RSWire Manual

RSWire Designer

User’s Guide

TM

Contacting RockwellSoftware

Technical Support Telephone—1–440–646–7800

Technical Support Fax—1–440–646–7801

World Wide Web—www.software.rockwell.com

Copyright Notice © 2000 Rockwell Software Inc. wishes to ackknowledge the use of copyrighted material provided underlicense from ECT International, Inc.Printed in the United States of America

Portions copyrighted by Allen–Bradley Company,LLC, a Rockwell Automation company.

This manual and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Software Inc.Any reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Software Inc. is strictlyprohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details.

Trademark Notices The Rockwell Software logo, RSAlarm, RSAnimator, RSAssistant, RSBatch, RSBreakerBox, RSButton,RSChart, RSCompare, RSControlRoom, RSData, RSDataPlayer, RSEventMaster, RSGauge, RSJunctionBox,RSLogix Emulate 5, RSLogix Emulate 500, RSGuardian, RSHarmony, RSKeys, RSLadder, RSLadder 5,RSLadder 500, RSLibrary Builder, RSLinx, RSLogix 5, RSLogix 500, RSLogix Frameworks, RSLogix SL5,RSMailman, RSNetWorx for ControlNet, RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, RSPortal, RSPower, RSPowerCFG,RSPowerRUN, RSPowerTools, RSRules, RSServer32, RSServer, RSServer OPC Toolkit, RSSidewinderX,RSSlider, RSSnapshot, RSSql, RSToolbox, RSToolPak I, RSToolPak II, RSTools, RSTrainer, RSTrend,RSTune, RSVessel, RSView32, RSView, RSVisualLogix, RSWheel, RSWire, RSWorkbench, RSWorkshop,SoftLogix 5, A.I. Series, Advanced Interface (A.I.) Series, AdvanceDDE, AutomationPak, ControlGuardian,ControlPak, ControlView, INTERCHANGE, Library Manager, Logic Wizard, Packed DDE, ProcessPak,View Wizard, WINtelligent, WINtelligent LINX, WINtelligent LOGIC 5, WINtelligent Series, WINtelligentVIEW, WINtelligent RECIPE, WINtelligent VISION, and WINtelligent VISION2 are trademarks of Rock-well Software Inc., a Rockwell Automation company.

Data Highway Plus, DH+, DHII, DTL, MicroLogix, Network DTL, PLC, PLC–2, PLC–3, PLC–5, Power-Text, Pyramid Integrator, PanelBuilder, PanelView, PLC–5/250, PLC–5/20E, PLC–5/40E, PLC–5/80E, SLC,SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05, and SLC 500 are trademarks of the Allen–BradleyCompany, LLC, a Rockwell Automation company.Microsoft, MS–DOS, Windows, and Visual Basic are registered trademarks, and Windows NT, Windows 98,Microsoft Access, and Visual SourceSafe are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.

ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International.

DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel, and Xerox Corporation.

Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation.

Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. AIX, PowerPC, Power Se-ries, RISC System/6000 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.

Warranty This Rockwell Software product is warranted in accord with the product license. The product’s performancewill be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator control and other relatedfactors.

The product’s implementation may vary among users.

This manual is as up–to–date as possible at the time of printing; however, the accompanying software mayhave changed since that time. Rockwell Software reserves the right to change any information contained inthis manual or the software at anytime without prior notice.

The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details or variations in the equipment, procedure,or process described, nor to provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation,operation, or maintenance.

Technical Support:

Rockwell Software provides technical support to RSWire Designer userscurrently under warranty or support contracts. Technical support is availableMonday through Friday from 8 am to 5 pm Eastern Standard Time.

Phone (440) 646–7800 Fax (440) 646–7801

Please have your RSWire Designer serial number available when contactingRockwell Software Technical Support.

For Additional Support Services such as support contract renewal andproduct information, contact the following:

440–646–7700 SW Services Phone440–646–7701 SW Services Fax440–646–7777 AutoFax Product InfoEmail: [email protected]

Information on RSWire training courses is available by contacting:

414–321–8000 Chris [email protected]

Table of Contents

i

Table of Contents

1 Installation and Start–up 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting RSWireTM 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting From RSWire 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VBA 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Load Project 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unload Project 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Macro 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Editor 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Guide 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version) 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version) 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Introduction to RSWire 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The RSWire Concept 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Functionality 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using This Manual 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Organization 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Conventions 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menus and Functions 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Boxes 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Software Modules 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using RSWire 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Project Management 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Organization 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Project 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preselect 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock and Unlock Project 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Project 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Project 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Project 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

ii

Rename Project 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project List 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Backup a Project 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup a Symbol Catalog 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Selected Symbols, Macros, or Device Types 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore a Project or Symbol Catalog 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Project Reorganize 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Page Count 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Page Management 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Organization 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Storage 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Pages (Select, Refresh, Next, Previous) 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Page 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Page Save 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As Page 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Page 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Break 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Page 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Page 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Page 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Page 4-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modify Page Variables Globally 4-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Page Variables in Title Block 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rename Page 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Page 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Pages 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browse Copy 4-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page List 4-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Installation 4-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Installation 4-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Installation 4-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Function 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Count 4-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 Schematic Elements 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire/Line 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wires 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Lines 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Symbol Select 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

iii

Multiple Placement of Symbols 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search Device ID 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parent and Child Symbols 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Select 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Text 5-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Text Settings 5-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invisible Text 5-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foreign Language Text 5-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Box 5-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field 5-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circles and Arcs 5-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Cross Reference – JIC 5-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Cross Reference – IEC 5-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Numbers 5-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Wire Number Assignment 5-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Wire Number Assignment 5-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicate Wire Numbers Using Invisible Text 5-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Wire Numbers 5-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Wire Numbers 5-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Wire Numbers 5-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part Numbers 5-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions 5-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drawing a Dimension 5-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text File on Drawing 5-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Schematic Elements 5-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Edit Menu 5-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Menu 5-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy 5-105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move 5-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Symbol 5-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Page 5-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Device IDs 5-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Text 5-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Symbol Text 5-115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Part Number 5-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Part Number Globally 5-119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Wire Number 5-120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/O Device ID 5-121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linetype Properties 5-122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers 5-123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

iv

Selecting Layers 5-124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Settings 5-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Layer Names 5-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List Object Function (for drawing elements) 5-132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Create Schematic Elements 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Symbols 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Symbol Elements 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Libraries and Directories 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Creation Procedure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Part Number During Symbol Creation (for automatic assignment) 6-18. . . . Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DXF Import 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Creation Examples 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating an Example Parent Symbol 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Child Symbol 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Device Type Definition 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Programmable Controller (Parent) Symbol 6-39. . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (JIC Format) 6-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (IEC Format) 6-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Terminal Symbol 6-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Pin Charts 6-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Form C Contacts 6-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols 6-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create Macro 6-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Title Block Macro 6-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create Device Type 6-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete, Copy, Rename for Symbols, Macros, and Devices 6-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Delete Symbol, Macro, or Device 6-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Symbol, Macro, or Device 6-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Symbol, Macro, or Device 6-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modify Symbol, Macro, or Device 6-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiline Styles 6-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 Settings 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Settings 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Grid Settings 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Settings 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Settings 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Format Files 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

v

Printer Configuration 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Protection 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Settings 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address File 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Project Settings 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Defaults 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Control Functions 7-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Formats 7-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Controller Settings 7-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal and Plug ID Settings 7-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device ID Styles 7-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Defaults 7-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Configuration 7-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin–Plug Plan Configuration 7-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Object Settings 7-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings 7-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Settings 7-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire/Line Type 7-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Text Styles 7-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Styles (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) 7-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Styles (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) 7-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) 7-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) 7-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (Standalone Version) 7-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Plotting 8-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Functions 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Preview 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) 8-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) 8-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) 8-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting to Files 8-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PLT Files 8-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWF Files 8-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWG Files 8-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Files 8-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Plotting Selected Layers 8-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Selecting Layer Groups 8-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Custom Drawing Layers 8-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

vi

9 Reports 9-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Lists from RSWire 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reports 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Project Full 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Brief 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installations 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Full 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Brief 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Library Reports 9-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro 9-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols 9-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Type Full 9-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Type Brief 9-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 9-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign Languages 9-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Formats 9-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connections Reports 9-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire List 9-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Labels 9-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable List 9-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Wire 9-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals 9-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminals Reports 9-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminals 9-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Strips 9-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PLC–List Report 9-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Reports 9-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compile Parts File 9-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master List 9-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bill of Materials 9-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchase Order List 9-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Costing List 9-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension List 9-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MS Access Reports 9-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comma Separated Reports 9-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Checking Reports 9-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unreferenced Signals Report 9-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Without Parent Report 9-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

vii

10 Panel Layout 10-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Panel Layout Steps 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Layout Procedure 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Layout/Schematic Comparison Check 10-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Layout Symbol 10-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan 11-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Overview 11-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steps of Terminal Plan Creation 11-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal/External Connections and Jumpers 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Functions 11-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminal Plan Editor 11-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editor Display 11-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Editing Functions 11-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphical Terminal Plan 11-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Macro 11-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration 11-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Generation 11-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pin–Plug Plan 11-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin–Plug Editing 11-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Pin–Plug Plan 11-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 Cables 12-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Cable in the Schematic 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor 12-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Symbol 12-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Device Type 12-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol 12-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Lists 12-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 Parts Database 13-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS–Access Database Files 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UI.mdb 13-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARTICLE.mdb 13-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDB.mdb 13-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb 13-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessing the Parts Database 13-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Database Edit Form 13-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Database Data Fields 13-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Parts Database Record 13-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Parts Database Record 13-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

viii

Find a Parts Database Record 13-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit a Parts Database Record 13-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table View of Database 13-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Manipulation 13-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Database Manipulation Outside of RSWire 13-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Database Outside of RSWire 13-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Field Sizes 13-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Fields 13-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Complete Restructure 13-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Previewing the Parts Database 13-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing the Parts Database 13-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing from MS–Access 13-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing from RSWire 13-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14 List Generator Configuration 14-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning List Generator Files 14-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List File Structure 14-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sort Criteria Function 14-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Variable Data in Lists 14-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Data Formatting 14-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arithmetic Operations With Variables 14-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . String Manipulations 14-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Filter for Lists 14-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab Formatting in Lists 14-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List Generator Variables 14-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Lists 14-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Lists 14-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Lists 14-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Lists 14-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Wiring Lists 14-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Checking Lists 14-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 Alternate Search Paths 15-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A RSWire Error Messages A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B RSWire Files B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C Creating Symbol Icon Groups C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index

Installation and Start–up

1-1

1 Installation and Start–up

Unpacking

The following items are included in the RSWireTM Designer package. Whenunpacking, if any of these items are missing or damaged, contact Rockwell Softwareor your RSWire distributor.

Package contents:

� Software CD

� Activation Floppy Disk(s) w/Serial Numbers (Not applicable for RSWire Detailer)

� Document On–Line and Resource CD

All Rockwell Software Inc. products include a serial number which identifies thesoftware. For RSWire , these serial numbers will be on the Activation Softwaredisk(s). These serial numbers are required to access technical support for yourRSWire software, so please store the serial number in a secure location.


1-2

Installation

To install the software, follow the instructions in the Installation Guide booklet.Refer to the section of the Installation Guide that covers the version of RSWire(AutoCAD–compatible or Standalone) that you purchased.

The installation process creates the following directory structure on your hard disk.Some of these directories may contain additional subdirectories.

Bmp (not applicable to RSWire Standalone)

Catalog JIC Block(or other Devicecatalog) Macro

Wmf

Db CustomLgLogos

Dbs Db

Fonts

Menu DialogMnu

Plot

Program System

Project Work

Syscon ListSystem

Tmp

User

Work

Rs toolbar button bitmap files

block definitionsdevice definitionsmacro definitionsicon selection group files

address filesforeign language filestitle block logo files

parts database files

font directory

dialog (prompt) & help filesmenu files

DWG and PLT plot files

executables and DLL files

user’s project files

list generator filesconfiguration files

temporary (scratch) files

user interface files (upgrades only)

working directory


1-3

Starting RSWire

1. In Windows you can run RSWire from the Start button menu or, if you havecreated an icon (shortcut) for RSWire on the desktop, you can double click onthe icon.

2. The RSWire set of menus (File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, etc.) will appearon the screen. RSWire is now ready to operate.


1-4

Exiting From RSWire

To exit from RSWire:

Select the Exit function in the File pull–down menu.

File

NewOpenCloseBreakSaveSave AsNext PagePrevious PagePrint/PlotDXF ImportBackup/RestoreACAD MenuExit

You will then exit from RSWire.

Exit without saving: RSWire will automatically save any changes you have madeto the current drawing page when you exit from the software using the File > Exitfunction. If you wish to exit without saving the changes to the current drawingpage, execute the File > Break function before exiting with the File > Exit function.

Note In RSWire version 4.0, if you use the “X” button in the upper right corner of thewindow to exit from the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, the software will ask ifyou wish to save changes to the current drawing. If you select Yes, the RSWire menuwill be displayed the next time you enter AutoCAD. If this happens, you can selectthe File > Exit function to return to the AutoCAD menu.


1-5

VBA

The add–on version of RSWire functions as an application inside AutoCAD. Thisallows access to Visual Basic Applications (VBA) pertaining to RSWire. (Thestandalone version of RSWire does not support VBA functionality.)

The Tools > VBA pull–down menu provides functions which allow a variety ofparameters to be set within VBA.

Tools � VBA � Load Project� Unload Project� Run Macro� Load Editor

Load Project

Provides access to VBA.

Unload Project

Takes the user out of VBA

Run Macro

Allows the user to choose a subroutine or function to run and debug its VBA codewhile in VBA Run Mode.

Load Editor

Allows the user to edit and debug VBA code and to create forms while in theDesign Mode.

Reference Guide

For an explanation of VBA within RSWire, refer to the RSWire Visual BasicApplication (VBA) Reference Guide.


1-6

Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version)

Keyboard command aliases (shortcuts) are available for functions in the AutoCADadd–on version of RSWire. To see a list of these aliases, view the ACAD.PGP file inthe RS\MENU\MNU directory.


1-7

Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version)

A graphics tablet (digitizer) can be used with the AutoCAD add–on version ofRSWire for drawing and for selecting symbols, macros, menu functions, etc.

A tablet template drawing named RSWIRETAB.DWG is provided in theRS\WORK directory. This drawing is sized for a 11 x 11 inch tablet and contains avariety of JIC symbols, macros, and RSWire commands. You can plot this drawingand use it on your tablet.

Configure the Template:

1. Mount the template drawing on your tablet.

2. Open a new or existing drawing in AutoCAD (not RSWire).

3. On the command line enter the command: TABLET

4. When prompted for an option (ON/OFF/CAL/CFG), enter: CFG

5. When prompted for the number of tablet menus desired, enter: 4

6. You will be prompted to pick three points for each menu area on the templatefollowed by prompts for number of column and rows. Pick the points indicatedon the following diagram and enter the indicated column and row values.

7. When prompted to define the Screen Area, select the two points indicated in thediagram.


1-8

MENU AREA 125 Columns9 Rows


SCREEN AREA



Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information on configuring tablets.

Introduction to RSWire

2-1

2 Introduction to RSWire

This section introduces RSWireTM Designer and explains the use and conventions ofthis reference manual. A description of menu functions and their use is included.

RSWire Overview

The RSWire Concept

RSWireTM Designer is an advanced productivity tool for designers of electricalcontrol systems. Because of its customizable, open architecture, RSWire can also beadapted to other applications such as hydraulics, pneumatics, and process control.

RSWire allows schematic diagrams to be rapidly constructed using pre–definedsymbols and macros. Wires are automatically broken at symbol connection pointsand sections of drawings can be cut and pasted to save time. Many functions areperformed automatically by the software including the generation of unique deviceIDs for each symbol, cross referencing of related symbols (such as contacts andcoils), and numbering of wires.

RSWire recognizes logical interconnections between devices in a schematic. A wireis recognized as a wire and not just a graphic line. The system can check for errorssuch as duplicate device IDs while the schematic is being created. The software canperform automatic cross referencing and wire numbering. In combination with aparts database,the software can automatically generate a variety of supportdocumentation such as terminal diagrams, cable plans, panel layouts, bills ofmaterial, and a job costing analysis. Because work is divided into projects, manyrelated drawing pages can be included in these automatic functions.

The AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire runs as an application inside AutoCAD totake advantage of that software’s drawing capabilities. There are add–on versionsfor AutoCAD Release 14 and AutoCAD 2000.

RSWire Standalone is a self–contained software system: it does not run insideanother CAD software package. There are standalone versions that incorporate theAutoCAD “OEM engines” for AutoCAD Release 14 and AutoCAD 2000, offeringDWG file compatibility with the corresponding RSWire add–on versions.


2-2

RSWire Functionality

This chart shows the interrelationship of RSWire functions.

SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS CREATE

STRUCTURE

CUSTOMIZE:

LISTS

TERMINAL / CABLE

EXTERNAL INTERFACES

Page FormatTitle BlockDialog BoxesPull–down MenusLanguage ListsList FormatsSymbol Libraries

ProjectInstallationsLocations

SymbolsDevice TypesLinesMacrosFieldsCross References

Master Parts ListQuantified Parts (PO) ListBill of MaterialJob Costing ListWiring ListLabels

LAN OperationCAD Software (DXF, DWG Files)PLC Programming Software

RSWire

PLAN


2-3

Using This Manual

Purpose

This manual is a reference for the operation of the RSWire system. Informationprovided in this manual is sufficient for learning how to use the majority of thesoftware’s operating functions and advanced customization capabilities. However, torealize the full potential of RSWire it is recommended that you participate in thetraining programs offered by Rockwell Software. These training programs areaccelerated learning courses designed to ensure quick startup for users, and masteryof the software’s advanced customizing and interfacing features for systemadministrators and key operators.

Manual Organization

The sections of this manual are organized into four main groups:

I. INSTALLATION / INTRODUCTION1. Installation and Start–up2. Introduction to RSWire

II. PROJECTS AND SCHEMATICS3. Project Management4. Page Management5. Schematic Elements6. Create Schematic Elements7. Settings8. Plotting

III. LAYOUTS, LISTINGS, TERMINAL PLANS AND CABLES9. Reports10. Panel Layout11. Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan12. Cables

IV. CONFIGURATION AND CUSTOMIZATION13. Parts Database14. List Generator Configuration15. Alternate Search Paths


2-4

Manual Conventions

RSWire Functions

Various functions are available from pull–down menus at the top of the screen.They are accessed by pointing the cursor and clicking the mouse button. In thismanual, the first reference to a pull–down menu function is shown as a series ofcommands in bold type separated by arrows that indicate different levels of themenu. For example:

Draw � Wire � 3 Phase

The above command indicates that one should go to the Draw pull–down menu,select the Wire function and then select the 3 Phase function on the submenu.

Draw

TextLogical BoxFieldGraphicDimensionHatch...

ContinuousCenterDashed

90 Degree Down90 Degree UpMultilineRepeat Last

Wire

3 Phase

Keyboard Use

If a specific key on the keyboard is to be pressed. The name of the key will beshown enclosed in < > characters. For example:

<Enter> (press the Enter key)


2-5

Menus and Functions

RSWire functions are accessible through pull–down menus at the top of the screen.Functions can also be activated by selecting them in dialog boxes. The AutoCADadd–on version of RSWire also allows functions to be entered on the command line.These command line functions are listed in the RSWire help file under Commands.

Pull–down menu functions are shown on the following page. The numbersfollowing the first level menu functions indicate which submenu will appear.

In the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, some of these functions are alsodisplayed as side menu functions to provide faster access during work sessions. Theinitial side menu is:

MAIN

Sym–Crea the Manage > Symbol (create) submenuSymbol the Insert > Symbol by Name functionMacro the Insert > Macro by Name functionIcon the Insert > Select Icon function

Continuous the Draw > Wire > Continuous functionWire 3 the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase functionText the Draw > Text functionBox functions from Draw > Graphic > Box and

Draw > Logical Box menusField the Draw > Field function

Delete the Modify > Delete functionMove the Modify > Move functionStretch the Modify > Stretch functionCopy the Modify > Copy function

System the Tools > System Settings function

Sym–Edit the Modify > Symbol functionPage functions from Manage > Page menusUndo the Edit > Undo functionZoom the View > Zoom > Window function

You can return to the initial side menu from one of the other side menus by selectingthe MAIN menu header.


2-6

Pulldown Menus:

Below are the main pulldown menus and their submenus.

File Edit View Insert Format Draw Modify Manage Tools Reports Help

FileNew -------------->

OpenCloseBreakSaveSave AsNext PagePrevious PagePrint/Plot -------------->DXF Import ------------------------------------>Backup/RestoreACAD MenuExit

PageProject

Save Current PageNew DXF Page...DXF Import...Save as DWG...Save as Block...

Preview...Plot Config...Current Page...Multiple Pages...

EditUndo

Cut to ClipboardCopy ClipboardPastePaste SpecialBrowse Copy...

ViewRefresh Page

RedrawRegenZoom ------------------------------------------->Pan ---------------------->Aerial ViewQuadrant...NavigatorListCommand DispatchToolbars...

Real TimePreviousWindowDynamicScaleCenterInOutAllExtents

Real TimePointLeftRightUpDown

InsertSelect Icon...

Symbol by Name...Macro by Name...Text On Drawing...Block -------------------->Image... ------------------------------------->

Insert...Explode

Raster Image...Modify...FrameImage Clip


2-7

DrawWire ----------------------------------------------------------->

Text...Logical Box --->FieldGraphic ------------------------------------>Dimension --------->Hatch...

CreateConn. PointDelete Conn. Point

ContinuousCenterDashed3 Phase90 Degree Down90 Degree UpMultilineRepeat Last

LinePolylineBox EmptyBox FilledArcCircleEllipse

LinearAlignedOrdinateRadiusDiameterAngularBaselineContinueLeaderToleranceCenter MarkObliqueAlign TextStyleOverrideUpdate

FormatLayer...

Color...Linetype...Text StyleDimension Style...Multiline Style...

ModifyPower-Editor

SymbolLineTextFieldWire NumberDeleteCopyMoveStretchProperties...

ManageProject 1>

Installation 2>Page 3>Symbol 4>Macro 5>Device Type 6>Parts Database 7>Foreign Language 8>

8>New...Delete...Edit Phrases...

7>Edit Form...Edit Table...Duplicates Check...

6>New/Modify...Delete...Copy...Rename...

5>New/Modify...Reference PointSelect ItemsSaveCancelDelete...Copy...Rename...

4>New/Modify...Reference PointDevice IDConnection PointDelete Conn. PointCross Ref. PositionSaveCancelDelete...Copy...Rename...

3>ClearDeleteCopyRenameMoveModifyPage VariablesUpdate

1>Delete...Copy...Modify...Rename...Project PreselectPage Count...Reorganize

2>DeleteCopyRename


2-8

ToolsProject Settings...

System Settings...Wire Number ------------------------------------------------------------>Terminal/Pin-Plug Plan --->Panel Layout...Wiring Diagram LayoutCreate IconI/O Device IDReplace -------------------------------------------------------->OsnapVBA * ------------------------->Install TabletCustomize Menus...Preferences...

Edit Terminals/Pin-Plugs...Generate Graphical Plan...

Automatic...Manual...Delete...

Part Number...Wire Number...Symbol...Text...Symbol Text...Device ID...

Load ProjectUnload ProjectRun MacroLoad Editor

* Not in Standalone version

ReportsProject 1>

Libraries 2>Connections 3>Terminals 4>PLC-List...Parts 5>MS Access Reports 6>Comma Separated 7>Error Checking 8>

3>Wire List...Wire Labels...Cable List..Field Wire...Signals...

1>Project Full...Project Brief...Installations...Page Full...Page Brief...Table of Contents...

2>Macros...Symbols...Device Type Full...Device Type Brief...PartsForeign Languages...Page Formats...

4>Terminals...Terminal Strips...

5>Compile Parts FileMaster List...Bill of Materials...Purchase Order...Job Costing...Dimension List...

7>ProjectLibrariesConnectionsTerminalsPLC-List...PartsError Checking

8>Unreferenced Signals...Device Without Parent...

6>Preview... 9>Print... 9>

9>Master List...Bill of Materials...Purchase Order...Job Costing...Dimension List...

HelpRSWire Help

AutoCAD HelpConnect to InternetAbout RSWire...


2-9

Third Mouse Button Menu

If your mouse has a third (middle) button configured to function in Windows, youcan press the third button to display the following pop–up menu. This menuincludes a selection of functions found in the pull–down menus. (On Standalonesystems, this menu appears when the right mouse button is clicked – the third buttonactivates the pan function.)

DeleteMoveCopyModify SymbolSelect Icon...NavigatorBrowse Copy...OpenNew Page...Refresh PagePanWindowZoom ExtentsOSNAP >

Note If the third button menu does not appear, enter the command mbuttonpan on theAutoCAD command line. Then enter the value 0. (Entering a value of 1 makes thethird button activate the Pan function.)

Toolbars

Toolbars are groups of buttons that can be positioned along the edge of the drawingarea or as floating “palettes.” These buttons allow a variety of RSWire functions tobe accessed more quickly than using a pull–down menu. When you place the cursorover one of these buttons and pause for a few seconds, a label will appear describingthe function.

Toolbar

Toolbar Handle


2-10

Each toolbar has a handle. By placing the cursor on the handle, you can drag thetoolbar to different positions at the edge of the drawing area. You can also drag atoolbar into the drawing area to create a floating toolbar.

Once the toolbars are positioned you can set the position so that the toolbars willalways appear in the same place. Use the Tools > Preferences function. Select theProfiles tab, make sure the RSWire profile is highlighted and then select the SetCurrent button.

Command Line / Text Window

The command line is an area at the bottom of the drawing screen where the mostrecently executed commands are displayed. The software also displays prompts herefor certain functions.

By placing the cursor on its border, the command line area can be dragged to the topof the drawing screen or out onto the desktop to become a floating text window. Thefloating window can display more lines and therefore is useful for such functions asView > List. You can drag the floating window back to the drawing screen toreattach it. You can also display a floating text window without moving thecommand line by pressing the <F2> key.

Regenerating drawing.

Command: ECS_START

Command:

Command:Command:All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Left/Previous/Vmax/WFirst corner: Other corner:

AutoCAD Text Window

Edit

Command:

TextWindow

CommandLine


2-11

Help Screens

Online help information is available to describe RSWire functions. Many of thedialog boxes displayed by RSWire have a Help button which can be selected todisplay information.

Windows Help

File Options HelpEdit Bookmark

Contents PrintBackIndex

Device Types

A device type is a definition that specifies howmany and what type of child symbols areassociated with a parent symbol. For example, 2normally open and 2 normally closed contacts fora 4 pole relay. The device type can also specify across reference symbol to indicate contact usagenear the parent symbol.

The following buttons are available in the Windows help screens:

Contents – Select a topic from the help table of contents.Index – View a list of indexed topics in the help file.Back – Display the previously selected help screen.Print – Print the current help screen.

The help file can also be accessed through the “Help” pull–down menu in the upperright corner of the screen. This provides a function called RSWire Help whichdisplays the main help file screen (from which you can select the Contents or Indextab).

Help

AutoCAD HelpConnect to InternetAbout RSWire

RSWire Help


2-12

Dialog Boxes

When the software requires information from you, a dialog box will be displayedthat contains fields for the appropriate data. For example, the following New/Modify Symbol dialog box allows you to specify various parameters for a newsymbol.

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:

Snapmode: Endpoint

HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

CS3 Cable Cross Reference Symbol

XCAB4REF

Example cable cross reference symbol

Data Field

Buttons

Radio Button

New/Modify Symbol

List...

Search Language Text...

Checkbox

You can select a data field by pointing the cursor and clicking the button. You canalso move from field to field by pressing the <Tab> key.

Radio button and checkbox functions within a dialog box have only two states: onor off, selected or de–selected, etc. Radio buttons are selected) when they contain adark center. Checkboxes are selected when they contain a checkmark.

Buttons are provided in the dialog boxes to confirm information that has beenentered, or to provide additional selections. Generally, selecting the OK button willconfirm the information that has been entered, load it into the system and close thedialog box. In many (but not all) dialog boxes, pressing the <Enter> key has thesame effect as selecting OK. Selecting the Cancel button will abandon theinformation that was entered and will exit the current function. In many (but not all)dialog boxes, pressing the <Esc> (Escape) key has the same effect as selectingCancel. Selecting the Help button will display descriptive text about the functions inthe current dialog box.


2-13

You can change the label text that appears in the dialog boxes by editing the fileRs\Menu\Dialog\Dcl_eng.txt (for English versions).


2-14

Optional Software Modules

RSWire is available as a base system to which optional modules are added.

RSWire Base System

Functions include:

� Schematic creation and editing

� Single and 3 phase lines (wires)

� Logical and drawing lines

� Move and modify routines

� Real time cross referencing

� Real time error checking

� Auto device ID assignment

� Auto wire break

� Parent/child symbol relationships

� Fields (remote location areas)

� Electrical symbol library

� Macro library

� Multi–page view (Cut & Paste) function

� Text on drawing function

� Programmable Controller List

� Automatic wire number assignment

� Multiple language text

� DWG and DXF file support


2-15

Optional Modules

Parts Database – Parts database functions and panel layout� Allows access to the parts database and master list function.� Allows assignment of part numbers to device IDs.� Auto generation of: Master parts list, Bill of materials, P.O. list, Job costing list.� Allows creation and editing of language text database.� Panel Layout mode. Prompts the user with layout symbols for creation of panel

layout drawings based on schematics.

Wire List – Allows creation of a wire (connection) list and related output.� Point to point wire list

� Wire labels

Terminal Plans – Edit and graphically display terminal information.

� Terminal plan editor

� Graphical terminal plan drawings

� Cable list

� Field wiring list

� Terminal connection list

Wiring Diagram/Shortest Distance Generator – Generates wiring diagrams basedon schematics. Requires Parts Database and Wire List options. Separate instructionsprovided.

� Wiring diagrams

� Connection list on wiring diagram

� Shortest distance on wire list

DeviceNet Module – Allows generation of DeviceNet layout drawings and relatedconnection lists. Requires Parts Database and Wire List options. Separateinstructions provided.

� Network layout diagrams

� Symbol library

� Component parts data

� Connection list generator

PLC Schematic Generator – Allows automatic generation of PLC I/O modulewiring diagrams. Separate instructions provided.

� Automatic PLC drawing generation


2-16

Using RSWire

Generally, doing a job with RSWire involves the following stages:

1. If the optional database is to be used to allow the automatic generation ofsupport documentation, component (parts) information must be entered orimported into the database. This information includes catalog numbers,manufacturer, price, dimensions, etc. If the same database is to be used for alljobs, this data entry step will not be necessary for subsequent projects unlessnew components are to be included. Part numbers can be assigned to symbols inthe schematics.

2. Create the schematic drawings. For the first project, most RSWire users createcustom page formats, title blocks, symbols, etc., to match existing companystandards. This customization is not necessary for subsequent projects.

3. Generate panel layout drawings. RSWire has an optional semi–automatic panellayout mode that will prompt the user for each component in the schematicdiagram. The user then positions the component as desired in the layoutdrawing.

4. Generate a connection list. This automatically generated list contains connectioninformation used in the terminal plan and other documentation lists.

5. Generate terminal plan. RSWire automatically places terminal connectioninformation on a graphical diagram page. The user can edit this plan as desired,for example, to assign cables and conduits.

6. Generate documentation lists. Using information in the schematics and in thedatabase, RSWire can automatically generate other useful lists such as bills ofmaterial, wire lists, wire labels, component labels, job cost analysis,programmable controller lists, and so on.

Project Management

3-1

3 Project Management

This section explains the concept of projects, which is how work is organized inRSWireTM Designer. Project organization is presented first followed by sections onhow to create, delete, copy, modify, rename and back up projects.

The following sections are included:

� Project Organization

� Create New Project

� Project Preselect

� Lock and Unlock Project

� Delete Project

� Copy Project

� Modify Project

� Renumber Project

� Rename Project

� Project List

� Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols

� Project Reorganize

� Project Page Count

Project Management

3-2

Project Organization

A project is a collection of work done in RSWire, all of which relates to the samejob. This work includes both graphical drawings (schematics, layouts, etc.) andsupport documentation (part lists, labels, connection information).

By associating every drawing and list with a specific project, the software is able torecognize which information to use when performing automatic functions such aslist generation, cross referencing, wire numbering, cost analysis, and so on.

Drawings Documentation

Schematic diagramsPanel layoutsGraphical terminal plans

Bill of materialsWire listTerminal listPurchase order listWire and device labelsJob cost analysisetc.

PROJECT

Installations and Locations – Projects can be subdivided into installations andlocations. These usually correspond to physical locations. For example, the projectcould consist of an entire production facility while each production line within thefacility is designated as an installation and each control cabinet on a line is alocation.

Project Management

3-3

PROJECT

I N S T A L L A T I O N

LOCATION

I N S T A L L A T I O N

LOCATION LOCATIONLOCATION

When graphical (drawing) pages are created, they are assigned to a specificinstallation and location. (This is what creates the installation and location.) Whensupport documentation is generated, it can also be sorted by installation andlocation.

Drawing page numbers within a single installation must be unique, even if they arein different locations (see Project 1, Installation 2 in the following illustration – pagenumbers in the second location continue from the first).

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2

Pages

INSTALLATION 1 INSTALLATION 2

LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION(No Installationor Location)

Drawing

Project Management

3-4

The use of installations and locations is optional. In Project 2 shown in the previousfigure, no installations or locations have been assigned. All drawing pages in theproject, therefore, are part of the same number sequence. Also, an installation doesnot have to be divided into locations.

Some RSWire functions require an installation and location name. In these cases, ifthe user has not assigned an installation or location name, the system will use thedefault installation name NO_INST and location name NO_LOC.

When a project is created (see page 3-5) the system creates a directory for it in theRS\PROJECT\WORK subdirectory. Project directories are assigned a short namesuch as:

______10.EC1 ______11.EC1

The file NAMES.EC2 in the RS\PROJECT\WORK directory describes which ofthese directories belongs to each project. In each project’s directory, separatesubdirectories are automatically created for each installation and also for varioussupport documentation.

Project Management

3-5

Create New Project

To create a new project, use the File > New > Project function.

Select:

File � New � Project

The following New Project dialog box will appear.

Project

Symbol Library

Address File

Project Description

Job Number

Drawing Number

Title Block Macro Default Page Macro

Select ... Select ...

OK Cancel Help...

New Project

JIC

Use Parameters From:


Description... Parameter... Settings... Parts Database...

The following fields are provided in this dialog box:

Project – Enter the name of the project, up to 14 characters (no spaces allowed).

Symbol Library – The name of the subdirectory containing the graphic symbols tobe used in this project. The selection here will be JIC, IEC, or another library ofcontrol symbols that exists under the RS\CATALOG directory.

Project Management

3-6

Use Parameters From – You may use parameters and settings from an existingproject. This eliminates the need to make the same settings for the new project. Ifyou wish to do this, select the name of the existing project from the drop–down list.The parameters that carry over will include the Project Description, Job Number,Drawing Number, as well as the settings from the Project Parameters and ProjectSettings dialogs (see below).

Title Block Macro – The name of a macro file (a stored combination of drawingelements) that will automatically be placed on the drawing as a title block. Thedefault entry is TITLED. This is one of the title block macros provided withRSWire. The user can also create custom title block macros. Use the Select button todisplay the macro list from which selections can be made (you can make wildcardentries).

Note Before you can use the Select button you must first have opened a page that uses thecurrent symbol catalog. You must also remove any default entry from the Title BlockMacro field.

Default Page Macro – This field allows a macro to be named that willautomatically be placed on every page of the project. Use the Select button todisplay the macro list from which selections can be made.

Address File – A text file containing information such as the user’s street addresswhich the software can automatically place on lists so that the user need not enter itmanually. These files can be created or edited with the Tools > System Settingsfunction (Address File tab).

Project Description – A brief project description (49 characters) may be entered inthis field which can be placed in title blocks of drawings and on various lists createdby the system.

Job Number, Drawing Number – These fields for project descriptions or identifierswhich can be included in drawings and documentation.

Project Description 4 through 20 – These are additional fields for projectdescriptions or identifiers which can be included in drawings and documentation.These fields are accessed through the use of the scroll bar to the right of the fields.

Search Language Text – Selecting this button accesses the language text database,allowing you to insert language text phrases into the Project Description fields (putthe cursor in the desired field first). See page 5-32 for more on language text.

Four option buttons, Description, Parameters, Settings, and Parts Database areavailable in the New Project dialog box. These allow additional information andsettings to be entered.

Project Management

3-7

Description Button – Selecting this button produces a dialog box with fields forentering ten lines (49 characters per line) of additional project description. There isalso a Search Language Text button that allows you to select and enter languagetext phrases (see page 5-32). Enter the desired description and select OK tocontinue.

OK Cancel

Description

Description

Description

Description

Description

Description

Description

Description

Description

Description


Project Description

Parameter Button – Selecting this button displays the Project Parameters dialogbox which allows various project–wide default values to be altered.

Project Management

3-8

Ascending by Inst. and Pages

0.5000

Default Device ID Display: Device ID – Page – Line No.

LanguageDefault Text Size

Default Grid

Device ID

Connection Point

Strip/Plug Device ID

Terminal/Plug ID

1:

2:

3:

0.1250

0.1250

0.0000

0.1250

X

Y

0.5000

Signal Cross Reference Analysis Type:

English

OK Cancel Help...

Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved

Cross Reference

Signal Cross Reference0.1250

0.1250

Default Text Style

Wire Numbering Mode: Wire Number Same Over Terminal

Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address

ROMANS

Project Parameters

Note Values shown in inches.

The following fields are available in this dialog box:

Project Management

3-9

Default Device ID Display – This field allows the user to select the format that thesystem will use to assign device IDs. By clicking on the down arrow button, thefollowing device ID formats will be listed:

Device ID Format Description Example

Device ID - Seq.No. Device ID tag and sequential number PB1

Device ID - Page - Line No. Device ID tag, page number, line number PB109

Page-Device ID - Line No. Page number, Device ID tag, line number 1PB09

Device ID - Continuous Line No. Device ID tag, continuous line number PB86

Group-Device ID - Seq.No. Prompt, Device ID tag, sequential number APB1

Seq.No. - Device ID Sequential number, Device ID tag 1PB

Page - Line No. - Device ID Page number, line number, Device ID tag 109PB

Page Line - Device ID - Seq. No.* Page line, Device ID tag, sequential number 10PB1

Page-Device ID - Seq. No. Page number, Device ID tag,sequential number 1PB1

* There are three versions of this format: Page Checked, Line Checked and ProjectChecked. These differ in what the the software checks for duplicate IDs: the currentpage, the current line, or the entire project.

Note “Device ID tag” is the mnemonic abbreviation (such as PB for pushbutton)associated with a given type of symbol. The “Continuous Line No.” format causesline numbering on each page to begin where the previous page ended. The “Group”format will place a number (or other character) in front of every device ID. Whenthe user changes this character when placing a symbol, all similar symbols placedthereafter (in the same work session) will have the new character in the device ID.

Signal Cross Ref. Analysis Type – This field determines how signal cross referencesare analyzed. Choices include Ascending Order by installations and pages (default),Pairs (signal cross references that exist only in pairs – page order not taken intoaccount), or Ascending Numbers (ascending number order for all cross references –page order not taken into account).

Language 1, 2, 3 – Certain descriptive text strings in a drawing can be displayed inup to three different languages simultaneously. In the Language fields, the userselects which languages will be used. By selecting the down arrow button thefollowing list of languages can be selected from: English, German, French, Spanish,Dutch, Italian.

Project Management

3-10

Default Text Style – Allows the user to define the size of various types of drawingtext. Fields are provided for Device ID, Connection Point, Strip/Plug Device ID,Terminal Device ID, Cross Reference, and Signal Cross Reference. These valueswill be used provided that the Use Text Height from Project Parameters checkboxis set in the General Defaults dialog box (see page 7-19). If this checkbox is not set,text heights defined for each symbol will be used.

Default Grid – Allows the user to define the default size of the grid in the drawingarea.

Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved – This checkbox determines if thedevice ID of an existing symbol will be adjusted automatically if the symbol ismoved to a new position (with the Modify > Move function). This affects onlyprojects that use one of the device ID formats based on page and line number. Selectthe checkbox to enable automatic device ID adjustment.

Note The device IDs of symbols that have a cross reference relationship are not changedwhen moved. This must be done with the Modify > Symbol > Device ID function.

Wire Numbering System: Wire Number Same Over Terminal – Selects whether ornot the same wire number will be assigned before and after a terminal when wiresare numbered. When a checkmark appears in the box, the same wire number willappear before and after the terminal symbol. If the box is empty, a different wirenumber will be assigned after the terminal as shown below.

TB215 16

Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address – Selects whether ornot to replace PLC connection point text in the connection list with the full PLC I/Oaddress. For example, for input 05 of a PLC module (rack 01, module 02) selectingthis toggle will replace “05” in the connection list with “I0102/05.”

When the project parameters are entered as desired, select the OK button to enterthem and return to the New Project dialog box.

Settings Button – Selecting this button displays the Project Settings dialog boxwhich allows various page and display setting values to be altered. These settingsare described in Section 7 (see Page 7-19).

Parts Database Button – Selecting this button allows you to select or create anODBC data source name that points to database file other than the default partsdatabase. No setting is necessary here if you plan to use the default parts database.

Project Management

3-11

To finish creating the project, select the OK button in the New Project dialog box.The system will create the necessary directory for the project and drawing pages canthen be created.

Immediately after creating the new project, the software will display the New Pagedialog box allowing you to begin creating drawing pages. See page 4-11.

Project Management

3-12

Project Preselect

Certain functions that affect an entire project require you to select a project so thatthe software knows which project to act upon. When you open a drawing page (withthe File > Open functions) the software will treat the project to which the pagebelongs as the currently selected project. However, at the beginning of a worksession before any pages have been opened, or if you have been working on oneproject and wish to make settings in a different project, you can use the Manage >Project > Project Preselect function to select another project.

Manage � Project � Project Preselect

The Project Preselect dialog box will appear listing the names of all the projects onyour system.

Project:

ABACKMACHINE1

WAREHOUSEWEB

TOOL

Search...

OK Cancel Help...

Lock Project Unlock Project

Project Preselect

TOOL

Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mousebutton. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear inthe Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projectswith descriptions. You can also make selections from this list.

Select the OK button to open the project, making it the currently selected project.

Project Management

3-13

Lock and Unlock Project

When operating RSWire on a network you can use the Lock Project toggle in theProject Preselect dialog box (see previous page) to prevent another user on thenetwork from accessing the same project. This is important during such criticaloperations as automatic wire numbering, project renumbering, project parametermodification, project/installation deletion, or project/installation renaming.

To Lock a Project:

1. Select the File > Project Preselect function. The Project Preselect dialog boxwill appear.

2. Select the desired project name from the displayed list.

3. Select the Lock Project checkbox.

4. Select the OK button to lock the project.

The project will remain locked to other users until you unlock the project.

To Unlock a Project:

1. Select the File > Project Preselect function. The Project Preselect dialog boxwill appear.

2. Select the desired project name from the displayed list.

3. Select the Unlock Project checkbox.

4. Select the OK button to unlock the project.

Project Management

3-14

Delete Project

The Manage > Project > Delete function will erase a set of project files from thesystem.

Warning: Deleting a project will erase all the files for the selected project fromthe computer.

Select:

Manage � Project � Delete

The Select: Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on yoursystem.

Project:

ABACKMACHINE1

WAREHOUSEWEB

TOOL

Search...

OK Cancel Help...

Select: Project

TOOL

Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mousebutton. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear inthe Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projectswith descriptions. You can also make selections from this list.

Project Management

3-15

To delete the selected project, select the OK button. The message “Select OK todelete the project:” will appear in a dialog box along with the project name. Selectthe OK button in this dialog box to delete the project. Select the Cancel button tocancel the deletion.

Project Management

3-16

Copy Project

The Manage > Project > Copy function creates a copy of an existing project undera different name.

Select:

Manage � Project � Copy

The Copy Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on yoursystem.

From:

ABACKMACHINE1

WAREHOUSEWEB

TOOL

To:

Search...

OK Cancel Help...

Copy Project

TOOL

Select the project to be copied. Its name will appear in the From field. Use theSearch button to display a list of projects with descriptions.

Enter the name that the copy of the project is to have in the To field.

Select the OK button to create a copy of the project.

Project Management

3-17

Modify Project

The Manage > Project > Modify function allows you to alter project parameters(descriptions, device ID format, etc.) that were entered when the project wasoriginally created.

Select:

Manage � Project � Modify

The Select: Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on yoursystem.

Project:

ABACKMACHINE1

WAREHOUSEWEB

TOOL

Search...

OK Cancel Help...

Select: Project

TOOL

Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The selectedproject name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in the Project field abovethe list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions.

Select the OK button to continue. The Modify Project dialog box will appear.

Project Management

3-18

Project

Symbol Library

Address File

Project Description

Job Number

Drawing Number

Title Block Macro Default Page Macro


OK Cancel Help...

JIC


Description... Parameter... Settings... Parts Database...

No. of Pages: 1

Modify Project

JIC

This dialog box is the same as the New Project dialog box, except that the Projectname field cannot be accessed or changed. A No. of Pages field also appears. Theother fields, including those accessed with the Description, Parameter, Settingsand Parts Database buttons, will display information for the selected project, andthis may be modified. For descriptions of these fields, see page 3-5, New Project.

When the desired modifications have been made, select the OK button to put themodifications into effect.

Project Management

3-19

Rename Project

The Manage > Project > Rename function allows you to assign a new name to anexisting project.

Select:

Manage � Project � Rename

The Rename Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on yoursystem.

From:

ABACKMACHINE1

WAREHOUSEWEB

TOOL

To:

Search...

OK Cancel Help...

Rename Project

TOOL

Select the project to be renamed. Its name will appear in the From field. Use theSearch button to display a list of projects with descriptions.

Enter the new name that the project is to have in the To field.

Select the OK button to rename the project.

Project Management

3-20

Project List

To generate a list of all the projects currently on your system, use the Reports >Project > Project Full function.

Select:

Reports � Project � Project Full

For more information on this function, see page 9-4.

Project Management

3-21

Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols

The Backup/Restore function allows you to make backup copies of project filesand symbol catalogs. The backups are stored as .ZIP files. The symbol catalogbackup will also store macros and device types found in the selected symbol catalogdirectory. The restore function allows you to load backed–up projects or catalogsback into your system.

Select:

File � Backup/Restore

When you select the Backup/Restore function, the Backup/Restore dialog boxappears.

A:

OK Cancel Help

Backup/Restore Path:

Selected:

Selected:

Available for Restoring

Symbol Macro Device

RestoreBackup

Select Project

Save...

Backup/Restore

Browse

Select Catalog

Project Management

3-22

Backup a Project

1. In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directorywhere the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Use the Browse buttonto locate an existing directory on your system. Select the Save button to save thepath you have entered for future work sessions.

2. Select the Backup button.

3. Pick the Select Project button.

4. The Select Project dialog box will appear. Select the project that you wish toback up and select the OK button. The name of the selected project will bedisplayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.

Note Do not enter project names directly in the Selected field, use the Select Projectbutton.

5. Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup .ZIPfile.

For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will becreated which contains the name of the project contained in the .ZIP file.

Important It is recommended that you only save one project per floppy disk set. (If you backup one or more projects on a floppy disk and then do another backupthat fills the first disk and extends to a second disk, you will only be able to restorethe last project – the other projects on the first disk will become inaccessible.)

Note Whenever project settings are saved (the various tabs under Tools > ProjectSettings), configuration files are created in a Config subdirectory under thedirectory for that project. These configuration files are automatically saved with aproject backup and are restored automatically when the project is restored.

Backup a Symbol Catalog

1. In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directorywhere the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Select the Save buttonto save the path you have entered for future work sessions.


3. Pick the Select Catalog button.

Project Management

3-23

4. The Select Path–Catalog dialog box will appear. Select the catalog that youwish to back up and select the OK button. The name of the selected catalog willbe displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.

Note Do not enter catalog names directly in the Selected field, use the Select Catalogbutton.

5. Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup .ZIPfile.

For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will becreated which contains the name of the catalog contained in the .ZIP file.

Important It is recommended that you only save one catalog per floppy disk set. (If you backup one or more catalogs on a floppy disk and then do another backupthat fills the first disk and extends to a second disk, you will only be able to restorethe last catalog –– the other catalogs on the first disk will become inaccessible.)

Backup Selected Symbols, Macros, or Device Types

You can back up selected symbols, macros or device types. You can then restore theselected items on another computer or in a different symbol catalog without copyingover an entire catalog. Use the following procedure:

1. In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directorywhere the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Use the Browse buttonto locate an existing directory on your system. Select the Save button to save thepath you have entered for future work sessions.


3. Pick the Select Catalog button.

4. The Select Path–Catalog dialog box will appear. Select the catalog from whichyou wish to make the backup and select the OK button. The name of theselected catalog will be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restoredialog box.

5. Select the Symbol, Macro or Device Type button depending on the type of itemyou wish to back up. (If you are not backing up the entire catalog you mustcreate separate files for each type of item.)

6. The Select Files dialog box will appear, listing all the symbols, macros, ordevice types in the selected catalog. Select (highlight) the items you wish toinclude in the backup file. Select the OK button to continue.

Project Management

3-24

7. Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup file.

For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will becreated which contains the names of the symbols, macros or device types containedin the .ZIP file.

When you restore the backed up items (see following procedure), they will be addedto the selected catalog path. Any existing item in the catalog having the same nameas an item in the backup file will be overwritten by the backed up item.

Restore a Project or Symbol Catalog

1. In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directorywhere the backup files are stored. Use the Browse button to locate an existingdirectory on your system.

2. Select the Restore button.

3. Names of the available projects or catalogs will be displayed in the Availablefor Restoring field. Pick the desired project or catalog. The selected name willappear in the Selected field.

4. Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to restore the project orcatalog.

5. If a project with the same name already exists on your system you will beprompted “Project already exists. Overwrite?” Select the Yes button to overwritethe existing project. Select No or Cancel to abort the restore operation.

Project Management

3-25

Project Reorganize

This function re–creates the project database file, Oldb.mdb. The function is onlyneeded in cases where your project data becomes corrupted.

Select:

Manage � Project � Reorganize

The software will display the Project Preselect dialog box. Select the project thatyou wish to reorganize and select OK.

The software will open each page in the project and store the relevant information inthe project’s Oldb.mdb file.

When this process is complete the software will display a text logfile that lists all thepages that were processed.

Project Management

3-26

Project Page Count

This function updates the total page count for the project. Ordinarily this is doneautomatically, but occasionally after performing multiple page move and deletefunctions, the page count can become inaccurate. If you notice an error in the pagetotal for a project (for example in the “page __ of __” field in a title block) use theManage > Project > Page Count function.

Select:

Manage � Project � Page Count

The software will update the total page count for the project.

Page Management

4-1

4 Page Management

This section describes functions related to RSWireTM Designer drawing pages. Thefirst section covers how pages are organized within the project. Other sectionsdescribe how to display (open), create, delete and copy pages. Installationfunctions allow all the pages within an installation to be copied, deleted, orrenamed as a unit.

For information on configuring page formats, see page 7-29 (Tools > ProjectSettings > Page Format function).


� Page Organization

� Page Storage

� Displaying Pages (Open, Refresh, Next Page, Previous Page)

� Save Page

� Save As Page

� Create New Page

� Quit Page

� Clear Page

� Delete Page

� Copy Page

� Modify Page

� Rename Page

� Move Page

� Viewing Pages

� Browse Copy

� Page List

� Delete Installation

� Copy Installation

� Rename Installation

� Navigator Function

� Page Count

Page Management

4-2

Page Organization

As described in Section 3, projects can be (optionally) divided into installationsand locations. An installation or location does not exist until a drawing page iscreated and assigned to that installation and location. A page need not be assignedto an installation or location, but it must be associated with an existing project.

Page numbering for each installation can be independent. Two locations in thesame installation can not have the same page numbers (see Project 1, Installation 2in the illustration below).

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2

PAGES

INSTALLATION 1 INSTALLATION 2

LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION(NO INSTALLATIONOR LOCATION)

DRAWING

If no installations or locations have been created in a project, all the pages in theproject will be part of the same numbering series (see Project 2 in the aboveillustration).

Page numbering need not be continuous; there can be “gaps.”

Page Management

4-3

Page Storage

When a RSWire drawing page is created and stored, the graphical information isstored in a DWG file while the logical information is stored in the project’sOldb.mdb file.

Drawing Page

Oldb.mdb file(project logical data)

.DWG file (graphics)stored as

The DWG file contains the graphical information for the drawing: everything thatis seen when the drawing is plotted.

The Oldb.mdb file contains logical information about all the drawings in theproject. This data includes device IDs, wire coordinates, and connectioninformation and is used by various software functions. By having this informationin the Oldb.mdb file, the software is able to perform project–wide operations suchas cross referencing and list generation without having to open and analyze everyDWG file.

When changes are made in the currently open page that affect another page in theproject, the software will place the change in the Oldb.mdb file. The next time theuser opens the second drawing page, the DWG file is updated from theinformation in the Oldb.mdb file.

Within the DWG file the software follows a layering standard that places differenttypes of information on separate layers. See page 5-125.

The Oldb.mdb and DWG files are stored in the directory for the project to whichthey belong.

As each page in an installation is created, the software assigns a name to the DWGfiles in the following format:

_______1.DWG

The number in the filename is incremented for each new page in the installationthat is created. When you create a new installation, the filename numbering beginsagain.

Page Management

4-4

Displaying Pages (Select, Refresh, Next, Previous)

Four functions are available for displaying drawing pages. These functions areOpen, Refresh, Next Page, and Previous Page.

Open Page

The File > Open function allows an existing drawing page to be loaded intoRSWire and displayed on the screen for viewing and editing.

To open a page, select:

File � Open

The Select Page dialog box will appear, listing all the currently available projects.

Project:

ABACKMACHINE1TOOLWAREHOUSEWEB

MACHINE1

Installation: Page:

Search... Search...

OK

Preview

Search...

Description:

Cancel Help...

User:Date: Online:Format: Scale:Page Type:Installation:Location:

Select Page

Page Management

4-5

Select the desired project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. Thenames of all the installations in the selected project will appear in the Installationcolumn. When you select an installation, the existing pages in that installation willbe listed in the Page column. You can then select the desired page.

When you select a page, a thumbnail view of the page will appear in the previewarea of the dialog box.

In the following example, page 1 of the installation LINE1 in the projectMACHINE1 has been selected. Information about the page appears in the lowerright corner of the dialog box.

LINE2

Project:


MACHINE1

Installation: Page:

Search... Search...

OK

Preview

Search...

Cancel Help...

23456

Description:Motor Control Center

User: USERDate: 8/10/98 Online: OffFormat: D–2COL Scale: 1Page Type: Circuit DiagramInstallation: LINE1Location: ENC1

Select Page

MACHINE1LINE1 1

In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects,installations or pages with descriptions. You can also make selections from theselists.

Select the OK button to proceed. The selected page will be displayed on thescreen.

Page Management

4-6

Page Name Field – There is a page name field that indicates the project name,installation name, location name, page name, and online/offline status of thecurrently displayed page. This field appears in the lower left corner of the window.In the following example, the current page is page 1 of the project Machine1,installation LINE1, location EN1 and the page is an online page (On). (See page4-14 for an explanation of the Online function.) If the page is assigned to noparticular installation or location the words NO_INST and NO_LOC will appear inthis field.

LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Command:Command:

Page Name Field

MACHINE1, LINE1, EN1, 1, On 2.5000, 0.5000

Refresh Page

If, during an RSWire session, the drawing screen is cleared, selecting the View >Refresh Page function will bring back the last drawing page that was displayed.

Select:

View � Refresh Page

Page Management

4-7

Next and Previous Page

The File > Next Page and Previous Page functions allow you to display the nextand previous drawing pages in numerical order without having to enter thespecific page name.

Select:

File � Next Page

or

File � Previous Page

Page Management

4-8

Save Page

Use the File > Save function to save (store) a drawing page onto disk.

After saving, the page remains on screen, available for further editing.

Select:

File � Save

When the save operation is complete, the message “The page was saved” appearson the command line.

Automatic Page Save

You can configure the software to automatically save the currently open page at aregular time interval. Use the following procedure:

1. Using Notepad or another text editor, create an ASCII text file namedautosave.cfg containing a time interval value in minutes. In other words, if thefile contains the number 15, the page will be saved every 15 minutes. The fileneed only contain this number.

2. Place the autosave.cfg file in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory.

Page Management

4-9

Save As Page

Use the File > Save As function to save an RSWire drawing as a DWG file underanother name for use outside of RSWire. The logical information for the DWGfile that is created with this function will not be saved in the project Oldb.mdb fileand therefore will not work with the RSWire logical functions (error checking,cross referencing, etc.). It will only be a graphical view of the drawing page. Youcan also save drawings as DXF or DWT files.

Therefore, do not use the Save As function to create files that you wish to use laterin RSWire. Use the Manage > Page > Copy command to make copies of pagesfor use inside RSWire.

Warning: Use the Save As functions only for DWG files that will be usedoutside of RSWire. The logical information for the DWG file that is createdwith this function will not be saved and therefore will not work with theRSWire logical functions if you attempt to use the new DWG file later inRSWire.

The File > Save As function will save an AutoCAD DWG file in the followingformats: AutoCAD 2000, Release 14/LT98/LT97, AutoCAD Release 13/LT95.You can also select to save as a Drawing Template File (*.dwt) or as a DXF file inthe following formats: AutoCAD 2000, R14/LT98/LT97, R13/Lt95, R12/LT2.

To use this command, first display the RSWire drawing page that you wish tosave.

Then, select:

File � Save As

The Save Drawing As dialog box will appear.

Page Management

4-10

Save in

_______1.dwg Save

Cancel

Options

File Name:

Save as type:

_______1.dwg

AutoCAD R14/LT98 Drawing (*.dwg)

Work

Save Drawing As

In the Save in Field, select the path and folder in which you want to save thedrawing from the dropdown list.

The drawing’s current name is indicated in the File Name field. Enter the newname under which you wish to save the drawing in this field. Do not enter the.DWG extension; it will be added automatically.

In the Save as type: field, select the file type that you want the file saved as, fromthe dropdown list.

Select the Save button to save the new DWG file.

Select Cancel to abort the Save As function.

Select Options to save proxy images of custom objects. The Export Optionsdialog box will appear. If you save to the Release 14 or Release 13 file type, andthe drawing contains custom objects from another application, you can select theSave Proxy Images of Custom Objects checkbox. Images of the custom objects aresaved in the drawing file. If you do not choose this option, a frame for each objectis saved in the drawing file. Refer to your AutoCAD manual for moreinformation.

Page Management

4-11

New Page

Use the File > New > Page function to create a new drawing page.

Select:

File � New � Page

The New Page dialog box will appear.

Project:

Installation:

Location:

Page:

Format Name D–2COL

Scale 1: 1

Online

Title Block Parameters

Select Page Format...

Page Macro


1... 2... 3... 4... 5...

6... 7... 8... 9... 10...

Page Type

Schematic Diagram

OK Cancel Help...

Select...

Select...

Select...

New Page

If a project is currently active, the name of the project (and installation) will beprompted in the Project and Installation fields. These can be changed if desired.

Project – In this field, enter the name of the project to which the page will belong.An entry must be made in this field and the project must exist, otherwise the errormessage “Project does not exist” will be displayed. Use the Select button to viewand pick from a list of existing projects.

Installation – In this field enter the name of the installation to which the drawingpage will belong. An entry in this field is optional. If the installation name entereddoes not yet exist, a new installation will be created. (See page 4-2 for moreinformation on installations and locations.) The installation name can have up to14 characters. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existinginstallations.

Page Management

4-12

Location – In this field enter the name of the location to which the page willbelong. An entry in this field is optional. If the location name entered does not yetexist, a new location will be created. The location name can have up to 14characters. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing locations.

Page – In this field enter the page number (name). If you wish to be automaticallyprompted for the next available page number in the specified installation, placethe cursor in the Page field, delete any existing number, and then point and clickat a different field – the next available number will then appear in the Page field.

Note Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the installation, location, orpage names that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). Thesecharacters are used for various purposes by the software and may causeunexpected results if entered in these fields.

Format Name – This field selects the page size format. Fifty different formats arepossible. The pre–defined formats provided with RSWire are as follows:

Page Management

4-13

Format Name Dimensions/Description

DEFAULT 1180.0 x 810.0 in. - System Default (do not modify)

A-0VCOL 8.5 x 11 in. - A Size Vertical Without Line Numbers

A-0HCOL 11.0 x 8.5 in. - A Size Horizontal Without Line Numbers

B-0COL 17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size Without Line Numbers

C-0COL 22.0 x 17.0 in. - C Size Without Line Numbers

D-0COL 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Without Line Numbers

E-0COL 44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size Without Line Numbers

A-1VCOL 8.5 x 11.0 in. - A Size 1 Line Number Column

A-1HCOL 11 x 8.5 in. - A Size 1 Line Number Column

B-1COL 17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size 1 Line Number Column

C-1COL 22.0 x 17.0 - C Size 1 Line Number Column

D-1COL 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 1 Line Number Column

E-1COL 44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 1 Line Number Column

B-2COL 17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size 2 Line Number Columns

C-2COL 22.0 x 17.0 - C Size 2 Line Number Columns

D-2COL 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 2 Line Number Columns

E-2COL 44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 2 Line Number Columns

D-3COL 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 3 Line Number Columns



A0 1189.0 x 841.0 mm - IEC Size A0

A1 841.0 x 594.0 mm - IEC Size A1

A2 594.0 x 420.0 mm - IEC Size A2

A3 420.0 x 297.0 mm - IEC Size A3

A4V 210.0 x 297.0 mm - IEC Size A4 vertical

A4H 297.0 x 210.0 mm - IEC Size A4 horizontal

ZONE 34.0 x 22.0 in. - Zone Cross Referencing

HEX-LAD-D1 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Hexagon Ladder

HEX-LAD-D2 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Hexagon Ladder

HEX-LAD-C1 22.0 x 17 in. - C Size 1 Column Hexagon Ladder

HEX-LAD-C2 22.0 x 17 in. - C Size 2 Column Hexagon Ladder

HEX-LAD-B1 17.0x11.0 in. - B Size 1 Column Hexagon Ladder

HEX-LAD-A1V 8.5 x 11 in. - A Size Vertical, Hexagon Ladder

HEX-LAD-A1H 11.0x8.5 in. - A Size Horizontal, Hexagon Ladder

UNDEFINED 0.0 x 0.0 - The remaining formats are undefined

Page Management

4-14

To display the list of page formats, use the Select Page Format button. This willdisplay a dialog box from which you can select a format.

Any formats with a width and height of 0.0 are undefined (unused) formats.

Undefined page formats are available to the user for custom page formats. Thesecan be set up using the Tools > Project Settings function (see page 7-29) andselecting the Page Format tab. Existing page formats also can be re–defined usingthis function.

Note You must assign a name to a page format before you can create a page with theformat.

Note Do not re–define the first (“DEFAULT”) page format. The system requires thisformat in its default state for certain display functions.

You can also display or print a list of page formats with the Reports > Libraries >Page Formats function.

Scale – This optional field specifies the drawing scale to be used for the pagebeing defined. This is mainly used for panel layout drawings so that symbols canbe placed at less than full size.

Online – This checkbox determines whether or not logical functions are active onthe page. When the Online checkbox is selected, the page is online, meaning thatautomatic functions such as error checking and cross referencing will beperformed on the drawing. When the Online box is empty, the page is not online(it is “offline”). The software does not recognize the connections on offline pages.The Online checkbox should be turned off only when no logically connectedcontrol devices will be placed on the page, such as for panel layouts, creating newsymbols, or general mechanical CAD work where no error checking or crossreferencing is required. You can change the online status of a page after it iscreated by using the Manage > Page > Modify function.

Page Type – This field provides a number of page type options: SchematicDiagram is for online schematic diagram pages. This type should be selected forthe majority of RSWire drawings. Select Panel Layout for panel layout diagrams.The Graphical Terminal Plan is assigned to pages generated by the graphicalterminal plan function. The Graphical Contents List type is assigned to pagesgenerated when a report is sent as output to a project page. Select the WiringDiagram Layout type when creating a wiring diagram layout drawing.

Page Macro – This optional field allows a macro to be placed on the pageautomatically. Unlike the Default Page Macro specified when a project is created,the Page Macro here only applies to the page currently being created. A Selectbutton under the field allows the macro list to be displayed and selected from.

Page Management

4-15

Title Block – This optional field specifies the title block macro to be used only onthe page being created. A title block named on the New Page dialog box willoverride the title block specified on the New Project dialog box when the projectwas created. A Select button under the field allows the macro list to be displayedand selected from.

Parameters – This area of the dialog box contains ten buttons labeled 1 through10. Selecting any of these buttons will display a list of ten page informationparameters (selecting 1 will display parameters 1 through 10, selecting 2 willdisplay parameters 11 though 20, and so on). These parameters are associated withand stored with the page. Some are used in title blocks. When a button is activatedthe following Page Parameter dialog box will appear.

11. Para

12. Para

13. Para

14. Para

15. Para

16. Para

17. Para

18. Para

19. Para

20. Para

OK Cancel Help...

Search Language Text

Page Parameter 2

,

Select the Search Language Text button to access the language text database,allowing you to insert language text phrases into the page parameter fields (put thecursor in the desired field first). See page 5-32 for more on language text.

Enter the desired information in the parameter fields and select the OK button tocontinue.

When the desired information is entered in the New Page dialog box, select theOK button to create the page. The blank page will then appear on the screen, readyfor further editing.

Page Management

4-16

Page Break

The File > Break function removes the currently active drawing page from thescreen without saving any changes that have been made since the page wasopened (or since it was last saved).

Warning: You will lose any edits that have been made since the page was lastsaved.

To exit from a drawing page without saving any changes that have been made,select:

File � Break

The current drawing page will be removed from the screen without being saved.

The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the page breakfunction. Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel thebreak function.

Page Management

4-17

Clear Page

The Manage > Page > Clear function erases all drawing elements from thecurrently active drawing page. The page becomes blank as if it had just beencreated. This function therefore should be used with caution.

Warning: This function deletes all current page data completely.

To erase everything from the current drawing page, select:

Manage � Page � Clear

The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the Page Clear.Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the clearoperation.

Note If you perform Manage > Page > Clear by accident, you can recover the data byperforming the File > Break function immediately after the Manage > Page >Clear.

Page Management

4-18

Delete Page

The Manage > Page > Delete function allows you to delete RSWire drawingpages.

Note You can also use the Manage > Installation > Delete function to delete an entireinstallation of pages.

Select:

Manage � Page � Delete

The following Delete Page(s) dialog box will appear. Select a project name and alist of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages inthat installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the pages that youwish to delete.

Project:


MACHINE1

Installation: Page:

Search... Search...

OK

Preview

Search...

Description:

User:Date:Installation: Location:Format: Scale:Online: Page Type:

Cancel Help...

Delete Page(s)

In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects,installations or pages with descriptions.

Page Management

4-19

When the desired pages have been selected, select the OK button. The message“Delete the selected pages?” will appear. Select the OK button again to delete thepages, or select Cancel to abort the page deletion.

Page Management

4-20

Copy Page

The Manage > Page > Copy function allows you to copy drawing pages.

Note You can also use the Manage > Installation > Copy function to copy an entireinstallation of pages.

Select:

Manage � Page � Copy

The following Copy Page(s) dialog box will appear.

Project:

ABACKTOOL

Installation: Page:From:

Project:

TOOL

Installation:

Page:

To:

Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference

Location:

Search... Search... Search...

OK Cancel Help...

Set Pages Online

Wire Numbers:Maintain Add Prefix: Add Suffix:

Renumber All Terminals

Modify Field Settings

Copy Page(s)

Page Management

4-21

In the From: fields, select the pages you wish to copy. Select a project name and alist of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages inthat installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the pages that youwish to copy.

In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects,installations or pages with descriptions.

In the To: fields select the installation in which the copy is to reside (the “To”project will always be the currently selected project). A location and page numbercan also be specified. If you selected multiple pages to be copied, the numberentered in the To: Page field will be assigned to the lowest numbered page beingcopied. The spacing of the copied pages will be maintained; in other words, if youselect pages 1 and 3 and assign a destination of page 5, the copies will becomepages 5 and 7.

The Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference checkboxdetermines whether device IDs on the copied pages will be automatically changedto match the new page number. When the checkbox is selected, the device IDswill be converted. When the checkbox is not selected, device IDs will remain thesame if the page is copied to an offline page. If you copy to an online page youwill be prompted for a new device ID for each item (see important note below).

The Set Pages Online checkbox determines whether the copied pages will beonline or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. Ifthe pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed.

Important If you turn off the Convert Device IDs... checkbox and copy to an online page(i.e., the Set Pages Online checkbox is turned on) the software’s error checkingwill detect duplicate device IDs on the copied page and will prompt you for a newID for each item on the page. This can be time–consuming if the schematic islarge. It may be preferable to let the system automatically convert the device IDs(i.e., leave the Convert Device IDs checkbox on) and then manually change IDs asneeded with the Edit > Symbol function.

The Renumber All Terminals checkbox determines whether or not terminals inthe copied page will be renumbered automatically to avoid duplication. Select thecheckbox to automatically renumber terminals. If the checkbox is not selected,you will be prompted to enter a new ID for each terminal that is duplicated withinthe same installation.

The Modify Field Settings checkbox determines whether or not field settings ofthe existing page will be duplicated into the copied page. If the checkbox isselected, you will be prompted with the Field Parameters dialog box to makemodifications to the field settings of the copied page. If the checkbox is notselected, existing field settings will copy into the copied page.

Page Management

4-22

The Wire Numbers area of the dialog box allows you to set how existing wirenumbers in the copied page will be copied. Because the software considersduplicate wire numbers to be an error, the system will alter any wire numbers (asdescribed below) that already exist in the project receiving the copied page.

The Maintain checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied.If you do not select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied.

If you do select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under thefollowing rules:

1. If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project, the wirenumbers will be maintained without changes.

2. If copied wire numbers are connected to a signal cross reference connecting toan existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copiedportion.

3. If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destinationproject, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire numberthat duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 iscopied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wirenumber will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix orsuffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)

The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix thatwill be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix willmake the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unlessthe prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project.)

Select the OK button to copy the pages.

Note Part numbers that are assigned to device IDs on the original page will be assignedto corresponding IDs on the copied pages.

Note Pages can only be coped into the open project.

Page Management

4-23

Modify Page

The Manage > Page > Modify function allows you to change the title block usedon an existing drawing page and also change the page parameters and turn theOnline function off and on.

To modify a drawing page, first display the page (File > Open Page) and thenselect:

Manage � Page � Modify

The Modify Page Data dialog box will appear. This dialog box is similar to theNew Page dialog box (see page 4-11) except that only the Title Block, PageFormat, Online, and Parameters fields are accessible for modification. See pages4-12 through 4-15 for a description of these fields.


Online



Page Macro

Select

1... 2... 3... 4... 5...

6... 7... 8... 9... 10...

Page Type

OK

Select

Select

Select

Help...Cancel

Select

Modify Page Data

Make the desired changes to the title block, page macro, parameters and onlinestatus and select the OK button to load the changes.

Set Page Online

When you use the Manage > Page > Modify function to turn a page from offlineto online, the page is once again subject to error checking for conditions such asduplicate device IDs. When you select the Online checkbox in the Modify PageData dialog box and select OK, the following dialog box will appear.

Page Management

4-24

OK Cancel Help...

Online Page

Keep existing Device IDs

Rename Device IDs Automatically

Select the Keep existing Device IDs checkbox to keep device IDs as they currentlyexist on the page.

De–select the Keep existing Device IDs checkbox to allow the software to changedevice IDs to match the currently selected device ID format (i.e., page/linenumber, sequential number, etc.).

Select the Rename Device IDs Automatically checkbox to allow the software tochange device IDs without prompting you.

De–select the Rename Device IDs Automatically checkbox to cause the softwareto prompt you before changing each device ID.

Select OK to complete setting the page online.

Page Management

4-25

Modify Page Variables Globally

The Manage > Page > Page Variables function allows you to globally changepage parameter text across a range of pages, installations, or across an entireproject.

Select:

Manage � Page � Page Variables

The Page Variables dialog box is displayed.

OK Cancel Help...

Select Pages...

1... 2... 3... 4... 5...

6... 7... 8... 9... 10...

Select Text

Page Variables

Select the Select Pages button in the Page Variables dialog box. The ExchangeTitle Block Text dialog box will appear, listing the projects on your system.

Project:


Installation: Page:


OK Cancel Help...

Exchange Title Block Text

Page Management

4-26

This dialog box allows you to select which pages are affected by the text change.Select the desired project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. Thenames of all the installations in the selected project will then appear in theInstallation column. When you select an installation, the existing pages in thatinstallation will be listed in the Page column. Then select the desired pages.

If you select only a project name, all pages in that project will be affected. If youselect only the installation name (and no pages) then all pages in that installationwill be affected. Select OK to continue with the change function.

Select Text – This area of the dialog box contains ten buttons labeled 1 through10. Selecting any of these buttons will display a list of ten page informationparameters (selecting 1 will display parameters 1 through 10, selecting 2 willdisplay parameters 11 though 20, and so on). These parameters are associated withand stored with the page. Some are used in title blocks. When a button is activatedthe following Page Parameter dialog box will appear.

11. Para

12. Para

13. Para

14. Para

15. Para

16. Para

17. Para

18. Para

19. Para

20. Para

OK Cancel Help...

Search Language Text

Page Parameter 2

,

Enter the text that you wish to assign globally in the desired field.

Note This text will replace any existing parameter text for the selected pages.

Select the OK button when the text has been entered. You will return to the PageVariables dialog box and a different group of parameters can be selected.

Select the OK button in Page Variables dialog box to execute the change titleblock text function.

Page Management

4-27

Modify Page Variables in Title Block

You can modify the values of page variables that appear in page title blocks bypointing the cursor at the desired value and clicking the right mouse button.

DATE

DRAWN BY900–178–01

1 OF 3Line Cabinet A

Warehouse

Unit One Storage LIneD. Smith

03/04/2000

PROJECT

PAGE DESCRIPTION

DRAWING NO.

JOB NO.178

SHEET

Right click on value to modify

An appropriate dialog box will appear that will allow you to edit the variablevalue.

Note You can also edit the page description, page number, and project description byright clicking on the value in the title block.

Page Management

4-28

Rename Page

The Manage > Page > Rename function allows you to rename RSWire drawingpages within a project.

Select:

Manage � Page � Rename

The following Rename Page dialog box will appear.

Project:

ABACKMACHINE1TOOLWAREHOUSE

Installation: Page:From:

Project: Installation:

Page:

To:

Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference


OK Cancel Help...

Location:

Rename Page

In the From: fields, select the pages you wish to rename. First select a projectname and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list ofpages in that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the page thatyou wish to rename.

In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects,installations or pages including descriptions.

Page Management

4-29

In the To: fields, enter the installation, location, and page number that the renamedpage is to have. The location assignment is optional.

The Convert Device ID to New Page/Line Number Reference checkboxdetermines whether device IDs on the renamed page will be automaticallychanged to match the new page number. When a checkmark appears in the box,the device IDs will be converted. When the box is empty, device IDs will remainthe same.

Select the OK button to rename the page.

Page Management

4-30

Move Page

The Manage > Page > Move function allows you to move drawing pages withinan installation. You may wish to move pages to rearrange the page order or tomake room for inserting new pages. Or, you may wish to move pages to close gapsin the page order.

Note If you wish to move a page to another installation, or to another project, use theManage > Page > Copy function and then delete the original page.

To move a page, select:

Manage � Page � Move

The Move Page(s) dialog box will appear.

From:

Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Reference

Increment Page Numbers By +/–:

Project:


Installation: Page:


OK Cancel Help...

Move Pages(s)

Use the Project and Installation fields to identify the project and installationcontaining the page(s) to be moved.

In the Page field select one or more pages to be moved.

In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects,installations or pages including descriptions.

Use the Increment Page Numbers By field to specify the number of positionsforward (+) or backward (–) you wish to move the pages. For example, enter “2”to move the page(s) two page positions forward, or enter “–1” to move them oneposition backward.

Page Management

4-31

The Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox allowsyou to select whether or not the device IDs in the moved drawings will beautomatically changed to reflect the new page number. When a checkmarkappears in the checkbox, IDs will be renamed automatically. When the checkboxis empty, the original IDs will be retained.

Select the OK button to perform the page move operation.

Rules for Page Move:

A page cannot be moved into a position already occupied by another page. Thiswill cause a “Page already exists” error message to appear. A page cannot bemoved backward to a page number of less than zero. If this is attempted, themessage “Incorrect input” is displayed on the command line.

The following illustration shows an installation containing five drawing pages,numbered 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6. There is no page 3. Pages 1 and 2 could be movedforward one position (+1) in which case they would become pages 2 and 3,respectively. They could not be moved forward two positions (+2) because thiswould conflict with the existing page 4. However, they could be moved ahead sixpositions (+6) where they would become pages 7 and 8.

Pages

12

4

5

6 Move Pages 1 and 2:

+1 Allowed

+2 Not Allowed

+6 Allowed

–1 Allowed

–2 Not Allowed

(+ = forward, – = backward)

Pages 1 and 2 could also be moved backward one position (–1) where they wouldbecome pages 0 and 1. They could not be moved back any further than this.

Page Management

4-32

Viewing Pages

The View pull–down menu contains a number of functions that control the user’sview of drawing pages.

View � Refresh Page� Redraw� Regen� Zoom� Pan� Aerial View� Quadrant...� Navigator� List� Command Dispatch� Toolbars...

Refresh Page – If, during an RSWire session, the drawing screen is cleared,selecting the View > Refresh Page function will bring back the last drawing pagethat was displayed.

Redraw – Redraws the current drawing.

Regen – Regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates forall objects.

Zoom – There are a number of zoom functions:

Real Time Zoom – This option is used for interactive zooming. With thisZoom function, you can zoom in or out of the drawing by holding down theleft button of the pointing device and moving the cursor vertically up or down.Press <Esc> to exit this mode.

Zoom Previous – Displays the previous zoom view of the drawing.

Zoom Window – Allows the user to enlarge (zoom) the view of a selected areaof the drawing. When selected, the software prompts you to select the firstcorner followed by the opposite corner. This allows you to define a rectangulararea on the drawing which will be enlarged to fill the screen.

Zoom Dynamic – Allows the user to zoom out as well as in. Selecting thefunction produces a reduced view of the entire drawing with a square areawindow. Position the area window and click the left button. The window cannow be re–sized as desired by moving the mouse. Click the right button tozoom to the selected area.

Page Management

4-33

Zoom Scale – Allows you to zoom at a specified scale factor. When you selectthis function you will be prompted on the command line to enter a scale factor.Entering a value followed by “x” specifies a scale relative to the current view(“2x” magnifies objects to twice their current size). Entering a value followedby “xp” specifies a scale relative to paper space units (the first view isconsidered 1xp).

Zoom Center – Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and amagnification factor or height. When you select the function you will beprompted to specify a center point and then enter a height or magnificationfactor.

Zoom In – Zooms in to the drawing in 2X increments.

Zoom Out – Zooms out from the drawing in .5X increments.

Zoom All – Zooms to the smallest view that includes everything in thedrawing.

Zoom Extents – Zooms to display the drawing extents.

Pan – The following Pan functions are available:

Real Time – This option is used for interactive panning. You can pan thedrawing image to a new location by holding down the left button of thepointing device and moving the cursor. Press <Esc> to exit this mode.

Point – Moves the view of the drawing by the specified distance.

Left – Moves the drawing to the left.

Right – Moves the drawing to the right.

Up – Moves the drawing up.

Down – Moves the drawing down.

When you are using the Real Time option of Zoom or Pan, you can right–click thepointing device and use the cursor menu to move quickly between zooming andpanning.

Aerial View – Aerial View is a navigation tool that displays a view of the drawingin a separate window so that you can quickly move to that area. If you keep theAerial View window open as you work, you can zoom and pan without selecting acommand. In the Mode menu you can choose Pan or Zoom. Pan mode allows youto move a rectangle to the part of the drawing you wish to view. Zoom modeallows you to define a window to move and resize the drawing at the same time.

Page Management

4-34

Quadrant – Allows you to zoom to a specific quadrant of the drawing page. Thefollowing Select Quadrant dialog box is displayed. Select the radio button for thedesired page quadrant. Select the All radio button to display the entire page.

OK Cancel Help...

3–Lower Left

2–Upper Left 1–Upper Right

4–Lower Right

All

Select Quadrant

Navigator – The Navigator function allows you to move quickly from onedrawing page to another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a signal.For more information, see page 4-43.

List – The List function allows you to view data relating to specific entities in adrawing. See page 5-132.

Command Dispatch – Displays a drop down list containing RSWire commands.Select the desired command and then select the checkmark button to execute thecommand.

Toolbars – This function allows you to select which toolbars are displayed on thescreen.

Page Management

4-35

Browse Copy

The Edit > Browse Copy function allows you to simultaneously display up to fourdrawing pages. It is possible to copy portions from these pages and paste themonto the current drawing page. The pages copied from can exist in the same or in adifferent project from the current page.

To use the Browse Copy function:

1. Display the page that you wish to receive the copied items.

2. Then select the Edit > Browse Copy function.

Edit � Browse Copy

The Browse Copy dialog box will appear. This dialog box operates in a similarmanner to the File > Open dialog box, except that multiple pages can beselected that will be displayed on the screen. These selected pages must existin the same project and installation (however they can be in a different projector installation from the currently active page).

3. Select the name of the Project and Installation that contains the pages youwish to view and/or copy from. The pages in the selected installation will belisted. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list ofprojects, installations or pages including descriptions.

4. Select the page (number) of the first page that you wish to view. This page andthe three pages that follow it in numerical order will be displayed in theBrowse Copy dialog box. The number of each page is displayed above thethumbnail view.

In the following figure, page 2 has been selected, so pages 2 through 5 aredisplayed.

Page Management

4-36

Select... Select...

OK Cancel Help...

Project

Browse Copy

Installation

Search...

Search... Search...

LINE1

C2HOUSE

EX2EXAMPLEMACHINE1

1

3456

Page Preview

Single Selection

Maintain Device IDs As Created

Select...

Display Page To Be CopiedIn This Quadrant

2

54

3

LINE1

C2HOUSE 2Select...

Previous Next

You can use the Next button to display the next four pages in the installation(if any). Use the Previous button to display the previous group of four pages.

You can check the Single Selection checkbox to display individual pages inthe order they were selected in the page column. If this checkbox is notselected, the next pages (if any) in the installation will be displayed.

5. Check the Maintain Device IDs As Created checkbox if you wish to maintainthe existing device ID of the copied portion. If this checkbox is not selected,the device IDs will acquire the numbering sequence of the destination page.

Note If you are copying symbols within the same project, the Maintain Device ID AsCreated checkbox option has no effect. RSWire will not allow duplicate device IDswithin the same project.

Page Management

4-37

6. Display the page from which you wish to copy in the upper left quadrant ofthe Browse Copy dialog box. Do this by selecting the desired page number inthe Page column.

7. Select the OK button. The selected page will fill the screen.

Note You can also select a page to copy from by selecting the Select button above thethumbnail view.

8. You will be prompted to “Define Base Point.” Select a reference point for thecopied portion.

9. Just as with the standard copy function, you will be prompted to “Selectobjects.” Select the portion of the drawing that you wish to copy and click theright mouse button (or press the <Enter> key).

Note If you want to exit this function, select Edit > Browse Copy. You will return to theoriginal page that you wanted to receive copied items.

10. The destination page (selected in the first step) will fill the screen. Select aposition for the copied elements.

11. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear with a device ID shown foreach copied symbol (the copied items are treated as a macro by the software).You can accept the prompted IDs or enter new ones.

Note If you copy a field, the destination page must have an installation and locationassigned or the field will not be copied.

Page Management

4-38

Page List

To generate a list of drawing pages for a given project, use the Reports > Project> Page Full function. See page 9-4 for more information.

Select:

Reports � Project � Page Full

Page Management

4-39

Delete Installation

The Manage > Installation > Delete function allows you to delete an installationfrom a project.

Warning: All drawing pages in the selected installation will be deleted.

To delete an installation, select:

Manage � Installation � Delete

The following Select Project–Installation dialog box will appear, listing allprojects currently on your system.

Project:


Installation:

Search...

OK Cancel Help...

Select Project – Installation

Search...

When you select a project name, a list of all installations in the project will appearin the installation column. Select the installation that you wish to delete. Use theSearch button to display a list of projects or installations including descriptions.Select the OK button to proceed with the deletion.

The software will prompt “Delete the selected installation?” Select the OK buttonto delete the installation or select Cancel to abort the deletion.

Page Management

4-40

Copy Installation

The Manage > Installation > Copy function allows you to copy an installation(and all the drawing pages it contains).

To copy an installation, select:

Manage � Installation � Copy

The following Copy Installation dialog box will appear. In the From: fields, selectthe installation you wish to copy. First select a project name and a list ofinstallations will appear. You can then select (highlight) the installation that youwish to copy. The Search buttons display a list of projects or installations withdescriptions.

Project:

ABACKTOOL

Installation:From:

Project:

TOOL

Location:

To:

Search... Search...

Set Pages Online

OK Cancel Help...

Wire Numbers:

Maintain Add Prefix:

Add Suffix:

Installation:

Copy Installation

Page Management

4-41

In the To: fields, the current project is automatically selected as the destination.Enter the name that the copied installation is to have. Optionally, a location canalso be assigned which will apply to all the pages in the copied installation.

The Set Pages Online checkbox determines whether the copied pages will beonline or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. Ifthe pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed.

The Wire Numbers area of the dialog box allows you to set how existing wirenumbers in the copied installation will be copied. Because the software considersduplicate wire numbers to be an error, the system will alter any wire numbers (asdescribed below) that already exist in the project receiving the copied installation.

The Maintain checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied.If you do not select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied.

If you do select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under thefollowing rules:

1. If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project, the wirenumbers will be maintained without changes.

2. If copied wire numbers are connected to a signal cross reference connected toan existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copiedportion.

3. If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destinationproject, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire numberthat duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 iscopied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wirenumber will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix orsuffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)

The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix thatwill be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix willmake the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unlessthe prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project).

Select the OK button to copy the installation.

Page Management

4-42

Rename Installation

The Manage > Installation > Rename function allows you to assign a new nameto an installation.

To rename an installation, select:

Manage � Installation � Rename

The following Rename Installation dialog box will appear.

Installation:

Location:

To:

Search...

Installation:

Project:

ABACKMACHINE1TOOL

From:

Search...

OK Cancel Help...

Rename Installation

Project:

In the From: fields, select the installation you wish to rename. First select aproject name and a list of installations will appear. You can then select (highlight)the installation that you wish to rename. The Search buttons display a list ofprojects or installations with descriptions.

In the To: fields, enter the new installation name. Optionally, a location can alsobe assigned which will apply to all pages in the renamed installation. Select theOK button to rename the installation.

Page Management

4-43

Navigator Function

The Navigator function allows you to move quickly from one drawing page toanother by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a signal. It is useful whenyou wish to go from one place where a particular ID is used to another place in theproject where the same ID occurs. The Navigator can also jump from a displayedpart number to the parts database screen for that part.

To activate the Navigator, select:

View � Navigator

(There is also a navigator button in the toolbar – the one with binoculars on it.)

You will then be prompted to “Select attribute,” which means you can now pick anID or cross reference to initiate a navigator “jump”.

You must re–activate the Navigator function for each jump that you make.

The following types of navigator jumps are possible:

Signal Cross References – By clicking on the signal cross reference you will jumpfrom the current page to the page where the signal continues (or originates). Thepoint of continuation is marked with an inverted triangle.

CR124

126

AH126

127

128L1/2.01 L2/2.01

Select Signal Cross Reference

125

Page Management

4-44

Device Cross References – When clicking on symbol cross reference information,the display will jump to the page containing the symbol to which the crossreference refers. If you select the cross reference at a parent symbol you will jumpto the page containing the selected child symbol. Similarly, if you select the crossreference at the child symbol you will jump to the page containing the parentsymbol. The parent or child symbol that is jumped to is marked with an invertedtriangle.

CR112

CR112220

112

Select Cross Reference ToParent Or Child symbol(JIC)

–K1

Select Cross Reference ToParent Or Child Symbol(IEC)

4

3

/2.6

2221

13 14

–K1/3.2

13

14

A1

A2

Page Management

4-45

Schematic/Panel Layout/Wiring Diagram – Clicking on a symbol’s device ID in aschematic page will cause the display to jump to the panel layout page or wiringdiagram page containing the same device ID. (Wiring diagrams are generated bythe optional Wiring Diagram Generator routine.) If you select the device ID on apanel layout page or wiring diagram page, you will jump to the schematic pagecontaining that device ID.

PB206

Schematic Drawing Wiring Diagram Drawing

PB206

Panel Layout Drawing

PB206

1 2

WIRE WIRE

1381 1441

Select Device ID (JIC)

–S110250T101 –51X

Schematic Drawing Wiring Diagram Drawing

–S1

Panel Layout Drawing

–S11

2

WIRE

WIRE

1381

1441

Select Device ID (IEC)

Page Management

4-46

Terminal Device ID – By selecting a terminal device ID or number, you can jumpbetween the schematic, panel layout, or terminal plan pages containing that ID.

TERMINAL STRIP=L1+CAB1–TB2FROM SOURCE WIRE NO. WIRE NO.

LS101:4 W10 1

2

3

4

W14

W18

W21

LS103:4

LS105:4

LS107:4

W62

W66

W69

W73

Schematic (or Panel Layout) Page Terminal Plan Page

TB2W21 W734

Select Device ID

Select Terminal Number

JIC Terminal

Schematic (or Panel Layout) Page

–X2

Select Device ID

IEC Terminal

4

W21

TERMINAL STRIP=L1+CAB1–X2FROM SOURCE WIRE NO. WIRE NO.

LS101:4 W21 1

2

3

4

W22

W23

W24

LS103:4

LS105:4

LS107:4

W21

W22

W23

W24

Terminal Plan Page

Select Terminal Number

When you select a terminal device ID in the schematic or panel layout pages, thefollowing dialog box will appear, allowing you to select which type of page youwish to go to. (The current page type will be unavailable for selection.)

Page Management

4-47

Schematic

Terminal Plan

OK Cancel Help...

Panel Layout

Wire Diagram Layout

Select Page

When you select the terminal number in the terminal plan page, you will bereturned automatically to the schematic page.

Part Number – Another function of the Navigator is to jump from a displayed partnumber to the Parts Database window. When part numbers are displayed on theschematic screen, you can activate the Navigator, select a part number, and theparts database will be displayed with the complete information for that part.

PB118

118

800T–B6D2

Select Displayed Part Number

–S110250T10151X

JIC Example IEC Example

Navigator Search – You can also use the Navigator to search for and go to anydevice ID or function text in the current project. To use it, first select theNavigator function and then click in any empty area of the drawing screen. Thefollowing Navigator dialog box will appear.

Page Management

4-48

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

OK Cancel Help...

Search...

Search...

Search...

Navigator

Function Text: Search...

If you wish to narrow your choices down to a specific installation and location,make entries in the Installation and Location fields. Use the Search button next toeach field to display a list of installations or locations from which you can pick.(You must select an installation before you can select a location.)

When you select the Search button for Device ID, the following Select Devicedialog box will appear, listing the device IDs that currently exist.

Installation Location Device ID Device Type Function Text

Select Device

LINE1 BAY1 MTR110 CONVEYOR LINE1 BAY1 TB1LINE1 BAY1 MTR117 PUMP MOTOLINE1 BAY1 TB1LINE1 BAY2 MTR124 PRESS MOTLINE1 BAY2 TB1LINE1 BAY3 IAD247 1771-IADLINE1 BAY3 TBLINE1 BAY3 CR2 22LINE1 CAB1 CR164 22LINE1 CAB1 CR166 40

OK

Cancel

Help

Select the desired device ID followed by the OK button. The selected ID willappear in the Navigator dialog box. Select OK in the Navigator dialog box todisplay the page containing the selected device ID.

Page Management

4-49

Page Count

In some cases, after copying or moving pages, the software’s internal page countfor a given project will need to be updated. Use the Manage > Project > PageCount function.

1. Select the following pull–down menu:


2. The Select: Project dialog box will appear. Select (highlight) the desiredproject name(s).

3. Select the OK button. The project(s) will be internally updated.

4. Select the following pull–down menu:


5. Select the Search button. A list of all the projects with page counts willappear.

6. Select the OK button. The Select: Project dialog box will appear.

7. Select the Cancel button. The Select: Project dialog box will close.

Page Management

4-50

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Schematic Elements

5-1

5 Schematic Elements

This section covers schematic elements within RSWireTM Designer: the variouslines, symbols, macros, texts, and other items that make up a drawing. Included aresections on the various types of elements as well as sections on placing, deleting,copying, and moving the schematic elements.

See Section 6 for information on how to create custom schematic elements.

The following sections are provided:

� Wire/Line

� Drawing Wires

� Drawing Lines

� Symbol Select

� Symbol Settings

� Parent and Child Symbols

� Macro Select

� Entering Text

� Text Settings

� Invisible Text

� Foreign Language Text

� Box

� Field

� Circles and Arcs

� Signal Cross Reference

� Wire Numbers

� Part Numbers

� Dimensions

� Text File on Drawing

Schematic Elements

5-2

� Edit Schematic Elements

� Edit Menu

� Modify Menu

� Replace Symbol

� Clear Page

� Replace Device IDs

� Replace Text

� Replace Symbol Text

� Edit Part Number

� Replace Part Number Globally

� Deleting Wire Number

� I/O Device ID

� Linetype Properties

� Layers

� List Object Function (for drawing elements)

Schematic Elements

5-3

Wire/Line

RSWire is capable of creating two types of lines: wires and drawing lines.

Wires – Wires are lines that have logical properties. Wires must be used to connectthe symbols in schematic drawings. Wires will break automatically at symbolconnection points. Wires allow RSWire to recognize the connections betweensymbols and perform other functions such as automatic wire numbering.

Drawing Lines – Drawing lines are simple graphic lines with no logical properties.They should only be used for borders or for drawing when you create a new symbol.They should not be used to represent wires.

Select the Draw > Wire function when you wish to create wires on the drawingscreen. (A drawing page must be active before selecting this function.)

Select the Draw > Graphic > Line function to create drawing lines.

Wires

Use the Draw > Wire function to draw wires, pipes or other elements that connectthe symbols on a drawing. Wires are necessary for RSWire to recognize the from/toconnections between the symbols. When wires are drawn over symbols (or whensymbols are placed on a wire), the line is broken automatically at the symbolconnection points. When two wires are connected, the connection points are drawnautomatically.

Important You must draw wires using the Wire functions in order for RSWire to recognizeconnections and perform other automatic functions. Drawing lines will not work forthis purpose.

Draw � Wire � Continuous� Center� Dashed� 3 Phase� 90 Degree Down� 90 Degree Up� Multiline� Repeat Last

Schematic Elements

5-4

The following wire drawing functions are available:

The Continuous function is used when you wish to create single wire segments ortwo or more connected wire segments.

The Center and Dashed functions create dash–dot and dashed wires, respectively.

The 3 Phase function allows automatic drawing of three parallel wires.

With the 90 Degree Down and 90 Degree Up functions, you can connect two pointswith wire segments at a 90 degree angle in one step. The angle is either above orbelow the vertical wire.

The Multiline function allows multiple parallel wires to be drawn in a single step.Multilines can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted lines invarious colors. These are called multiline styles. You can select and customizemultiline styles using the Format > Multiline Style function. See page 6-100.

The Repeat Last function allows you to draw a wire parallel to the previouslydrawn wire. Only the end point needs to be entered. For horizontal wires the Xcoordinate is the same as for the previous wire, for vertical wires the Y coordinate isthe same as for the previous wire.

To Draw a Single Wire:

Select the Draw > Wire > Continuous function.

1. Locate the starting point of the wire by clicking the left mouse button.

2. Click on end point with the left mouse button.

3. Click the right mouse button to complete the wire.

117

118PB118 PB118.1

CR118

Click On Start And End Points

Symbol Connection Points(Wire Broken Automatically)Connection Points

(Drawn Automatically)

119

JIC Single Wires

Schematic Elements

5-5

Click On Start Point

–K1

4

3

/.42221

13 14

22

21

22

21

–S6

–S513

–K1

14

22

21

–S4

–H4

Click On End Point

IEC Single Wires

/.6

Adjusting Wire Length – You can extend an existing parallel wire by drawinganother line and connecting it to the first. The system will treat the two wires as asingle wire. You can also adjust wire length by stretching the wire’s endpoint(Modify > Stretch function).

Note If a wire is drawn over one or more symbols, the wire will automatically breakbetween symbols.

Wire/Line Coordinates Display – While wires and lines are being drawn, x–ycoordinates of the line endpoint are displayed on the status line below the drawingarea.

Schematic Elements

5-6

To Draw 3–Phase Wires:

Use the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function to automatically draw 3 parallel wiresspaced one grid unit apart. 3–phase wires are used for power circuit diagrams.

Select the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function.

1. Locate starting point of wires by clicking left mouse button.

2. Click the left mouse button again on the desired end point.

3–Phase Drawing Example:

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

M

PUMP

5 HP

1000 RPM

7.2 AMP

Wire Starting Point

3–Phase Connections(Drawn Automatically)

Wire End Point

101

102

103

104

105

M

PUMP

5 HP

1000 RPM

7.2 AMP

Wire Starting PointWire End Point

JIC 3–Phase Wires

T1

T3

T2

T1

T3

T2

M1

M1

106

107

Schematic Elements

5-7

M3~

WireStarting Point

3–Phase Connections(Drawn Automatically)

WireEnd Point

PUMP

5 HP

1000 RPM

7.2 AMP

IEC 3–Phase Wires

M3~

PUMP

5 HP

1000 RPM

7.2 AMP

WireEnd Point

WireStarting Point

U WV PE U WV PE

–M1 –M1

Note The software automatically connects two intersecting sets of 3 phase wires.However, you must draw the second set of wires into the first set. See the aboveexamples.

Schematic Elements

5-8

To Draw Repeat Wires:

Use the Repeat Last function to repeatedly draw parallel wires. Once a wire isdrawn, only the end points of subsequent wires need to be defined. For horizontalwires the X coordinate is the same as for the previous wire, for vertical wires the Ycoordinate is the same as for the previous wires. Wires or drawing lines can bedrawn using the Repeat option.

Select the Draw > Wire > Repeat Last option.

1. Draw the first wire (using the Draw > Wire > Continuous function).

2. Select the Draw > Wire > Repeat Last option.

3. Click on end points of all subsequent parallel wires.

Note The starting points for wires are along the x or y axis of the starting point of the firstwire.

Repeat Wires Example:

Y–AXIS

First WireEnd PointStarting Point

Click Here To Draw Second Wire

Click Here To Draw Third Wire

Click Here To Draw Fourth Wire

To Draw Continuous Wires or Lines:

The Continuous function allows you to draw multiple, connected wire segments.

Select the Draw > Wire > Continuous function.

1. Locate starting point of the first wire by clicking the left mouse button.

2. Click on end point of first wire with the left mouse button.

3. Create second and all subsequent lines by clicking on the destination point ofeach wire segment with the left mouse button.

Schematic Elements

5-9

4. Complete the last segment by clicking the right mouse button (or pressing the<Enter> key).

Step 1 Step 2

Step 3 Step 4

First Segment

To Draw Wires Using 90 Degree Up / Down:

Use the Draw > Wire > 90 Degree Up and 90 Degree Down options to draw rightangles automatically. This allows a pair of wires to be drawn in one operation. Seeexamples below for procedure. “90 Degree Up” means the angle is above thediagonal. “90 Degree Down” places the angle below the diagonal.

90 Degree Up Example:

1) Click On Start Point

2) Click On End Point

3) Angle Drawn Automatically

90 Degree Down Example:

1) Click On Start Point 2) Click on

End Point

3) Angle Drawn Automatically

Schematic Elements

5-10

Drawing Lines

Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to create drawing lines.

Note Unlike wires, RSWire does not recognize drawing lines as having any electrical orconnective properties. Drawing lines are used for mechanical layouts, devicelayouts, assembly layouts, borders, etc. Connection points are not automaticallydrawn.

Draw � Graphic � Line� Polyline

The following line drawing functions are available:

The Single function allows a single graphic line segment to be drawn by defining astart and end point with the left mouse button. You can create multiple, connectedline segments in a manner similar to the continuous wire drawing function. Click theright mouse button to complete the line.

The Polyline function activates the AutoCAD Polyline function.

Schematic Elements

5-11

Symbol Select

There are two functions for selecting symbols located under the Insert menu.

Insert � Select Icon� Symbol By Name

Select Icon allows you to select symbols by picking a graphical representation ofthe symbol.

Symbol By Name allows you to select symbols by entering the symbol name.

Both options display the following symbol selection dialog box.

Schematic Elements

5-12

Select Icon

On the lower left side of the dialog box is a list of symbol groups. Selecting one ofthese groups displays graphical images of the symbols in the selected group.Individual symbols can be selected by pointing and clicking on the icons. When youplace the cursor on one of the icons, a pop–up symbol description tag will appear.

Pull–down menus are provided in the select icon window. The Edit menu provides afunction to delete symbol groups from the list (caution: this function will delete theWMF file for the symbol group) and a function to refresh the display. The Settingsmenu gives access to the symbol and macro setting dialog boxes, and to abackground color function for the Select Icon window. The Exit menu will close thewindow.

The user can create his or her own symbol groups for use in the Select Icon mode.The procedure for creating these groups is described in an appendix. See page C-1.

Symbol by Name

If you know the symbol name, you can enter it in the Name field of the Select Icondialog box and select OK.

Otherwise, wildcard searches can be made by making entries containing asterisks(*) in the Name or Description fields. For example, enter *PUSHBUTTON* in theDescription field to search for any symbols with the word PUSHBUTTON in thedescription. If any symbols matching the search string are found they are displayedon screen in a list which can be selected from by pointing and clicking.

You can also select the Search button to see a list of all the symbols in the currentproject’s symbol catalogs. As shown in the following figure, this Symbol Databasedialog includes the symbols’ Catalog, Name, Type and Description. By clicking onone of these column headings you can determine how the listed symbols are sorted.

In the Path field you can select which catalogs are displayed. The availableselections are those listed in the catalog path line of the ecs.cfg file in the Rs\Workdirectory.

Schematic Elements

5-13

Name Type

Symbol Database

JIC CRNO PS2 NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTJIC CRNC PS2 NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACTJIC CRC PS2 CONTROL RELAY FORM C CONJIC CR PS1 CONTROL RELAY COILJIC CP CP1 NECESSARY SYMBOL FOR LIBJIC COS GS1 CABLE-OPERATED (EMERG.)JIC CONN TS5 CHILD PIN CONNECTORJIC CI GS1 CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER 3PHAS

Path: OKAll Catalogs

Catalog Description

Symbol Settings

Also displayed in the Select Icon dialog box under Symbol Settings are the currentAngle, Scale, and Mirror settings. If you wish to change these settings, click insidethe desired field. For more on these symbol settings, see page 5-23.

Placing a Symbol

Once a symbol is selected, its outline is visible on the drawing screen at the cursorlocation. Position the symbol by pointing the cursor at the desired location andpressing the left mouse button. The symbol is then placed in the diagram. Thereference point of the symbol will snap to the nearest grid line.

If the symbol is placed on a wire, the wire will break automatically at the symbolconnection points. If a symbol is placed first and a wire is drawn over the symbol,the wire will also break automatically.

The symbol will be rotated automatically to match the horizontal or verticalalignment of a wire. (For this to occur, symbol rotation must be set to 0 degrees andthe symbol reference point must be on the wire. Certain 3–phase symbols will not berotated automatically.)

Note No more than one wire should be connected to a single symbol connection point.

Schematic Elements

5-14

PB118 PB118

Wrong Right

Auto Device ID Assignment

Once the symbol is placed, the Device ID Assignment dialog box appears. You canaccept the prompted device ID, or you can type a different ID in the fields provided.A device ID can have up to 14 characters. (The drop–down list beside the Device IDfield will show all the device IDs that have been assigned in the current worksession.) The format of the device ID can consist of sequential numbers or letters, incombination with page and/or line numbers. The device ID format is selected in theProject Parameters dialog box when the project is created (see page 3-9). Theprompted device ID is the lowest available ID.

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Part Number

Suppress Device ID

OK Cancel Help...

Duplicate Device ID

Search Device ID

Search...

Search...

Multiple Placement

Search...

Addit.Part Number

Assigned Part No./Select to Delete

Device ID Assignment

Schematic Elements

5-15

Note Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the device ID that you enter:# = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These characters are used forvarious purposes by the software and may cause unexpected results if entered in thedevice ID. (You can use dashes if you intend to use the Nested Device IDs function.See page 7-44.)

If you wish the device ID to be hidden on the screen and on plots of the drawing,select the Suppress Device ID checkbox. The device ID will still be assigned to thesymbol; it will simply not be shown.

Selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox allows you to place two symbols withthe same device ID (ordinarily, the software’s error checking prevents duplicateIDs). The two symbols must belong to the GS1 symbol group. You must select theDuplicate Device ID checkbox when placing both symbols. Cross referencing willappear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbolappears. If you place more than two symbols with the same ID using this method,some of the symbols will have two cross references, one indicating the relatedsymbol that comes before it and one indicating the symbol that comes after it (inpage/line order). If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should onlyassign a part number to one of the symbols.

The Multiple Placement checkbox applies only when placing a series of similarsymbols (allows automatic placement on consecutive lines). See page 5-19.

The Search Device ID button is active when parent or child symbols are placed (seepage 5-25 for more on parent and child symbols). It allows you to search forexisting device IDs of a given type (see page 5-20).

To assign a part number to a symbol, select the Search button in the Device IDAssignment dialog box. This will display a list of part numbers in the Assign PartNumber screen. You can select one or more of the displayed part numbers. See page5-79 for more information on the Assign Part Number screen.

If you wish to assign additional part numbers to the same symbol you can simplyuse the Search button again to return to the Assign Part Number screen. Or, if youknow the part number, you can type the additional part number in the the AdditionalPart Number field and select the Addit. Part Number button.

Selected part numbers for the current device ID are listed in the Assigned PartNo./Select to Delete field. To delete (un–assign) part numbers that have alreadybeen assigned simply click on the part number you wish to delete.

Select the OK button to accept the device ID and any part numbers that have beenselected. This ID will be placed on the symbol in the drawing.

Schematic Elements

5-16

If the symbol has symbol text associated with it, the Symbol Text dialog box willappear displaying the text. Symbol text is functional attribute text that is associatedwith a specific symbol (rather than ordinary text which can be placed anywhere in adrawing). If a symbol text entry is required, the text will be displayed as a “?”. Enterthe desired symbol text and select OK.

Symbol Text:

OK Cancel Help...Next Previous

Full load current: ? AMP

Attributes Only

Symbol

Note Some symbols have fixed symbol text which does not require an entry. If you onlywish to have the “?” symbol text displayed in the Symbol Text dialog box, select theAttributes Only checkbox in the symbol text dialog box. This reduces the chancethat someone might make an entry in the wrong text field.

The system will check for duplicate device IDs unless the Online function is turnedoff for the page. The online function is selected when the page is created byactivating the Online checkbox in the New Page dialog box (see page 4-14). Youcan activate the Online function for an existing page through the Manage > Page >Modify function.

If you attempt to assign a duplicate device ID (when the Online function is active),the message “Device ID already exists” is displayed on the screen along with the IDand page/line location of the existing symbol. After selecting the OK button, thenext available device ID will be displayed.

Schematic Elements

5-17

Parent Symbols – If the symbol you are placing is a “parent” symbol (one that mayhave associated contacts elsewhere in the diagram such as a relay), you will also beprompted to select a “Device Type.” This device type is a definition that associates aparent symbol, one or more child symbols, and a cross reference symbol. Byselecting a device type you tell the software how many child symbols are to beassociated with this parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place nextto the parent. (See page 5-25 for more on parent and child symbols.) The followingDevice Type dialog box will appear.

Device Type:

Search... OK Cancel Help...

Device Type

Description:

Enter the desired device type in the Device Type field. The drop–down list in thisfield will show all the device types that have been assigned in the current worksession. Select the Search button to display a list of device names and descriptionsthat are associated with the symbol type you are currently placing.

After you enter the device type, the Connection Points dialog box is displayedwhich lists the connection point designations for the parent symbol and itsassociated child symbols.

Symbol Connection Points

Connection Points

CR A1 A2CRNO 13 14CRNO 23 24CRNC 31 32 11 12CRNC 41 42 21 22

OK Cancel Help

Device ID: =LINE1+EN1–CR108

Device: 22

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Select Connection Points

Installation Pg.Line

Modification Field

Schematic Elements

5-18

This dialog box displays the connection point designations for the parent symboland each child symbol. If desired, you can select the parent symbol line (“CR A1A2” in the example above) to display the connection point designations in themodification field. These designations can be reversed if desired by entering thedesignations in reverse order (“A2 A1”). The designations will then appear on theopposite sides of the symbol.

Select the OK button to place the parent symbol in the drawing. A cross referencebox will appear next to the parent symbol which will be automatically updated aseach child symbol is placed.

Child Symbols – When placing a child symbol (such as a relay contact) the softwarewill prompt a device ID containing a “?”. For example, “CR?”. You must enter thesame device ID as the parent symbol to allow the software to recognize the relationbetween the parent and child symbol.

After entering the child symbol device ID, the same Connection Points dialog boxshown for the parent symbol will be displayed. The connection point designations ofthe first available child symbol of the selected type (CRNO or CRNC) will bedisplayed in the modification field. If desired, you can select a different childsymbol of the same type if you prefer that these connection designations be assignedto the symbol you are currently placing (for example, 23 and 24 rather than 13 and14). You can also enter the connection designations in reverse order in themodification field. Select the OK button to place the symbol in the drawing.

If you select the wrong child symbol type or enter connection designations that werenot defined for this symbol the error message “Connection point description notpossible” will be displayed.

As each child symbol is placed, its position (page and line number) will beautomatically placed in the cross reference box beside the parent symbol.

Schematic Elements

5-19

Multiple Placement of Symbols

When the Multiple Placement checkbox in the Device ID Assignment dialog box isenabled you can automatically place symbols on parallel wires.

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Part Number

Suppress Device ID

OK

Duplicate Device ID

Search Device ID

Search...

Search...

Multiple Placement

Search...

Addit.Part Number


Help...Cancel

MultiplePlacementcheckbox


To place multiple symbols use the following steps:

1. Select a symbol (such as X1) using the Insert > Select Icon or Insert > SymbolBy Name function.

2. Place the symbol on the first wire of the range of wires to be included.

3. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear (see above). Enter the desireddevice ID in the Device ID field.

4. Select the Multiple Placement checkbox.

5. Select the OK button to continue. The symbol will appear on the wire.

6. Press the <Esc> key to end the Insert Symbol function.

Schematic Elements

5-20

7. Select the last wire in the range of wires by pointing the cursor and clicking onthe desired terminal position (do not select a symbol draw function again). Ifterminal symbols are being placed, consecutively numbered terminals willappear on all wires between the first and last selected wires. For non–terminalsymbols, a device ID will be prompted for the symbol on each wire.

–TB41

2

3

Place First Symbol Here

Click On Last Line

Terminals 2 And 3 Placed AreNumbered Automatically

Note For terminal symbols: when grid lines are visible between wires, the device ID ofthe terminal will be displayed on all terminal symbols placed with the MultiplePlacement function. When no grid line is displayed between wires then the functionwill automatically suppress the device ID of all multiple terminal symbols except thefirst (as shown above).

Search Device ID

Related parent and child symbols share the same device ID. Therefore, whenplacing a parent or child symbol it is useful to know which device IDs have alreadybeen used. For this purpose, a Search Device ID button is provided in the Device IDAssignment dialog box. This button is only active when a parent or child symbol isbeing placed.

Schematic Elements

5-21

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Part Number

Suppress Device ID

OK

Duplicate Device ID

Search Device ID

Search...

Search...

Multiple Placement

Search...

Addit.Part Number


Help...Cancel

SearchDevice ID

Button


When you select the Search Device ID button, the following Search Device IDdialog box will appear.

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Function Text:

OK Cancel Help...

Search Device ID

The Device ID field will contain a wildcard string based on the symbol that iscurrently being placed. This determines what kind of device IDs will be included inthe search. You can also narrow the search by entering installation and locationnames in the Installation and Location fields. In addition the Function Text fieldallows your search to be based on existing function text.

Schematic Elements

5-22

When you select the OK button, all existing device IDs that match the searchparameters will be displayed along with their installation, location, device type, andfunction text. This search will cover the entire project.

If desired, you can pick one of these device IDs and it will appear in the Device IDAssignment dialog box to be assigned to the symbol you are currently placing. If thisID cannot be used because the parent symbol already exists or because all the childsymbols have been assigned, an error message will appear when you place thesymbol.

Schematic Elements

5-23

Symbol Settings

Various settings can be made that govern how the symbol appears on the drawing. Ingeneral, these settings remain in effect until a different setting is made.

Symbol Scale, Rotation, and Mirroring – Use the Symbol Settings function to setsymbol scale, rotation and mirroring. (These settings do not affect symbols thatalready exist on a drawing, only those symbols placed after the setting is made.)

First, right click on the desired symbol, then, from the pop–up menu, select:

Block Settings � Symbol Settings

The following Symbol dialog box will be displayed.

1.000

2.000

5.000

0.500

Scale Factor

0.250

Current Values

1.000

0

45

60

90

Rotate

180

Mirror

None

x–axis

y–axis

0

OK Cancel Help... Save

Symbol

Note You can also make these settings in the Select Icon dialog box when placingsymbols. See page 5-13.

Scaling and rotation values can be selected from the Scale Factor and Rotate fieldsby pointing and clicking. The currently selected values appear in the Current Valuesfields. The Scale values allow the symbol to be reduced (0.500) or enlarged (2.000).Rotate values allow rotation of the symbol in degrees. If desired, you can enter otherscale and rotation values in the fields (including negative rotation values) and thenselect them. Use the Save button to store any values you enter in the selection fieldsfor future work sessions.

Schematic Elements

5-24

Note When scaling symbols with the AutoCAD R14 Add–on version of the software, donot use a scale that results in symbol connection points being spaced at a distancethat involves units smaller than one thousandth of an inch (.001 inch). The softwarecannot correctly position such symbols on a grid and will not be able to recognizeconnections. The AutoCAD 2000 Add–on version of the software provides anadditional decimal place of precision (.0001 inch).

The Mirror radio buttons allow the symbol to be mirrored on the X or Y axis. SelectNone for no mirroring (normal orientation).

None – No Mirroring X Axis Mirroring Y Axis Mirroring

Other Symbol Settings:

Suppressing Device ID Sign (–) – Use the Tools > Project Settings function,Device ID Style tab to display the Device ID Style dialog box. Then turn on theSuppress Device ID Sign checkbox to remove the leading “–” from the device IDon the schematic drawing.

Schematic Elements

5-25

Parent and Child Symbols

Certain symbols can have a “parent” or “child” relationship with other symbols in aschematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have relatedcontacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. If child symbols are given thesame device ID as the parent, the system can automatically provide crossreferencing.

CR112

CR112114

Parent Symbol

Child SymbolCross Reference To Child

(Line 112)

(Line 114)

112Cross Reference To Parent

JIC Cross Reference

–K1

4

3

/.42221

13 14

22

21

–K1

IEC Cross Reference

Parent Symbol

Cross Reference To Child

Cross Reference To Parent

Child Symbol

/.6

A1

A2

You may wonder how the system knows how many children a parent symbol has.This is accomplished with a “Device Type” definition that establishes the type andnumber of child symbols that are associated with the parent and which crossreference symbol to place next to the parent symbol.

Schematic Elements

5-26

When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask what its devicetype is. Once the system knows the device name, it can also perform error–checkingfunctions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have beenused.

The same symbol types can be assigned to different devices. For example, you canuse the CR parent symbol with various device types to represent relays withdifferent combinations of normally open and normally closed contacts. Or, you cancreate devices for a relay and a motor starter that both use the same cross referencesymbol.

A number of device type definitions are provided with RSWire (you can list themwith the Reports > Libraries > Device Type Full function), or the user can createcustom device definitions. The example above could use the standard device typenamed “20.” This device consists of a parent relay with two normally open and nonormally closed contact children. Put simply, the device type definition contains thefollowing information:

Device Name: 20Parent Symbol Name: CRCross Reference Symbol Name: Q20Child Symbol: CRNOChild Symbol: CRNO

Schematic Elements

5-27

Macro Select

A macro is a collection of symbols and other elements that can be placed on adrawing in one step. A number of macros are provided with RSWire. You can alsocreate your own macros. See page 6-81 for instructions on creating a macro.

To select a macro, use one of these functions.

Insert � Select Icon� Macro By Name

Selecting Insert > Select Icon function allows you to select pictorial representations(icons) of macros.

Selecting Insert > Macro By Name function allows macro selection by entering themacro name.

Both options display the following Select Icon dialog box.

Schematic Elements

5-28

To select macros by graphical icon, select one of the macro groups from the list inthe lower left side of the dialog box. Then select one of the displayed macros bypointing and clicking on the icons. The macro groups provided with the softwarebegin with the word “MACRO_”.

To select macros by name, first select the Macro radio button in the Select Icondialog box. Then enter the name in the Macro Name field and select OK.Otherwise, wildcard searches can be made by making entries containing asterisks(*) in the Name or Description fields and selecting the Search button.

For example, enter *MOTOR* in the Description field to search for any macroswith the word MOTOR in the description. If any macros matching the search stringare found, they are displayed on screen in a list which can be selected from bypointing and clicking.

Schematic Elements

5-29

In the Macro Settings area of the Select Icon dialog box, there is a field labeledMaintain Device IDs as Created. You can click inside this field to select between“Yes” and “No” values. If you select “Yes,” the device IDs of any symbols in themacro will not be automatically updated to reflect their new position (however youwill still be prompted with the original device ID). This is useful when using amacro (such as for L1 and L2 lines) that will always have the same device IDs.

Also displayed in the Select Icon dialog box under Macro Settings are the currentRotate and Scale settings. If you wish to change these settings, click in the desiredfield and enter a value. These settings do not affect macros that already exist on adrawing, only those macros placed after the setting is made. Scale and rotationvalues are selected similar to symbol scaling and rotation (see page 5-23). Nomirroring is possible with macros.

Placing a Macro

Once a macro is selected, its outline is visible on the drawing screen at the cursorlocation. Position the macro by pointing the screen cursor at the desired location andpressing the left mouse button. The macro is then placed in the diagram and thefollowing Device ID Assignment dialog box appears.

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Part Number

Suppress Device ID

OK

Duplicate Device ID

Search Device ID

Search...

Search...

Search...

Addit.Part Number


Help...CancelAccept All


Schematic Elements

5-30

Device ID – The device IDs of the symbols within the macro are prompted one byone in the Device ID Assignment dialog box. The prompted IDs will reflect the newposition of the symbols unless you selected the Maintain Device IDs as Createdcheckbox when the macro was selected.

Select the Suppress Device ID checkbox if you wish the device ID to be hidden onthe screen and on plots of the drawing. The device ID will still be assigned to thesymbol; it simply will not be shown.

Selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox allows you to place two symbols withthe same device ID (ordinarily, the software’s error checking prevents duplicateIDs). The two symbols must belong to the GS1 symbol group. You must select theDuplicate Device ID checkbox when placing both symbols. Cross referencing willappear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbolappears. If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only assign a partnumber to one of the symbols.

Selecting the Accept All button causes all the default device IDs to be accepted andentered in one step. You will not be prompted for symbol text.

You can assign part numbers to each symbol with the Search button. This willdisplay the Assign Part Number dialog box for part selection. See page 5-79.

Any special symbol text (such as Amp and horsepower values) will also beprompted. The example dialog box shows the prompt for a text requiring an Ampvalue. Simply replace the “?” with the desired value and select OK. Values enteredhere can be changed with the Modify > Symbol function.

Symbol Text:

OK Cancel Help...Next Previous

Full load current: ? AMP

Attributes Only

Symbol

Macro Wire Numbers – If wire numbers were stored as part of the macro, these willappear when the macro is placed. If the macro’s wire numbers are connected to orduplicate existing wire numbers in the project, the existing wire numbers will takeprecedence. See page 6-81 for more information.

Schematic Elements

5-31

Entering Text

Although RSWire automatically enters device IDs and other descriptive labels whenplacing symbols, the user may wish to include additional text to further describevarious drawing elements. Text can be entered on a drawing by selecting the Draw> Text function.

Draw � Text

Entering Text – To enter text on a drawing, first select the Draw > Text function.The following Text dialog box will appear.

0.1500Height: 0.0000Position X:

0.0000Position Y:0Angle:

0Slant:

0.0000Ratio:

5Label Origin:

0Color:

Attribute Number:

Object Default Settings

Text: Search...Number:

Language Text

Font:

Text

Function Text

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

OK Cancel Help...

Disable Settings

Text

In the Text field, enter the desired text. Text strings up to 256 characters in lengthcan be entered (the text will scroll within the field).

Schematic Elements

5-32

Multi–line text – If you wish to enter multi–line text, enter a “^” character to cause aline break. For example, the entry “EMERGENCY^STOP” will be displayed as:

EMERGENCYSTOP

The Function Text checkbox allows you to assign the text from the Text Input fieldas function text to be associated with a particular device ID in the Master List.When this checkbox is selected and you select OK to close the Text dialog box, youwill be prompted to “Select objects” on the drawing screen. Select the desiredsymbol and press <Enter>. The software will prompt you to “Define point.” Select apoint near the symbol. The text that was entered in the Text Input field will appearhere. This text will then be associated with the symbol’s device ID when a MasterList is generated. For parent/child symbols, assign the function text to the parentsymbol.

If you have used the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in the Device ID Assignmentdialog box to allow a duplicate device ID, you should assign function text to onlyone of the two symbols.

If you wish to place a text string more than once, you can select the down arrowbutton next to the Text field to see a drop–down list of text strings that have beenentered in the current work session. You can select from this list.

Use the Language Text fields to search for entries from the RSWire language textlists (see page 5-41). Enter either the text number in the Number field or the textitself in the Text field (wildcard searches are permitted) and select the Searchbutton. Any text matching the entered value will be displayed and can be selected bypointing and clicking. The list that is accessed will be the number 1 languageselected when the project was created.

Note If you wish to enter a language text number directly in the Text Input field, the textnumber must be preceded by a tilde (~) character.

The Position X and Position Y fields indicate the coordinates of the last text to beentered, and by making an entry you can determine the coordinates of the next textto be entered.

The Attribute Number field is used when creating a new symbol to define asequence of text attributes. When you are not in the symbol–create mode, the field isnot accessible. See page 6-14 for more information.

The remainder of the dialog box consists of fields and buttons that allow varioustext parameters to be set. These are described in the following subsection, TextSettings.

Schematic Elements

5-33

Selecting the Object Default Settings checkbox will change the text parameters tomatch the settings listed in the Object Defaults tab in the Project Settings dialog boxunder Tools > Project Settings. If this checkbox is not selected, the text parameterscan be changed.

The Disable Settings checkbox will remove the text parameter fields and buttons(Height, Angle, Slant, etc.) from the Text dialog box on subsequent text entries. Thefigure below shows how this reduced Text dialog box will appear. The parameterscan be returned by selecting an Enable Settings checkbox which will then bepresent.

23.5000Position X: 15.0000Position Y: Attribute No.

Enable Settings


Language Text

Text

Function Text

OK Cancel Help...

Text

To place the text, select the OK button.

If you have not entered coordinates in the dialog box, the system will prompt,“Define point or select parameter” allowing you to choose a point for placing texton the drawing.

Schematic Elements

5-34

Text Settings

When you select the Draw > Text function, the Text dialog box that appearscontains fields for various text parameters. Parameters are entered with the Selectbuttons that list available values for these parameters and allow selections to bemade.

The Disable Settings checkbox will remove the text parameter fields (Height,Angle, Slant, etc.) from the Text dialog box on subsequent text entries. Theparameters can be returned by selecting an Enable Settings checkbox which willthen be present.

The following parameters are available:

Height – This option allows you to set the height of the text characters. When youselect the Choice button, the following Height dialog box appears.

0.1000

0.1250

0.2500

0.5000

Text Height

0.7500

1.0000

0.2500

0.250

Text Height 1:

Text Height 2:

Text Height 3:

Text Height 4:

Text Height 5:

Text Height 6:

Last Selection:


Height

Text Height 7:


This dialog box provides seven different height values which can be selected. Ifdesired, you can also enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to savethese newly entered value so they will be available in future work sessions). Toselect a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Thenselect the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selectionfield.

Schematic Elements

5-35

Angle – This option sets the angle at which text strings will appear on the drawing.Selecting Select displays the following Angle dialog box.

0

90

–90

180

Text Angle

0

0

Text Angle 1:

Text Angle 2:

Text Angle 3:

Text Angle 4:

Text Angle 5:

Last Selection:


Angle

Five angle values (in degrees) are available for selection. If desired, you can alsoenter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly enteredvalues so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point andclick so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. Thecurrently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.

Schematic Elements

5-36

Slant – This option selects the text slant – the angle that individual characters willhave. Selecting Select displays the following Slant dialog box.

0

15

30

0

Text Slant

0

Text Slant 1:

Text Slant 2:

Text Slant 3:

Last Selection:


Slant

Text Slant 4:

Four slant values (in degrees) are available for selection. If desired you can alsoenter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly enteredvalues so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point andclick so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. Thecurrently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.

Schematic Elements

5-37

Ratio – This option allows selection of a width–to–height ratio for text characters.For example, a ratio value of 4 would produce characters 4 times wider than theirheight. Selecting Select displays the following Ratio dialog box.

1.0000

0.0000

0.0000

0.0000

Text Ratio

0.0000

0.000

Text Ratio 1:

Text Ratio 2:

Text Ratio 3:

Text Ratio 4:

Last Selection:


Ratio

Text Ratio 5: Ratio

Five ratio values are available for selection. If desired, you can enter new values inthese fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered values so they will beavailable in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that thecursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selectedvalue is displayed in the Last Selection field.

Schematic Elements

5-38

Label Origin – This option allows you to set where the text will appear in relation tothe reference point you select on the drawing. When you select Select, the followingLabel Origin dialog box will be displayed.

Last Selection: 5


2 Bottom Center1 Bottom Left 3 Bottom Right

5 Middle Center4 Middle Left 6 Middle Right

8 Top Center7 Top Left 9 Top Right

11 Baseline Center10 Baseline Left 12 Baseline Right

Label Origin

The current label origin is shown in the Last Selection field. Select the desired labelorigin by pointing and clicking on the appropriate button. Then select the OKbutton. Text will be placed in relation to the origin point as shown in the followingillustration.

Top Left:

Middle Left:

Baseline Left:

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

Top Center:

Middle Center:

Baseline Center:

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

Top Right:

Middle Right:

Baseline Right:

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

Bottom Left: TEXT Bottom Center: TEXT Bottom Right: TEXT

Schematic Elements

5-39

Color – This parameter sets the color of the text. When you select the Select button,the following Select Color dialog box appears.

Standard Colors

Full Color Palette

Gray Shades Logical Colors

BYBLOCKColor:

OK Cancel Help...

BYLAYER BYBLOCK

Select Color

Select a color either from the Standard Colors or the Full Color Palette areas. Theselected color is indicated by a square to the right of the Color: field.

The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK buttons allow selection of these two methods ofcoloring. The current selection is indicated in the Color field.

Font – This field indicates the currently selected font. To set the text font, use theFormat > Text Style function and select one of the displayed fonts.

Schematic Elements

5-40

Invisible Text

It is possible to hide all or part of a text string on a drawing by beginning and endingthe text to be hidden with an “@” character. The text is otherwise entered as normalusing the Draw > Text function.

Example:Text as entered: Main @Class B@MotorText as it appears on drawing: Main Motor

The hidden text will be visible only when editing the text using the Modify > Textfunction.

Note Invisible text can also be used in symbol (function) text and in wire number prefixes.

Schematic Elements

5-41

Foreign Language Text

RSWire has the capability to automatically display selected text words and phrasesin multiple languages.

RSWire includes a file containing lists of commonly used technical words andphrases in six languages (English, German, French, Spanish, Italian and Dutch). Thewords and phrases in each list are numbered, and the corresponding term is giventhe same number in each language list. By entering the number for the word orphrase in the drawing (instead of the word itself), the software can automaticallydisplay the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages.

The text is entered on the drawing (using the Draw > Text function) as a tildecharacter “~” followed by the desired text number. For example, ~187.

The user can edit and add to any of the word lists and can create new word lists foradditional languages. Up to 20 language lists can be stored. The text in eachlanguage is restricted to 80 characters per phrase.

Selecting Languages

To select which languages will appear in a drawing, one first specifies up to threelanguages in the Language fields of the Project Parameters dialog box whencreating a project. See page 3-9. (You can change these settings with the Manage >Project > Modify function.)

In the following Project Parameters dialog box, English has been chosen asLanguage 1, French as Language 2, and German as Language 3.

Schematic Elements

5-42

Ascending by Inst. and Pages

0.5000

Default Device ID Display: Device ID – Page – Line No.

LanguageDefault Text Size

Default Grid

Device ID

Connection Point

Strip/Plug ID

Terminal/Plug ID

1:

2:

3:

0.1250

0.1250

0.0000

0.1250

X

Y

0.5000

Signal Cross Reference Analysis Type:

English

OK Cancel Help...

Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved

Cross Reference

Signal Cross Reference0.1250

0.1250

Default Text Style

Wire Numbering Mode: Wire Number Same Over Terminal

Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address

ROMANS

Project Parameters

French

German

LanguageFields


Placing Language Text

Text codes are placed on the drawing in the form of a number preceded by a “~”.This text is displayed in the languages selected in the Project Parameters dialogbox.

Example: Text number 380 is “YES/NO” in English. If the selected languages areEnglish–French–German as shown previously, and the text “~380” is placed on adrawing the following text will be displayed:

YES/NOOUI/NONJA/NEIN

Schematic Elements

5-43

Viewing Language Lists

Functions for viewing the contents of the language lists are accessed through theReports > Libraries > Foreign Languages function. See page 9-7 for moreinformation.

Schematic Elements

5-44

Language List Phrases

To view a list of language phrases, select the Manage > Foreign Language > EditPhrases function.

Select:

Manage � Foreign Language � Edit Phrases

The contents of the language phrase lists are accessed through Microsoft Access.The following form will appear.

TEXT: Form

Text Number

English:

Language Database

Find Text Number

French:

Italy:

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

1

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

German:

Spain:

Dutch:

DRIVE

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

ANTRIEB

AZIONAMENTI

DRIVEENTRAINEMENT

AANDRIJVING

The dialog lists a selected text phrase in all the languages for which a translationexists in the language text database.

To display a specific text number – Enter the number of the desired phrase in theFind Text Number field and select the Find Text Number button (the button withthe binoculars icon). You can step forward or backward through the list in numericalorder by using the Next Record and Previous Record buttons at the bottom of thedialog box (the buttons with the triangle icons).

To edit a phrase – Edit the displayed phrases as desired. To save your changes,select the Save Record button (the button with the disk and pencil icon).

Schematic Elements

5-45

To add a new phrase – Select the Add Record button (the button with the triangleand asterisk). Enter an unused text number at the prompt. Enter the desired wordsfor each language. Select the Save Record button (the button with the disk andpencil icon).

Language List Additions

To add a language to the language list, use the Manage > Foreign Language >New function.

Select:

Manage � Foreign Language � New...

The result will be the New Language dialog box with a list of current languages.Add the additional language(s) to the list. The list can accept up to 20 languages.Select the OK button to save the changes.

OK

New Language

1. English

Index Language Font

2. German

3. French

4. Spanish

5. Italian

6. English

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Index Language Font

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

Cancel Help

If desired, you can use the Font field to assign a text style for each language. Thisallows you to distinguish each language on a drawing with a different font.

Schematic Elements

5-46

Language List Deletions

To delete a language from the language list, use the Manage > Foreign Language >Delete... function.

Select:

Manage � Foreign Language � Delete...

The result will be the Delete Language dialog box with a list of current languages.Select (highlight) the language(s) to be deleted from the list. Select the OK button tosave the changes.

OK Cancel Help...

Delete Language

Language

EnglishGermanFrenchSpanishItalianDutch

Schematic Elements

5-47

Box

You can draw two types of boxes: Logical boxes and Drawing boxes. Logical boxesare processed like symbols and include a device ID and connection points. Drawingboxes are simple graphic elements with no logical properties. Filled or emptydrawing boxes can be drawn.

Draw � Logical Box� Graphic � Box Empty

� Box Filled

Logical Boxes

Logical boxes are used as symbols in a schematic drawing. Like other symbols, theyare assigned a device ID and have connection points.

Connection Point

Connection Point Text

Logical Box

D426

Device ID

A B

There are a number of functions in the Draw > Logical Box submenu.

Draw � Logical Box � Create� Conn. Point� Delete Conn. Point

To draw a logical box, select the Draw > Logical Box > Create function. Thesoftware will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the oppositecorner.

Then the software will display the Device ID Assignment dialog box and prompt youto enter a device ID for the logical box. The device ID is entered in the same way asfor a symbol. If desired, you can also assign a part number to the logical box.

Schematic Elements

5-48

The default position for the device ID is to the left of the logical box. It can bemoved with the Modify > Symbol function.

Next, select the Draw > Logical Box > Conn. Point function and select aconnection point by pointing and clicking. You will be prompted to select thelocation for connection point text. (If you don’t want connection point text, pick anypoint near the symbol.) Then you will be prompted to enter the connection point textin the following dialog box.

?

5

0.1500

0

0

0.0000

0.0000

Connection Point:

Label Origin:

Height:

Angle:

Color:

Conn.Pt. X Offset:

Conn.Pt. Y Offset:

0.0000

0.0000

Text X Offset:

Text Y Offset:

Device ID at Connection Point

Device ID: –D426

OK Cancel Help...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Connection Point Parameters

Select the Device ID at Connection Point checkbox if you wish the symbol’s deviceID to be part of the connection point label. For example, if the device ID is D426and if you enter “A” in the Connection Point field, the full connection point labelwill then be –D426:A.

Select OK to enter the connection point parameters. Enter additional connectionpoints as required.

Important To delete the connection point of a logical box, you must select the Draw > LogicalBox > Delete Conn. Point function. Then click directly on the connection point youwish to delete. The Modify > Delete function will not affect these connection points.

Schematic Elements

5-49

Logical Box With Nested Symbols

It is possible to place symbols inside a logical box. This allows the symbols insidethe box to have a device ID that combines the ID of the logical box with the ID ofthe nested symbol. One application of this feature would be to use the box torepresent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols to represent theconnectors on the board. The box could also represent a special controller modulewith terminal symbols inside that are related to that module.

Symbols inside logical boxcan have combined device IDs

Logical BoxLB1–TB1

LB1

Nested SymbolsLB1–TB2

LB1–TB3

To correctly display the combined device IDs of the nested symbols, you must usethe Tools > Project Settings function, select the Device ID Style tab, and thenselect the Complete radio button in the Nested Device ID section.

Drawing Boxes

Drawing boxes are simple graphic objects. The software does not recognize drawingboxes as having any logical properties. Empty or filled drawing boxes can becreated. (To change the fill color, use the Tools > Project Settings > ObjectDefaults function.)

To create a drawing box, select the Draw > Graphic function and either the BoxEmpty or Box Filled option.

Draw � Graphic � Box Empty� Box Filled

The software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then theopposite corner.

Schematic Elements

5-50

Box Settings

To set the line type and fill of boxes that are not yet drawn:

1. Select the Tools > Project Settings function.

2. Select the Object Defaults tab.

3. Select the Activate Object checkbox.

4. Select “Drawing Box” from the drop down list of objects.

5. Select the desired linetype or color.

These functions display the available color and line type options which may beselected. The color selection affects both the border and fill of the box whendrawing filled boxes.

To set the line type and fill of existing boxes:

AutoCAD 14

1. Select the Modify > Properties function.

2. Select the desired box in the drawing.

3. Select the desired color.

AutoCAD 2000

1. Select the Tools > Preferences function.

2. Select the Selection tab.

3. Select the Enable grips checkbox.

4. Select OK.

5. Select the desired box in the drawing.

6. Select the Modify > Properties function.

7. In the Properties dialog, select the desired color.

8. Close the Properties dialog.

Schematic Elements

5-51

9. Turn off the Enable grips function.

Schematic Elements

5-52

Field

RSWire software has the ability to recognize devices on a schematic that originatefrom a remote location, in other words, devices that exist in a different physicallocale than the other devices on the schematic page. One way the user can identifythese remote devices is by placing them in a “field.” (Another way is to use theModify > Symbol function to change a symbol’s device ID to a differentinstallation and location.)

Overview – RSWire is an intelligent software package that can identify locations aswell as logical connections. However, in the two–dimensional schematic world, theuser must provide RSWire with the means to distinguish between real–world,physical locations and theoretical callouts on the drawing.

To allow the software to recognize remote devices, the user can assign a field as anarea of the schematic to contain the remote devices. A different Installation andLocation can then be assigned to the field.

RSWire will associate the devices in the field with this new Installation andLocation rather than the Installation and Location of the page where the fieldappears.

Rules for Field Creation:

1. Fields can only be created on a page that has been given an Installation orLocation name when created.

2. A field can be drawn around existing devices, or devices can be drawn inside anexisting field.

3. A field can be drawn within another field.

Procedure for Field Creation:

1. Select the Draw > Field function.

Draw � Field

Note If you cannot select the Field function, the page may not have an installation orlocation assigned. See “Rules for Field Creation” above.

2. On the command line, you will be prompted to define the first corner andopposite corner of the field in the desired area of the drawing. A box willindicate the field area.

Schematic Elements

5-53

3. Next a prompt will appear on the Command Line asking you to “Locate the textposition.” This means to select a point near the field where the field’sInstallation/Location name will be printed. Select the point by pointing thecursor and clicking.

4. The following Field Parameters dialog box will then appear.

0

5

0.2500

0

0

Text Color:

Label Origin:

Height:

Angle:

Slant:

0.5000

0.5000

Text–X–Offset:

Text–Y–Offset:

1Line Color:

Installation:

Rename existing symbols to Inst./Loc. of the field

CENTERLine Type:

OK Cancel Help...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Location:

Search...

Search...

Field Parameters

1.0000Ratio:

Font:

Select...


At the top of this dialog box you can enter the Installation and/or Locationname to which you wish the field to be assigned. This can be an existinginstallation/location, or one that has not yet been used. (The field can have thesame installation name as the drawing page where it appears, but it should havea different location name if the field is to indicate remote devices.) Use theSearch buttons to display a list of existing installations and locations.

Schematic Elements

5-54

Note Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the installation and locationnames that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). Thesecharacters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause unexpectedresults if entered in these fields.

The Rename existing symbols to inst/loc of the field checkbox determineswhether or not any existing symbols in the field area will be renamed(reassigned) to the field’s installation and location. When the checkbox is on,existing symbols are renamed.

The Text Position checkbox is only available with the Modify > Field function.It is used to change the position of the field’s installation/location label.

There is also a set of fields for determining the characteristics of the text thatwill label the field on the drawing. See page 5-34 for more information on thesetext functions.

The Text–Offset values indicate the distance from the field reference point (firstcorner) to the reference point (write position) of the text. These values can bealtered if desired.

The Line Color and Line Type fields allow the characteristics of the field borderline to be set.

Buttons are available on the right side of the dialog box for displaying andselecting most of these text and line parameters.

5. When the desired values are entered, select the OK button to complete creationof the field.

Mixed Device Assignment – In some cases, you may wish to have some deviceswithin a field remain associated with the Installation and Location of the drawingpage, i.e., be local rather than remote devices. In such a case, use the followingprocedure:

1. Before creating the field, draw the devices that are to remain local.

2. Draw the field around the local devices. During the field creation process, setthe Rename symbols to inst/loc to name of the field checkbox to off (nocheckmark). This will cause the symbols to remain associated with theInstallation/Location of the current page.

3. Add the remote devices to the field area. Any new devices will be assigned tothe Installation/Location of the field.

Schematic Elements

5-55

Deleting a Field – To delete a field, you must select the Modify > Delete functionand then click on the border of the field.

Note The logic functions of RSWire ordinarily do not allow two devices with the samename to be assigned to the same Installation/Location. However, you may wish thedevices in a field to represent devices that exist on another page, and therefore youwould give the field the same Installation name as the other page where the devicesappear.

As shown in the following illustration, the device PB123 appears in Installation A,Location B as a local device and also as a remote device in Installation X, LocationY. The remote field has been assigned to Installation A, Location B.

Installation A Location B Installation X Location Y

PB123

PB123

Field Assigned ToInst. A Location B

Ordinarily, when the device ID PB123 was entered a second time for the sameInstallation/Location, a “Device already exists” error would be displayed and the IDwould not be allowed.

This restriction can be overridden by selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox inthe Device ID Assignment dialog box when both symbols are placed. Therefore inthe example above, the ID PB123 would be assigned to both pushbuttons when theyare placed (or after they have been placed by using the Modify > Symbol > DeviceID function).

Note To avoid duplication, part numbers should only be assigned to one of the devices.

Schematic Elements

5-56

Circles and Arcs

Functions are included in the Draw > Graphic pull–down menu for drawing Circlesand Arcs.

Circles – Selecting the Circle function displays the following submenu whichprovides a variety of methods for circle drawing:

Draw � Graphic � Circle � Center, Radius� Center, Diameter� 2 Points� 3 Points� Tan, Tan, Radius� Tan, Tan, Tan� Filled Circle

Center, Radius – Creates a circle by defining a center point and radius on thedrawing.

Center, Diameter – Creates a circle by defining a center point and a diameter onthe drawing.

2 Points – Creates a circle by defining two endpoints of the circle’s diameter.

3 Points – Creates a circle by defining three points on the surface of the circle.

Tan, Tan, Radius – (Tangent/Tangent/Radius) creates a circle by selecting twolines or arcs to which the circle is to be tangent and then entering a radius value.

Filled Circle – Creates a circle with a fill color. Select the fill color with the

Arcs – Use the Draw > Graphic > Arc functions to draw arcs. You will beprompted to select a center point (of the arc’s circle), a start point for the arc and anendpoint that establishes the length of the arc.

Schematic Elements

5-57

Draw � Graphic � Arc � 3 Points� Start, Center, End� Start, Center, Angle� Start, Center, Length� Start, End, Angle� Start, End, Direction� Start, End, Radius� Center, Start, End� Center, Start, Angle� Center, Start, Length� Continue� Filled Arc

Arcs are drawn by making three selections on the drawing, as determined by thename of the specific arc function.

Use the Draw > Graphic > Arc > Filled Arc function to create an arc with a filledinterior.

Schematic Elements

5-58

Signal Cross Reference – JIC

To allow RSWire to cross reference the devices in long schematics that extend overmultiple columns and pages, the wires at the end of a column must be logicallyconnected to the wires in the next column or next page so that the software knowsthat they are to be treated as one continuous circuit.

To make this connection, a Signal Cross Reference symbol is placed at the end ofthe lines in one column and at the beginning of the next column.

Note Because they are used to bring wires together, signal cross references should beassigned before wire numbers are assigned.

125 CR124

126

AH126

127

128

129L1/1 L2/1

Signal Cross Reference Symbols

If different page formats are used within a project, be sure to use identical crossreferencing. When referencing from page to page, use the same reference on eachpage such as L1. The signal lines leaving or entering a location can be in thehorizontal or in the vertical direction (shown below). When the reference is to bewithin the same sheet, the reference input used must be followed with /1, /2, etc.For example:

Schematic Elements

5-59

Incoming Signal

Outgoing Signal

L1

L1/1

JICSingle Page SignalCross Reference

Vertical Layout

L2

L2/1

L1/2

L1/3

L2/2

L2/3

L1/4

L1

L2/4

L2

Three Columns

The following signal cross reference symbols are provided with the software (in theJIC symbol catalog). The user can also create custom symbols (see page 6-77).

Symbol name Description

SIG1 Outgoing, horizontal, right side of drawing, ID to right

SIG2 Incoming, horizontal, left side of drawing, ID to left

SIG3 Incoming, vertical, top of drawing, ID above

SIG4 Incoming, vertical, bottom of drawing, ID below

SIG5 Outgoing, vertical, top of drawing, ID above

SIG6 Outgoing, vertical, bottom of drawing, ID below

SIGIN Incoming, vertical, ID in box

SIGOUT Outgoing, vertical, ID in box

STARHEX2L (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2L macro

STARHEX2R (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2R macro

STARHEXOUT5 (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT5 macro

STARIN1 (Star type) Incoming, printed on 1 line

STARIN2 (Star type) Incoming, printed on 2 lines

STAROUT5 (Star type) Outgoing, 5 references



These symbols are selected and placed like other symbols. After the signal crossreference symbols are placed, they will automatically display the current crossreference values (i.e., they will indicate where the circuit continues or originates).

Schematic Elements

5-60

Note If a signal cross reference ID appears in the wire list (see page 9-10) this is anindication that the signal is not matching correctly with its mate.

Signal Cross Reference Notation Formats – You can select the format of the signalcross reference with the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function (seepage 7-22). The following formats for the cross reference information are availablein the Signal Cross Ref. Type field

Note Where you see the character string <=Inst/> in the following format names it meansthe installation name will be included in the cross reference only if it differs from theinstallation where cross reference symbol is located):

Notation Format:

� DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber

Shows signal designation with page.line number.Example: L1/1.42Installation is shown only when cross reference is outside current installation.

� DevID=Inst/Page.Linenumber

Shows signal designation, installation, and page.line number. Example: L1/=INST1/1.8

� DevID/Page.Linenumber

Shows signal designation, page.line number. Never shows installation. Example: L1/1.8

� DevID/<=Inst/>Page Linenumber

Shows signal designation, page and line number (without period between page and line number). Example: L1/1218 (for signal 1 on page 12, line 18)

� <=Inst/>Page Linenumber

Shows page and line number (without period or signal designation). Example: 1218 (for page 12, line 18)

� Page^Linenumber

Note Do not use with star type references.

Shows page and line number on separate lines.Example: 12

18 (for page 12, line 18)

� <=Inst/>Page.Linenumber

Schematic Elements

5-61

Shows page.line number (without signal designation). Example: 1218 (for page 12, line 18)

The device ID of the signal can take any form (L1, L2, etc.); the program suggeststhe identification letters based on the device ID tag entered when the symbol wascreated. The cross reference symbol you choose (see above) determines whether thecross–reference is printed on one or two lines.

Cross Reference Device ID Format – The symbol group that was selected when thecross reference symbol was created (see list below) determines whether thecross–reference is printed on one or two lines. In the case of groups SG2 and SG4, itcan be placed according to definition (the cross reference will appear at theconnection text location designated when the signal cross reference symbol wascreated). See page 6-6 for more on symbol creation.

Symbol Group Description

SG1 Incoming signal (1 line combined label)

SG2 Incoming signal (2 line separated label)

SG3 Outgoing signal (1 line combined label)

SG4 Outgoing signal (2 line separated label)

SG5 Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line label)

SG6 Incoming signal (star configuration, 2 line label)

SG7 Outgoing signal (star configuration, written upwards)

SG8 Outgoing signal (star configuration, written downwards)

Signal Analysis Types – When creating a project (or when using the Manage >Project > Modify function) the user can select from three types of signal crossreferencing analysis in the Project Parameter dialog box. Choices includeAscending by Installations and Pages (default), Pairs (signal cross references thatexist only in pairs – page order not taken into account), and Ascending Numbers(ascending order for all cross references).

Ascending By Inst. and Pages – Signal cross–references are analyzed in ascendingorder for all installations and pages.

Note The outgoing symbol must be placed ahead of the incoming signal in the page order.

Schematic Elements

5-62

Example:Ascending By Inst. and Pages Signal Cross Reference

L1/2.01

Page 1

L2/2.01L1/3.01

Page 2

L2/3.01

L1/1.22 L2/1.22

Page 3

L1/2.22 L2/2.22

L1 L224681011121416182022

24681011121416182022

24681011121416182022

L1 L2

Pairs Analysis – The signal cross–references only exist in pairs. Each pair isrecognized and analyzed as such. Installation and sequence of the pages are nottaken into account. The sub–group (incoming/outgoing) is ignored.

Example:Pairs Signal Cross Reference

L3/3.01

P.1

L4/3.01

P.2

L5/3.22 L6/3.22

P.3

L3/1.22 L4/1.22

L1 L224681011121416182022

24681011121416182022

24681011121416182022

L5/2.01 L6/2.01L3 And L4 On Page 1 Lead To L3 And L4 On Page 3Which Lead To Page 2.

Schematic Elements

5-63

Ascending Numbers Analysis – These signal cross–references link outgoing andincoming signals regardless of page and installation order if the signals have a slashfollowed by the same number. For example, you can have the outgoing signal L1/3on page 10 and the incoming signal L1/3 on page 2. Signal symbols need not beplaced in page order.

Example:Ascending Numbers Signal Cross Reference

L1/3

P.3

L2/3

P.1

L1/3 L2/3

P.2

L1 L224681011121416182022

24681011121416182022

24681011121416182022

L1/3 And L2/3 On Page 3 Lead To L1/3 And L1/3 On Page 1From Which L1/4 and L2/4 Lead To Page 2.

L1/4 L2/4

L1/4 L2/4

L1/5 L2/5

Star Type Signal Processing:

The symbols for star–type signal processing are created as symbols in SymbolGroups SG5, SG6, SG7 and SG8. They must have a connection point and a writeposition for connection point text. The cross–reference will later be entered at thiswrite position.

The format of the cross–reference depends on the symbol group:

Incoming Signals – Symbol group SG5 – cross–reference is printed on one line. SG6 – cross–reference is written on two lines.

Outgoing Signals – With star–type signal processing there is only one outgoingsignal but several incoming signals. The outgoing signal has references to allincoming signals. The outgoing signal does not have to be placed on a page beforethe first incoming signal; it can be correctly analyzed in other positions as well. Thesoftware includes outgoing star type symbols that can accommodate 5, 10 and 15references (symbol names STAROUT5, STAROUT10, STAROUT15).

Schematic Elements

5-64

Example:Star Type Signal Processing (Ascending Order Analysis)

L12.013.014.01P.1

L22.013.014.01 P.2

L1/1.22 L2/1.22

P.3

L1 L2

24681011121416182022

24681011121416182022

24681011121416182022

P.4

24681011121416182022

L1/1.22 L2/1.22

L1/1.22 L2/1.22

Outgoing Signals On Page 1Lead To Incoming Signals On Pages 2, 3 And 4

Notes on Star Type Signal Cross Reference:

If you are cross referencing within a single page with star type symbols, it is notnecessary to use the “/” character in the device IDs.

Important It is important not to mix star type signal cross references with regular signal crossreferences using the same device ID. For example if you use a SIG3 incoming signalsymbol and a STAROUT5 outgoing signal symbol on the same page, they must nothave the same device ID.

Each outgoing star type cross reference symbol must have a unique device ID. Forexample, you cannot have outgoing signals on two different pages both called L1.

Schematic Elements

5-65

Signal Cross Reference – IEC

To allow RSWire to cross reference the IEC devices in long schematics that extendover multiple pages, the wires at the end of a page must be logically connected tothe wires in the next page so that the software knows that they are to be treated asone continuous circuit.

To make this connection, the software requires a Signal Cross Reference symbol tobe placed at the end of the lines in one page and at the beginning of the next page.

Note Because they are used to bring wires together, signal cross references should beassigned before wire numbers are assigned.

P1/1

IEC Signal Cross Reference Symbols

N1/1

P1/2

N1/2

Page 1Page 2

P1/3

N1/3

Schematic Elements

5-66

Wire Numbers

RSWire schematic diagrams are created with wire lines which the system canrecognize as wires (unlike drawing lines which are not recognized as having anylogical properties). The Tools > Wire Number > Automatic function allows thesoftware to automatically assign wire numbers throughout the project.

The format of the wire numbers is user–selectable: it can be based on line numbersor sequential numbers with alphanumeric prefixes or suffixes. Color and gauge(size) also can be assigned to each wire.

Wire numbers can be assigned automatically or manually as described in thefollowing sections.

Automatic Wire Number Assignment

The software can automatically assign wire numbers. The automatic wire numberingfunction does not overwrite existing wire numbers. Therefore, if you wish to redothe wire numbers, you must first delete the existing numbers using the Tools > WireNumber > Delete function (see page 5-77).

Important Before the system can assign wire numbers across columns and pages, signal crossreference symbols must be placed in the drawing to tie together the “hot” and“common” lines on each column and page. See page 5-58. If this step is performed,automatic wire numbering can extend across the pages of a project.

To automatically assign wire numbers, first use the Tools > Project Preselectfunction to select a project for numbering (otherwise the currently selected projectwill be numbered). Then select:

Tools � Wire Number � Automatic

The following Wire Number Automatic dialog box will appear.

Schematic Elements

5-67

Numbering Format:

Wire Number

Page – Line Number

Values

Gauge

Color

Additional

Additional

Additional

Additional

Additional

Prefix Suffix

0

0.1250

OK Cancel Help...

Color...

Height...

Terminal = Wire Number

Wire Numbering System

Wire Number With Suffix Over Terminal

Save

Wire Number = I/O Address

Parameters

Select Pages

Text Position

Beginning Middle End

Wire Number Automatic

Wire Numbering Omitted on Cables

Select Pages – Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pageson which the automatic wire numbering will be performed. After you make theother wire number settings and select the OK button in the Wire Number Automaticdialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the project,installation, and pages to which the automatic wire numbering will be applied.

If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, the automatic wire numbering willapply to the entire project.

Note If you select individual pages for wire numbering, you may be using different wirenumber formats in different parts of the project. Be aware that wire numbers canpass through signal cross referencing and may come from or go to a page having adifferent format from the current page.

Schematic Elements

5-68

Wire Numbering Formats – The Numbering Format field allows you to select oneof the following five formats.

Note You can add a prefix or suffix to any of these formats.

Page–Line Number – Page and line number plus sequential number.

Example:

CR124123

124

125

LS124 LS124.1

CR124

126

AH126

1241 1242

LS1261261 1262

Page–Line Number – ABC suffix – Page and line number plus letter.

Example:

CR124123

124

125

LS124 LS124.1

CR124

126

AH126

124A 124B

LS126126A 126B

Sequential Wire Numbers – sequential number.

Example:

CR124123

124

125

LS124 LS124.1

CR124

126

AH126LS126

17 18

19 20

Schematic Elements

5-69

Seq. Wire Number – Page Number – Sequential number plus page number.Example (page 5):

CR124523

524

525

LS124 LS124.1

CR124

526

AH126LS126

175 185

195 205

Branch Numbering – The wire numbers have a prefix consisting of the first twoletters of the installation name. This is followed by the page number and asequential number beginning with 00. For each branch of a potential that connects toan additional device, the software adds a decimal point and a sequential number. Inorder to see the decimal point wire number extensions, you must select BranchNumbering in the Wire Number Display field in the Tools > Project SettingsGeneral Defaults tab.

CR124

124

125

126

AH126

ZB0101

Installation Name “ZBX”Page Number 01

LS124 LS124.1

AH128127

ZB0100 ZB0102.1Z

B10

2.2

ZB0102.3

ZB0103.1

ZB0103.2

The Values column of the Wire Number Automatic dialog contains a group of fieldsthat allow the following parameters to be assigned.

Schematic Elements

5-70

JIC Wire Number – When numbering formats involving sequential numbers areselected, the value entered in this field is the first sequential number that will beassigned. If no value is entered, numbering will start with 1. This field does notaffect the Branch Numbering format which always starts with 0100.

IEC Wire Number – On IEC format pages, wires are automatically numbered fromleft to right and then from top to bottom within a column, and by column from leftto right across the page. When a 3–phase circuit is drawn, the placement of all threewire phases will determine the automatic wire numbering sequences.

The following illustrates the wire numbering of a 3–phase circuit placed within twocolumns and within one column.

M3~

IEC 3–Phase Wire Numbering

PUMP

5 HP

1000 RPM

7.2 AMP

U WV PE

–M1

1 2 3

W1

W3

W2

W4

W8

W6

W5

W9

W7

Placement Within Two Columns

M3~

PUMP

5 HP

1000 RPM

7.2 AMP

U WV PE

–M1

1 2 3

W1

W7

W4

W2

W8

W5

W3

W9

W6

Placement Within One Column

Schematic Elements

5-71

Gauge (Size in IEC version) – Allows a wire gauge (size) value to be assignedwhich will be associated with the wires.

Color – This field (left side of the dialog box) allows a wire color to be assignedwhich will be associated with the wires.

Additional – Five additional fields are available for any other information the usermay wish to associate with wires.

The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to specify an alphanumeric prefix or suffixthat will be added to each wire number. If, for example, a prefix of “WN” and asuffix of “A” is entered for a sequential wire numbering format, the numbers willappear on the drawing as “WN1A, WN2A”, etc.

The Color button and field (right side of dialog box) allow a color to be assigned tothe wire numbers that appear on the drawing. Enter the color number in the field orselect the button to select from a display of colors.

The Height button and field allow a text height value to be assigned to the wirenumbers that appear in the drawing. Enter the height value in the field or select thebutton to display a dialog box of height values to select from.

Text Position – These three radio buttons, Beginning, Middle, and End, allow youto set a default position on the wire segment for the wire number. On wires havingmultiple segments, the number will be placed on the first segment.

Note After wire numbers have been assigned, individual wire numbers can berepositioned with the Modify > Wire Number function and Wire Number Manualdialog box (Text Position checkbox).

Wire Numbering System – The following checkboxes determine how wirenumbering will interact with certain symbols such as terminals and PLCs.

Wire Number = I/O Address – This checkbox selects the format of the wirenumbering for wires connected to PLC I/O module symbols. If the checkbox isselected, the PLC I/O address will be used for the wire number. If the checkbox isnot selected, the wire numbering sequence used in the rest of the project will becontinued through the PLC symbol. Attribute text in the PLC symbol must havebeen set for Address when the symbol was created for this numbering to work (seepage 6-44).

Schematic Elements

5-72

Terminal = Wire Number – Determines whether or not terminals will take on thesame number as the wire connected to them. This happens when the wire numberfunction is executed. If this feature is disabled, terminals will keep the numberassigned when the terminal symbol is placed. When a checkmark appears in the box,the terminal will take the same number as the wire. When the box is empty,terminals will keep the same number assigned when the terminal symbol wasplaced.

Wire Number With Suffix Over Terminal – When wire numbering is set to be thesame over terminals in the Project Parameters dialog box, selecting this checkboxwill add an incrementing letter suffix (A, B, C, etc.) to the wire number after eachterminal.

TB21A 1CTB31B

Wire Numbering Omitted on Cable – When this function is selected, wirenumbering will not be performed on any wires that are assigned as conductors of acable.

Select the Save button if you wish to save the wire numbering settings for futurework sessions.

When all wire number parameters are entered, select the OK button to proceed withthe wire numbering.

Manual Wire Number Assignment

To manually assign wire numbers, select:

Tools � Wire Number � Manual

You can also use the Modify > Wire Number function.

The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the wire that you wish tonumber by clicking the left mouse button and then click the right mouse button (orpress the <Enter> key. The following dialog box will appear.

Schematic Elements

5-73

Wire NumberText Position

Values

Gauge

Color

Additional

Additional

Additional

Additional

Additional

Parameters

OK Cancel Help...

Color...

Angle...

Height...

Label Origin...

Beginning Middle End

Duplicate Manual

Change All

Save

Wire Number Manual

The Wire Number field displays the number currently assigned to the wire (if any)and allows you to enter a new number. Up to 20 characters can be entered. This fieldcorresponds to the variable ?pot1 listed on page 14-36.

The Gauge (Size in IEC version) and Color fields display the selected wire’s currentgauge (size) and color. Changes can be made here that affect only the selected wire.These fields correspond to the variables ?pot2 and ?pot3 listed on page 14-36.

The Additional fields display any additional data associated with the selected wire.New information can be entered. These fields correspond to the variables ?pot4through ?pot8 listed on page 14-36.

The Duplicate checkbox allows you to place a copy of an existing wire number on adifferent segment of a wire (potential) with multiple segments. This checkbox isonly available when the selected potential is multi–segment with a wire numberalready assigned. After a wire number has been assigned to one segment, you can:

1. Select the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function

2. Select the segment on which the duplicate number is to appear

3. Select the Duplicate checkbox in the Manual Wire Number dialog box

4. Select the OK button.

Schematic Elements

5-74

If you attempt to place a duplicate wire number on a segment that is connected to asignal cross reference an error message will appear indicating this fact. If you selectthe OK button in the error message dialog box you will still be allowed to duplicatethe wire number.

Note After you assign duplicate wire numbers, you can modify any of the segments so thatthey have different color or gauge values (or any of the five Additional wiredescription fields). Use the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function to assigncolor and gauge values. Assigning different values to the segments can result inunpredictable results in the wire list unless there is a terminal symbol separating thesegments having different values.

Select the Text Position checkbox if you wish to change the position of the wirenumber. After the OK button is selected, you will be prompted to “Define targetposition” on the drawing. Select the desired new position for the wire number.

The Manual checkbox determines whether the software considers this wire numberto be manually assigned or automatically assigned. This is relevant when using thedelete wire numbers function (Tools > Wire Number > Delete) where you aregiven the option of deleting all wire numbers (both manually and automaticallyassigned) or just the automatically assigned numbers. When this checkbox ischecked the software considers the wire number a manually assigned number. Whenthe checkbox is unchecked, the wire number is considered automatically assigned.

If you select a group of wires for modification, the Change All checkbox determineswhether or not the parameters you change will apply to all the selected wires. Whenthe checkbox is checked, the parameters will be assigned to all the selected wires inone step. When the checkbox is unchecked, you will be prompted for each wireseparately.

The three position radio buttons, Beginning, Middle and End, allow you to set adefault position on the wire segment for the wire number that is about to beassigned.

The Color, Angle, Height and Label Origin buttons allow you to alter theseattributes of the wire number to change its appearance on the drawing. Selectingeach button will display a list of available values to choose from.

Select the Save button to save the wire number parameters as a default for futurework sessions.

Select the OK button to load the new wire number parameters.

If you selected more than one wire, the Wire Number Manual dialog box will bedisplayed for each wire in turn.

Schematic Elements

5-75

Note This function should not be used to modify the number of a wire with a signal crossreference (an error may result). For these wires you should use the Tools > Replace> Wire Number function (see page 5-76 ).

Duplicate Wire Numbers Using Invisible Text

The software’s error checking functions prevent two different wires in the sameproject from having the same wire number. However some users may wish to haveduplicate wire numbers (for example if they wish each installation to start with thesame wire number).

It is possible to have what appear to be duplicate numbers by using invisible text inthe wire number prefix. Any text beginning and ending with an “@” character willnot be visible in the drawing.

Therefore, the user can run the automatic wire number function for different parts ofthe project with different invisible text in the wire number prefix. The visible part ofthe wire number will be the same.

For example if one page was sequentially numbered from 1 with the prefixW@AA@ and another page was similarly numbered with the prefix W@BB@ bothpages would appear to have wire numbers W1, W2, etc.

Wire numbers with invisible prefixes can also be assigned using the manual wirenumbering function.

The hidden text will not be visible in the wire list. It will be visible only whenediting the wire number using the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function.

Note Invisible text can also be used in symbol (function) text and in normal text.

Schematic Elements

5-76

Changing Wire Numbers

The Tools > Replace > Wire Number function allows existing wire colors andgauges to be changed on a project–wide basis. A single wire number can also bechanged.

Select:

Tools � Replace � Wire Number

Wire Number

Old Values

Gauge

Color

Select One

Wire Number Color Gauge

New Values

Wire Number

Gauge

Color

Additional

Additional

Additional

Additional

Additional

OK Cancel Help...

Replace Wire Numbers

Installation

In the Select group of checkboxes, select whether you wish to change Wire Number,Color, or Gauge.

There is also an Installation button and field that allows you to restrict the wirenumber replace function to a selected installation. Select the button to view a list ofinstallations in the current project. You can select from this list.

In the Old Values field, enter the existing value that you wish to change. In the NewValues field, enter the new value that you wish to assign.

Schematic Elements

5-77

Color and Gauge changes affect all wires. Number changes affect only the singlewire number that is changed.

Select OK to make the change.

If you enter an old color or gauge value to change without entering a new value, thesoftware will ask if you wish to delete the old value. Select the OK button to deletethe old value. Select No to return to the change dialog box.

Deleting Wire Numbers

To delete a single wire number:

You can delete the wire itself, or use the Modify > Wire Number function, selectthe wire, and delete the existing wire number from the Wire Number field of thedialog box. Then select OK.

To globally delete existing wire numbers, use the following procedure:

Select:

Tools � Wire Number � Delete

The following Delete Wire Numbers dialog box will appear.

All (including manually assigned)

Only Automatically assigned

OK Cancel Help...

Select Pages

Delete Wire Numbers

The All radio button will cause all wire numbers to be deleted including those thatwere manually assigned.

The Only Automatically Assigned radio button will cause only those wire numbersthat were automatically assigned to be deleted.

Schematic Elements

5-78

Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which thewire numbering will be deleted. After you select the OK button in the Delete WireNumbers dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick theproject, installation, and pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted.

If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, wire numbering (of the selectedtype) will be deleted throughout the entire project.

Select the OK button to proceed with wire number deletion. The software will ask“Are you sure?” Select OK to delete the wire numbers.

Repositioning Wire Numbers

If you wish to reposition wire numbers, use the Tools > Wire Number > Manualfunction and select the Text Position checkbox in the Wire Number Manual dialogbox. See page 5-74.

The software will then prompt “Define target position.” Click at the point where youwish the wire number to be moved.

Schematic Elements

5-79

Part Numbers

The parts database allows RSWire users to assign part numbers to device IDs in theschematic. This allows the system to generate bills of material and other informativelists based on the items in the schematics and the information in the database.

See Section 13 for information on accessing and editing the parts database.

See page 5-119 for information on the Replace Part Number function (replacing oneassigned part number with another throughout a project).

Assigning Part Numbers – Part numbers can be assigned when a symbol is placedor at a later time.

Note You can also assign a part number when a symbol is created so that the part numberis always prompted whenever the symbol is placed. See page 6-18.

Part numbers are assigned to device IDs within a given project. They are notautomatically assigned to the same symbols in a new project unless you use the Edit> Browse Copy function to copy part of an existing project with part numbersassigned.

Note If you create a macro containing elements which have been assigned part numbers,these part numbers will be stored with the macro. (If desired, they can be alteredafter the macro is placed by right clicking on the symbol and selecting the PartNumber function from the pop–up menu.)

When a symbol is placed, the Device ID Assignment dialog box appears, promptingthe user with a device ID for the symbol. This dialog box also contains a PartNumber field and a part number Search button.

Schematic Elements

5-80

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Part Number

Suppress Device ID

OK Cancel Help...

Duplicate Device ID

Search Device ID

Search...

Search...

Multiple Placement

Search...

Addit.Part Number


Delete Assigned Part Numbers ByClicking On Part Number

Use To Select Part NumbersFrom Parts Database


To assign a part number from the parts database select the Search button. Thiswill display the Assign Part Number dialog box, which allows you to search thedatabase and make part number selections (see next page).

If you wish to assign additional part numbers to the same symbol you cansimply use the Search button again to return to the Assign Part Number screen. Or,if you know the part number, you can type the additional part number in the theAdditional Part Number field and select the Additional Part Number button.

To delete (un–assign) part numbers that have already been assigned (listed in theDelete area of the Device ID Assignment dialog box) simply click on the partnumber you wish to delete.

Schematic Elements

5-81

CRPREGROUP =PARTNUMBER =DESCR =MANUFACT =

Selected Part Numbers Are Listed Here . . .

OK Cancel Help...

Assign Part Number

Device ID

SYMB_REF =

FilterSYMB_REF =”CR”

Refresh

_

CR 500FL-COA93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NECR 500FL-COB93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NECR 500FL-COC93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NECR 500FL-COD93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NECR 500FL-COF93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE

SYMB_REF PREFGROUP PARTNUMBER DESCR MANUFACT TECHDATE_1

CR 500FL-COA93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE


The Assign Part Number dialog box above shows a part selection that could bedisplayed when a control relay (JIC symbol name “CR”) is entered on a drawing.

The Assign Part Number dialog box contains the following fields and columns:

Device ID – The device ID of the currently selected symbol. (This field will beblank if the symbol has not yet been placed.)

The Filter area allows you to to select criteria that determine the parts that aredisplayed. To to filter the parts, select one of the database field names (SYMB_REF,PARTNUMBER, etc.) and enter a specific value (PBNO, A–B, etc.) in the left field.To remove parameters, select one of the database field names and delete theparameter listed in the left field. Use the Refresh button to update the parts displayafter each parameter has been entered or deleted. You can enter wildcard (*) stringsin the left field – for example, select the DESC field and enter *MOTOR* to displayall parts with the word “MOTOR” in the description.

Schematic Elements

5-82

The part number information is listed in columns. The width of these columns canbe adjusted by pointing the cursor at the dividing line in the column heading areaand dragging the column wider or narrower. The following columns of informationare available:

SYMB_REF – This column indicating what symbol name the part number isusually associated with. (The Ref Symbol field is the primary search criteria whenyou first enter the Assign Part Number dialog box. If you get a message “No datafound”, try searching by an entry in a different field.)

PREFGROUP – This column indicates which Preferred Manufacturer’s Group(PMG) product category the part number is associated with. (See page 13-20 formore information.)

PARTNUMBER – This column is the product part number.

DESCR – Product part description.

MANUFACT – Part manufacturer name.

TECHDATE_1 – An additional part description.

To select a part number, click twice on the desired part in the list. The selected partwill be listed in the area just below the part list. (You can select multiple partnumbers.) Then select the OK button. The Assign Part Number dialog box will closeand the selected part number will be displayed in the part number field of the DeviceID Assignment dialog box.

Existing Symbols: Assigning or Modifying Part Number – To change the partnumber assigned to a symbol (or assign one to an existing symbol), Right click onthe desired symbol and select Part Number from the pop–up menu. The Assign PartNumber dialog box will then appear, allowing you to select a new or different partnumber. To remove a part number when multiple part numbers have been assigned,simply click on the part number you wish to remove in the list of assigned partnumbers.

Schematic Elements

5-83

Dimensions

The Draw > Dimensions function provides a submenu of the various AutoCADdimension functions. These are useful for adding dimensions to panel layoutdiagrams and for drawing leader lines to annotate items. Consult the AutoCADUser’s Guide for additional information.

To make settings to the dimension function, use the Draw > Dimension > Stylefunction. See page 7-52.

Draw � Dimensions � Linear� Aligned� Ordinate� Radius� Diameter� Angular� Baseline� Continue� Leader� Tolerance� Center Mark� Oblique� Align Text� Style� Override� Update

The dimensioning function allows one to pick two points on a drawing andautomatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display theangle between two lines.

Schematic Elements

5-84

JIC

Dimension TextArrowhead Dimension Line

Extension Line

Parts of a Dimension

1.50 in 22 mm

IEC

The following dimension function are available:

Linear – Measures the distance between two points.

Aligned – Creates an aligned linear dimension.

Ordinate – Measures the perpendicular distance from an origin point called adatum to another point. The current UCS is used to determine the distance.

Radius – Creates radius dimensions for a circle or arc.

Diameter – Creates a diameter dimension for circles and arcs.

Angular – Measures the angle between two lines or three points.

Baseline – Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline ofthe previous dimension or a selected dimension.

Continue – Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the secondextension line of the previous dimension or a selected dimension.

Leader – A leader is a line that connects annotation text to some item in adrawing. This leader is not the same as the leader that is generated automaticallyas part of a dimension line.

Tolerance – Creates geometric tolerances. Tolerances specify the requiredaccuracy for proper function and fit of the objects you draw. The software addsgeometric tolerances to a drawing in feature control frames. These are framesdivided into compartments that contain the geometric characteristic symbolsfollowed by one or more tolerance values.

Schematic Elements

5-85

Center Mark – Creates a center mark for circles and arcs.

Oblique – Makes the extension line of linear dimensions oblique.

Align Text – Submenu: Home moves dimension text back to its default position.Angle rotates dimension text to an angle. Left will left justify dimension text.Center will center dimension text. Right will right justify dimension text.

Style – Creates and modifies dimension styles.

Override – Overrides dimension system variables.

Update – Updates dimensions so they use the most current dimension stylesettings.

Drawing a Dimension

Use the following procedures to draw the various dimension types.

Note After you select a dimensioning function the software will prompt the steps on thecommand line.

Linear Dimension

1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Linear or one of the following related dimensionfunctions:

Aligned – The dimension line runs parallel to the dimensioned distance.

Baseline – Multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline.

Continue – Multiple dimensions placed end to end.

2. Select the first extension line origin point (i.e., one end of the distance to bedimensioned).

3. Select the second extension line origin point (the other end of the distance to bedimensioned).

4. Select a location for the dimension line. This determines the length of theextension lines.

Schematic Elements

5-86

Circle/Arc Dimensions

1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Radius or one of the following related dimensionfunctions:

Diameter – The diameter of a circle or arc.

Center Mark – Marks the center point of a circle or arc.

2. Select the circle or arc.

3. Select a position for the dimension line.

4. Press the <Enter> key (or click the right mouse button).

Ordinate Dimensions

1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Ordinate. The software automatically determineswhether the datum is X or Y.

2. Select the feature location.

3. Select an endpoint for the leader.

4. The software will display the dimension text (distance) on the command line.

Schematic Elements

5-87

Angular Dimensions

To measure the angle between two lines:

1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Angular.

2. Select the first line.

3. Select the second line.

4. Select a position for the dimension line arc.

Leader Lines

To draw a leader line between two objects,

1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Leader.

2. Select a position for the arrowhead end of the leader.

3. If you wish the leader to have sections (bends), select a point for each bend andcontinue the leader from there.

4. Press <Enter> to complete the leader line.

5. Enter annotation text string(s).

6. Press <Enter> to complete the leader.

Schematic Elements

5-88

Text File on Drawing

Lists, reports and other text file information can be placed on drawing pages. Thiswould, for example, allow a bill of material to appear on the same page with a panellayout drawing.

Important You must place the text first on a blank page because the Text On Drawing functionwill erase any existing elements on that page.

Two methods for placing text on drawings are given below: A) for information thatis already in a text file, and B) for sending text directly from an RSWire reportfunction to a drawing page.

To Use an Existing Text File – To place an existing text file on a drawing, firstselect the Insert > Text on Drawing function. The Text On Drawing dialog box willthen appear.

To Place an RSWire Report on a Drawing – To send an RSWire list to a drawingpage, first select the Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function and selectthe Project radio button in the Output section. This will cause the list generator toaccess the Text On Drawing function whenever a list is created. The Text OnDrawing dialog box will appear after the desired list function is selected.

Command ProtecReports: Description FilesReport Settings Printer Configuration

Cancel Help...SaveOK

XSystem Settings

Filter

OFF

ON

Sort

OFF

ON

Output

Screen

Project

File

Printer

Graphic Output

Select ProjectOutput Option

Interactive

Schematic Elements

5-89

Text On Drawing Dialog Box – The Text On Drawing dialog box appears as a resultof having the Project output radio button selected under Tools > Systems Settings >Report Settings (or by executing the Draw > Text on Drawing function).

C:\BOM.TXT

0.1

File:

Height: Select...

0Angle:

0Slant:

0.000Ratio:

1Label Origin:

0Color:

Search...

Text:

Font:

.2Line Spacing:

Lines:

18First Line: 2.5Last Line:

201:

Columns:

2: 3: 4:


Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Text On Drawing

The following fields are provided:

File – Enter the name of the text file to be placed on a page. When the Projectoutput radio button has been selected, this field will automatically contain the nameof an ASCII file in the RS\TMP directory. The Search button allows you to lookthrough various directories and select a file name.

Text – This group of fields allow you to set various text parameters. See page 5-34for descriptions of these parameters. For each parameter there is a Search buttonthat provides a selection dialog box.

Schematic Elements

5-90

Note The Label Origin setting affects how the text lines will appear on the drawing(centered, left justified, etc.) in relation to the values entered in the Column fields.

Lines – This group of fields allows entries for Line Spacing (space between lines),First Line (distance from the bottom of the page where text will begin), and LastLine (distance from the bottom of the page where text will stop). In the exampleabove, text will start 18 inches from the page bottom and stop 2.5 inches from pagebottom.

Note If the text area defined by the Lines fields is not large enough to hold the entire textfile, the software will create one or more additional pages to accommodate the restof the file.

Columns – This group of fields allows up to four text columns to be defined on thedrawing page. The values entered in the fields represent the distance from the leftside of the drawing page. In the previous example, there will be only one columnlocated 20 inches from the left side of the drawing. Text appears at the columnpositions according to the value entered in the Label Origin field (i.e., centered, leftjustified, etc.).

When the desired parameters have been entered in the Text On Drawing dialog box,select the OK button.

A dialog box will appear that indicates how many pages will be required to hold thetext according to the settings you have made. For example, “Create Pages: 3”.Select Cancel to abort the process or select OK to continue.

The New Page dialog box will then appear, allowing you to specify the (first) pageon which the text is to appear.

Schematic Elements

5-91

Project:

Installation:

Location:

Page:


Scale 1: 1

Online



Page Macro


1... 2... 3... 4... 5...

6... 7... 8... 9... 10...

Page Type

Schematic Diagram

OK Cancel Help...

Select...

Select...

Select...

New Page

Enter the desired Project, Installation, and Page name just as you would whencreating a new page. You can also select page formats, title blocks, etc.

Warning: if you specify an existing drawing page to receive the text, anyexisting elements on that page will be erased and replaced with the text. Beaware that the software will create multiple pages in the specified range if thetext does not fit on one page.

Select OK to create the pages to receive the text. If more than one page is requiredto receive the text, RSWire will create additional pages continuing from thespecified page number.

You can view the newly created pages with the File > Open function.

Schematic Elements

5-92

Edit Schematic Elements

The Edit and Modify pull–down menus contain functions for editing existingschematic elements in a drawing. These functions are described in the followingsections.

Edit Menu

Edit � Undo� Cut to Clipboard� Copy Clipboard� Paste� Paste Special� Browse Copy...

Undo

The Edit > Undo function will remove the most recently placed drawing elementfrom the screen.

Select:

Edit � Undo

If you execute Edit > Undo multiple times, items will be removed in the reverseorder in which they were placed. This will only affect the most recently selecteddrawing element type. For example, if you draw some lines, a box, and then morelines, only the lines will be affected by the Undo function.

Schematic Elements

5-93

Cut to Clipboard

The Edit > Cut to Clipboard function will remove a drawing element and place itin the Windows clipboard where it can be pasted into another application.

Copy to Clipboard

Use the Edit > Copy Clipboard function to copy portions of an RSWire drawing tothe Windows clipboard. The copied portion exists as a Windows metafile in theclipboard and can be pasted as graphics into other Windows applications.

Select:

Edit � Copy Clipboard

The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the portion of the drawingthat you wish to copy either by selecting individual objects or by windowing anarea. Press the <Enter> key when all the desired objects have been selected. Theobjects will be copied to the Windows clipboard where they will be available forpasting into other applications.

Warning: It is strongly recommended that you exit from RSWire beforepasting the copied items into another application. The pasted items have a linkto the original drawing which can cause the original drawing to beinadvertently affected.

Paste

Selecting the Edit > Paste function will allow the user to paste items copied or cutfrom a non–RSWire application.

Paste Special

Selecting the Edit > Paste Special function will allow the user to paste items copiedor cut from a non–RSWire application. The user is given a number of options as towhat format the pasted items will assume (text, AutoCAD entities, etc.). If thesource application supports an OLE link, this can be set.

Schematic Elements

5-94

Warning: Do not use the Edit > Cut, Copy Clipboard or Paste functions tocopy items within an RSWire drawing. Any items so copied (symbols, wires,etc.) will lose their logical properties. Use the Modify > Copy function to copyRSWire drawing elements within RSWire.

Browse Copy

The Browse Copy function allows you to simultaneously display up to four drawingpages and copy portions of these drawings into the current drawing page. For moreinformation, see page 4-35.

Modify Menu

Modif y � Power–Editor� Symbol� Line� Text� Field� Wire Number� Delete� Copy� Move� Stretch� Properties

Power–Editor

The Power–Editor allows you to edit a variety parameters for drawing elements.You can access the Power–Editor through the Modify > Power–Editor function(you will be prompted to “Select Entity”) or by pointing at the desired element andclicking the right mouse button. The following menu of functions will appear.

Schematic Elements

5-95

Device IDPart NumberConnection PointSymbol TextMoveRotateText PositionText AngleAttribute SettingsBlock Settings

Device ID – Displays the Device ID Assignment dialog box, allowing you tochange the current device ID of the selected symbol.

Part Number – Displays the Part Number Assignment dialog box, allowing youto change the current part number of the selected symbol.

Connection Point – Displays the Modify Connection Point dialog box, allowingyou to change the connection point designations of the selected symbol.

Symbol Text – Displays a dialog box containing any symbol text associatedwith the selected symbol. You can edit the text as desired.

Move – Activates the Modify > Move function, allowing you to reposition theselected drawing element.

Rotate – Displays a dialog box with angle values that allow you to rotate theselected symbol. Highlight the desired angle value and select the OK button.

Text Position – Allows you to reposition text associated with the selectedsymbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired text andthen define a new position for it.

Text Angle – Allows you to change the angle of text associated with theselected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desiredtext. A dialog box with angle values will appear. Highlight the desired anglevalue and select the OK button.

Attribute Settings – Allows you to modify the color, height and label origin oftext associated with the selected symbol. You will be prompted to “SelectAttribute.” Select the desired text. A dialog box with values will appear. Selectthe desired value and select the OK button.

Schematic Elements

5-96

Block Settings – Allows you to modify the appearance of the graphic portion ofthe selected symbol. There are two submenu selections: Color and SymbolSettings. Color allows you to change the color of the symbol. Symbol Settingsallow you to change Scale, Rotation and Mirror settings.

Modify Symbol

The Modify > Symbol function allows you to alter a variety of parameters forexisting symbols on a drawing.

Note To edit the default appearance of a symbol and permanently store it in a symbolcatalog, use Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.

Select:

Modify � Symbol

The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select individual object bypointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desiredobject(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mousebutton. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter>key to complete the selection.

The following Modify Symbol dialog box will appear.

Schematic Elements

5-97

Text

Angle

Height

Label Origin

Text Symbol

Color

Terminal Dest. Cable Text

OK Cancel Help...

Select...

Symbol Settings

Settings

Settings...

Device ID

Device Type

Connection Point

Symbol Text

Text Position Prog. Controller Cross Reference Toggle

Select...

Select...

Color...

Modify Symbol

A group of checkboxes and buttons are provided in the dialog box for varioussymbol parameters. In general, by selecting the desired checkbox you will be giventhe opportunity to select or enter a new value. The following checkboxes andbuttons are provided.

Device ID – Assign a new device ID to the symbol. A dialog box will appearshowing the current device ID. Modify it as desired and select the OK button.

Device Type – Assign a new device type to the symbol. A dialog box will appearshowing the current device type. Use the Search button to search for existing devicetypes. Enter the desired new device type. You will be prompted for “Automaticcopy? Y/N” Answer yes if you wish existing child symbols to be copied into thenew device relationship automatically. If you answer no, the following dialog boxwill appear which allows you to manually select where the information will becopied.

Schematic Elements

5-98

In the above example, a relay (CR) is being modified from a device type 20 (2normally open, 0 normally closed contacts) to a device type 22 (2 normally open, 2normally closed contacts).

To copy the information manually, one must first select the relay name on the “old”side and then select the relay line (“CR”) on the ’new” side followed by theExchange button. One can then pick contacts on the old side and then select theorder you wish them to occupy on the new side. When all existing contacts havebeen reassigned, the dialog box will close and device modification will be complete.

Note If a device type was automatically assigned because it is associated with a partnumber, you will be prompted if the new device type does not match the partnumber’s device type.

Connection Point – Assign new connection point labels. A connection dialog boxwill appear, listing the current connection point labels. (When a cable symbol hasbeen selected, this function lists cable conductor designations.)

Current No. Description

Modify Connection Points

1 X1 2 X2

OK

Cancel

Help

Schematic Elements

5-99

Enter the desired new label in the appropriate field. (For parent/child symbols, youmust edit the text in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.) These entries cannotdiffer from the labels that were defined when the symbol was created, except inorder (for example, you can enter 14 13 instead of 13 14). When finished, select OK.

Symbol Text – Assign new symbol text (this is text that is part of the symbol, eitherfixed or prompted when the symbol is placed). A dialog box will appear showingthe current symbol text. Modify it as desired and select the OK button.

Text Position – Assign a new position for device IDs, symbol text, connection pointtext, and cross references. After the OK button is selected you will be prompted to“Select attribute” on the drawing. Pick the text item that you wish to move andselect a new position.

Terminal Dest. – Change the connection point designations of terminal symbols.Terminal symbol connection points can be designated as Internal, External, orJumper (see page 11-3). This function lets you make or change this assignment.After selecting this checkbox and OK, the following Terminal Target Settings dialogbox will appear (the number of connection points will reflect the type of terminalsymbol selected). Make the desired selection for each connection point.

Internal External Jumper

Terminal Target Settings

Connection Point 1 X Connection Point 2 XConnection Point 3 XConnection Point 4 XConnection Point 5 X

OK

Cancel

Help

Accept All

Reset

Prog. Controller – Assign new function text for programmable controller symbols.A dialog box will appear listing existing text including rack and module number andfunction text. The Insert Text button will access and insert function text from anexternal file (see page 7-38.) Edit the information as desired and select OK.

Schematic Elements

5-100

Device ID: PLC377

Module: 02

Rack: 01

I0102/00

I0102/01

I0102/02

I0102/03

Limit switch 1

Pushbutton 1 – Start

0

1

2

3

Address

I0102/04

I0102/05

I0102/06

I0102/07

4

5

6

7

OK CancelNext Previous I/O Text

Function Text

Programmable Controller Text Definition

Cable Text – Allows you to change the descriptive texts associated with a cablesymbol. After selecting this checkbox and OK, the Cable Text dialog box willappear, listing any texts associated with the selected cable. Enter or change the textsas desired and select OK to continue.

Cross Reference Toggle – Use this checkbox to turn off (hide) the cross referencesat individual parent and child symbols.

Color – Use these checkboxes to change the color of the text. First select either theText checkbox (to color various symbol labels) or the Symbol checkbox (to color thesymbol itself). Use the Color button to display a color selection dialog box. Selectthe desired color. Select OK for the color, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box.You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the part of thesymbol that you wish to modify. This will then appear in the new color. When theText checkbox is selected you can selectively color device IDs, function text, andconnection point labels.

The functions in the Text area of the dialog box allow parameters for the varioussymbol–related texts (device ID, symbol text, programmable controller functiontext, etc.) to be modified.

Schematic Elements

5-101

Angle – Use this checkbox and button to change the angle of the text. First select theAngle checkbox. Use the Select button to display an angle selection dialog box.Select the desired angle. Select OK for the angle, and OK for the Modify Symboldialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on thetext that you wish to modify. The text will then appear at the new angle.

Height – use this checkbox and button to change the height of the text. First selectthe Height checkbox. Use the Select button to display a height selection dialog box.Select the desired height. Select OK for the height, and OK for the Modify Symboldialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on thetext that you wish to modify. The text will then appear with the new height.

Label Origin – use this checkbox and button to change the label origin of the text.First select the Label Origin checkbox. Use the Select button to display a labelorigin selection dialog box. Select the desired label origin. Select OK for the labelorigin, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to“Select attribute.” Point and click on the text that you wish to modify. The text willthen appear with the new label origin.

Settings – If you wish to change the symbol’s Scale, Rotation, or Mirror settings,select the Settings button. The Symbol Settings dialog box will appear. Select thedesired settings followed by OK. Once you have set the parameter for one symbol,you need only select the Settings checkbox to make the same modification to othersymbols.

Modify Wire/Line Type

The Modify > Line function allows you to change three characteristics of a wire orline in an RSWire drawing:

� Line Type (Wire vs. Drawing Line)

� Line Color

� Line Style (solid, dashed, etc.)

Select:

Modify � Line

The following Line Modify dialog box will appear.

Note The Format > Linetype and Format > Color functions apply only to lines created inAutoCAD.

Schematic Elements

5-102

CONTINUOUS

Line Type

Select

Wire Drawing

Color 1

SelectLine Style

OK Cancel Help...

Line Modify

On the left side of the dialog box are three checkboxes: Line Type, Color and LineStyle. You must select these to determine which line characteristics you are going tomodify.

Line Type – Select this checkbox to change a wire to a drawing line or vice versa.Select the Wire radio button if you want to change drawing lines to wires. Select theDrawing radio button if you wish to change wires to drawing lines. See page 5-3for a description of the differences between wires and drawing lines.

Color – Select this checkbox to change the color of a wire or line. You can enter anumber for the color or select the Select button to choose from a color display.

Line Style – Select this checkbox to change the line style. Select the Select button todisplay a list of available choices from which you can make selections.

� Continuous (Solid)

� Border (Dot 2 Dash)

� Center (Long Dash, Short Dash)

� Dashed (Short Dashes)

After you have selected the line characteristics that you wish to change, select theOK button. The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the lines youwish to modify. When you press <Enter> the selected lines will be modified.

Schematic Elements

5-103

Modify Text

The Modify > Text function allows you to edit existing text on the drawing. Thisfunction affects only text that was entered with the Draw > Text function. Othertext such as device IDs must be modified with the appropriate modify function,(such as Modify > Symbol in the case of device IDs, Modify > Wire Numberfunctions for wire numbers, etc.).

Select:

Modify � Text

The software will prompt you to “Select object.” Select the desired text and press<Enter>.

A dialog box will appear displaying the existing text which can be edited as desired.This is the same dialog box used for entering text (see page 5-31). Other textparameters such as height, angle, etc., can also be changed at this time. Select theOK button to load the changes.

Modify Field

The Modify > Field function allows you to alter parameters of existing fields.

Select:

Modify � Field

The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Click on the field you wish tomodify and press <Enter>.

A dialog box will appear listing current parameter values for the field. Any of thesevalues can be altered as described for creating fields on page 5-53.

Schematic Elements

5-104

Modify Wire Number

The Modify > Wire Number function allows you to alter the parameters of existingwire numbers. You can also reposition wire numbers with this function. Thisfunction is identical to the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function.

Select:

Modify � Wire Number

The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the wire that you wish tomodify and press <Enter>. The Wire Number Manual dialog box will appear. Seepage 5-73.

Note This function should not be used to modify the number of a wire with a signal crossreference (an error may result). For these wires you should use the Tools > Replace> Wire Number function.

Delete, Undo Delete

To delete selected objects from a drawing page, use the Modify > Delete function.

Select:

Modify � Delete

The software will prompt you to “Select objects.”

To Delete an Object or Objects – Select individual object by pointing and clickingor define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting onecorner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selectedobjects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete thedeletion.

In the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, when selecting items you can use theAutoCAD “R” and “A” command line options to remove and add items to the set ofentities to be deleted. Also, holding <Shift> and selecting an item will remove itfrom the selection set.

The Edit > Undo function will restore the most recently deleted objects.

Note If you are unable to delete a selected object, the object may be an imported itemwhich would require the use of the Edit > Cut to Clipboard function.

Schematic Elements

5-105

Copy

To copy objects on the drawing page, use the Modif y > Copy function. When itemswith device IDs are copied, the device IDs will be updated to reflect the position ofthe copy.

Select:

Modify � Copy


Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on thescreen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the oppositecorner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated bydashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the selection.

The software will then prompt you to “Select base point.” Select a point on thedrawing with the left mouse button that is to be the reference point of the copiedobject(s).

The software will then prompt you to “Select second point of displacement.” Selectthe destination reference point for the copied objects with the left mouse button. Thecopied objects will appear at the new location.

You can place multiple copies of the selected objects, one after the other.

Note If you are unable to copy a selected object, the object may be an imported itemwhich would require the use of the Edit > Copy Clipboard function.

Schematic Elements

5-106

Move

To relocate objects on the drawing page, use the Modify > Move function.

Select:

Modify � Move


To Move an Object or Objects – Select individual object by pointing and clicking ordefine a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting onecorner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selectedobjects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete theselection.

The software will then prompt you to select “Base point or displacement.” Select apoint on the drawing with the left mouse button that is to be the reference point ofthe moved object(s). This point determines where the cursor will be positioned onthe items being moved.

The software will then prompt you to select “Second point of displacement.” Selectthe destination reference point for the objects with the left mouse button. The movedobjects will appear at the new location.

Device IDs of Moved Symbols – When a project is created or modified there is acheckbox in the Project Parameters dialog box labeled Adjust Device ID WhenSymbols Are Moved (see page 3-10). This checkbox determines if the device ID ofan existing symbol will be adjusted automatically when the symbol is moved to anew position. This affects only projects that use one of the device ID formats basedon page and line number. Select the checkbox to enable automatic device IDadjustment. To change this setting on an existing project, use the Manage > Project> Modify function and select the Project Parameters button.

Schematic Elements

5-107

Stretch

Use the Modify > Stretch function to make wires and drawing lines longer orshorter.

Select:

Modify � Stretch

The software will prompt “Define first corner of the field.”

You must define a field (box) on the screen that contains the endpoint of the line thatyou wish to extend. After the first corner is selected, the software prompts you to“Define the opposite corner of the field.”

The software prompts “Select base point.” Select a point on the line (usually theendpoint you wish to reposition).

The software prompts “Specify second point of displacement.” Select a new point toextend or shorten the line by the desired amount.

If you select the endpoints of multiple lines, all will be stretched.

Warning: Do not stretch wires in a direction perpendicular to the originaldirection of the wire. This can cause unexpected results in the drawing. Wiresshould only be stretched in a direction that is parallel to the wire.

Properties

The Modify > Properties function allows you to change the color, line weight andother properties of imported AutoCAD drawing objects. This function will notaffect objects created with RSWire drawing functions.

Select:

Modify � Properties

The Properties dialog box will appear listing a variety of object properties. You canselect new values by clicking in the desired field. Refer to the AutoCAD manual forfurther information.

Schematic Elements

5-108

Replace Symbol

The Tools > Replace > Symbol function allows you to replace one type of symbolwith another. You can select individual symbols for replacement or globally replaceone symbol type throughout a page or an entire project.

Note The existing symbol and the symbol used to replace it must belong to the samesymbol group (GS1, PS1, etc.). If the existing symbol uses a device type, thereplacement symbol must be able to use the same device type.

Select:

Tools � Replace � Symbol

The Replace Symbol dialog box will appear.

All Pages Current Page

Symbol Text With Attributes

OK Cancel Help...

Take New Symbol Settings

Settings

Settings...

Device ID


All Symbol Text

Replace

Existing Symbol

Select Individually

Search...Name:

New Symbol

Search...Name:

Maintain On New Symbol

Part Number

Replace Symbol


The following selections are provided:

Schematic Elements

5-109

Replace – Select whether you wish a global replacement to occur on All Pages ofthe project or only the Current Page.

Existing Symbol – Enter the name of the symbol that you wish to replace. Thisshould be a symbol name (PBNO, LSNC, etc.) and not a device ID (PB102, LS5,etc.). Pick the Select Individually checkbox if you wish to select specificoccurrences of the symbol for replacement. Otherwise, all occurrences of thesymbol on the current page or in the current project will be replaced. Use the Searchbutton to display a symbol list from which selections can be made.

New Symbol – Enter the name of the symbol that is to replace the current symbol.This can be any symbol from the libraries on the software’s symbol (catalog) path.This path is listed in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file. Example: CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\JIC C:\RS\CATALOG\IEC(See Section 15 for more on search paths.) Use the Search button to display asymbol list from which selections can be made.

Maintain on New Symbol – This series of checkboxes allows you to select itemsfrom the current symbol that you wish to keep:

Device ID – Select this checkbox to keep the current device ID. Otherwise youmust enter a new device ID after the replace function by using the Modify >Symbol function.

Connection Point Text – Select this checkbox to keep the current connectionpoint text. Otherwise, the connection point text defined for the new symbol willbe used.

All Symbol Text – Select this checkbox to keep all symbol text includingattribute text from the current symbol.

Part Number – Select this checkbox to keep any part numbers assigned to thecurrent symbol.

Symbol Text With Attributes – Select this checkbox to keep symbol text withattributes from the current symbol (attribute text only).

Terminal Target Settings – Select this checkbox to keep the terminal targetdestination settings (internal, external, jumper).

Settings – Select the Take New Symbol Settings checkbox if you wish the newsymbol to have different settings (Scale, Rotation, etc.) from the current symbol.Select the Settings button to display a dialog box where new settings can be made.

Select the OK button to begin the symbol replacement. If you selected the SelectIndividually checkbox, you will be prompted to select symbols on the drawing.

Schematic Elements

5-110

Clear Page

The Manage > Page > Clear function erases everything on the current drawingpage. Use this function with extreme caution. See page 4-17.

Replace Device IDs

The Tools > Replace > Device ID function allows you to renumber device IDs andterminals across an entire project. This is useful if there has been editing within theproject and the symbol IDs no longer represent their positions in the schematic, or ifthere are gaps in the ID sequences.

Select:

Tools � Replace � Device ID

The Select Project dialog box will appear. Select the desired project name and selectOK to continue.

The Replace Device ID dialog box will appear.

First Number

X Y

OK Cancel Help...

Device ID

Terminals

Sort Direction

1

Replace Device ID

Schematic Elements

5-111

Renumber Device IDs

Select the Device ID checkbox followed by the OK button. All the devices IDs inthe project will be renumbered according to the format that was selected in theDefault Device ID Selection field of the Project Parameters dialog box when theproject was created (or when the Manage > Project > Modify function was used).See page 3-9 for more on device ID formats.

Renumber Terminals

The Tools > Replace > Device ID function allows you to automatically renumberterminals throughout a whole project, starting with a specified number.

Procedure:

1. Select the Tools > Replace > Device ID function. Select the desired project.

2. In the Replace Device ID dialog box select the Terminals checkbox.

3. In the First Number field enter the number that the first terminal in each strip isto have. If you want continuous numbering of the terminals through the wholeproject, you must use identical terminal strip designations (installation, location,device ID). Terminals are then numbered in the order of the existing pages.

4. Select either the X or Y sort direction radio button to determine the direction inwhich terminal numbering will proceed (x=horizontal, y=vertical). Terminalsare numbered in ascending order of x coordinate and descending order of ycoordinate. If direction x is specified, terminals on the same x coordinate as oneanother are numbered first, followed by terminals on the next higher xcoordinate, and so on across the page. The same applies by analogy fordirection y. Terminal numbers which are part of a macro are treated as a singleunit and numbered in such a way as to indicate their association with oneanother. See the next page for X and Y terminal numbering examples.

5. Select the OK button to execute the renumbering.

The terminal number can also be an alphanumeric expression. In this case, it is onlyincluded in the numbering operation if it meets the following conditions:

� it consists of a single number (number is replaced by new number)

� it has a number at the beginning, the remaining sequence is alphanumeric(number is replaced, rest remains unchanged)

� it consists of a question mark only (question mark is replaced by number)

Schematic Elements

5-112

Terminal Numbering – JIC Examples

Note Terminals within a macro are always numbered consecutively.

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

Symbols

Macro

MacroRotated 90 Degrees

Symbols


Symbols

X Direction Terminal Numbering

1 4 7

2 5 8

3 6 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB1

Symbols

Macro

MacroRotated 90Degrees

Symbols


SymbolsY Direction

Terminal Numbering 8 9 10

11 12 13

14 15 16

6

3

1

4

7

2

5

Schematic Elements

5-113

Terminal Numbering – IEC Examples

Note Terminals within a macro are always numbered consecutively.

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

Symbols

Macro

Macro

Symbols

Macro

Symbols

Terminal NumberingX Direction

1 4 7

2 5 8

3 6 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

–X1

Symbols

Macro

Macro

Symbols

Macro

SymbolsTerminal Numbering

Y Direction 8 9 10

11 12 13

14 15 16

6

3

1

4

7

2

5

Schematic Elements

5-114

Replace Text

The Tools > Replace > Text function allows you to globally replace device IDs,symbol text or standard text on the currently active drawing page.

With the desired drawing page displayed, select the Tools > Replace > Textfunction.

Select:

Tools � Replace � Text

The Replace Text dialog box will appear.

Select Text Type

Symbol Text

Device ID

Old:

Text

OK Cancel Help...

New:

Case Sensitive

Replace Text

In the Select Text Type area, select which kind of text you wish to replace:

Device ID – Device IDs; the numbered symbol identifiers.

Symbol Text – Text that is defined when the symbol is created or automaticallyprompted when the symbol is placed.

Text – Standard text that was entered with the Draw > Text function.

Schematic Elements

5-115

In the Old field enter the text that you wish to replace. You must match theupper/lower case of the existing text. Any text entered will be treated as a wildcardentry. In other words, it will find the specified characters even if they exist in alonger string of text (of the selected type).

In the New field enter the new text that is to replace the old text.

Select the Case Sensitive checkbox to make the replace function apply only to textthat exactly matches the upper/lower case letters entered in the Old field.

Select the OK button to execute the replace.

The software will search for the first occurrence of the old text on the current page.It will then display the new text in the dialog box.

=L1+E1–MDS1

Exchange Exchange All Next Cancel

Replace Text

To Replace One Occurrence of the Text – Select the Exchange button.

To Replace All Occurrences of the Text on the Current Page – Select theExchange All button.

To Skip the Replace for the Current Occurrence – Select the Next button. Thecurrent occurrence will remain unchanged and the software will seek the nextoccurrence.

To Exit the Exchange Function – Select the Cancel button.

Replace Symbol Text

The Tools > Replace > Symbol Text function allows you to replace any symbol textof any existing symbols based on device ID and attribute number from a text file.(Symbol text is text defined when the symbol is created or automatically promptedwhen the symbol is placed.)

Schematic Elements

5-116

Select:

Tools � Replace � Symbol Text

When you activate the Tools > Replace > Symbol Text function, the Select Filedialog box will appear. Select the file that contains the replacement text. (See nextpage for information on creating and formatting this file.)

Scrolling lists of filenames and directories are provided from which you can searchfor and select the desired file.

The Find File button allows you to search for files matching given criteria. Whenyou select Find File the Browse/Search dialog box is displayed. Here you can entera Search Pattern for the file name (such as symbol* to find files that begin with“symbol”). You can also select which File Type (extension) will be searched for,minimum Time and Date values, and which drives and paths will be searched.

The Locate button allows you to search for a specific filename.

When you have selected the desired file in the Select File dialog box, select the OKbutton to execute the symbol text replace operation.

When a page is active the function will only change devices found on the open page.

If the function is run when no page file is open, the program will query the user toselect a project. All devices on all pages of the selected project selected will then beavailable for symbol text replacement.

Schematic Elements

5-117

Symbol Text Replace File Format:

The file containing the replacement symbol text should be an ASCII file with linescontaining the following information, each item in quotes and separated by commas:“device ID”,“attribute number”, “new text string”

Here is an example file:

”=LINE1+EN1–RES1”,”31”,”560 OHMS^3.25 WATTS””=LINE1+EN1–CAP1”,”31”,”1400 MFD, 100VDC””=LINE1+EN1–OVPR”,”1”,”OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION^RELAY””=LINE1+EN1–L1”,”1”,”FUSE F1ÂVAILABLE””=LINE1+EN1–L1”,”31”,”G””=LINE1+EN1–D1”,”31”,”IR206D””=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”14”,”24VDCÎNPUT””=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”14”,”24VDCÔUTPUT””=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”31”,”75 WATTS””=LINE1+EN1–PC”,”31”,”PWR322^POWER SUPPLY””=LINE1+EN1–R1S1”,”4”,”1””=LINE1+EN1–R1S2”,”4”,”2””=LINE1+EN1–L6”,”1”,”FUSE F6 AVAILABLE””=LINE1+EN1–L6”,”31”,”G””=LINE1+EN1–L7”,”1”,”FUSE F7 AVAILABLE”

For a list of symbol text attributes, see page 6-15.

Note Text attributes are defined in the file RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT. Users canedit this file to define unused attributes, however this file may be overwritten when anew version (update) of RSWire is installed. The user can also define his ownattributes in a file called ATT_CUST.TXT (which the user must create). The softwarewill first read ATT_ENG.TXT and then ATT_CUST.TXT. Any values inATT_CUST.TXT will then overwrite the attributes in the first file. The fileATT_CUST.TXT must begin with attribute 42 which is the first user–definableattribute.

Example format of ATT_CUST.TXT:

42 customer defined attribute43 customer defined attribute44 customer defined attribute45 customer defined attribute

Note The part number attribute (number 10) cannot be replaced using this method. Thepart number is converted to text at the time of symbol placement and is no longer anattribute.

Schematic Elements

5-118

Edit Part Number

To change the part number assigned to existing symbols in a drawing, use thefollowing procedure:

1. If assigned part numbers are not currently displayed in the drawing, select theTools > System Settings function and select the Display Settings tab. Select theDisplay Part Numbers checkbox. Assigned part numbers will now be displayedin the drawing.

2. Point the cursor at the part number you wish to change and click the rightmouse button. Select Part Number from the pop–up menu. The Assign PartNumber dialog box will appear. This dialog box will list any currently assignedpart numbers. See page 5-79 for more information.

3. To remove a part number when multiple part numbers have been assigned,double click on the part number you wish to remove in the list of assigned partnumbers. New part numbers can then be searched for and selected.

CRPREGROUP =PARTNUMBER =DESCR =MANUFACT =

Assigned Part Numbers Are Listed Here

OK Cancel Help...

Assign Part Number

Device ID

SYMB_REF =

FilterSYMB_REF =”CR”

Refresh

_

CR 500FL-COA93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NECR 500FL-COB93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NECR 500FL-COC93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NECR 500FL-COD93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NECR 500FL-COF93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE


CR 500FL-COA93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE


Schematic Elements

5-119

Replace Part Number Globally

The Tools > Replace > Part Number function allows you to replace assigned partnumbers throughout a project.

Select:

Tools � Replace � Part Number

The Replace Part Number dialog box will appear.

Old New

Replace Part Number

OK

Cancel

Help

Search

Save

In the Replace Part Number dialog box there are two columns of fields labeled Oldand New.

In one of the Old fields enter the existing part number that you wish to change. (Youcan see a list of existing part numbers in the current project by double clicking inany of the Old fields. You can select from this list.)

In the corresponding New field to the right, enter the new part number that willreplace the old part number.

Select the Save button to save the replacement list to a text file. This file can be usedin future work sessions (for other projects) by selecting the Search button.

Select the OK button to execute the change. The old part number will be changed tothe new part number wherever it has been assigned in the current project.

Schematic Elements

5-120

Deleting Wire Number

To Delete a Single Wire Number:

You can delete the wire itself, or use the Modify > Wire Number function, selectthe wire, and delete the existing wire number from the Wire Number field of thedialog box. Then select OK.

To Globally Delete Existing Wire Numbers:

Select:

Tools � Wire Number � Delete

The following Delete Wire Numbers dialog box will appear.

All (including manually assigned)

Only Automatically Assigned

OK Cancel Help...

Select Pages

Delete Wire Numbers

The All radio button will cause all wire numbers to be deleted including those thatwere manually assigned.

The Only Automatically Assigned radio button will cause only those wire numbersthat were automatically assigned to be deleted.

Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which thewire numbering will be deleted. After you select the OK button in the Delete WireNumbers dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick theproject, installation, and pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted.

If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, wire numbering (of the selectedtype) will be deleted throughout the entire project.

Select the OK button to proceed with wire number deletion. The software will ask“Are you sure?” Select OK to delete the wire numbers.

Schematic Elements

5-121

I/O Device ID

The Tools > I/O Device ID function goes through the current drawing page andchanges the device IDs of symbols connected to a programmable controller symbolto match the I/O address to which it is attached.

Tools � I/O Device ID

Only the symbol that is closest to the programmable controller symbol will berenamed. If a terminal symbol is closest to the programmable controller symbol,then the terminal will be skipped over and the next closest symbol will be renamed.

Schematic Elements

5-122

Linetype Properties

To modify linetypes, use the Format > Linetype function.

Select:

Format � Linetype

The Linetype Manager dialog box will appear.

Schematic Elements

5-123

Layers

In RSWire each category of drawing object (symbols, texts, wires, etc.) isautomatically placed on a separate “layer” in the drawing. This separation allows asingle setting to be made that will affect everything on that layer (and not affectitems on other layers). Each layer has a name that distinguishes it from other layers.

The user can create new layers and place things on these layers, however theRSWire drawing and editing functions will only recognize items placed on thestandard RSWire layers. See page 5-128 for a list of RSWire layers.

The Format > Layer function allows you to select drawing layers and make varioussettings for these layers. This function is useful for selectively hiding portions of adrawing when plotting or for locking layers to prevent editing. You can also setcolors and line types for an entire layer.

Select:

Format � Layer

The Layer Properties dialog box will appear.

Schematic Elements

5-124

The Layer Properties dialog box lists each layer in the current drawing and showseach layer’s on/off status, color and line type.

Selecting Layers

You can select one or more individual layers by clicking on the desired layer nameto highlight it.

To Select All Layers – Select the first layer, hold down the <Shift> key, slide thescroll bar down to the bottom, and select the last layer.

To Deselect All Layers – Select any single layer.

Schematic Elements

5-125

To Select Specific Layers – Select the first layer, hold down the <Ctrl> key, andselect additional layers.

To Deselect Specific Layers – Select any single layer.

Layer Settings

The following settings are possible in the Layer& Linetype Properties dialog box:

Show – Select one of the following layer types to be listed:AllAll in useAll unusedAll Xref dependentAll not Xref dependentAll that pass filterSet Filter dialog

Current – When a layer is current, you can create new objects on that layer. Tomake a layer current, select the layer name and select the Current button A layer iscurrent when the layer name is shown next to the Current button.

(O...) On/Off – Select the icon to turn the currently selected layer on and off. Whena layer is off it is invisible on the drawing screen and on plots. An On layer isidentified by a highlighted icon in the column.

(F...) Freeze/Thaw in All Viewpoints, Current Viewpoints, New Viewpoints –Freezing a layer is similar to turning a layer off in that it is invisible on the screenand in plots. Additionally, a frozen layer is not included in drawing regenerations.By freezing layers, the regenerating speed of complex drawings can be improved.To freeze the currently selected layer, select the Freeze icon. To un–freeze a layer,select the Freeze icon. A frozen layer is identified by a highlighted icon in thecolumn.

Note The Freeze in Current Viewpoints and Freeze in New Viewpoints properties are validonly when tilemode is off.

(L...) Lock/Unlock – When a layer is locked you cannot edit the objects on thatlayer (although you can add objects to the layer). The locked layer is visibleprovided it has not also been turned off or frozen. To lock the currently selectedlayer, select the Lock icon. To unlock a locked layer select the Lock icon. A lockedlayer is identified by a highlighted icon in the column.

Schematic Elements

5-126

(C...) Color – To change the color of a layer, first select the layer, then select the SetColor button. A Select Color dialog box will appear allowing you to choose a color.Select OK. The current color of the layer is indicated in the Color column of theLayer Control dialog box.

Linetype – To change the line type of objects on a layer, first select the layer, thenselect the Linetype text. A Select Linetype dialog box will appear allowing you tochoose a line style. Select OK. The current line type of the layer is indicated in theLinetype column.

New – The New button is used to create new layers. To create a new drawing layer,select the New button and enter the layer name in the text field. The layer name canbe up to 31 characters long. The new layer name will appear in the layer list.

Note To rename a layer first select a layer name from the list. Its name will appear in thetext field. Enter the new name in this field. The layer name will be changed to thenew name. Do not rename the standard RSWire drawing layers (layer namesstarting with “ECS”). Renaming these layers will make them inaccessible to theRSWire software.

Delete – The Delete button is used to delete layers. To delete a layer first select alayer name from the list. Select the Delete button and the layer will be deleted.

Note You cannot delete the current layer (name listed next to the Current button), layer 0,an Xref layer, or a layer that contains objects.

Schematic Elements

5-127

RSWire Layer Names

RSWire drawing layers follow a naming standard that indicates the type of objectfound on that layer.

All RSWire layer names begin with the characters ECS_L.

The next letter indicates whether the objects on this layer are evaluated (E) or notevaluated (X). An evaluated object is part of the online control or can be changed bythe program automatically, e.g. the ladder text, frame size, etc.

The next letter indicates whether the objects on this layer are visible (V) or invisible(X). Visible objects are normally always shown except when switched off by theLAYER command. Example: Standard symbols in the schematic.Invisible objects are normally invisible independent of the other (visible) objects.Example: The shape of a drill hole in a panel layout.

The remainder of the layer name is a description of the type of object or portion ofobject on that layer. Example: ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVID for symbol device ID.

Schematic Elements

5-128

Symbol: Evaluated – Visible (standard symbol)

Layer Name Description

ECS_LEV_SYM Initial insert layer

ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO Geometry (app. variable)

ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO3D Geometry 3D panel layout

ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO_SCM Geometry (schematic)

ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVID Device ID

ECS_LEV_SYM_CPOINT Connection point text

ECS_LEV_SYM_TPOINT Terminal text

ECS_LEV_SYM_TEXT Symbol text

ECS_LEV_SYM_PARTNO Part number

ECS_LEV_SYM_PCR Potential cross reference text

ECS_LEV_SYM_EED_PNT Extended Entity Data at Point

ECS_LEV_SYM_M_RP Reference point mark

ECS_LEV_SYM_M_CP Connection point mark

ECS_LEV_SYM_M_PN Part number mark

ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVICE Device Type

ECS_LEV_SYM_NAME Symbol name

ECS_LEV_SYM_MARK Selected symbol mark

Symbol: Evaluated – Invisible

ECS_LEX_SYM Initial insert layer

ECS_LEX_SYM_CPOINT Connection point text

ECS_LEX_SYM_DEVICE Device type

ECS_LEX_SYM_DEVID Device ID

ECS_LEX_SYM_GEO Geometry (app. variable)

ECS_LEX_SYM_GEO_SCM Geometry (app. variable)

ECS_LEX_SYM_NAME Symbol name

ECS_LEX_SYM_TPOINT Terminal text

ECS_LEX_SYM_TEXT Symbol text

ECS_LEX_SYM_PARTNO Part number

ECS_LEX_SYM_PCR Potential cross reference text

ECS_LEX_SYM_EED_PNT Extended Entity Data at Point

ECS_LEX_SYM_M_RP Reference point mark

ECS_LEX_SYM_M_CP Connection point mark

ECS_LEX_SYM_M_PN Part number mark

Schematic Elements

5-129

Symbol: Not Evaluated – Visible

ECS_LXV_SYM Initial insert layer

ECS_LXV_SYM_CPOINT Connection point text

ECS_LXV_SYM_DEVICE Device type

ECS_LXV_SYM_DEVID Device ID

ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO Geometry (app. variable)

ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO_HEX Geometry (app. variable)

ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO_SCM Geometry (app. variable)

ECS_LXV_SYM_NAME Symbol name

ECS_LXV_SYM_TPOINT Terminal text

ECS_LXV_SYM_TEXT Symbol text

ECS_LXV_SYM_PARTNO Part number

ECS_LXV_SYM_PCR Potential cross reference text

ECS_LXV_SYM_EED_PNT Extended Entity Data at POINT

ECS_LXV_SYM_M_RP Reference point mark

ECS_LXV_SYM_M_CP Connection point mark

ECS_LXV_SYM_M_PN Part number mark

ECS_LXV_NAV_MARK Navigator mark

ECS_LXV_CR_POS Connection point position during symbol create

Symbol: Dummy Symbol – Evaluated – Visible (rotated symbol placement)

ECS_LED_SYM Initial insert layer

Macro: Evaluated – Visible

ECS_LEX_MC_M_RP Reference point mark

Cross Reference Symbol: Evaluated – Visible

ECS_LEV_SYMCR Geometry + all texts

ECS_LEV_SYMCR_M_RP Reference point mark

Schematic Elements

5-130

Field: Evaluated Visible

ECS_LEV_FIELD Geometry + device ID

Line: Evaluated

ECS_LEV_LINE Wire (evaluated)

Line: Not Evaluated Visible

ECS_LXV_LINE Drawing line (not evaluated)

Wire Number: Evaluated Visible

ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO Wire number

Free Texts: Not Evaluated Visible

ECS_LXV_TEXT Free text

Page Header: Evaluated Visible

ECS_LEV_PH_DATA Drawing data

ECS_LEV_PH_EED EED data at POINT

ECS_LEV_PH_TMP EED data temporarily

ECS_LEV_PH_LOGO Logo

Schematic Elements

5-131

Page: Evaluated Visible

ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME Page frame

ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER Ladder Marks

Temporarily Used Layers

ECS_LXV_CURSOR Symbol as cursor

ECS_LXX_JUST_MOD Modify justification

Schematic Elements

5-132

List Object Function (for drawing elements)

The View > List function allows you to view data relating to specific entities in adrawing.

Select:

View � List

With a drawing page displayed, select the View > List function. The software willprompt you to “select objects.” Select one or more drawing entities (wires, symbols,circles, etc.) by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. Then pressthe <Enter> key.

The software will then display a text window containing data for the selecteddrawing entities. If there is more information than will fit in the window, the listingwill stop and you can press the <Enter> key to display the next screen of data.

The information listed depends on the type of entity, but its type, its x,y,z position,and the layer on which it is drawn are always listed. Color and line type aredisplayed if either are not done by layer.

The data displayed for symbols includes the symbol name and catalog (example:“JIC–PBNO”) as well as descriptions of the graphic elements in the symbols. Datafor the various symbol attributes (device ID, connection point text, etc.) are alsodisplayed.

For lines and wires, information includes the x,y,z coordinates of the endpoints, thelength, and the angle in the x–y plane from start point to end point.

For circles, information includes center point, radius, area, and circumference.

You can toggle between the list window and the drawing window by pressing the<F2> key.

If you select many entities, the list output may be very long. You can cancel the listdisplay by pressing the <Ctrl> and <C> keys.

To cancel the “select objects” prompt, press the <Ctrl> and <C> keys.

Create Schematic Elements

6-1

6 Create Schematic Elements

This section describes how users can create custom symbols, macros, and otherelements for use in RSWireTM Designer drawings.


� Create Symbols

� Symbol Elements

� Symbol Creation Procedure

� Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File

� Symbol Creation Examples

� Creating an Example Parent Symbol

� Creating an Example Child Symbol

� Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol

� Creating an Example Device Type Definition

� Creating an Example PLC (Parent) Symbol

� Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol

� Creating an Example Terminal Symbol

� Creating Pin Charts

� Creating Form C Contacts

� Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols

� Create Macro

� Create Title Block Macro

� Create Device Type

� Delete, Copy, Rename, for Symbols, Macros, Devices

� Modify Symbol, Macro, Device


6-2

Create Symbols

Symbol Elements

Creating a symbol involves drawing the symbol itself and also defining the relatedinformation shown in the following illustration.

CR 103

CONTROL RELAY

Device ID

Connection PointsReference Point

Symbol Text

ELEMENTS OF A JIC SYMBOL

A B Connection Point Text

8501XD1000V02 Part Number

LOW TEMP RELAY

Connection Points

ELEMENTS OF AN IEC SYMBOL

A1

A2 Connection Point Text

Symbol Text

Reference Point

Part Number

–K2

Device ID

8501XD1000V02

Device ID – A device ID tag must be defined for intelligent symbol types. The restof the device ID is added to this tag at the time the symbol is placed on the drawing.In the illustration above, “CR” is used as the tag for control relay device IDs. Therest of the ID is filled in automatically when the symbol is placed in a drawing andmight consist of consecutive numbers, page number, line number, or a combinationof these (this is determined in the Project Parameters dialog box when a newproject is created).

Reference Point – A reference point must be defined. This point will be positionedon the cursor when the symbol is placed in the drawing.


6-3

Connection Points – These points determine where lines will break when thesymbol is placed on a line or when a line is drawn through the symbol.

If desired, Connection Point Text can be defined that will automatically label theconnection points when the symbol is placed (such as A and B terminations on arelay coil).

Symbol Text – This is optional, additional text which will appear with the symbol.Symbol text can be fixed text, or it can be configured to prompt the user forinformation (Amp values, for example) when the symbol is placed.

Part Number (Optional) – You can enter a part number during symbol creation sothat this part number will be automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed.


6-4

Symbol Libraries and Directories

Symbols for a given type of application or drawing format are organized intosymbol libraries, also known as symbol catalogs. There are available RSWirecatalogs for JIC (electrical), IEC (electrical), ISA (process control), hydraulic, andpneumatic symbols.

A sub–directory (folder) exists for each symbol catalog inside the RS\CATALOGdirectory. Inside each symbol catalog directory there are the followingsubdirectories:

BLOCK – Contains graphics files (.DWG) and definition data files (.EC1) foreach symbol in the catalog.

DEVICE – Contains device type definition files (.EC1) for device typesassociated with this symbol catalog.

MACRO – Contains graphics files (.DWG) and definition data files (.EC1) foreach macro associated with this catalog.

In each of the above directories there is a file called NAMES.EC2 that listswhich symbol, device type or macro is associated with each file.

WMF – This directory contains the graphics files (.WMF) for the symbolselection groups used with the Insert > Select Icon function.


6-5

Symbol Catalog Path

The file RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG contains a path statement that determines wheresymbols are stored and which catalogs are available when creating projects. Forexample:

CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\CUSTOM\ C:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ C:\RS\CATALOG\AB_CAT\

The first directory named in this path (CUSTOM in this example) is the directorywhere all newly created symbols will be stored. Edit the path statement if you wishsymbols to be stored in a different directory.

Moving Symbols From Catalog to Catalog

Symbols can be moved from one catalog to another using the File >Backup/Restore function. Selected symbols can be saved to a file using the backupfunction and then loaded into the desired catalog using the restore function. Seepage 3-21.

If you decide to move symbols by manually copying the files from one catalogdirectory to another, the copied symbols will not be listed in the new catalog untilthe NAMES.EC2 file is updated. To do this, delete the existing NAMES.EC2 file inthe destination directory. The software will then generate a new, updated file whenthat catalog is accessed.


6-6

Symbol Creation Procedure

Symbols created with this procedure become part of an RSWire symbol library andcan be accessed at any time during schematic creation. The symbol will be stored inthe first catalog search path (listed in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file). Thedefault library for new user–created symbols is CUSTOM.

Note During symbol creation, if you wish to cancel the symbol creation, select the Cancelfunction from the Manage > Symbol menu. This will erase any symbol informationthat has been entered but not yet stored.

1. Use a blank page. Display a blank drawing page. There can be drawingelements such as lines, circles and boxes on the page, but no symbols can existon the page. If a blank page is not available, create one using the File > New >Page function (see page 4-11).

Turn off the Online function. When you create the page, turn off the Onlinecheckbox in the New Page dialog box. Symbols cannot be created when theOnline function is active. For an existing online page, use the Manage > Page >Modify function to turn off the Online checkbox.

2. Select Manage > Symbol > New/Modify.

Manage � Symbol � New/Modify

If the page has symbols on it, the message “Caution: Symbols are already placedon this page” will be displayed and the symbol creation function will becanceled. You must use a page that contains no symbols.

3. Enter symbol name, type, description. The software will next display theNew/Modify Symbol dialog box. Enter a symbol name of up to 14 characters inthe Symbol Name field. Do not use an existing symbol name unless you wish toreplace or edit the existing symbol. Use the List button to see a list of existingsymbol names.


6-7

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:

Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint

HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

New/Modify Symbol

List...


GS1 General Symbol (no cross ref.)

The Preferred Direction checkboxes determine how the software will look atthe symbol when generating a connection list. It also determines how wires willbe broken or closed when the symbol is placed or moved. Select the Horizontalcheckbox if the symbol is to be scanned from left to right (in other words, if thewire will be horizontal in relation to the symbol). Select the Vertical checkbox ifthe symbol is to be scanned from top to bottom (i.e., if the wire will be verticalin relation to the symbol, as in IEC format drawings).

Preferred direction horizontal Preferred direction vertical

Use the Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint checkbox to create a symbol that willautomatically snap to the end of a wire. The reference point of the symbol willbe positioned at the nearest endpoint of the wire on which it is placed. Thisfunction is mainly used to create signal cross reference symbols and PLC childsymbols.


6-8

Enter a description of the symbol up to 100 characters long in the Descriptionfield. This description will appear in symbol lists. If you wish to include foreignlanguage text strings in the description, select the Search Language Text buttonto select from the available strings.

In the Symbol Group field, select the type of symbol that you are creating.Select the down arrow button to display a list of symbol types. The followingtypes are available:

GS1 General Symbol, no cross ref. (e.g., lights, pushbuttons)

GS2 General Symbol, no cross ref. treated as wire (trailing cables)

PS1 Parent symbol with cross ref. (e.g., coils of relays, etc.)

PS2Child symbol with cross ref. (e.g., normally open contact, normally closedcontact, form C contact, etc.)

PS3 Cross reference symbol

TS1 Terminal block

TS2 Plug - multi-pole

TS3 Plug - single pole

TS4 Parent plug with cross reference

TS5 Child pin with cross reference

TS6 Connector Cross reference symbol (pin chart)

SG1 Incoming signal (1 line text)


SG3 Outgoing signal (1 line text)


SG5 Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line text)


SG7 Outgoing signal (star, same as SG8)

SG8 Outgoing signal (star, same as SG7)

CP1 Connection point

DW1 Diagonal wiring connection symbol

BOX Rectangular symbol

RES Reserved for future use - Do not use

CS2 Cable Child Symbol


SG9 Outgoing Signal, Device ID Reference (1 line text)

SGA Outgoing Signal, Device ID Reference (2 line text)


6-9

Select the OK button when the New/Modify Symbol dialog box is complete. Ifthe symbol name is already assigned, the following message will appear:“Symbol already exists. Modify ?” Select the Yes button to redefine the symbol.Select the No button to cancel symbol creation.

4. Select reference point. After you select OK in the New/Modify Symbol dialogbox, the software will prompt you on the command line to define a referencepoint. This is the insertion point of the symbol in relation to the rest of thesymbol. Point to the desired reference point on the drawing page and click theleft mouse button. The reference point will be marked on the screen with asmall inverted triangle.

5. Draw the symbol. Now use RSWire drawing functions such as lines, circles,boxes, text, etc., to create the symbol shape. You may call up existing symbolsand use them as part of a new symbol. You may wish to change grid spacing(use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings tab) while creating symbols.

Important When drawing the symbol, be aware of the grid spacing that will be used in yourschematic drawings so that connection points are properly spaced. Connectionpoints must always be on this grid.

6. Enter Device ID. Once the symbol is drawn, return to the Manage > Symbolmenu and select the Device ID function.

The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a pointnear (usually above for JIC and to the left for IEC) the symbol where you wishthe device ID to appear on drawings. The following Device ID Parameter dialogbox will appear.

?

5

0.150

0

0

0.500

0.500

Device–ID:

Label Origin:

Height:

Angle:

Color:

x–offset:

y–offset:

OK Cancel Help...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Device ID Parameter



6-10


Device ID – Enter a device ID tag. The tag is just a prefix or mnemonic for thetype of device for which you are creating a symbol. For example, you might use“PB” for pushbutton, or “K” for IEC relays. Complete device IDs are generatedby the system when a symbol is placed.

Label Origin – Enter a value to select whether the ID will appear to the left,right, above, below, or centered on the device ID origin point (i.e., select “5” tocenter the label on the origin point). The numbers correspond to the followingpositioning: 7 8 9

4 5 61 2 310 11 12

If you cannot remember these numbers, use the Select button to select fromverbal descriptions (Top Left, Middle Center, etc.).

Height – Enter a character height value for the device ID. The default entry is 0.If no other entry is made the default text sizes set during project creation willapply when the symbol is placed. If a different entry is made it will override theproject default text sizes.

Angle – Enter a value to determine the angle at which the device ID will appear.Use the Select button to display a list of values.

Color – Enter a color number to determine the color of the device ID. You canalso use the Select button to display and select the available colors.

X–offset, Y–offset – These values represent the x and y distance from thesymbol reference point to the device ID reference point. If a device ID referencepoint has already been selected with the mouse, this point’s position will bereflected in the values shown, which can be changed.

When you select the OK button, the device ID tag will appear on the symbol atthe selected position.

Note The currently selected text font is used for the symbol’s device ID, connection pointtext, and symbol text. You can select a different font for each, if desired. The fontsused when the symbol is created will be used whenever the symbol is placed. Selectthe Format > Text Style function to select fonts.


6-11

7. Define connection points. Next, select the Connection Point function fromthe Manage > Symbol menu. The software will prompt you to “Define theconnection point.” Select a point on the symbol where a wire is to connect (beaware of the grid spacing that will be used in your drawings). The selected pointis marked with an “X”.

Note The first connection point should be placed at the reference point. (You can relocatethe reference point to this location before you save.)

You will then be prompted to “Define label origin of text.” This is the pointwhere connection point text will appear. You must select a point, even if you donot plan to have any connection point text. When you select a point, thefollowing Connection Point Parameter dialog box appears.

?

5

0.150

0

0

0.000

0.000

Connection Point:

Label Origin:

Height:

Angle:

Color:

Conn.Pt. X Offset:

Conn.Pt. Y Offset:

0.000

0.000

Text X Offset:

Text Y Offset:

1Sequence Number:

Undefined Internal External Jumper

Terminal

OK Cancel Help...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Select...

Connection Point Parameters

Display Connection Point in the Graph. Terminal Plan



6-12


Connection Point – Enter a label for the connection point such as “CP1”.

Label Origin – Enter a value to select whether the label will appear to the left,right, above, below, or centered on the selected point (i.e., select “5” to centerthe label on the origin point). The numbers correspond to the followingpositioning:

7 8 94 5 61 2 310 11 12

If you cannot remember these numbers, use the Select button to select fromverbal descriptions (Top Left, Middle Center, etc.).

Height – Enter a character height value for the label. Use the Select button todisplay a list of values.

Angle – Enter a value to determine the angle at which the label will appear. Usethe Select button to display a list of values.

Color – Enter a color number to determine the color of the label. You can alsouse the Select button to display and select the available colors.

Conn.Pt.–X–offset, Conn.Pt.–Y–offset – These values represent the x and ydistance from the symbol reference point to the selected connection point. Ifdesired, these values can be changed.

Text–X–offset, Text–Y–offset – These values represent the distance from theconnection point to the selected reference point of the connection point label(text). If desired, these values can be changed.

Sequence Number – The value in this field indicates the order of connectionpoints in the symbol. It can be altered if desired.

Terminal – There are also four radio buttons to determine the type of connectionpoint: Undefined, Internal, External, or Jumper. These are only used withterminal symbols (symbol group TS1). For more information see page 11-3.

Display Connection Point in the Graph. Terminal Plan – Select thischeckbox to determine whether the terminal connection point will alwaysappear in the graphical terminal plan or only when it is used. Selecting thecheckbox will cause the connection point to always appear in the terminal plan.

Select the OK button when the Connection Point Parameter dialog box iscomplete. You can define additional connection points as required.


6-13

If you need to remove a connection point you have placed, select the Manage >Symbol > Delete Conn. Point function and click on the “x” of the connectionpoint you wish to remove. (If the connection point is not located on a grid line,you must use the Tools > Osnap function.)

Note The software has an automatic rotation feature that will automatically rotate asymbol to match the horizontal or vertical orientation of the wire on which it isplaced. The software does this by checking the orientation of the first twoconnection points that were defined when the symbol was created. If you arecreating a symbol with more than two connection points you may wish to define thefirst two connection points so that they lie in a direction parallel to the wire.

8. (Optional) Modify Device ID and Connection Points – If necessary, duringsymbol creation you can modify the text and position of the device ID andconnection points. Use the following procedures:

Modify Device ID

a. Point the cursor at the device ID and click the right mouse button. Thefollowing popup menu will appear

Device ID ModifyText Position

b. Select Device ID Modify if you wish to change the text or text parametersof the device ID. Select Text Position if you wish to change the position ofthe device ID.

Modify Connection Points

a. Point the cursor at the connection point text (not at the connection pointitself) and click the right mouse button. The following popup menu willappear

Connection Point >Text Position

ModifyMoveDelete

b. Select Connection Point if you wish to change the connection point. SelectText Position if you wish to change the position of the connection pointtext.

9. Add symbol Text – Text entered during symbol creation is part of the symboldefinition and appears with the symbol each time it is placed in the schematic.Symbol text can be set up to contain input entered at the time of symbolplacement. Additionally, it can be set up to prompt for a certain type of input.Use the following procedure to enter symbol text.


6-14

a. Select the Draw > Text function.

b. In the Text dialog box enter the text itself and set other text parameters asdesired. See page 5-31. If you wish to have prompted input at the time ofsymbol placement, enter a “?” where the text is to appear. Enter, forexample: ? Hours (leave enough spaces after “?” for any valid input).When the symbol is placed on a drawing, text input will be requested thatwill take the place of the question mark. Select OK when ready.

c. Select a reference point for the text in the drawing.

d. Next, the Text Attribute Definition dialog box will appear. If you turn on theAttribute – Activate checkbox, you can select an attribute for the text fromthe attribute list (see list on next page), or you can enter the number of thetext in the No: field instead. An attribute will provide a prompt when thesymbol is placed that indicates what units or other information is to beentered.

These attributes are defined in the file RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT(for English). You can edit this file to add additional prompts in the 52 through120 positions in the list. Alternatively, you can create a file calledRS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_CUST.TXT to hold your additional attribute texts.This ATT_CUST.TXT file will not be replaced during software updates.

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text

No:

Visible Hidden Hidden Fixed

OK Cancel Help...

AttributeI/O Attribute

Activate Activate

No:

Text Attribute Definition


6-15

If the text is related to a PLC symbol, select the I/O Attribute – Activatecheckbox. The following additional items will be enabled: Select the Addresscheckbox if the text will be a PLC module address. Select the I/O Textcheckbox if the text will be PLC function text.

In the No: field you must enter a sequence number starting with 0 to determinewhich place this text attribute has in the sequence of addressing. This numbercan be modified during symbol creation in the Attribute Number field in theEdit – Text dialog box.

The group of radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box are selected todetermine if the text will be Visible, Hidden, or Hidden Fixed (cannot bemodified).

List of Symbol Text Attributes

(numbers are for internal reference only)

1 Function Text:

2 PLC Function Text:

3 Rack:

4 Module:

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 DID, SDW:

8 Wire Diagram, CP:

9 DID,Panel/Wire Dia:

10 Part Number:

11 Reference Symbol Name:

12 Horsepower [P]:

13 Revolutions per minute [n]:

14 Voltage [V]:

15 VA:

16 Current (A) [I]:

17 Frequency [f]:

18 Temperature [T]:

19 Pressure [p]:

20 Resistance (ohm) [R]:

21 Velocity [v]:

22 Density [D]:

23 Quantity [Q]:

24 Capacitance [Cap]:

25 Inductance [L]:


6-16

List of Symbol Text Attributes

26 Seconds [s]:

27 Minutes [min}:

28 Hours [h]:

29 Channel:

30 Manufacturer:

31 Type

32 Length [l]:

33 Weight, mass [m]:

34 Amount of Material [mol]:

35 Luminous Intensity [lv]:

36 Area [A]:

37 Volume [V]:

38 Power [Pow]:

39 Quantity of Heat [Qj]:

40 Conductance [G]:

41 Field Strength [E]:

42 Magnetic Flux [Phi]:

43 time [t]:

44 sound level [dB(A) ]:

45 acceleration [a]:

46 current density [J]:

47 permittivity [F/m]:

48 permeability [My]:

49 permeance [H]:

50 thermal conductivity [W/(m*K)]:

51 temperature conductivity [m2/s]:

52 - 120 Free for user entries

10. Select cross reference position (child symbols only) – A cross reference canappear at a child symbol to indicate the location of the parent symbol.Ordinarily, the position of this cross reference can be adjusted by entering avalue in the Dist. Device ID Cross Ref. field in the Tools > Project Settings >General Defaults tab (see page 7-21). However, if you wish to set a fixedposition for the cross reference (which will not be affected by the above value),select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select thedesired position on the drawing. The position will be marked by a blue “X”.


6-17

If you wish to reposition the cross reference position, simply use the samefunction to place it again. If you wish to remove the blue X (i.e., not use thisfeature), place the cross reference position at the symbol reference point (redtriangle). When the symbol is saved, the blue X will be removed.

11. Store the symbol. Select the Save function from the Manage > Symbol menuto store the symbol. The software will prompt you to “Define first corner” and“Define opposite corner” which means that you should define a window aroundall the elements that you wish to store as the symbol. The software will displaythe message “The symbol was added to the catalog.”

All symbols created by the user are stored automatically in the first symbolcatalog defined by the catalog path statement in file ECSCAD.CFG.

Note You can cancel the symbol creation process at any time by selecting the Manage >Symbol > Cancel function. This will abort the symbol creation.


6-18

Entering Part Number During Symbol Creation (for automatic assignment)

You can enter a part number during symbol creation so that this part number will beautomatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed. Use the followingprocedure:

1. During the symbol creation process (after the New/Modify Symbol dialog boxhas been completed) select the Draw > Text function.

2. In the Text field of the Text dialog box, enter the desired part number.

Note This number must exactly match the number used in the parts database (casesensitive). None of the text parameters (Height, Angle, etc.) need be set; the partnumber will be displayed with the same parameters as the device ID (except forcolor).

0.150Height: 23.500Position X:

15.000Position Y:0Angle:


Language Text

Text

Function Text

Select...

Select...

EnterPart Number

Here

Text


3. Select the OK button. The software will prompt you to select a position for thetext. Select any position (the part number will be automatically positionedbelow the device ID when the symbol is placed).

4. The Text Attribute Definition dialog box will appear. Select the Attribute–Activate checkbox and select “Part Number” from the attribute list.


6-19

Part Number

Symbol Text:

Address


Activate Activate

No: 10

SelectActivate

checkbox

Select“Part Number”

From List

800T–A1D1

I/O Text


5. Select the OK button. The part number will appear on the drawing.

6. Complete the symbol creation and save the symbol.

When you place a symbol that has had a part number assigned during symbolcreation, the part number will automatically appear in the Assigned Part Numbersarea of the Device ID Assignment dialog box. If desired, you can delete the partnumber by clicking on it. You can then search the database for a different partnumber by selecting the Search button.

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Part Number

Suppress Device ID

OK Cancel Help...

Duplicate Device ID

Search Device ID

Search...

Search...

Multiple Placement

Search...

Addit.Part Number



800T–A1D1

Part NumberAppears Here. Delete ByClicking OnPart Number.


6-20

The part number will appear below the symbol’s device ID (assuming the partnumber display has been activated with the Tools > System Settings > DisplaySettings function).


6-21

Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File

Graphics from existing AutoCAD DWG files can be converted into RSWiresymbols.

Note DWG files must be in a format compatible with AutoCAD Release 14 or AutoCAD2000, depending on the Version of AutoCAD under which you are running thesoftware.

Use the following steps:

1. In RSWire, display a blank drawing page with the Online checkbox turned off.(Use the Manage > Page > Modify function to access this checkbox.)

2. Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. Enter a symbol nameand description in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box. Choose an appropriatesymbol group. (For more information on this part of the symbol creationprocess, see page 6-8.) Select OK to continue.

3. Define a reference point for the symbol. You can redefine this point later, ifdesired.

4. Bring in the AutoCAD drawing using the Insert > Block > Insert function.Select an insertion point on the drawing page.

Note RSWire AutoCAD add–on users can also use the command line commandDDINSERT.

5. It is not necessary to explode the inserted drawing elements unless there areitems within blocks that you wish to change or remove. Explode the DWGelements with the Insert > Block > Explode function.

6. As with normal symbol creation, add connection points, device ID, text, etc.Redefine the reference point if desired. Remember that connection points mustbe placed on a grid line.

7. Store the symbol: select Manage > Symbol > Save and define a windowaround the symbol elements.


6-22

DXF Import

The File > DXF Import function allows the importing of drawings in the DXFformat.

File � DXF Import � Save Current Page� New DXF Page� DXF Import� Save as DWG� Save as Block

Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save Current Page function will save andclose current page. (You must close the current RSWire page and create a blankAutoCAD page on which to place the DXF drawing.)

Selecting the File > DXF Import > New DXF Page function will bring up a blankAutoCAD page.

Selecting the File > DXF Import > DXF Import function allows the user to pick aDXF file and open it in the current page.

Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save as DWG function will save the currentpage as a .DWG file.

Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save as Block function will group all itemswithin the current page and save them as a block.

Note To ungroup items grouped with the File > DXF Import > Save as Block function,use the Insert > Block > Explode function.

Rules for DXF Import:

1. Save and close any current RSWire page with the File > DXF Import > SaveCurrent Page function.

2. Create a blank AutoCAD page with the File > DXF Import > New DXF Pagefunction.

Use the following procedure:

1. Select the File > DXF Import > DXF Import function.

2. Select the DXF file that you want to import.


6-23

3. Save the imported DXF drawing as a DWG file (File > DXF Import > Save asDWG) or as an AutoCAD block (File > DXF Import > Save as Block).

You can insert the saved DWG file by using the Insert > Block > Insert function.


6-24

Symbol Creation Examples

Creating an Example Parent Symbol

Certain symbols can have a “parent/child” relationship with other symbols in aschematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have relatedcontacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. The child symbols are given thesame device ID as the parent, and the system can automatically provide crossreferencing. The system requires a “Device” definition that establishes which typeand number of child symbols are associated with the parent. This section and thefollowing sections describe how to create your own parent symbols, child symbols,cross reference symbols, and device definitions.

Use the following procedure to create a parent relay symbol called XRELAY.

1. Display a blank drawing page.

2. Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).

3. Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools >System Settings > Grid Settings tab).

4. Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.

5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XRELAY . Press the <Enter> key.

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:


HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.

XRELAY

Example parent symbol

SelectPreferredDirection

List...

New/Modify Symbol


6-25

6. Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually theorientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC orVertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.

7. Enter the description “Example parent symbol.”

8. Select symbol group PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.

9. Select the OK button to continue.

10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a JIC symbolreference point on a 0.5 inch grid line (symbol should be 0.5 inches wide,overall). Select a IEC symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line (symbolshould be 10 mm wide, overall). Zoom in for a better view of the work area.

11. Draw reference lines to mark the width of the symbol (this will help when wechange the size of the grid).

ref. lines

.5 in. apart

ref. lines5 mm apart

JIC Symbol IEC Symbol

12. Set grid to 0.05 inch (JIC only).

13. As shown above, draw a circle 0.3 inch in diameter for JIC. (Draw a 5 mm by10 mm rectangle for IEC.) Draw 0.1 inch lines on each side of the circle. (Drawa 5 mm line from the bottom center of the rectangle for IEC.)

14. Delete the reference lines.

15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will promptyou to “Define Device ID position.” Select an appropriate device ID referencepoint above the symbol for JIC (left of the symbol for IEC). Enter the device IDXRE for JIC (–XK for IEC).


6-26

JIC Symbol IEC Symbol

Device IDPosition

–XKXRE


17. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function.

18. Locate the left connection point for JIC (top connection point for IEC) at thesymbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point oftext.” Select a point below the connection point for JIC (upper right of theconnection point for IEC). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog boxappears, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field and select the OK buttonto continue (no text will be entered at this time).

19. Locate the right connection point on the right side of the symbol (bottomconnection point on the bottom for IEC). Select a point below the connectionpoint for JIC (lower right of the connection point for IEC). Again, enter noconnection point text.

Connection PointPosition

Connection PointText Position

JIC Parent Symbol IEC Parent Symbol


6-27

20. (Optional.) If you wish the position of the cross reference information to befixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select apoint near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the crossreference will be offset from the device ID position and can be adjusted usingthe Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Manage > Project Settings >General Defaults function.

21. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of thesymbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Thesymbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.


6-28

Creating an Example Child Symbol

Use the following procedure to create a child contact symbol called XNO for theXRELAY parent symbol created in the previous section.



3. Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools >System Settings > Grid Setting function).


5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XNO. Press the <Enter> key.

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:


HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.

XNO

Example child symbol


List...

New/Modify Symbol

6. Symbols are drawn based on how the wire passes through the symbol. Usuallythe orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC orVertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.

7. Enter the description “Example child symbol”.

8. Select symbol group PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.



6-29

10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a JIC symbolreference point on a 0.5 inch grid line (symbol should be 0.5 inches wide,overall). Select a IEC symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line (symbolshould be 10 mm height). Zoom in for a better view of the work area.

11. Draw reference lines to mark the width of the symbol (this will help when wechange the size of the grid).

Ref. Lines

IEC Child SymbolJIC Child Symbol

Ref. Lines

12. Set grid to 0.05 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC.

13. As shown above, draw a pair of vertical lines about 0.3 inches apart. Drawhorizontal 0.1 inch lines on each side of the vertical lines.

14. Delete the reference lines.

15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will promptyou to “Define Device ID position.” Select an appropriate device ID referencepoint above the symbol for JIC (left of the symbol for IEC). Enter the device IDXRE for JIC (–XK for IEC).

Note A child symbol must have same device ID as the parent symbol.




6-30

IEC Child SymbolJIC Child Symbol

Connection PointLocation

Connection PointText Location

–XK

XRE

18. Locate the left connection point for JIC (top connection point for IEC) at thesymbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point oftext.” Select a point below the connection point for JIC (upper right of theconnection point for IEC). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog boxappears, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field and select the OK buttonto continue (no text will be entered at this time).

19. Locate the right connection point on the right side of the symbol (bottomconnection point on the bottom for IEC). Select a point below the connectionpoint for JIC (lower right of the connection point for IEC). Again, enter noconnection point text.

20. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference appears at the childsymbol. If you wish the position of this information to be fixed, select theManage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near thesymbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference at thechild symbol will be offset from the device ID position and can be adjustedusing the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Manage > ProjectSettings > General Defaults function.

21. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of thesymbol. Define a window around the symbol elements.

Note Make sure complete text elements are included within the window around the symbolelements.

The message “The symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.


6-31

Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol

In this section we will create a cross reference symbol that will appear beside theXRELAY coil symbol and indicate where its contacts (child symbols) are located.

A number of cross reference symbols are included with the software (with namessuch as Q22, Q42, etc.), but you may need to make your own for specialrequirements.




3. Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools >System Settings > Grid Settings function).


5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCROSS (the name of our examplesymbol). Press the <Enter> key.

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:

Snapmode: Endpoint

HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

PS3 Cross Reference Symbol

XCROSS

Example cross reference symbol


List...

New/Modify Symbol

6. Symbols are drawn based on how the wire passes through the symbol. Usuallythe orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC orVertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.


6-32

7. Enter the description “Example cross reference symbol”.

8. Select symbol group PS3 Cross Reference Symbol.


10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbolreference point on a grid line. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.

IEC Cross Reference SymbolJIC Cross Reference Symbol

Reference Point

11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw boxes as shown.

12. Set grid to 0.05 inch (JIC only).

13. Use drawing lines to create the relay contact symbol as shown.

IEC Cross Reference SymbolJIC Cross Reference Symbol

Relay Contact Symbol Relay Contact Symbol


6-33

14. Using the Draw > Text function, place the texts “?1” and “?2” (separately) asshown. This text will later hold cross reference information.

?1 ?2 ?1

?2

JIC Cross Reference Symbol IEC Cross Reference Symbol

Symbol Text Symbol Text

Note If you wish to make a cross reference symbol that includes normally closed symbolsas well as normally open, you could simply add another row (or rows) of boxes,draw a normally closed symbol, and place additional text (?3, ?4, etc.). Theinformation that appears in the ? text locations is determined in the Device TypeNew/Modify dialog box (see following section).

Note Some applications require that the cross reference text be underlined for normallyclosed contacts. Add “%%U” before text “?1”, “?2”, etc., for cross references thatare normally closed only. Do not add “%%U” before the text of normally opencontacts. This is usually done when no open or closed symbol graphics are used inthe cross reference.

When prompted for an attribute for these texts, select the OK button (noattribute).

15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of thesymbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Symboladded to the catalog” will be displayed.


6-34

Creating an Example Device Type Definition

In the previous sections, we have created a parent symbol, a child symbol, and across reference symbol. We now need to tie these three together somehow so thatRSWire knows which child symbol(s) are associated with a parent symbol andwhich cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol.

This is accomplished by defining a device type. A device type is a combination ofparent symbol, child symbol(s) and cross reference symbol.

The same symbols can be assigned to different devices. For example, you can havevarious devices to represent relays with different combinations of normally openand normally closed contacts. Or, you can create devices for a relay and a motorstarter that both use the same cross reference symbol.

When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask for its devicetype. Once the software knows the device type, it can also perform error–checkingfunctions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have beenused.

For more information on creating devices, see page 6-89.


6-35

We will use the following procedure to define a device called X20.

1. Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. The Device TypeNew/Modify dialog box will appear.

Symbol Name Connection Points

Device Type New/Modify

Parent XRELAY A BChild 1 XNO 1 2Child 2 XNO 3 4Child 3Child 4Child 5Child 6Child 7Child 8Child 9

OK Cancel Help Description...

Device Type X20

Relay, I/O, PlugGroup

Search

Cross Ref. XCROSS

Absolute Position

0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000Delta X

Note Example shown is in the JIC format. Same principles apply to IEC.

2. In the Device Type field, enter the name X20. Press the <Enter> key.

3. Select the Description button and enter “Example device” in the firstdescription field. Select OK. This description will appear on device listings.

4. In the Group field leave the default selection Relay, I/O, Plug.

5. Enter XRELAY for Parent symbol name. This is the symbol name of the parentsymbol of the device.


6-36

6. Enter XNO for Child 1 and Child 2. Enter the names of child symbols in theorder in which they will be used in the cross reference symbol (i.e., the firstchild corresponds to the “?1” text in the cross reference symbol, the secondchild corresponds to “?2”, etc.).

7. Enter the connection point text shown in the previous dialog box (A B, 1 2, 3 4). Optional connection point text can be entered in these fieldswhich will overwrite any connection point text that was specified when theparent or child symbol was created. Separate each connection point text with aspace. If more than two texts are entered, they will all be displayed when thesymbol is placed, and the unwanted texts can be deleted at that time.

In the example, the connection points for the relay coil will be labeled A and B.The connection points for the first contact will be labeled 1 and 2. Connectionpoints for the second contact will be labeled 3 and 4.

8. Enter XCROSS for the Cross Ref. field. This is the name of the cross referencesymbol that will hold the cross reference information for the parent/childsymbols (we created this symbol in the previous section).

Note If you are creating a device type for which there will be no cross reference symbol,enter the name DUMMY in the Cross Ref. field.


6-37

9. Enter 1.50 for dx (delta x) and –0.5 for dy (delta y) for JIC values. The valuesentered in these fields determine where the cross reference symbol will appearon the drawing in relation to the parent symbol. Refer to the followingillustration. The distances entered are between the reference point of the parentsymbol and the reference point of the cross reference symbol. (If the AbsolutePosition checkbox is selected, these values are measured from the drawingorigin point (0, 0) rather than from the parent symbol.)

Note For IEC, enter 0 for dx, 75 for dy, and select Absolute Position checkbox. The IECcross reference symbol will start at 75 mm from the bottom of the page.

dx=1.50”

dy=–0.5”

dx=0 mm

dy=75 mm

JIC Distance Values IEC Distance Values

Bottom of Page

10. Select OK to complete the creation of the device type.


6-38

Testing the Device Type – To test the operation of the example device type, crossreference, and parent/child symbols created thus far, use the following procedure:

Note Example shown is in the JIC format. Same principles apply to IEC.

1. Use a drawing page with the Online function turned on.

2. On one line place the parent symbol, XRELAY .

3. Accept the prompted device ID by selecting OK in the Device ID Assignmentdialog box (the format of the device ID will vary according to how your projectwas set up.

4. When prompted for a device type, enter X20. The connection points dialog boxwill appear on the screen, prompting the connection point text. Select OK tocontinue. The parent symbol should appear on the screen with the crossreference symbol beside it.

5. On another line of the drawing, place the child symbol, XNO.

6. Give the child symbol the same device ID as the parent symbol. The connectionpoints dialog box will appear on the screen, prompting the connection pointtext. Select OK to continue.

The cross reference symbol should indicate the location (line number) of the childsymbol.

XRE1

XRE1

114

(line 112)

(line 114)

A B

1 2

A1

A24

3

13 14

–XK

14

13

–XK

JIC Device IDs IEC Device IDs

Bottom of Page


6-39

Creating an Example Programmable Controller (Parent) Symbol

Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are a part of many control systems. WithRSWire, symbols can be created that represent PLC input and output modules. Thesymbol can be designed to prompt the user for information such as rack and modulenumber, and automatically place address numbers and descriptive text.

In this section we will create an example PLC symbol like the one shown belowcalled XPLC8.

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

L1

PLC102

RACK: 1MODULE: 0

L2

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

Device ID

Rack AndModule Group

Terminal Numbers

I/O Addresses

1000

1001

1002

1003

1004

1005

1006

1007

Limit sw. 3

Limit sw. 4

Limit sw. 5

Limit sw. 6

Limit sw. 7

Descriptive Text

Limit sw. 2


6-40

DIGITAL INPUT MODULE 220 VAC6ES5 436–4UA11

F+

F–

1N

11.0

0

11.0

5

11.0

4

11.0

3

11.0

2

11.0

1

PLC1

F+

F–

1N 6 8 10 161412

=M–S4

=M–S3

=M–S2

=M–S1

=M–S8

=M–S7

P22

Device ID

Rack AndModule/Slot Group

Terminal Numbers

I/O Addresses

Descriptive Text

=M–S5

=M–S6

This symbol is considered a parent symbol. Child symbols for the individual I/Opoints can be located throughout the schematics in the same project.

The following procedure describes how to create a symbol for an eight point PLCinput module.


2. Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).


4. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XPLC8 (this is the symbol name wewill use for this particular example). Press the <Enter> key.


6-41

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:

Snapmode: Endpoint

HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...


List...

New/Modify Symbol

PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.

XPLC8

Example 8 point PLC input module


6. Enter the description “Example 8 point PLC input module”.

7. Select symbol group PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.


9. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbolreference point on a 0.5 inch (5 mm for IEC) grid line. Zoom in for a betterview.

10. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw the sides of a rectangle about2 x 9 inches (it must be long enough for the input lines and wide enough for theaddress text). If necessary the rectangle can be redrawn before saving thesymbol. If desired, use the circle and drawing line functions to draw terminalscrew heads. You will have to select a smaller grid size to do this, but place thescrews on your standard schematic line spacing. Leave about 1 inch (25 mm)free at the top of the box for rack and module information.


6-42

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

Note Text Label Origin – When placing text in this or any symbol, it is important todecide how you want the text to appear on the drawing in relation to the referencepoint selected for the text. By selecting an appropriate label origin before enteringthe text, you can determine whether the text will appear above, below, to the left, tothe right, or centered on the origin point. By selecting an appropriate label origin,you can prevent one text from overwriting another or extending outside its intendedlocation.

11. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will promptyou to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point abovethe symbol. Enter the device ID “PLC”.

12. Use the Draw > Text function to enter the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” atthe top of the symbol. After selecting the reference point for each word you willbe prompted for text attributes. Simply select the OK button.


6-43

RACK:

MODULE:

?

?

PLCDevice ID

Standard TextAttribute Text

13. To the right of the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” use the Draw > Textfunction to enter a “?”. After selecting the reference point for each “?” you willbe prompted for text attributes. In the attribute dialog box, select the Attribute –Activate checkbox and from the attribute list select “Rack:” for the “?” that youplace next to the word RACK, and “Module” for the one next to MODULE.

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text

No: 000 +


Activate Activate

No:

?Select

“Activate”checkbox

Select“Module”or “Rack”

PLC Function TextRack:Module:Combination of attributesReserved


14. Use the Draw > Text function to place a series of “?” characters beside eachscrew location. For each “?”, select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox andthe Address checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. These texts will displaythe individual I/O addresses when the symbol is placed in a drawing.


6-44

Important You must place these texts in the order they will be addressed and you must numbereach of these attributes the Number field of the text attribute dialog box startingwith 0 as shown below. If you lose track of which number you have assigned to thesetexts use the Edit > Text > Modify function and select the text in question. Theassigned number will be displayed in the Attribute Number field of the Modify Textdialog box. Internally, RSWire assigns address numbers to the “300” range, so thetext codes displayed here will start at 300, rather than 00.

Select“Activate”

and“Address”

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

RACK: ? MODULE: ?

PLC

Number the first “?” 0, the next one 1, etc.

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text

No: 300 +


Activate Activate

No:

0

?



6-45

15. Enter another series of ”?” attribute texts to the right of the module. Theseattribute will contain PLC function text. Therefore for each “?”, select the I/OAttribute–Activate checkbox and the I/O Text checkbox in the text attributedialog box. Like the address texts, each of these must be numbered sequentiallystarting with 0.

If you lose track of which number you have assigned to these texts use theModify > Text function and select the text in question. The assigned numberwill be displayed in the Attribute Number field of the Text dialog box.Internally, RSWire assigns function text numbers to the “600” range, so the textcodes displayed here will start at 600, rather than 00.


6-46


and“I/O Text”

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

RACK: ? MODULE: ?

PLC

Number The First “?” 0, The Next One 1,

etc.?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text

No: 600 +

Visible

Hidden


Activate Activate

No:

0

?


16. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. Place a connectionpoint beside each screw symbol. Be sure the connection points match yourstandard line spacing. Place the connection point text below each screw.


6-47

Important You must place connection points in the same order as the I/O addresses. If yoursymbol includes additional non–addressable terminals such as hots or commons(our example does not) the connection points for these terminals must be assignedlast regardless of where they are located on the module.

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

RACK: ? MODULE: ?

PLC

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

Place This Connection Point First

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

Connection Point Text Locations

17. Store the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define awindow around the symbol elements.

Create PLC Device Type – Before the symbol will function correctly, we mustcreate a device type that specifies the cross reference and child symbols to beassociated with the parent symbol.

1. Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. In the Device Typefield, enter the name XPLC8 (we will give the device type the same name asthe parent to make it easier to remember). Press the <Enter> key.


6-48



Parent XPLC8 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07Child 1 INPUT 00Child 2 INPUT 01Child 3 INPUT 02Child 4 INPUT 03Child 5 INPUT 04Child 6 INPUT 05Child 7 INPUT 06Child 8 INPUT 07Child 9


Device Type

Group

Search

Cross Ref.

Absolute Position

XPLC8

Relay, I/O, Plug

XPLC 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000Delta X

2. Enter the information shown in the example above.

a. For Cross Ref. enter XPLC . This is a standard PLC cross referenceprovided with RSWire.

b. In the Connection Points field enter the same series of connection pointdesignations we placed as connection point text in the symbol.

c. In the Child symbol fields, enter the symbol name INPUT. This is a PLCchild symbol provided with RSWire (you can also create custom childsymbols). These child symbols can be placed throughout the schematics.They can be given the same address as the parent and assigned one of theterminal numbers.

3. Select OK to save the device.


6-49

Testing the PLC Symbol – To test the functioning of the PLC symbol use thefollowing steps:

1. Make settings: The Tools > Project Settings > Programmable ControllerSettings function allows various PLC related parameters to be set such as octalvs. decimal addressing, the word/bit separator character for addresses, etc. Seepage 7-37 for more information.

2. Select the symbol using the Insert > Symbol by Name function. Enter thesymbol name XPLC8 (or whatever other name you gave the symbol).

3. Place the symbol (page must be Online). The Device ID Assignment dialog boxwill appear. Accept the prompted device ID or enter a different one.

4. The Device Type dialog box will appear. Enter the device type XPLC8.

5. The Connection Points dialog box will appear, showing the device ID, theparent and child symbol names, and the connection point designations. SelectOK to continue.


Connection Points

XPLC8 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07INPUT 1INPUT 2INPUT 3INPUT 4INPUT 5INPUT 6INPUT 6INPUT 7INPUT 8

OK Cancel Help

Device ID: =LINE1+NO_LOC–PLC377

Device Item: XPLC8

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07




6-50

6. The Programmable Controller Text Definition dialog box will appear. Thisdialog box allows you to set rack and module numbers, the addressing numbers,and function text for each point on the module. (See next page.)

Device ID: PLC377

Module: 02

Rack: 01

I0102/00

I0102/01

I0102/02

I0102/03

Limit switch 1

Pushbutton 1 – Start

0

1

2

3

Address

I0102/04

I0102/05

I0102/06

I0102/07

4

5

6

7

OK CancelNext Previous I/O Text

Function Text

I/O Text Definition

a. Enter the Module and Rack numbers in the appropriate fields.

b. In the Address fields, it is only necessary to enter an address in the firstfield: once you move the cursor to another field, the remaining addresseswill be filled in automatically, continuing from the first. If you wish to use aword/bit address, use the separator character that was specified in theAddress Separator field of the Programmable Controller Settings dialogbox (Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settingsfunction). In the example above, “/” is the separator character.

c. In each Function Text field you can enter descriptive text. Two examplesare entered above.

d. If you select the I/O Text button, entries for the Function Text fields willbe taken from an external file. This filename is specified in the Active InputFile field of the Tools > Project Settings > Programmable ControllerSettings tab. See page 7-38.


6-51

7. Select the OK button. The module symbol should appear on the drawing withthe appropriate Rack and Module numbers, addresses, and function texts.


6-52

Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (JIC Format)

RSWire includes several PLC child symbols (symbol names: INPUT, OUTPUT).These can be used to represent individual PLC I/O points throughout the schematic,as opposed to showing all wiring connected directly to a single parent symbol.

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

L1 L2

Device ID


I/O Address

Function Text

Limit switch 2

IAD343

01 I:000/01

343

Cross Reference to Parent

LS103 TB2:2

JIC Format

Use the following procedure to create a PLC (input) child symbol:




4. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XINPUT (this is the symbol namewe will use for this particular example. Press the <Enter> key.


6-53

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:


HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

XINPUT

Example PLC child input

New/Modify Symbol

List...




5. Select the Snapmode:Nearest Endpoint checkbox. (The symbol will beautomatically positioned at the end of the wire.)


7. Enter the description “Example PLC child input”.



10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbolreference point on a 0.5 inch grid line. Zoom in for a better view.

11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw lines to form a box about 1.5x 0.5 inches. Draw a line to divide the box into two parts: one part to hold theconnection point designation and a larger part to hold the full I/O address. Ifnecessary the box can be redrawn before saving the symbol. You will have toselect a smaller grid size to place some elements, but be aware of yourschematic line spacing when placing connection points.


6-54

12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will promptyou to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point abovethe symbol. Enter the device ID “PLC”.

Note This default device ID tag can be overwritten when the symbol is placed.


14. Locate the connection point at the symbol reference point. You will beprompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point inside the smallerpart of the box. When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears,select the OK button to continue. There are no other connection points on thesymbol.

?

PLCReference Point

Connection PointConnection Point Text

15. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference (to the parentsymbol) appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of thisinformation to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Positionfunction and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, theposition of the cross reference at the child symbol can be adjusted using theDevice ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Tools > Project Settings > GeneralDefaults function.


6-55

16. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character in the larger part of thebox (see following figure). (Be aware of how the label origin value you selectfor the text will affect the placement of information later.) Select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in thetext attribute dialog box. This text will display the individual I/O address whenthe symbol is placed in a drawing.


and“Address”

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text

No: 300 +


Activate Activate

No:

0

?

? ?

Place TextPLC


17. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character below the box. Select theAttribute–Activate checkbox and the PLC Function Text selection in the textattribute pull down list. This text will display the I/O function text from theparent symbol when the symbol is placed in a drawing.


6-56

Select“Activate”checkbox

Select“PLC

FunctionText”

? ?Place Text

?

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text

No: 000 +


Activate Activate

No: 2

?

PLC Function TextRack:Module:Combination of attributes

PLC




6-57

Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (IEC Format)

RSWire includes several PLC child symbols (symbol names: INPUT, OUTPUT).These can be used to represent individual PLC I/O points throughout the schematic,as opposed to showing all wiring connected directly to a single parent symbol.

Text Label–A1.1

–X1

I0.00

INPUTCP:00

Sta

rt M

otor

PLC Function Text

–S713

14

IEC Format

Device ID


I/O Address

Function Text

Cross Reference to Parent

1


6-58

Use the following procedure to create a PLC (input) child symbol:




4. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XINPUT (this is the symbol namewe will use for this particular example. Press the <Enter> key.

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:


HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

XINPUT

Example PLC child input

New/Modify Symbol

List...




5. Select the Snapmode:Endpoint checkbox. (The symbol will be automaticallypositioned at the end of the wire.)


7. Enter the description “Example PLC child input”.




6-59

10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbolreference point on a 5 mm grid line. Zoom in for a better view.

11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw lines to form a box about 20x 15 mm. Draw a line to divide the box into two parts: one part to hold the I/Oaddress and a larger part to hold the full connection point text . If necessary thebox can be redrawn before saving the symbol. You will have to select a smallergrid size to place some elements, but be aware of your schematic line spacingwhen placing connection points.

Reference Point

12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will promptyou to “Define Device ID position.”

13. Select a device ID reference point below the symbol.

14. Enter the device ID “PLC”.

Note This default device ID tag can be overwritten when the symbol is placed.


16. Locate the connection point at the symbol reference point. You will beprompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point inside the smallerpart of the box.


6-60

Reference Point

?


Connection Point

PLC

17. When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the OKbutton to continue. There are no other connection points on the symbol.

18. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference (to the parentsymbol) appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of thisinformation to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Positionfunction and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, theposition of the cross reference at the child symbol can be adjusted using theDevice ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Tools > Project Settings > GeneralDefaults function.

19. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character in the larger part of thebox (see following figure). (Be aware of how the label origin value you selectfor the text will affect the placement of information later.)

20. Select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in thetext attribute dialog box. This text will display the individual I/O address whenthe symbol is placed in a drawing.


6-61

?

I/O Address?

PLC


and“Address”

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text

No: 300 +


Activate Activate

No:

0

?


21. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character below the box. Select theAttribute–Activate checkbox and the PLC Function Text selection in the textattribute pull down list. This text will display the I/O function text from theparent symbol when the symbol is placed in a drawing.


6-62

?

I/O Address?

PLC

Select“Activate”checkbox

Select“PLC

FunctionText”

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text

No: 000 +


Activate Activate

No: 2

?

PLC Function TextRack:Module:Combination of attributes




6-63

Creating an Example Terminal Symbol

A number of terminal symbols are provided with RSWire. The user may wish tocreate custom terminal symbols. This section describes how to create an exampleterminal symbol called XTERM.




3. Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch (use the Tools > System Settings > GridSettings tab).


5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XTERM . Press the <Enter> key.

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:


HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

XTERM

Example terminal symbol

New/Modify Symbol

List...


TS1 Terminal Block

6. Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Exampleterminal symbol.” Select symbol group TS1 Terminal Block.



6-64

8. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbolreference point where two 0.5 inch grid lines intersect. Zoom in for a betterview of the work area.

9. Set the grid to 0.05 inch.

10. Draw a small circle, about 0.2 inches in diameter.

11. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. When prompted to “DefineDevice ID position,” select a point above the symbol.

12. In the Device ID Parameter dialog box, enter TB in the Device ID field. Enter alabel origin of 6 (Middle Right). Select OK to continue.


14. When prompted to “Locate connection point,” select the point at the center ofthe circle.

TB

Device ID Connection Point 1 Text Origin Point

?

15. When prompted to “Define reference point of text”, select a point to the right ofthe device ID (the text for connection point 1 will be part of the device ID).


6-65

16. In the Connection Point Parameters dialog box leave the “?” in the ConnectionPoint field and enter a label origin of 4 (Middle Left).

In the Connection Point Parameters dialog there are also four radio buttons todetermine the type of connection point for terminal symbols: Undefined,Internal, External, or Jumper. These determine how the connectioninformation is displayed in the terminal plan editor. The default is Undefined.For more information see page 11-3.

17. Select OK to continue.

Note If you activate the Terminal=Wire Number checkbox in the Tools > Wire Number >Automatic function dialog box, the wire number will replace the terminal number atthe text reference point of the first connection point (indicated by the “?” in theabove figure).

18. Locate four more connection points at the top, bottom, left and right side of thecircle (i.e. at the 0, 90, 180, and 270 degree positions of the circle). For thesefour connection points, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field of theConnection Point Parameters dialog box. You can select a reference point fortext anywhere for each of these points (there will be no text).

TB ?

Note Because of the defaults that the system will use to interpret terminal symbolconnection points, it is best to place these five points in the following order (seepage 11-4 for more information).

Connection Point Order

12

3

4

5

13

4

5

2

JIC IEC

19. Store the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define awindow around the symbol elements.


6-66

By placing the five connection points as shown, it is possible to connect wires to theterminal symbol from left, right, above, and below. When a wire is drawn over thesymbol (or when the symbol is placed on a wire) the wire will break at the two outerconnection points.

When the terminal symbol is placed, you can specify in the Device ID field aterminal strip number and an individual terminal number separated by a colon. Forexample TB1:1. The next terminal symbol placed will be automatically promptedfor TB1:2, then TB1:3, etc., until you enter a new terminal strip number. You canalso use letters for the individual terminal designations.

Creating Pin Charts

A pin chart is a combination of a plug symbol, pin symbols, and a device(parent/child) relationship between them that provides cross referencing.

The plug symbol is placed somewhere on a drawing page and displays crossreference information (such as page/line number) that indicates where each pin islocated in the project drawings.

The pin and plug symbols are part of the “TS” symbol groups (when a symbol iscreated it is assigned to a symbol group such as general symbols, parent symbols,etc.). With pin charts, this means you can have cross referencing like a parentsymbol and terminal plan connection information like a terminal symbol.

The characteristics of “TS” symbol groups are:

1. They allow the circuit’s potential (wire number) to flow through the symbol.

2. They are connection devices and the user may assign a cable to the pin (child)symbol.

3. If they are to be treated the same as a terminal symbol, the user may work in theTerminal Plan area of the program. The discipline (prompts, menu picks, listingformats, etc.) of the program may need to be changed to reflect the Pin Planinstead of the Terminal Plan. The end result is a connection symbol with theability to graphically show all target destinations off the symbol’s deviceidentification.

In addition, symbols from groups TS4, TS5, and TS6 have these characteristics ofparent and child symbols:


6-67

1. They allow a cross referencing relationship between graphical entities on theschematic pages. The plug symbol may be located on a page, while all itsassociated pin symbols are placed throughout the entire schematic. Much likethe coil–to–contact cross referencing relationship, the pin chart will display thepage / line number of all associated pin symbols.

2. They allow the parent component of the relationship to receive a part numberfrom the parts database. The user may use all variables associated to the partsdatabase.

3. The symbols then will be included in a device relationship which the userdefines. Through error checking, this device relationship will prevent the userfrom using the same pin number twice and assigning too many pin numbers tothe selected plug.

Creating a pin chart involves creating the three components: pin symbol, plugsymbol, cross reference symbol, and creating the device relationship between them.If you are unfamiliar with the basic process of creating symbols and devices inRSWire, refer to the previous subsections.

Plug Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function,create a parent symbol (Plug ) used for cross referencing. The symbol can be createdgraphically as a 8 pin “D” type plug end. Label the pin numbers A1 through A8.Use the following symbol creation criteria.

� Symbol Name: PLUGA

� Layout Direction: Horizontal

� Description: Parent symbol for pin charts

� Symbol Group: TS4

The symbol will require a device ID such as “PLUG”. Connection points withassociated text are not necessary. This symbol is primarily used to display the pageand line number of its associated pins across the schematic. Make the circles in theplug large enough to hold cross reference data (circles 0.6 inch in diameter will hold0.1 inch text).


6-68

A5

A1

A6

A2

A7

A3

A8

A4

Plug

Cross Ref Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modifyfunction, create a cross reference symbol which will display Page / Line Number ofchild components. The symbol can be created using only 8 text variables, and nographic entities. The variables are arranged so that the appropriate cross referenceinformation will appear directly inside of the pin holes of the plug symbol. Be awareof the label origins and text size to ensure proper fit. Use the following symbolcreation criteria:

� Symbol Name: XPLUG

� Layout direction: Horizontal

� Description: Cross reference symbol for pin charts

� Symbol Group: TS6

The symbol will require no device ID, and no connection points with associatedtext. The symbol will only be used for cross referencing the pin symbol to the plugsymbol. The reference point of this symbol should match the reference point of theplug symbol so the cross references will be positioned correctly. Use the Draw >Text function to enter “?1” through “?8”.

?1

?5

?6

?2

?7

?3

?8

?4

Cross Reference SymbolFor Plug Symbol


6-69

Pin Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function,create a child symbol (Pin) used for cross referencing. Use the following symbolcreation criteria.

� Symbol Name: PIN

� Layout Direction: Horizontal

� Description: Child symbol for pin charts

� Symbol Main Group: TS5

Give the pin symbol the same device ID tag used by the parent symbol (“PLUG”).For the first (right) connection point, place the connection point text next to thedevice ID and enter a “?” for the text. For the second connection point, place thetext reference point anywhere and enter no text.

The pin device ID is handled much like a terminal symbol; the device ID tag servesas the plug identifier, and the first connection point text serves as the pin numberinside of the plug. Be aware of the label origin of the connection point text so that itdoes not run into the symbol.

PLUG

Device ID Connection Point TextFor Connection Point 1

?= Symbol Reference Point

= Connection Points

Device Type Creation – Finally, create a device type relationship between thepreviously created plug symbol, pin symbol, and cross reference symbol using theManage > Device Type > New/Modify function. Allow the relationship to contain8 pin symbols, with associated connection point text calling out the pin numberbeing used. Use the following criteria.


6-70



Parent PLUGAChild 1 PIN A1Child 2 PIN A2Child 3 PIN A3Child 4 PIN A4Child 5 PIN A5Child 6 PIN A6Child 7 PIN A7Child 8 PIN A8Child 9


Device Type PLUGA


Search

Cross Ref. XPLUG

Absolute Position


Pin Chart Usage – You can test the pin chart on a drawing page (it must be online).Place the PLUGA plug symbol anywhere on a page. When prompted for the devicename, enter PLUGA. Then place pin symbols elsewhere in the drawing, assigningthe same device ID as the plug symbol and with connection point text of A1, A2,etc. The location of the pins will appear in the plug symbol as shown below.


6-71

Plug 418


6-72

Creating Form C Contacts

There are two methods of creating and displaying Form C contacts in RSWire:

1. Create a child symbol with three connection points

2. Use two child symbols that share a common connection point designation

The first method reduces the likelihood of connection errors (e.g. different wiresconnected to the same connection point). The second method allows more flexibilityin where the two contacts are placed in the schematic. However the system cannotdetermine that both common connections share the same wire number.

The two methods are described in the following sections.


6-73

Method 1: Create a child symbol with three connection points

This method allows creation of Form C contact symbols which are graphicallyshown as a single symbol with three connection points (see examples below). Thethree connection points are indicated by the 1, 2 and 3 designations.

CR1

2

1

3

2

1

3

CR1

The steps to implement this method are:

1. Create the child symbol. See page 6-6 for the symbol creation procedure.When you define the symbol, select the PS2 symbol group (Child symbol withcross reference). Assign three connection points as indicated by the “x’s” in theabove figure (remember the order in which you assign them). Assign a deviceID tag that corresponds to the desired parent symbol (such as “CR” for a relay).Use the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function to select a positionfor cross reference information.

2. Create a device type that associates the Form C child symbol with the desiredparent symbol. See page 6-89 for device type creation procedure. Enter threeconnection point designations for each Form C child symbol in the device (seeexample figure on next page). In the example, the device type has been named2C, and the Form C child symbol name (the symbol created in step 1) isFORMC.

Important The order of the connection point designations entered in the Device TypeNew/Modify dialog box must match the order in which the connection points weredefined when the child symbol was created.


6-74



Parent CR 10 11Child 1 FORMC 1 2 3Child 2 FORMC 4 5 6Child 3Child 4Child 5Child 6Child 7Child 8Child 9


Device Type 2C


Search

Cross Ref. Q20

Absolute Position


Note In the example shown above, the cross reference symbol Q20 is specified. Thissymbol will serve to show the location of the Form C child symbols, but graphicallyit suggests that these are normally open contacts. You may wish to create a crossreference symbol that shows the Form C contact symbol.

3. When you place the parent symbol in the schematic the software will ask for itsdevice type. Use the device type created in step 2.

4. When you place the Form C child symbols, assign the same device ID as theparent symbol.

Method 2: Use two child symbols that share a common connection pointdesignation

In this method you use two separate child symbols that share a common connectionpoint designation. These two symbols are tied to the parent symbol through a devicetype definition and by assigning the same device ID as the parent symbol. Thismethod allows you to place the two child symbols on separate lines or even separatepages of the project.


6-75

CR112

CR112

114

Parent Symbol

Child Symbol

112

CR112Child Symbol

116LT114

LT116

G

R

1 2

1 3

10 11

Common ConnectionPointDesignation

CR

CR

1 3

1 2

Important When using this method, RSWire has no way of checking the potential of thecommon connection point. It might be possible in the schematic to have a differentwire connected to the child symbol’s common connection point. The user must beaware of this possibility.

The steps to implement this method are:

1. You can use existing child symbols or create custom Form C child symbols. Ifyou create custom symbols, select the PS2 symbol group (Child symbol withcross reference). Assign a common connection point designation for the twosymbols (in the previous figure “1” is the common designation.) See page 6-6for the symbol creation procedure.

2. Create a device type that associates the Form C child symbols with the desiredparent symbol. See page 6-89 for device type creation procedure. In theexample below the device type has been named FC2. The existing childsymbols CRNO and CRNC are used in this example.

Important The order of the connection point designations entered in the Device Definitiondialog box must match the order in which the connection points were defined whenthe child symbol was created. On most existing RSWire symbols the left connectionpoint was defined first.


6-76



Parent CR 10 11Child 1 FORMC 1 2 Child 2 FORMC 1 3Child 3Child 4Child 5Child 6Child 7Child 8Child 9


Device Type FC2


Search

Cross Ref. Q11

Absolute Position

Delta X 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000

3. When you place the parent symbol in the schematic the software will ask for itsdevice type. Use the device type created in step 2.

4. When you place the Form C child symbols, assign the same device ID as theparent symbol.

Recall that by using this second method with separate child symbols you have moreflexibility in where the two contacts are placed in the schematic. But because youcan place the symbols on separate lines the system cannot determine that bothcommon connections share the same wire number.


6-77

Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols

The various kinds of signal cross reference symbols are described beginning onpage 5-59. If desired, you can create custom signal cross reference symbols.

There are outgoing signal cross references and incoming signal cross references.The symbol group that you choose when creating the symbol determines whetherthe reference is written on one line or multiple lines. The symbol group alsodetermines whether or not the symbol is a star type signal cross reference.

Symbol Group Description







SG7 Outgoing signal (star configuration, same as SG8)

SG8 Outgoing signal (star configuration, same as SG7)

Symbol Creation Procedure – The following is the general procedure for creating asignal cross reference symbol. The selections and entries you make will varydepending on the specific type of symbol being created.




4. In the Symbol Name field, enter the desired symbol name. Press the <Enter>key.


6-78

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:


HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

name

Signal Cross Reference Symbol

New/Modify Symbol

List...


SG_ _________

5. Select Horizontal or Vertical for Preferred Direction (varies with symbol type).

6. Select the Snapmode:Nearest Endpoint checkbox so that the symbol willautomatically position itself on the end of a wire when placed.

7. Enter the desired description in the Description field.

8. In the Symbol Group field, select one of the SG symbol groups (describedabove), depending on whether the symbol is incoming or outgoing, star type ornon–star type, one line notation or multi–line notation.


10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbolreference point at the intersection of two 0.5 inch grid lines. Zoom in for abetter view of the work area.


6-79

11. Set the grid to 0.05 inch (1 mm).

12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. When prompted to “DefineDevice ID position,” select the appropriate position.

13. In the Device ID Parameter dialog box, enter the desired device ID tag (such as“L”) in the Device ID field. Select an appropriate label origin. Select OK tocontinue.

14. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. When prompted to“Locate connection point,” select the same point selected for the referencepoint. When prompted to “Define reference point of text,” select a point. Insome cases you will need to delete the “?” in the Connection Point field of theConnection Point Parameters dialog box so that no connection point text isused. Connection point text is used only if a single reference is to appear atsome point other than the device ID. Select OK to continue.

15. Draw the remainder of the symbol, (which in many cases may consist only of asingle drawing line perpendicular to the wire).

16. For a star type outgoing signal with multiple references, enter an appropriatenumber of attribute texts. Use the Draw > Text function to place “?” characters.When prompted for attributes, select Attribute–Activate and enter a number inthe 2000 series (2000 for the first reference, 2001 for the next one, etc.).


6-80

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text


Activate Activate

No: 2000

?Select

“Activate”checkbox

EnterAttributeNumber


17. Save the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define awindow around the symbol elements.


6-81

Create Macro

A macro is a group of schematic elements that are stored as a group and can beplaced in a drawing in one step. The macro can contain multiple symbols. If, forexample, there is a particular circuit which is needed repeatedly, you can store it as amacro and place it quickly and easily. Symbols within the macro are recognized andautomatically addressed by the software (and can be modified by the user) just aswhen individual symbols are placed in a drawing.

Custom title blocks and drawing borders can be stored as macros and can be placedautomatically on any new drawing. See page 4-14 for how to assign page macros.

Macros can be created on a blank page, or a portion of an existing drawing can bestored as a macro.

In this section, an overview of the macro creation procedure will be given first,followed by an example.

Macro Creation Procedure – The drawing elements that will comprise the macroshould be put down before selecting the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.

1. Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.

Manage � Macro � New/Modify

The New/Modify Macro dialog box will appear.

Macro Name:

Macro Description:

Maintain Sequence of Terminal Numbers During Renumbering

OK Cancel Help...

New/Modify Macro

List...



6-82

2. Enter macro name, description. Fields are provided for the macro name (upto 14 characters) and description. Use the List button to see a list of existingmacro names. If you wish to include foreign language text strings in thedescription, select the Search Language Text button to select from the availablestrings.

3. Does macro contain sequential terminals? There is a checkbox labeledMaintain Sequence of Terminal Numbers During Renumbering. This shouldbe selected if the macro contains any terminals that must be treated as a groupin the terminal plan (must not be split up in the terminal sorting process). If thecheckbox is selected, the terminals in the macro will also be renumbered as agroup if terminals are renumbered.


5. Select base point. The software will then prompt you to Define Base Point.This is the reference point that determines where the macro will appear inrelation to the point selected when it is placed in a drawing. (For macros such astitle blocks that are automatically placed by RSWire in the same location, selecta base point of x:0.000, y:0.000.)

Note Before the macro is saved you can change the base point with the Manage > Macro> Reference Point function.

6. Select objects. The software will prompt you to Select objects. Select objectsby windowing them (or selecting individually) on the drawing page. Press the<Enter> key when all items have been selected. The Manage > Macro > SelectItems function allows you to select additional items at any time before themacro is stored. Line numbers and other automatically placed elements will notbe included in the macro.

Note If you wish to bring in an AutoCAD drawing use the Insert > Block > Insertfunction. Select an insertion point on the drawing page. It is not necessary toexplode the inserted drawing elements unless there are items within blocks that youwish to change or remove. Explode the DWG elements with the Insert > Block >Explode function.

7. Store the macro. Select the Manage > Macro > Save function to store themacro.

The software will display the message “Macro stored.”


6-83

Note Attribute text: if the macro is to contain symbols with attribute text (text thatprompts you for a value when the symbol is placed), note the following. When themacro is created, this text must consist of an unanswered prompt, indicated by a “?”on the screen. If the attribute has already been assigned a value and a macro is thencreated, a new value will not be prompted when the macro is placed. Use the Modify> Symbol function to change this text back to a “?” before creating the macro. (Youcan also place the symbol again and press <Enter> when prompted for the attributevalue.)

You can cancel the macro creation procedure with the Manage > Macro > Cancelfunction.

Macro Wire Numbers – Wire numbers can be stored as part of the macro. Thesewill appear when the macro is placed. They will be altered by the system accordingto the following rules:

1. If a numbered wire in the macro is connected to an existing wire that alreadyhas a wire number, the existing wire number will be used.

2. If the macro contains a signal cross reference that already exists in the project,any existing wire number connected with that signal will be used.

3. If any wire numbers in the macro duplicate wire numbers that already exist inthe project, a “?” will be added to the duplicate wire numbers in the macro.

Create Title Block Macro

RSWire users can create page title blocks which automatically appear on schematicdrawing pages. A title block is created and stored as a macro. Variable text can beplaced in the title block when it is created, and these texts are automatically replacedwith project data (date, project name, page number, etc.) when the page is displayed.

A default title block can be named in the New Project dialog box when a project iscreated (see page 3-6). This will be placed automatically on every page in theproject. An appropriate title block can also be specified in the New Page dialog boxwhen a drawing page is created (see page 4-14) which will override the default titleblock. Existing title blocks in a drawing can be changed using the Manage > Page >Modify function.

Manage � Page � Modify

Title Block Creation Procedure – Use the following steps to create a title blockmacro:


6-84

1. Open a blank drawing page (see page 4-11).

2. Select Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function.

Tools � Project Settings � General Defaults

3. The General Defaults dialog box will appear. De–select the Display Title Blockcheckbox and select the OK button.

4. Now you can draw the elements of the title block. These will usually consist ofdrawing lines and text.

If you wish to include an existing graphic element, such as a company logo, inthe title block, it is best to do this before creating the rest of the title block. Youmay bring ACAD .dwg files using Insert > Block > Insert (AutoCAD textattributes will not be reorganized).

Insert � Block � Insert

Typically, the title block consists of an area at the bottom of the page dividedinto boxes for different pieces of information. Use the Draw > Graphic > Lineor Draw > Graphic > Box function to draw these areas. Do not use Wires orLogical Boxes when drawing these lines or boxes.

Note RSWire has a Frame function which automatically draws a single line borderaround the extents of the page format when the page is plotted. Therefore it is notnecessary to make this frame part of the title block. The Format > Layer functioncan be used to turn off the frame layer, if desired.

Use the Draw > Text function to label the various areas of the title block.Variable text which will be replaced with project data is entered as a questionmark followed by the appropriate variable name (for example, ?page for pagenumber). A list of available variables is given on page 6-87.

The following figure shows the macro TITLED, one of the title blocks includedwith RSWire. Note the variable (?) text.


6-85

DATE NAME

DRAWN BY

CKD BY

?addr01?addr02?addr03?addr04?addr05

PROJECT:

PAGE DESCRIPTION:

DRAWING–NO.: ?title03JOB–NO.: ?title02

SHEET

?page of ?prpgno?pgdescr01

?pgdescr18

?project

?title01?pgdescr02

?pgdescr03

?pgdescr04

?pgdescr05

Title block macro TITLED

5. Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function (see page 6-81).

6. Enter an appropriate name and description for the macro in the New/ModifyMacro dialog box. Select OK.

7. The software will prompt you to Define Base Point. The base point of the titleblock macro must be at the origin (0.0000, 0.0000) of the page XY coordinatesystem, i.e. at the bottom left corner. Therefore, when prompted for a basepoint, you can either enter these coordinates on the command line or you canposition the cursor at the 0.0000, 0.0000 point (coordinates are displayed abovethe drawing area) and press the left mouse button.

8. When the block is drawn as desired, you must select all the items to be includedin the macro. Use the Manage > Macro > Select Items function. The softwarewill prompt you to “Select objects.” Select objects by windowing them (orselecting individually) on the drawing page. (Or enter ALL in the CommandLine.)

9. The software will highlight all of the selected objects. Click the right mousebutton, or press the <Enter> key, to confirm the selected objects are grouped.

10. Use the Save function on the Manage > Macro submenu to store the macro.The software will display the message “Macro was stored.”

11. After the macro is stored, delete the title block from your page by selecting theManage > Page > Clear function.

12. To add the title block to your current project: Select Manage > Project >Modify . Add the title block macro name to the Title Block Macro field.To add the title block to a single page: Display the page and select Manage >Page > Modify. Add the macro name to the Title Block field.


6-86

Note The above example shows the variables ?addr01, ?addr02, etc., each of whichrepresents one line of the address file. See page 7-17 for more information on theaddress file. Using these variables instead of a fixed address allows you to changethe address without editing the title block macro.


6-87

Available Title Block Variables:

Project–Related Variables (File > New > Project function)

Variable: Description:

?project Current Project

?install Current Installation

?location Current Location

?page Current Page

?prpgno Total drawing pages in project

?inpgno Total drawing pages in installation

?nextpgflNext Page Flag: + following pages

- no more pages

?nextpgno Next page number in current installation

?plotdate Displays current date when page is created or plotted

?plottime Displays current time when page is created or plotted

?prdescr01 Project description 1 (�Comment")

?prdescr02 Project description 2

?prdescr03etc.

Project description 3

?prdescr09 Project description09

?title01 Project title data 01 (�Description")

?title02 Project title data 02 (�Job Number")

?title03etc.

Project title data 03 (�Drawing Number")

?title20 Project title data 20


6-88

Address File Variables (enter using Tools > System Settings > Address File)


?addr01 Address file: line 01


?addr03etc.

Address file: line 03


Page–Related Variables (File > New > Page function)


?pgdescr01Page description 1 (File > New > Page, �Parameter" button)

?pgdescr02 Page description 2 - date

?pgdescr03 Page description 3

?pgdescr04etc.

Page description 4 - user name



6-89

Create Device Type

The Manage > Device Type function is used to create a device type.

When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask for its devicetype.

A device type specifies a combination of parent symbol, child symbol(s) and crossreference symbol. This allows RSWire to know which child symbols are associatedwith a parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parentsymbol. Once RSWire knows the device type, it can also perform error–checkingfunctions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have beenused. For more information on parent and child symbols, see page 5-25.

A number of device types are provided with the software. These can be listed withthe Reports > Libraries > Device Type Full (or Device Brief) function.

You may also wish to create your own, custom device types. For this, use theManage > Device Type > New/Modify function. (An example device is created onpage 6-34.)

Select:

Manage � Device Type � New/Modify

The following Device Type New/Modify dialog box will appear.


6-90



ParentChild 1Child 2Child 3Child 4Child 5Child 6Child 7Child 8Child 9


Device Type


Search

Cross Ref.

Absolute Position



Device Type – Enter a name for the device type up to 14 characters long. Press the<Enter> key. Select the Search button to see a list of existing device types.

Group – Two choices are available: Relay,I/O,Plug and Cable. Choose Cable whendefining a cable device type and Relay,I/O,Plug for all other device types.

Note You must select a group for the device type before entering a description (see nextparagraph). Failure to follow this order of entry may result in the device type notappearing on the device type list.

Description – This button allows a description of the device to be entered whichwill appear on device listings. Three description fields are available. If you wish touse foreign language text strings in the descriptions, select the Search LanguageText button to select from the available strings. If a Cable device group wasselected, three additional fields will be accessible which allow the user to enter acable type description, gauge and a part number.


6-91

Description

Descr. 1

Descr. 2

OK Cancel Help...

Descr. 3

Cable

Cable Type

Gauge

Part No.

Device Type Description


Parent Symbol Name – Enter the symbol name of the parent symbol of the device.

Child 1, 2, etc. – Enter the names of child symbols in the order in which they will beused in the cross reference symbol (i.e., the first child corresponds to the “?1” text inthe cross reference symbol, the second child corresponds to “?2”, etc.). 256 Childfields are available.

Connection Points – Optional connection point text can be entered in these fieldswhich will overwrite any connection point text that was specified when the parent orchild symbol was created. Separate each connection point text with a space. If morethan two texts are entered, they will all be displayed when the symbol is placed, andthe unwanted texts can be deleted at that time.

Cross Ref. – Enter the name of the cross reference symbol that will hold the crossreference information for the parent/child symbols.

Delta X, Delta Y – The values entered in these fields determine where the crossreference symbol will appear on the drawing in relation to the parent symbol. Referto the following illustration. (If the Absolute Position checkbox is selected, the Ymeasurement will be from the drawing origin point: 0.0, 0.0.) The distances enteredare between the reference point of the parent symbol and the reference point of thecross reference symbol.


6-92

dx=1.50”

dy=–0.5”

dx=0 mm

dy=75 mm

JIC Distance Values IEC Distance Values

Bottom of Page

Absolute Position – Determines whether the Delta Y field is measured from thedrawing origin (0.0, 0.0) or from the reference point of the parent symbol. Select thecheckbox to measure from the drawing origin. This setting is typically used for IECformat drawings where the cross references appear in a row below the parentsymbols.

Once the Device Type New/Modify dialog box has been filled out, select the OKbutton to complete the creation of the device type.


6-93

Delete, Copy, Rename for Symbols, Macros, and Devices

Existing symbols, macros, and devices can be deleted, copied and renamed in theRSWire database by using the appropriate Manage submenu function.

Manage � Symbol � Delete� Copy� Rename

The above figure shows a portion of the Manage > Symbol submenu. Similarsubmenus are provided for the Manage > Macro and Manage > Device Typefunctions.

Delete Symbol, Macro, or Device

You can delete a symbol, macro or device to remove it from the RSWire database,making it unavailable for use.

Symbols – If you delete a symbol from the database, it will not be available forplacing in new drawings and the system will not be able to display the symbol whenexisting drawings containing the system are loaded. When you read such a page thesystem will display the message “Warning: Symbol not in the catalog” and willinclude the name of the missing symbol. When the page is displayed, the symbolwill not appear, although the device ID will remain.

Macros – If you delete a macro from the database, it will not be available forplacing in new drawings. In most cases, a page containing a deleted macro will stilldisplay the macro when the page is loaded. However title block macros and ladderline number macros will not appear if they have been deleted from the database.

Device Types – If you delete a device type from the database, it will not be availablefor new drawings. If you read a page containing a device type that has been deletedor is otherwise not in the database, the system will display a message “Error whilereading project data. Device not defined.” It will then list the parent and childsymbols that are part of the device in question.


6-94

To delete a symbol, macro, or device from the RSWire database:

1. Select the appropriate Delete function.

Manage � Symbol � Delete

Manage � Macro � Delete

Manage � Device Type � Delete

or

or

2. The Delete dialog box will appear. In the Name field, enter the name of thesymbol, macro, or device you wish to delete from the database. Select theSearch button to display a list of symbols, macros, or devices. Select the OKbutton to delete the selected item.

Symbol Name:

Search

Symbol Deleteor Macro Deleteor Device Delete

OK Cancel Help...

Delete Symbol

Note If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to delete a symbol, itindicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load(read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbolcatalog.


6-95

Copy Symbol, Macro, or Device

You can copy existing symbols, macros, and devices, assigning a different name tothe copy.

This is useful if you wish to create a new symbol, macro, or device type that issimilar to an existing one. You can modify the copy as desired instead of creatingthe new symbol, macro, or device from scratch. See page 6-97.

To copy a symbol, macro, or device in the RSWire database:

1. Select the appropriate Copy function.

Manage � Symbol � Copy

Manage � Macro � Copy

Manage � Device Type � Copy

or

or

2. The Copy dialog box will appear (Macro Copy dialog box shown).

Macro Name:

Search

To Macro Name:

OK Cancel Help...

Copy Macro

3. Enter the existing symbol, macro, or device type name in the left Name field. (Ifyou wish to see a list of existing items, use the Search button to display a listwhich can be selected from.)

4. Enter the name the copy is to have in the To Name field on the right.

5. Select the OK button to create copy.

Note If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to copy a symbol, itindicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load(read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbolcatalog.


6-96

Rename Symbol, Macro, or Device

You can rename existing symbols, macros, and devices, assigning a different nameto the original item.

To rename a symbol, macro, or device in the RSWire database:

1. Select the appropriate Rename function.

Manage � Symbol � Rename

Manage � Macro � Rename

Manage � Device Type � Rename

or

or

2. The Rename dialog box will appear (Device Rename dialog box shown).

Device Name:

Search

To Device Name:

OK Cancel Help...

Device Type Rename

3. Enter the existing symbol, macro, or device type name in the left Name field. (Ifyou wish to see a list of existing items, use the Search button to display a listwhich can be selected from.)

4. Enter the new name the item is to have in the To Name field on the right.

5. Select the OK button to rename the item.

Note If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to rename a symbol, itindicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load(read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbolcatalog.


6-97

Modify Symbol, Macro, or Device

This section describes how to change a symbol, macro or device type as it is storedin the catalog, in other words, changing its basic definition in the software. (Tochange a single use of a symbol in a drawing use the Modify > Symbol function.)

To Modify an Existing Symbol:

1. Display a blank, offline page.

2. Use the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function and enter the name of theexisting symbol. Press the <Enter> key.

3. The software will prompt you that it already exists and ask if you wish tomodify it. Select Yes to modify.

4. Make changes (if any) in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box and select OK.

5. The software will prompt you to select a reference point in the drawing for thesymbol. Select a point.

If the symbol you have chosen to modify exists in the first symbol catalog in thesymbol catalog search path, it will appear automatically at the selected referencepoint. If no symbol appears, it probably exists in a different catalog. If so youmust place the symbol in the drawing using the Insert > Symbol by Name orInsert > Select Icon function. (The symbol catalog path can be found in theRS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file.

6. Perform the desired modifications. To change the symbol’s reference point,device ID, connection points, or cross reference position, use the appropriatefunction in the Manage > Symbol submenu.

7. Store the symbol to save the changes. (Use the Manage > Symbol > Savefunction and define the area to be included in the symbol.)


6-98

To Modify an Existing Macro:

1. Use the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function and enter the name of theexisting macro. Select OK.

2. The software will prompt you that it already exists and ask if you wish tooverwrite it. Select Yes followed by OK to modify.

3. The software will prompt you to select a base point (reference point). Select anypoint. You can change it later.

4. The software will prompt you to select objects. At this point press the <Esc>key to escape from the macro creation process. The software will prompt“Selected item not valid.” Select OK to continue.

5. Place the existing macro on the page.

a. Select the Insert > Macro By Name function. Enter the macro name in theName field and select OK.

b. The macro will appear at the cursor. Click the left mouse button to place themacro in the drawing.

c. Select the Accept All button to insert device IDs in the macro.

6. Perform the desired modifications on the macro.

7. Select the items to be included in the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro >Select Items function and select the objects. Press <Enter> when all objectshave been selected.)

8. Select a reference point for the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > ReferencePoint function and select the desired reference point.)

9. Store the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Save function.)


6-99

To Modify an Existing Device Type:

1. Use the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function and enter the name ofthe existing device type in the Device Type field. Press the <Enter> key.

2. The software will prompt you that the device type already exists and ask if youwish to modify it. Select OK to modify.

3. Perform the desired modifications in the Device Type New/Modify dialog boxand select the OK button to save the changes.


6-100

Multiline Styles

Multilines are wires consisting of multiple parallel elements. Multiline wires aredrawn with the Draw > Wire > Multiline function (or using the Multiline button onthe toolbar). Multilines can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dottedlines in various colors. These combinations are called multiline styles.

You can select from the available multiline styles using the Format > MultilineStyle function.

Format � Multiline Style

The Multiline Styles dialog box will appear.

OK Cancel Help...

Multiline Styles

Multiline Style

3_PHASECurrent:

3_PHASEName:

L1,L2,L3Description:

Load... Save... Add Rename

Element Properties...

Multiline Properties...

The following fields and functions are available:

Current – This field displays and sets the current multiline style. Select a name fromthe list to make it current. If there are multiple styles, the name of the current style isselected.


6-101

Name – This field names a new multiline style or renames one. The element andmultiline properties are unavailable until you enter a new name and make it currentby choosing Add.

Enter a name and choose Add, and then save the multiline style to a multiline library(MLN) file. The software saves the definition in the MLN file you specify. If youspecify an MLN file that already exists, the new style definition is added to the fileand existing definitions are not erased. The default file name ispr/menu/mnu/acad.mln.

To rename a style, enter a name and choose Rename. You cannot rename, modify,or delete the default STANDARD multiline style. To make a copy of the currentstyle, enter a name and then choose Save. Multiline style names adhere to thenaming conventions for named objects.

Description – This field allows you to enter a description for a multiline style. Enterup to 255 characters, including spaces.

Load – This button displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box, in which you canload multiline styles from a specified MLN file.

Save – This button saves or copies a multiline style. Enter a name and then chooseSave.

Add – This button adds the multiline style in the Name field to the Current list.

Rename – This button renames a multiline style. Enter a name and then selectRename.

Element Properties – This button displays the Element Properties dialog box. Youcannot edit the element properties of an existing multiline style. Here you can set theproperties, such as the number, offset, color, and linetype, of new and existingmultiline elements.

Multiline Properties – Displays the Multiline Properties dialog box. Here you canset multiline properties, such as the display of segment joints, the start and end capsand their angle, and the background color.


6-102

Element Properties

Select the Element Properties button in the Multiline Styles dialog box.

OK Cancel Help...

Element Properties

Elements:

2.0 BYLAYER CONTINUOUS

Offset Color Ltype

Color...

Linetype...

Add Delete

1.5 BYLAYER CONTINUOUS1.0 BYLAYER CONTINUOUS

Offset 2.000

BYLAYER

CONTINUOUS

Elements – displays the elements in the current multiline style. Each line element inthe style is defined by its offset from the multiline origin (0.0), color and linetype.The line elements are always displayed in descending order of their offsets.

Add – Select this button to add a new line element to the multiline style.

Delete – Select this button to delete a line element from the multiline style.

Offset – This field specifies the offset of the line element in the multiline style.

Color – Select this button display and set the color of line elements in the multilinestyle. The software will display the Select Color dialog box.

Linetype – Select this button to display and set the linetype for line elements in themultiline style.


6-103

Multiline Properties

Select the Multiline Properties button in the Multiline Styles dialog box.

OK Cancel Help...

Multiline Properties

Caps

Line

Outer arc

Inner arcs

Display joints

Start End

Angle 90.000 90.000

Fill

On Color... BYBLOCK

Display joints – Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multilinesegment. A joint is also known as a miter. Joints typically would not be used forwires.

Caps – These functions control the start and end caps of the multiline.

Line – Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline.

Outer arc – Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline.

Inner arcs – Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there’s an oddnumber of elements, the center line is unconnected. For example, if there are 6elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4. If there are7 elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element4 is left unconnected.

Angle – Specifies the angle of the end caps.


6-104

Fill – These functions control the background fill of the multiline.

On – Turns background fill on.

Color – Displays and sets the color of the background fill. The software willdisplay the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter a color name or numberin the box.

Settings

7-1

7 Settings

There are a variety of parameters that can be set that determine how RSWireTM

Designer will operate. The functions that allow these settings to be made are foundmainly in the Tools and Format pulldown menus.


� System Settings

� Report Settings

� Reports: Description Files

� Printer Configuration

� Command Protection

� Navigator

� Display Settings

� Grid Settings

� Address Files

� Project Settings

� General Defaults

� Page Control Functions

� Page Formats

� Programmable Controller Settings

� Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs

� Device ID Style

� Object Defaults

� Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration

� Terminal Plan Configuration

� Pin–Plug Plan Configuration

� Object Styles

� Text Styles

� Dimension Styles

� Preferences

Settings

7-2

System Settings

Grid Settings

The Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings function defines the grid size of thedrawing. The size of the drawing grid determines how drawing elements arepositioned and where connections can be made. When placed on the drawing, thereference points of symbols, text, lines, etc., snap to the nearest grid line.

To set the grid size, select:

Tools � System Settings � Grid Settings

The Grid Settings dialog box will appear.

Format FilesDefault Settings

Command Protection

Report Settings


System Settings

Grid Settings

Y

Current Value:

X

0.0500

0.5000

0.0500

2.0000

1.0000

0.2500

0.1250

0.0100

0.0500

0.5000

0.0500

2.0000

1.0000

0.2500

0.1250

0.0100

Printer Configura

Settings

7-3


This dialog box lists a group of fields for X and Y values from which the user maychoose (these values represent the current drawing units – inches or millimeters).The user can select these values by placing the cursor and pressing the <Enter> key.Alternately, the user can select a radio button beside the desired value to select bothx and y values. The selected value will then appear in the Current Value field.Select the OK button to put the newly selected values into effect.

The user can also enter new grid values in any of the X and Y fields. These valuescan then be selected as described above. Select the Save button to save these newlyentered values for future work sessions.

Important (AutoCAD R14 Add–on version only) Do not use a grid value having units smallerthan thousandths of an inch (.001 inch). Use of such a grid value can result inunrecognized connections in the schematic drawings.

Settings

7-4

Default Settings

The Tools > System Settings > Default Settings function allows several settings tobe made.

Command ProtectioDefault SettingsGrid Settings Printer Configuration


System Settings

Default to Uppercase

General System Settings

Dialog Language

Symbol and macro names in RSWire are case sensitive – they must be enteredexactly as they exist in the symbol catalog. When you select the Default toUppercase checkbox, any symbol or macro names you enter will be converted touppercase letters, which is how the symbols provided with the software are named.

The Dialog Language section, allows you to select the language used for dialogboxes, menus, text attributes, and help screens. The choices are German, English,French, Italian and Spanish.

Select the Save button to save your settings for future work sessions. Select the OKbutton to load the new settings.

Note To change back to English from another language, the System Settings function islocated under the Format menu.

Settings

7-5

Report Settings

The Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function displays a dialog box thatallows a number of list related parameters to be set. These settings determine howthe lists will be formatted and handled by the system.

Tools � System Settings � Report Settings

Command ProtectionFormat FilesReport Settings Printer Configuration


System Settings

Filter

OFF

ON

Sort

OFF

ON

Output

Screen

Project

File

Printer

Graphic Output

Interactive

Settings

7-6

The following parameters can be set:

Filter – When On is selected, lists can be filtered according to wildcard stringsentered by the user when the list is generated. For example, when Filter is On andthe symbol list function is selected, a dialog box with the following fields willappear:

Symbol: = *

Description: = *

By entering “P*” in the Symbol field, the list will contain only those symbols whosenames begin with P. By entering “*NC*” only those symbols containing NC will belisted. An entry of “*” will include all information. Similarly, the Description fieldcan also be used to filter the list. When the Filter radio button is Off, no filtering isperformed.

Sort – When On is selected, lists will be sorted by selected fields according to sortvariables in the list generator file (the format of each list is determined by a listgenerator file located in the RS\SYSCON\LIST directory). When Off is selected, nosorting is performed. See page 14-11.

Output – These five radio buttons allow you to select the list output medium.Selecting Screen will cause the list to be displayed on the screen. Printer will sendthe list to the currently active LPT port (which may be different than the defaultAutoCAD printer). Selecting File will cause the list to be stored as a text file in theRS\TMP subdirectory. Selecting Project will activate the Text On Drawing functionwhich allows the list to be placed on a drawing page (see page 5-88). Selecting theInteractive option will cause the software to prompt you for the output type (screen,printer, file, project) whenever you generate a report. This removes the need to makethe output setting before you generate the report.

Graphic Output – This checkbox allows extended IBM graphic characters in thelists for borders and other purposes. When the Graphic Output checkbox is turnedoff these characters are translated to pipes and dashes for use where the extendedgraphic characters are not supported.

Select the Save button to save the current settings for future work sessions.

Settings

7-7

Report Format Files

The Tools > System Settings > Reports: Description Files function assigns a fileto either a report or list function. If you create a custom list generator file you mustassign this file to the appropriate report or list function within RSWire.

Select:

Tools � System Settings � Reports: Description Files

The following dialog box appears:



System Settings

Printer

Conn. List I/O List

Default 5 File3 41 2

List Name PrinterFile Name

Conn. List I/O ListConn. List Wire Diagram ListConn. List Wire Label ListConn. List Wiring ListFld. Wire Cable + Wire ListFld. Wire Cable ListFld. Wire Terminal ListFld. Wire Terminal Strip ListGen. Info Device Types [Brief]Gen. Info Device Types [Detailed]Gen. Info Macro DirectoryGen. Info Page Formats

DefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefault

PLC.LSTWIREDG.LSTWIRELAB.LSTWIRE.LSTFLDWIRE.LSTCABLE.LSTTERM.LSTTSTRIP.LSTDEVICE2.LSTDEVICE1.LSTMACRO.LSTFORMAT.LST

PLC.LST

Settings

7-8


List Name, File Name, and Printer – This is a description of available reports listedin alphabetical order by name of report. A corresponding file name for each reportas well as the defined printer for the report is also listed.

(List Name/File) – When you select a report name from the upper list, this fielddisplays the name of the operator file that will be used to print the selected(highlighted) list. If you wish to use a different file to generate the selected list, youcan enter the filename in this field.

Note The name of this field will change, depending on which list is selected.

Printer – These radio buttons select to which printer a file will print. Choose from adefault printer or one of five printers listed in the Printer Configuration dialog box.Each report can be defined to go to a print file for printing at a later time.

Settings

7-9

Printer Configuration

Use the Tools > System Settings > Printer Configuration tab to select the printerto be used for lists and other printed information.

Select:

Tools � System Settings � Printer Configuration




System Settings

Default Printer

53 41

1.

Printer

Printer

5. Printer

4. Printer

3. Printer

2. Printer

File

Options

60

60

60

60

60

Lines Symbol Set

60

File

ISO850

ISO850

ISO850

ISO850

ISO850

ISO850

2

Settings

7-10


The Printer column lists the available printer drivers. These are batch files locatedin the RS\WORK directory. See page 9-3 for more information.

The Lines column allows the number of lines per page to be specified for eachprinter. This applies to list outputs.

The Symbol Set area allows you to select standard ASCII character set (850) or ISO(International Standards Organization) foreign language symbol sets. If you selectISO certain inappropriate characters may appear in lists generated using the defaultformat files supplied with RSWire.

Use the Options column to enter appropriate options for each printer.

The Default Printer area allows one of the printer drivers to be selected as thedefault printer. Selecting File will send print outputs to file in the RS\TMPdirectory.

Select the Save button to save the printer settings for future work sessions.

Select the Cancel button to quit, discard all changes and exit the dialog box.

Select OK to exit the printer configuration dialog box.

Settings

7-11

Command Protection

The Tools > System Settings > Command Protection tab allows passwordprotection for access to functions. Functions can be assigned to one of three securitycategories: Unprotected (level 0), Constructor (level 1) or Administrator (level 2).This allows functions to be available or unavailable to different categories of users.

Select:

Tools � System Settings � Command Protection

The following dialog box appears.

00000011111011

Address FilesNavigatorCommand Protection Display Settings


System Settings

Passwords

Level 2 [Administrator]:

Grid Settings

Change

ChangeLevel 1 [User]:

ACAD_INIAD_DWGBACKUPBROWSECHECK_PARENTCHECK_SIGNALCIR_2POINTCIR_3POINTCIR_DIACIR_RADCIR_TTRCMD_DISPATCHCONF_LANGUAGECONF_LAYER

Level Command

Settings

7-12

When the user begins a work session, all unprotected commands are available. Withthe first attempt to access a level 1 command, the software will prompt for apassword. Entering the level 1 password gives access to all level 0 and level 1commands for the remainder of the session. With the first attempt to use a level 2command the software will prompt for a level 2 password which will give access toall level 0, 1 and 2 commands for the remainder of the session. Access to thecommand level and the password function can also be password protected.

Enter the password in the appropriate field making certain that it is spelled correctly.

Note One password is used for all same level access.

To password protect a command, click on that command in the dialog box. Witheach click, the software will toggle through the 0–2 levels of password protection.

Select level 0 for no password protection.

Select level 1 for Constructor password access.

Select level 2 for Administrator level password access.

Select the Change button to revise an existing password.

Select Cancel to discard any changes and exit the dialog box.

If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save buttonto store the settings. Select the OK button if you only wish to load the settings forthe current sessions.

The settings are save in the cp.cfg file located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEMdirectory. It is recommended that the cp.cfg file be made read–only to ensure thatusers cannot change the settings.

Settings

7-13

Navigator

The Tools > System Settings > Navigator tab allows you to set the zoomparameters that are used in conjunction with the Navigator function. Type thepercentage of zoom (0–100) in the text box or click and drag the slide bar. Thepercentage of zoom will appear in the text box as you move the slide bar. Smallerpercentage values will result in a closer zoom view.

Zoom Off – This checkbox activates the default settings for the Navigator Zoomfunction. When checkbox is not selected, the zoom function is on. When thecheckbox is selected, the zoom function is off.

Select:

Tools � System Settings � Navigator


Zoom



System Settings

Parameter

Grid Settings

Percent0

Zoom Off

Settings

7-14

When the desired settings have been made, select the OK button to load them for thecurrent sessions only and exit the dialog box.

If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save buttonto store the settings.


Settings

7-15

Display Settings

The Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function allows you to selectwhether or not the screen display will indicate symbol connection points, referencepoints, and part numbers.

To set the display settings, select:

Tools � System Settings � Display Settings

The following dialog box will appear:



System Settings

Grid Settings

All On

Display Part Numbers

Display Reference Points

Display Connection Points

All Off

Display Hidden Symbols [Cable...]

Display Wire Numbers

Settings

7-16

The following check boxes are available:

All On – Display connection points, reference points, part numbers, and wirenumbers for symbols on the drawing screen.

Display Connection Points – Display symbol connection points on the drawingscreen (marked by a green “X”).

Display Reference Points – Display symbol reference points on the drawing screen(marked by an inverted red triangle).

Display Part Numbers – Display symbol part numbers on drawing screen.

Display Wire Numbers – Display wire numbers on drawing screen.

Display Hidden Symbols (Cable...) – Display invisible symbols on the drawingscreen. For example, when you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphicrepresenting the cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressedunless this checkbox is selected.

All Off – Do not display connection points, reference points, part numbers, wirenumbers, and invisible symbols on the drawing screen.

When the desired settings have been made, select the OK button to load them for thecurrent sessions only and exit the dialog box.

If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save buttonto store the settings.


Settings

7-17

Address File

The Tools > System Settings > Address File tab allows you to create or edit a textfile containing information such as the user’s street address which the system canautomatically place on drawings, list headings, and title blocks. (In the New Projectdialog box there is a Address field for specifying an address file name to be used inthe project.)

Select:

Tools � System Settings � Address File


Grid Settings Address FileNavigatorCommand Protection Display Settings


System Settings

File Name

Delete

Title Block-Logo

File Name:

X-Coord: Y-Coord:

Search...

Edit Area

PreviousNext

Settings

7-18


The right File name field allows you to select from an existing list of address files.The left File name field allows you to enter the name of a new address file. Thesefiles must exist in the RS\DB\CUSTOM directory.

When a file name is entered or selected, the contents of that file will appear in theEdit Area fields. There are 20 fields, each of which holds 60 characters. Five fieldsare displayed at a time. Use the Next and Previous buttons to move through thegroups of fields.

The Title Block–Logo fields allow you to specify a DWG file (such as a logo) to beplaced automatically in the title block. X and Y positions can be set for the logo.The logo .DWG file must exist in the RS\WORK directory.

Use the Save button to save any newly entered or edited information for future worksessions.

Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected address file.

Use the Cancel button to exit the Address File dialog box.

Select OK to exit the address files dialog box.

Note On title blocks, if you wish the currently selected address file to be inserted in thetitle block automatically, you must create the title block with the variables ?addr01,?addr02, etc., in the position where the address is to appear. Each variablerepresents one line of the address file. See page 6-83, create title block macro.

Settings

7-19

Project Settings

General Defaults

Note If you use the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function to change unitsfrom inches to millimeters (or vice versa) during a work session, the on–screenmarkings for symbol reference points, connection points, etc., may appear either toolarge or too small. To avoid this, after selecting the units select the Save button, exitfrom RSWire and then restart RSWire.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � General Defaults


Settings

7-20

Configuration: Terminal aPage Control FunctionsGeneral Defaults Programmable Controller SettingsPage Formats


Project Settings

DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber

Cross Ref. Display Format

User Name

Zone Cross Ref. Display Format

Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset

Display Title Block

Line Number

Normal

Signal Cross Ref. Display Format

Default Page Format

Digits in Line Numbers

3.0000

D-2COL

2

USER

Part Number Check

Prompt For Page Store

Diagonal Wire

Wire Number Display

Display Cross Ref. at Child

Use Text Style from Project Parameters

Use Text Height from Project Parameters

Prompt For Conn. Point Text

Prompt For Device ID

Units=Inch

Display Grid

Ladder Without Page Numbers

JICIEC

Date Format MM/DD/YY

Create Connection List When Saving Page

Settings

7-21


User Name – This field allows you to change the default name that appears in thepage title block. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only pagescreated after the change. Any entry made here is automatically placed in the fourthpage parameter field when a new page is created.

Digits in Line Numbering – Determines number of digits used in ladder diagramline numbers.

Note This value does not include page number if page number is part of the line number.

Default Page Format – Determines the default page format name that will beprompted in the New Page dialog box when a new drawing page is created.

Date Format – Determines the default format for the dates that appear in the titleblock of drawing pages. Specify the order of day, month and year by using “DD” forday, “MM” for month and “YY” or “YYYY” for year. Example: MM/DD/YYYY

Cross Ref. Display Format – Selects IEC or JIC style cross reference.

Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset – Sets the distance between the device ID and thecross reference text. When device IDs with sequential numbers are used (rather thanpage and line numbers), or when the Display Cross Ref. at Child checkboxdescribed below is set, RSWire adds cross reference information at child symbols toindicate where the parent symbol is located. This field is used to adjust the verticalposition of the cross reference text. The value entered does not represent drawingunits; it is a factor that is multiplied with the cross reference character size. It affectsall relevant symbols in the project.

Device ID

Cross Reference Text

CR1

104

You can adjust the position of cross references at individual child symbols using theModify > Symbol function (Text Position checkbox). The cross reference box atindividual parent symbols can be positioned with the Modify > Move function.

Settings

7-22

Zone Cross Ref. Display Format – This pull–down list allows you to select fromthe following cross reference types:

� Line Number (no zones)

� Line/Zone Number (example 105A)

� Zone/Line Number (example: A105)

Cross referencing in RSWire can be configured to indicate page/line number, zones,or a combination of the two. Zones are areas you define to divide a page intocolumns. Each zone has a letter name (A, B, C, etc.). A zone cross reference willindicate the zone where the reference point of a given item is located. The crossreferencing in the figure below indicates that the relay coil is located in zone B (line102) while the contact is in zone A (line 105). For zone cross referencing to workyou must have page formats in which the zones have been defined (see page 7-36).

A B C

Zones101

102

103

104

105

106

CR1

CR1

105A

102B

Signal Cross Ref. Display Format – Here the user can select from a list signal crossreference formats by selecting the down arrow button. The following formats areavailable (see page 5-60 for more information):

DevID/<=Inst/>Page.LinenumberDevID=Inst/Page.LinenumberDevID/Page.LinenumberDevID/<=Inst/>Page Linenumber<=Inst/>Page LinenumberPage^Linenumber (Do not use with star type references)<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber

Note Where you see the character string <=Inst/> in the above format names it means theinstallation name will be included in the cross reference only if it differs from theinstallation where the cross reference symbol is located.

Display Title Block – Determines whether or not the page title block is visible onthe screen. If the checkbox is selected, the title block will be displayed.

Settings

7-23

Display Grid – Determines whether or not the grid appears on the drawing screen.

Units=Inch – Determines the default units of measurement (length) used indrawings. If the checkbox is selected, the units are inches. If the checkbox is notselected, millimeters are the units. Changing this entry does not affect existingpages, only pages created after the change.

Note If you change units during a work session, the on–screen markings for symbolreference points, connection points, etc., may appear either too large or too small.To avoid this, after selecting the units select the Save button in the General Defaultsdialog box, exit from RSWire then restart RSWire.

Prompt For Device ID – This checkbox determines whether or not the system willprompt the user for a device ID when a symbol is placed. When the checkbox isselected, the Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear as described on page5-14. If the checkbox is not selected, the Device ID Assignment dialog box will notappear; the default device ID (based on project parameters) will be assignedautomatically. This latter option speeds up the drawing process.

Prompt For Conn. Point Text – This checkbox determines whether or not thesystem will prompt the user for connection point text when a parent or child symbolis placed. When the checkbox is selected, the Connection Points dialog box willappear as described on page 5-17. If the checkbox is not selected, the default (nextavailable) connection point text will be assigned automatically.

Part Number Check – Determines whether or not the system will flag the entry ofpart numbers that do not exist in the database. When the checkbox is selected, thesystem will display a warning message when the user attempts to enter anon–existent part number. If the checkbox is not selected the system will allow anypart number to be entered without checking.

Use Text Height from Project Parameters – This checkbox determines whether ornot you will use the project default text height values for device IDs, connectionpoint text, terminal IDs and cross reference text. These default values are set in theProject Parameters dialog box (see page 3-8). When this checkbox is selected, thedefault text heights will be used on any symbols placed after you make the setting.When the checkbox is not selected, the software will use the text heights that weredefined when the symbol was created.

Use Text Style from Project Parameters – This checkbox determines whether thevarious texts associated with a symbol (device ID, connection point text, terminalID, cross reference text) will use the currently selected font (Format > Text Style)or the font that was defined when the symbol was created. This setting only affectssymbols placed after the setting is made.

Settings

7-24

Prompt For Page Store – When this checkbox is selected, you will be prompted ifyou wish to store (save) the page when you perform a Page Next, Page Previous, orother operations that clear the drawing screen (except the File > Break operation).This prompt will appear only if changes have been made to the current page. If thecheckbox is not selected the page is stored automatically when performing theseoperations (except the File > Break operation).

Ladder Without Page Numbers – Determines whether or not page numbers will beincluded as part of the line numbers. (Example: 201 for page 2, line 01.) When thecheckbox is selected, the page numbers will not be included in the line number.When the checkbox is not selected, page numbers will be included. Changing thisentry does not affect existing pages, only pages created after the change.

Diagonal Wire – Determines whether a diagonal or perpendicular connectionsymbol will be used at nodes. If the checkbox is selected, the diagonal symbol(symbol name DW) is used. If the checkbox is not selected, a perpendicularconnection (symbol name CP) is used. Changing this entry does not affect existingpages, only drawings created after the change.

Diagonal Connection Perpendicular Connection

Settings

7-25

Display Cross Ref. at Child – Selects whether or not a cross reference to the parentsymbol will appear at a child symbol. The project must be using one of thefollowing device ID formats:

� Device ID/Page/Line number

� Page/Device ID/Line number

� Device ID/Continuous line number

When the checkbox is selected, the reference will appear at the child symbol.If the checkbox is not selected, the reference will not appear at the child symbol.

Note You must re–open the page to see the result of this setting.

CR124

124

125CR124

126

AH126

126

124Cross Reference To Parent

You can also turn off cross references individually at parent and child symbols usingthe Modify > Symbol function. See page 5-96.

Create Connection List When Saving Page – This checkbox, when selected, causesthe software to update the connection list every time a page is saved. This ensuresthat any wire list or other report based on the connection list will always use thelatest information. When you first turn on the checkbox and select OK in the ProjectSettings dialog box, a dialog will appear that asks if you wish to create a connectionlist. Select the Yes button. This dialog will not appear subsequently. If the checkboxis not selected, the software will only update the connection list when the usergenerates a report that requires connection information.

Note When the Create Connection List When Saving Page checkbox is selected,performance of the software may be slowed somewhat because the connectioninformation must be updated each time is page is saved.

Settings

7-26

Wire Number Display – This pull–down menu with three selections determineswhether or not wire color and gauge are included with the wire number on thedrawing screen.

Normal – The wire number only is displayed.(Example: 126)

Complete – The wire number, color, and gauge are displayed.(Example: 126/14/RED

Branch Numbering – The wire number and decimal point aredisplayed (Example: AL126.1)

Note For the branch numbering display option to work, wire numbers must be createdusing the branch numbering option.

Select the Save button to save your general settings for future work sessions.

Select the OK button to activate the entries made in the General Defaults dialogbox.

Select the Cancel button to discard any changes made to the entries in the GeneralDefaults dialog box.

Settings

7-27

Page Control Functions

The Tools > Project Settings >Page Control Functions function allows a variety oferror checking settings to be made. These are conditions that RSWire will check forand flag with an error message when a drawing page is saved. For each conditionthe user can select from three options: take no action, prompt the user with a screenmessage, or send the error message to a file.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � Page Control Functions



Do Not Exit Page With Error

Cable FilePromptNo Ctrl

Symbol Without Part Number FilePromptNo Ctrl

Symbol Without Connection FilePromptNo Ctrl

Tie Point Between Terminals FilePromptNo Ctrl

Wire Without Connection FilePromptNo Ctrl

Page Without Control FilePromptNo Ctrl

Question Mark Alert FilePromptNo Ctrl

Short Circuit FilePromptNo Ctrl


Project Settings

Settings

7-28

By clicking on the appropriate checkbox for each condition the user can select :

� No Ctrl (No Control) Take no action; disregard condition.

� Prompt Notify user with an on–screen error message dialog box.

� File Send the error message to the file RS\TMP\DWGCTL.

The following conditions are detected:

Page Without Control – Checks for drawing pages that do not have the Onlinefunction activated.

Question Mark Alert – Checks for question marks (?) in device IDs, connectionpoints, wire numbers and texts. Question marks indicate that prompts have beenunanswered.

Short Circuit – Checks for direct connections between potentials. Wire numbersmust be assigned for this function to work.

Symbol Without Connection – Checks for symbols without logical line (wire)connections.

Tie Point Between Terminals – Checks for a branch on a wire between twoterminals.

Wire Without Connection – Checks for an open end on a wire.

Cable – Checks for wires that are assigned to more than one cable.

Symbol Without Part Number – Checks for symbols that do not have a part numberassigned.

Do Not Exit Page With Error – When selected, this checkbox will not allow you toleave a page on which any error conditions are detected. The message “Page notstored” is displayed. You must either correct the error condition or turn off theprompting checkbox for that error condition.

When the desired options have been set, select the OK button to load the selections,or select the Save button to save the selected settings for future work sessions.

Settings

7-29

Page Formats

The Tools > Project Settings > Page Formats function allows you to view andmodify the parameters of the 50 drawing page formats available in RSWire.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � Page Formats




Project Settings

Format Name:

Description:

Page Format Size:

Line Number Range:

Zone Number Range:

A-1VCOL

A Size Vertical 1 Line Number Column

X Min. X Max. Y Min. Y Max.8.50 110

Min. Max. Increment First Number1 0.510.75 1

Position of Line Numbers:

Ladder Macro

Hexagon

Max. Min. Increment Start Number0 10 1

Zone Macro

X Direction Y Direction

Two Line Ladders 1 0.25

3 0

2 0

4 0

LADDERA-V

Format Available For All Projects

Select Format: A-1VCOL (A Size Vertical 1 Line Number Column, 9x11.0)

Settings

7-30


Select Format – Use this pull–down list to select the page format that you wish toedit. If you wish to create a new page format, select one of the “UNDEFINED”formats from the list.

Format Name – This field indicates the name of the selected page format. A formatmust be assigned a name before it can be used to create a page. If you are creating anew format, enter a name for it here.

Description – This field shows the description of the page format. If you arecreating a new format, enter a description for it here.

Page Format Size – The fields on this line define the size limits of the page. The XMin. and Y Min. values determine the origin (lower left corner) of the page. The XMax. and Y Max. determine the upper right corner of the page.

Drawing Page

X Min., Y Min.

X Max., Y Max.

Settings

7-31

Line Number Range – This group of fields allows the user to define the position ofthe ladder diagram line numbers. In RSWire page formats, the allowable drawingarea is defined by the Min. and Max. line number range values.

Drawing Page

Y Direction Example

AllowableDrawingArea

Max.

Min.

Line

No.

Incr

emen

ts

Drawing Page

X Direction Example


Max.

Min

.

Line Number Increments

Settings

7-32

The Min. field value determines the lower limit of the line numbering area. It is thedistance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the allowable drawing area(assuming a Y–direction format where line numbers run from top to bottom). ForX–direction example, see previous page.

101

102

103

104

105

106

Increment

Maximum

Distance

107

108

109

110

111

112

Minimum Distance


The Max. field value is the distance from the drawing origin to the top of theallowable drawing area. For example, on a page that is 22 inches high, with adrawing area that starts 1 inch from the top, this value would be 21 (assuming aY–direction format where line numbers run from top to bottom). For X–directionexample, see previous page.

The Increment field value is the increment (distance) allowed for each line numberrow. This works in conjunction with the ladder macro. Any “?” characters from themacro that fall within a given line number row will receive a line number value thatis one greater than the previous row. See the ladder macro note on next page.

The First Number field value determines the number at which the line numberingwill begin.

Note This value should not include the page number.

Settings

7-33

X Direction, Y Direction – Select one of these radio buttons to determine the X or Yaxis orientation of the ladder line numbering. When Y is selected, the Line NumberRange field is measured from the bottom of the page and the Position of LineNumber values are measured from the left side of the page. When X is selected, theLine Number Range is measured from the left side of the page and the Position ofLine Number values are measured from the bottom of the page.

Two Line Ladders – This checkbox allows the page number to appear over each linenumber. When selected, the page number appears over each line number. When notselected, the page number appears next to the line number.

101

102Page Number

101

102

Line Number

Page Number

Line Number

Ladder Macro – Enter the name of the ladder line number macro to be used on thisdrawing page format. The following ladder macros are provided with RSWire. (Theuser can also create custom ladder macros – see note on next page.)For pages that are to have no ladders, see note on page 7-35.

Macro Description

LADDERA�H A�Size Horizontal (11 x 8.5 inches)

LADDERA�V A�Size Vertical (8.5 x 11 inches)

LADDERB B�Size

LADDERC C�Size

LADDERD D�Size

Note A ladder macro consists of a series of question mark characters (?) placed using theDraw > Text function and stored as a macro. If this macro is named as the laddermacro in a page format definition, RSWire will place this macro on every page usingthat format and will replace each question mark with a line number. This linenumbering is controlled by the line number rows established by the value in theIncrement field described previously. If two question marks from the ladder macrofall within the same line number row, they will receive the same line number.

Settings

7-34

?

?

?

?

?

?

Increment

Increment

Increment

Increment

Increment

Increment

Line Number RowsEstablished ByThe IncrementValue

Ladder Macro

Locate Ladder Macro Base Point One Grid Unit Left Of “?”

If you wish to have the line numbers on the drawing increment by some value otherthan one, you must define the increments and ladder macro so that there are emptyline number rows between each question mark.

Multiple line number columns are established by the Position of Line Numberfields described previously. If coordinates for more than one column are entered, theladder macro will be repeated at each position.

When defining a ladder macro that will be used on multiple column pages, locatethe macro base (reference) point at least one grid unit to the left of the ? characters.This will ensure that the ? characters are placed within the intended column.

Settings

7-35

The Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function includes severalfunctions that affect line numbering. The Digits in Line Numbers field determineshow many digits the line number will contain (not including page number). TheLadder without Page Numbers checkbox determines whether or not the pagenumber is included in the line number. See page 7-24.

Note Blank (ladder–less) Pages – If you wish to create a page format with no linenumbering, you must still make the following entries:Max. – The value in the Max. field must be greater than the value in the Min. field.Increment – This field must contain a value (any value).Ladder Macro – This field must contain the macro name DUMMY (this is an emptymacro provided with RSWire).

Hexagon – This field allows a hexagon (or other defined symbol) to be placedaround a star cross reference (as shown below). If no symbol name is entered,RSWire will not suppress the symbol around the star cross reference.

Note You will need to create a hexagon symbol of the appropriate size. See page 6-6 onhow to create a symbol.

Note For RSWire to suppress the hexagon symbol when a signal is not linked, thehexagon symbol must be placed on top of the reference point of the cross referencetext of the star cross reference. This can be simplified by creating a macro of thehexagon symbol and the signal symbol. See page 6-81 on how to create a macro.

101

102Page Number

Line Number

102 1.02

Position of Line Number – These four fields allow you to specify the distance ofeach column of line numbers (from column 1 up to column 4) from the page origin.For unused columns, enter a value of 0.00.

When all values for a page format have been entered, select the Save button to loadthe values.

Settings

7-36

Zone Number Range – Cross referencing in RSWire can be configured to indicatepage/line number, zones, or a combination of the two. Zones are areas you define todivide a page into columns. Each zone has a letter name (A, B, C, etc.). A zonecross reference will indicate the zone where the reference point of a given item islocated. Zone cross reference display format is selected with the Tools > ProjectSettings > General Defaults function (see page 7-22).

The Zone Number Range fields allow you to set the following values:

� Min. – Where the first zone will begin (in default units) measured from the leftside of the page.

� Max. – Where the last zone will end measured from the left side of the page.

� Increment – The width of each zone.

� First Number – A code number that sets the letter name of the first zone. A=65,B=66, etc.

� Zone Macro – The name of a macro that provides zone labels across the top ofthe page.

When you have made the desired page format settings, select the Save button tosave the values for future work sessions.

Format Available For All Projects – Selecting this checkbox will cause the pageformat to be stored in the RS\Syscon\System\dwg.cfg file when the Save button isselected. This matches the format available to all projects. When this checkbox isnot selected, new or edited page formats will only be available in the project that isopen when the format is saved. (New or edited page formats are always saved in thecfg directory of the current project, regardless of the settings of this checkbox.)

Settings

7-37

Programmable Controller Settings

Use the Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function toset parameters related to PLC (programmable logic controller) module symboladdressing and labeling.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � Programmable Controller Settings



Delete Unused Text

Module/Slot Proj. No Ctrl


Project Settings

Remove Linefeed Character (^)

Active Input File

Search...

File Format

Error Control Switches

Addressing

Loc.Inst.

Address Proj. No CtrlLoc.Inst.

Automatic Addressing

Address Separator /8-Bit octal

Replace Text in Current Project

Settings

7-38


Active Input File – Specifies a text file containing programmable controlleraddresses and descriptive text. Once the file is activated (by selecting the ReplaceText in Current Project button), the relevant text is automatically taken from thetext file and placed in the drawing when placing programmable controller symbols.The format of the text file is as follows:

1 6 (first and last column holding the PLC address)8 60 (first and last column holding descriptive text)I00100 CONVEYOR START PUSHBUTTON (first address and text)I00101 CONVEYOR STOP PUSHBUTTON (second address and text)etc.

Use the Search button to view and select available files.

The File Format field allows you to select the format of the programmablecontroller file. The current selections include:

Standard (see above)Siemens S5 (tab delimited)RSI RSLogix/AI for Allen–Bradley controllers (comma delimited)Festo FPC405Siemens S7

Replace Text in Current Project – Selecting this button will cause programmablecontroller descriptive text throughout the project to be replaced by text in the filethat is specified in the Active Input File field.

Delete Unused Text – If this function is activated and a PLC child symbol isdeleted, the corresponding function text will be deleted from the parent symbol andfrom the output (report) file. (The page must be refreshed before the text will beremoved from the parent symbol.) If the checkbox is not selected, the text will bekept and reused with the same address when a new symbol is placed.

Remove Line Feed Character (^) – Selecting this character will cause line feeds tobe removed from function text strings in reports. The line feeds are set by “^”characters entered in the function text.

Settings

7-39

Error Control Switches – These radio buttons determine whether or not the systemwill check for duplicate PLC symbol addressing. The Module row of buttonsdetermines error checking for duplicate module numbers. The Address row ofbuttons determines error checking for duplicate I/O address numbers. Within eachrow there is a Proj., Inst., Loc., and No Ctrl button to determine whether checkingis performed over the entire project (select Proj.), over the installation containingthe PLC symbol (select Inst.), over the location containing the PLC symbol (selectLoc.), or whether no duplicate checking will be performed (select No Ctrl).

Addressing – This field selects decimal or octal I/O address numbering forprogrammable controller symbols. The addressing will proceed in the selectednumbering system from the starting address entered by the user when the symbol isplaced. The following selections are available:

decimal8–bit octal8–bit decimal16–bit octal16–bit decimal32–bit octal32–bit decimal16–bit hexadecimal32–bit hexadecimal

Address Separator – This field allows a word/bit separator character to be specifiedfor programmable controller I/O addresses.

Automatic Addressing – This checkbox selects automatic or manual I/O addressingof programmable controller module symbols. When the checkbox is selected,automatic addressing is in effect; the system will take the rack and module numberand the beginning address number entered by the user, and assign consecutiveaddresses to the remaining I/O points on the module. This addressing will be octalor decimal depending on the setting of the Addressing field (see above). If theAutomatic Addressing checkbox is de–selected, manual addressing is in effect; thesystem will prompt consecutive addresses one at a time for each I/O point, whichthe user can either accept or type over.

When the desired settings have been made, select the Save button to save thesettings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to load the settings and exitthe dialog box.

Settings

7-40

Terminal and Plug ID Settings

The Tools > Project Settings > Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs functionallows a number of parameters to be set that relate to terminal symbols.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs


Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical ConfigurationConfiguration: Terminal and Plug IDs Object DefaultsDevice ID Style


Project Settings

Terminal Strips

Number of Terminals per Clip Jumper

Plug

1000

PL

TB

Part Number

Default IDs

Include With Terminals

Internal/External/Jumper

Target Configuration Control

Terminal IDs Without Duplicate Checking

PE NL3L2L1

GND U3U2U1

Settings

7-41


Default IDs: Terminal Strips and Plug – Use these two fields to set the defaultprefix for terminal strip and plug device IDs. If desired, the user can write overthese default prefixes during symbol placement.

Note You must leave and restart RSWire before changes in the above two fields will takeeffect.

Include With Terminals: Part Number – Use this checkbox to determine whetherthe system will allow you to enter a part number when a terminal symbol is placedin the drawing. Select the checkbox to allow part number entry, de–select thecheckbox to prevent part number entry.

Note These checkboxes work only on newly defined projects (projects that are createdafter you make the setting); they will not change existing projects.

Target Configuration Control – Terminal symbol connection points can bedesignated as Internal, External, or Jumper (see page 11-3). When theInternal/External/Jumper checkbox is selected, the software will prompt the userwith the following Terminal Target Settings dialog box when a terminal symbol isplaced on a wire. The user selects whether the target of each connection point is tobe Internal, External, a Jumper, or Undefined. The dialog box will appear for eachconnection point on the terminal that is being connected to a wire (the currentconnection point will be highlighted).

Internal External Jumper


Connection Point 1 X Connection Point 2 XConnection Point 3 XConnection Point 4 XConnection Point 5 X

OK

Cancel

Help

Accept All

Reset

Terminal IDs without Duplicate Checking – Terminal symbol IDs entered in thesefields will not be subject to RSWire error checking that prevents duplicate deviceIDs.

Settings

7-42

Number of Terminals per Clip Jumper – The value in this field is the maximumnumber of terminals that can exist in a clip jumper. If you edit a terminal strip in theterminal editor and attempt to define a clip jumper that matches or exceeds thisnumber of terminals, a message will appear stating that a “Clip jumper is notpossible.”

When the desired terminal and plug parameters have been set, select the OK buttonto load the settings. Select the Save button to save the settings for future worksessions.

Settings

7-43

Device ID Styles

The Tools > Project Settings > Device ID Style function allows you to select inwhat format a complete device ID (including installation and location) will bedisplayed: one line, two lines, or three lines. It also allows you to select which partof the device ID is placed on each line.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � Device ID Style

The Device ID Style dialog box will appear.



Project Settings

Second Line

Third Line

Nested Device ID

Show Installation

Show Location

First Line

Device IDLocationInstallation

NeverDefault Always

Default

Partial Complete

Never Always

Suppress Device ID Sign (-)

Settings

7-44


The First Line, Second Line, Third Line fields in this dialog box allow you toselect the three components of the complete Device ID: Installation, Location, andDevice ID. If you wish the complete device ID to appear on one line, then allcomponents of the ID should appear in the First Line area (as shown above).

If you wish the ID to appear on two lines, then one or two components can beplaced in the First Line, and the remainder can be selected in the Second Line area.Similarly, for a three line display, place one component on First Line, one onSecond Line, and one on Third Line. You cannot select a given component in morethan one field at a time.

Select the Suppress Device Sign (–) checkbox to hide the “–” character that willotherwise appear before each device ID.

The Show Installation and Show Location radio buttons control whether or notInstallation and Location names will be included with each device ID in thedrawing. The following options are provided:

Default – The default RSWire setting is to not include installation/locationnames with device IDs unless the symbol represents a device from a differentinstallation/location than the current drawing page.

Never – This setting will not include installation/location with device IDs underany circumstances.

Always – This setting will include installation/location with every device ID inthe drawing.

The Nested Device ID radio buttons apply to logical boxes only. This allowssymbols inside the logical box to have a device ID that combines the ID of thelogical box with the ID of the nested symbol. One application of this feature wouldbe to use the box to represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols torepresent the connectors on the board. The box could also represent a specialcontroller module with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module.Selecting the Partial button will display only the device ID of the nested symbol.Selecting the Complete button will display the entire, combined device ID.

Select the Save button to save the device ID settings for future work sessions.

Select the OK button to enter the selected device ID style.

You will need to re–read the current drawing page to see the effects of any changesin the device ID setting.

Settings

7-45

Object Defaults

The Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults function lets you set defaultdrawing element parameters that will apply to any projects and drawings that arecreated after the settings are made.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � Object Defaults

The following dialog box will appear. (You must select an object from thepull–down list before any of the fields will become active. Only those fields relevantto the selected object will be active.)



Project Settings

Text Color

Activate Object Activate All Deactivate All

Select...

Line Color Select...

Line Type Select...

Height Select...

Label Origin Select...

Slant Select...

Angle Select...

Ratio Select...

Font

Settings

7-46


Objects – To set drawing defaults, first select which kind of drawing object youwish to set in the pull–down list at the top of the dialog box. The following objectscan be selected:

� Drawing Line

� Logical Line (wire)

� Logical Line N (neutral)

� Logical Line PE (potential earth)

� Drawing Box

� Logical Box

� Field

� Text

� Function Text

� Circle

Activate Object – This checkbox determines whether or not the default settings willoverride the settings made to an element elsewhere (for example with the Tools >Project Settings > Object Defaults > Color function). When the Activate Objectcheckbox is selected, the settings made with the Defaults function will always be ineffect for the selected drawing element. When the Activate Object checkbox is notselected for the selected element, the parameters for that element can changedepending on the most recently made settings. To activate a specific element, selectelement, change settings, and select the Save button.

Activate All – This checkbox determines whether or not the default settings willoverride settings made to all elements elsewhere (for example with the Tools >Project Settings > Object Defaults > Color function). When the Activate Allcheckbox is selected, the settings made with the Defaults function will always be ineffect for all drawing elements. When the Activate All checkbox is not selected fora given element, the parameters for each element can change depending on the mostrecently made settings.

Deactivate All – This checkbox turns off the Activate checkbox for all drawingelements.

Text Color, Line Type, Line Color, Height, Label Origin, Angle, Slant, Ratio, andFont – These text parameters are the same listed in the Text dialog box with theDraw > Text function. (See page 5-31 on how to set the appropriate fields.) Use theSelect button beside each field to see a list of available values.

Settings

7-47

Deactivate All – This checkbox turns off the Activate checkbox for all drawingelements.

When the desired settings have been made you must select the Save button to savethe settings for future work sessions. Selecting the OK button (without Save) willonly enter the settings for the current work session.

Default values are saved in the file RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM\SODSETT.CFG.

Note Settings made for the three logical line types, when activated, will be in effect whenthe toolbar buttons for those functions are used.

Terminal Plan Configuration

The Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configurationfunction allows a number of graphical terminal plan configuration settings to bemade. See page 11-24.

Pin–Plug Plan Configuration

The Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configurationfunction allows a number of graphical Pin–Plug plan configuration settings to bemade. See page 11-24.

Settings

7-48

Object Settings

There are a number of functions for setting drawing object parameters.

Symbol Settings

To make scaling, rotation and mirroring settings for symbols, first right click on thesymbol and select Block Settings > Symbol Settings from the pop–up menu. Seepage 5-23.

Macro Settings

When you place a macro using the Insert > Macro by Name function, the SelectIcon dialog box contains Macro Settings fields that allow macro scale and angle(rotation) to be set. See page 5-28. These settings do not affect macros that alreadyexist on a drawing, only those macros placed after the setting is made.

Wire/Line Type

The Modify > Linetype function allows wire and line color to be selected as well asline type (dashed, solid, etc.). See page 5-101.

Settings

7-49

Text Styles

The Format > Text Style function displays a list of available drawing text styleswith graphic samples. This function also allows new text styles to be defined. A textstyle is a combination of a font, a height value and possibly other effects such asboldness, vertical orientation, etc. Various RSWire functions such as Draw > Textand Project Parameters allow you to select a text style that will apply to texts.

Select:

Format � Text Style

The Text Style dialog box is displayed.

STANDARD

Style Name

New... Rename...

Apply

Cancel

Help...

Delete

Font

1.0000Width Factor:

0Oblique Angle:

Use Big Font

Upside Down

Backwards

Vertical

1.0000romans.shx

Height:Font Style:Font Name:

Effects Preview

PreviewAaBbCcD

AaBbCcD

Text Style

In the Style Name area, there are the following items:

Style Name – A drop down list of currently available styles.

New – Select this button to create a new style. Displays the New Text Style dialogbox. You can accept the default name or enter a name in the box and choose OK toapply the current style settings to the new style name.

Settings

7-50

To Create a New Text Style:

1. Select the desired font and make any other settings for the font.

2. Select the New button.

3. Enter a name for the new text style.

4. Select OK.

5. Save the current drawing page.

Note When you create a new text style, it will only be available on the drawing page thatis currently open when you define it. To make the style available on all drawingpages, you must have the default RSWire drawing page RSWire.dwg open when youdefine the style. RSWire.dwg is active when you first enter RSWire but have not yetselected a project or page. You can also open RSWire.dwg using the command linecommand, OPEN (the RSWire.dwg file is located in the RS\WORK directory).Because RSWire.dwg is does not belong to a project you cannot use the File > Savecommand to save it; you must use the File > Save As command.

Rename – Select this button to rename an existing style. The text style listed in thebox is renamed when you enter a new name and choose OK.

Delete – Select this button to delete an existing style. Select a name from the list tomake it current, and then choose Delete.

In the Font area, there are the following items:

Font Name – Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and allAutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the AutoCAD Fonts directory. When youselect a name from the list, AutoCAD reads the file for the specified font. The file’scharacter definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use byanother text style. You can define several styles that use the same font.

Font Style – Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular.When Use Big Font is selected, this option changes to Big Font Name and is usedto select a Big Font file name.

Height – Sets the text height based on the value you enter. If you enter 0.0,AutoCAD prompts for the text height each time you enter text using this style.Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style. TrueType fontsmay be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts with the same height setting.

Settings

7-51

Use Big Font – Use the Big Font option to specify an Asian–language Big Font file;Use Big Font is available only if an SHX file is specified under Font Name; onlySHX files are valid file types for creating Big Fonts.

Note The text height you specify may not be accurately represented by uppercase lettersin TrueType fonts supplied with AutoCAD.

In the Effects area, there are the following items:

Upside Down – Displays the characters upside down.

Backwards – Displays the characters backwards.

Vertical – Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if theselected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available forTrueType fonts.

Width Factor – Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0 condensesthe text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.

Oblique Angle – Sets the oblique angle (italicizing) of the text. Entering a valuebetween –85 and 85 makes the text oblique.

Settings

7-52

Dimension Styles (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

The Format > Dimension Style function allows you to make settings for thedimensioning function. Refer to the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information.

The dimensioning function allows you to pick two points on a drawing andautomatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display theangle between two lines.

Select:

Format � Dimension Style


STANDARD

Current Dimstyle: STANDARD

Close

Set Current

New...

Modify...

Help

Don’t list styles in xrefs

All styles

List: Description

Dimension Style Manager

Override...

Compare...

STANDARD

Styles Styles

Settings

7-53

Dimension Styles (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

The Format > Dimension Style function allows you to make settings for thedimensioning function.

The dimensioning function allows you to pick two points on a drawing andautomatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display theangle between two lines.

Select:

Format � Dimension Style


Parent

Radial

Angular

OK Cancel Help...

Diameter

Ordinate

Leader

STANDARD

Family

Linear

Dimension Style

Current:

Name:

Save Rename

Geometry...

Format...

Annotation...

Dimension Styles

Settings

7-54


Dimension Style – A dimension style is a stored group of dimension settings whichdetermines the appearance of the dimensions. The style can be conveniently selectedin one step. In the Current field you can select an existing dimension style.STANDARD is the default dimension style.

You can define a new dimensioning style by entering the name in the Name field,making the desired settings using the Geometry, Format, and Annotation buttons,selecting the Save button, and then selecting the OK button.

Dimension Family –An overall dimension style consists of a family of styles withinwhich there are variations or family members. When you create a new style itbecomes the “parent” style. Variations of this parent can be defined for specifictypes of dimensioning such as linear, radial, angular, etc. This is done by selectingthe appropriate button in the Family area of the dialog box, making the desiredsettings using the Geometry, Format, and Annotation buttons, and then selectingthe Save button. If no family members have been defined for a dimension style, theparent style is automatically used.

The following style family members can be defined:

Linear – Measures the distance between two points.

Radial – Measures the radii of arcs and circles.

Angular – Measures the angle between two lines or three points.

Diameter – Measures the diameters of arcs and circles.

Ordinate – Measures the perpendicular distance from an origin point to anotherpoint.

Leader – A leader is a line that connects annotation text to some item in adrawing. This leader is not the same as the leader that is generated automaticallyas part of a dimension line.

Dimension Geometry – Selecting the Geometry button in the Dimension Stylesdialog box displays the Geometry dialog box. Here settings can be made that affectthe extension lines, dimension line, arrowheads, and center marks of a dimension.There is also a scale setting so that dimension scale can be set to match that of thepage.

Settings

7-55

Scale to Paper SpaceOverall Scale: 1.00000

Center

None

Mark

Line

OK Cancel Help...

Closed Filled

Scale

Size: 0.0900

Arrowheads

1st:

Closed Filled2nd:

0.1800Size:

Extension Line

0.2000

0.0625

BYBLOCKColor...

Origin Offset:

Extension:

Suppress: 1st 2nd

Dimension Line

0.000

0.3000

BYBLOCKColor...

Spacing:

Extension:

Suppress: 1st 2nd

Geometry


The following settings are available:

Dimension Line

Suppress – You can select checkboxes to turn off the 1st and/or the 2nd dimensionlines (when text divides a dimension line in two).

Extension – When using oblique stroke arrowheads, you can set the distance thatthe dimension line extends beyond the extension lines by entering a value in thisfield.

Spacing – Enter a value to set the distance between dimension lines of neighboringbaseline and continue dimensions.

Color – Select this button to set a color for the dimension lines. A Select Colordialog box will appear, displaying the available colors.

Settings

7-56

Arrowheads

The 1st and 2nd fields allow you to select an arrowhead style for each end of thedimension line. The currently selected style is displayed.

In the Size field you can enter a size for the arrowhead.

Extension Line

Suppress – Select these checkboxes to turn off the 1st and/or the 2nd extensionlines.

Extension – Enter a value to set how far beyond the dimension line the extensionline will extend.

Origin Offset – Enter a value to set the distance between the extension line originand the beginning of the extension line.

Color – Select this button to set a color for the extension lines. A Select Colordialog box will appear, displaying the available colors.

Center

Center marks and lines apply only to center, diameter, and radius dimensions. Theyare drawn only if the dimension line is placed outside the circle or arc. Select Mark,Line, or None as a center mark. The current selection is displayed.

In the Size field you can enter a size for the center mark.

Scale

In the Overall Scale field enter a value to determine the size of the dimensiongeometry relative to the drawing. It should be set according to the intended plotscaling. Dimension scale affects sizes such as text height and arrowhead size, andoffsets, such as extension line origin offset. You should set these sizes and offsets tovalues that represent their actual plotted size.

You can also set a scale relative to paper space. This scale adjusts dimensions inmodel space to the scale of the paper space view.

Settings

7-57

Dimension Format – Selecting the Format button in the Dimension Styles dialogbox displays the following dimension Format dialog box. This dialog box allows theuser to make settings that affect placement of dimension text, arrowheads and leaderlines relative to the dimension and extension lines.

Vertical Justification

OK Cancel Help...

Best Fit

Text

Fit:

Horizontal Justification

User Defined

Force Line Inside

Centered

Inside Horizontal

Outside Horizontal

Centered

Format

Select the User Defined checkbox if you wish to position dimension text by enteringcoordinates or by pointing the cursor. If you de–select this checkbox the softwarewill determine the text position automatically.

Select the Force Line Inside checkbox if you wish the software to draw a leaderline between extension lines when there is no room between the lines forarrowheads or text (i.e., when the arrowheads are placed outside the extensionlines).

The Fit field allows you to select how the software will place arrowheads,dimension text and leader lines between the extension lines.

The Inside Horizontal and Outside Horizontal checkboxes allow you to setdimension text either to remain horizontal or to align with the dimension line.

Settings

7-58

The Horizontal Justification field allows you to select the horizontal position of thedimension text in relation to the dimension line. The current selection is indicated.

The Vertical Justification field allows you to select the vertical position of thedimension text in relation to the dimension line. The current selection is indicated.

Dimension Annotation – Selecting the Annotation button in the Dimension Stylesdialog box displays the Annotation dialog box where settings can be made thataffect the formatting of the dimension text.

OK Cancel Help...

None

Alternate Units

Method: STANDARDStyle:

Tolerance

0.0000

0.0625

BYBLOCKColor...

Lower Value:

Upper Value:

Primary Units

1.00

Units...

Suffix:

Prefix:

Units...Enable Units

[25.4]

Suffix:

Prefix:

MiddleJustification:

1.0000Height:

Text

0.1800

0.0900Origin Offset:

Extension:

0.0000Round Off:

Annotation


Settings

7-59

Primary Units – Primary Units control the main dimension values. You can specifyspecial prefixes and suffixes for dimension values. The Units button displays thePrimary Units dialog box.

OK Cancel Help...

0 Feet

0 Inches

Decimal

Units

Dimension

Precision:

Decimal Degrees

Angles

0.0000

Leading

Trailing

Zero Suppression0 Feet

0 Inches

Tolerance

Precision:

0.0000

Leading

Trailing

Zero Suppression

Linear: Paper Space Only

Scale

1.00000

Primary Units

Under Units, select a unit type from the list for all dimension types exceptangular. For angular dimensions, select a type from the Angles list.

Under Dimension, select a precision value for the primary units.

Under Tolerance, select a precision value for any tolerance values.

There are also Zero Suppression checkboxes for suppressing leading andtrailing zeros in decimal dimensions and tolerances (select the Leading andTrailing checkboxes). You can also choose to suppress zero values fordimensions given in feet and inches (select the 0 Feet and 0 Inchescheckboxes).

Under Scale, set the units scale for primary units.

Settings

7-60

Alternate Units – The Alternate Units area of the Annotation dialog box, select theEnable Units checkbox to activate a second set of units (for example, if you wish toshow feet and inches in a metric drawing). The alternate unit values will appear insquare brackets [] in the dimension text.

Once you select the Enable Units checkbox, you can select the Units button in theAlternate Units area. This displays the Alternate Units dialog box which containsthe same fields and settings as the Primary Units dialog box (see above).

Tolerance – In the Tolerance area of the Annotation dialog box you can choose tohave lateral tolerance values added to the dimensions to indicate the degree ofaccuracy required.

The Method field allows you to select: None (no tolerance values), Symmetrical(same + and – value), Deviation (different + and – values), and Limits (the softwarecalculates a maximum and minimum dimension value).

The Upper Value and Lower Value fields allow you to enter tolerance values.

The Justification and Height fields allow you to set the alignment and size oftolerance values.

Text – In the Text area of the Annotation dialog box you can set the dimension textformat. Fields are provided for text Style, Height, and Gap (around base dimensiontext). A button is also provided for setting text Color.

Round Off – The Round Off field in the Annotation dialog box allows you to set avalue to which dimension values will be rounded (except angular dimensions). Forexample, if you specify a round–off value of 0.25 all dimensions are rounded to thenearest 0.25 unit.

Settings

7-61

Preferences (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings throughthe AutoCAD PREFERENCES function. Not all the available settings are relevantto RSWire. Refer to the online help and the AutoCAD User’s Guide for moreinformation.

Select:

Tools � Preferences


DraftingDisplayFiles Open and Save


Options

Window Elements

User Preferences

Display scroll bars in drawing window

Plotting System Selection Profiles

Current drawing: RSWire.dwg

?

Display screen menu

Colors... Fonts...

3 Text lines in command line window

Display resolution

100 Arc and circle smoothness

8 Segments in a polyline curve

0.5 Rendered object smoothness

4 Contour lines per surface

Layout Elements Display performance

Crosshair size

Display Layout and Model tabs

Display margins

Display paper background

Display paper shadow

Show Page Setup dialog for new layouts

Create viewport in new layouts

Pan and zoom with raster image

Highlight raster image frame only

True color raster images and rendering

Apply solid fill

Show text boundary frame only

Show silhouettes in wireframe

Reference Edit fading intensity

5 50

Current profile: RSWire

Settings

7-62

Files Tab

The Files options let you enter the support directories path which is used by thesoftware to locate help files, fonts, and other support files. Use the Browse buttonto search for files and subdirectories you wish to add to the support field.

Display Tab

The Colors button allows you to set colors of various areas of the software window.Select the element to color in the Window Element field. Then, select a color. Thesample Graphic and Text windows will show your color selections. Use the slidercontrols (or enter a number from 0 to 255) to change the Red , Green, or Bluecomponents of a color. Select the Monochrome Vectors checkbox if you are using amonochrome display. This setting may also be best for gray scale displays.

The Fonts button allows you to select the font used in the toolbar and on thecommand line. This setting has no effect on the text in your drawing. A Font dialogbox will appear, allowing you to select fonts from a list. You can also selectwhether the setting will affect the Graphics window or the (Command) textwindow.

Open and Save Tab

Options for loading and saving AutoCAD drawings.

Plotting Tab

Select and configure output devices (printers and plotters).

System Tab

Select 3D graphics displays and pointing devices.

User Preferences Tab

Settings for accelerator keys, shortcut menus and right mouse button actions.

Drafting Tab

Make AutoSnap, AutoTrack, and Alignment Point Acquisition settings.

Settings

7-63

Selection Tab

Make settings for selecting objects and configuring grips.

Profiles Tab

Available Profiles – Displays a list of the available profiles.

Set Current – Makes the selected profile the current profile.

Add to List – Add a new profile to the list.

Rename – Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name anddescription of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profilebut keep its current settings.

Delete – Deletes the selected profile.

Export – Exports a profile as a REG file. You can import the profile on the samecomputer or a different computer.

Import – Imports a profile created using export.

Reset – Resets the values in the selected profile to the default settings.

Settings

7-64

Preferences (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings throughthe AutoCAD PREFERENCES function. Not all the available settings are relevantto RSWire. Refer to the online help and the AutoCAD User’s Guide for moreinformation.

Select:

Tools � Preferences


ac$

200

OK Cancel Apply

Drawing session safety precautions

Create backup copy with each save

Full–time CRC validation

Maintain a log file

Reset

Audit after each DXFIN or DXBIN

Help...

Automatic save

Minutes between saves

Save thumbnail preview image

Beep on error in user input

Maximum number sorted symbols:

File extension for temporary files:

120

Performance ProfilesPrinterPointerDisplayGeneralCompatibilityFiles

?Preferences

This dialog box has eight tabs which can be selected to display different sets ofparameters. The user can make a variety of AutoCAD–related hardware andsoftware settings. Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information. Thisfunction is not available in the Standalone version of RSWire.

Settings

7-65

Files Tab

The Files options let you enter the support directories path which is used by thesoftware to locate help files, fonts, and other support files. Use the Browse buttonto search for files and subdirectories you wish to add to the support field.

Performance Tab

The Performance options control preferences that relate to performance. Consultyour AutoCAD manual for further information.

Compatibility Tab

The Compatibility options maintain compatibility with earlier versions ofAutoCAD. Consult your AutoCAD manual for further information.

General Tab

The General options let you specify a number of general operating preferences.

Automatic Save – By selecting the Automatic save checkbox, a DWG format file ofthe current drawing page will be saved automatically on a selectable time period.The file will be saved in the temporary files directory (default is RS\TMP).

Create backup copy with each save – Select this checkbox to create a backup of thedrawing each time the drawing is saved. Use the File tab to specify where thebackup is saved.

Full–time CRC validation – Not applicable.

Audit after each DXFIN or DXBIN – Not applicable.

Save Thumbnail Preview Image – Specifies whether an image of the drawingshould be displayed in the Preview area of the Select File dialog box.

Beep on Error in User Input – Select to hear an audible beep when an error occurs.

File Extension for Temporary Files – Specifies a unique extension for the currentuser to identify plot files in a network environment.

Settings

7-66

Maximum Number Sorted Symbols – Specifies the maximum number of items tosort. If you set this preference to 0, the items are listed in the order they werecreated. Items are sorted in alphabetical order.

Reset – resets the General Preferences to the system defaults.

Maintain a Log File – Saves a command history file of the current work session.This file is saved under the name ect.log in the RS\PROGRAM directory.

Display Tab

The Colors button allows you to set colors of various areas of the software window.Select the element to color in the Window Element field. Then, select a color. Thesample Graphic and Text windows will show your color selections. Use the slidercontrols (or enter a number from 0 to 255) to change the Red , Green, or Bluecomponents of a color. Select the Monochrome Vectors checkbox if you are using amonochrome display. This setting may also be best for gray scale displays.

The Fonts button allows you to select the font used in the toolbar and on thecommand line. This setting has no effect on the text in your drawing. A Font dialogbox will appear, allowing you to select fonts from a list. You can also selectwhether the setting will affect the Graphics window or the (Command) textwindow.

Pointer Tab

The Pointer options set the current pointing device.

Current Pointing Device Driver – Displays the name of the current pointing devicedriver.

Current System Pointing Device – Displays a list of the available pointing devicedrivers.

Set Current – Makes the selected pointing device the current pointing device.

Accept Input From – Specifies whether input is accepted from both a mouse and adigitizer or ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set.

Settings

7-67

Cursor Size – Controls the size of the crosshairs. The allowable range is from 1 to100 percent of the total screen. At 100% the ends of the crosshairs are never visible.When the size is decreased to 99% or below, the crosshairs have a finite size, andthe crosshairs’ ends are visible when moved to the edge of the graphics area. Thedefault size is 5%.

Printer Tab

Customizes printer or plotter settings and sets the current printer.

Current Printer – Displays the name of the current printer.

List of Printers – Displays a list of the available printers.

Printer Description – Displays information about the currently selected printer.

Set Current – Makes the selected printer the current printer.

Modify – Reconfigures the selected printer. Select a printer from the list of availableprinters and choose Modify. In the Reconfigure a Printer dialog box, provide adescription for the printer. Then choose Reconfigure.

New – Displays the Add a Printer dialog box. To add a printer, select a printer fromthe list of available printers, provide a description, and then choose OK. The textwindow with prompts for printer settings is displayed.

Open – Opens a printer configuration file. In the Select PC2 File dialog box, selectthe configuration file for the device you want to use. Then choose OK.

Save As – Saves the complete configuration information for a printer to a file.

Remove – Removes the selected printer from the list of available printers.

Settings

7-68

Profiles Tab

The options contained under this tab control use of profiles; a profile is auser–defined configuration.

Current profile – Lists the currently selected profile.

List of Profiles – Displays a list of the available profiles.

Set Current – Makes the selected profile the current profile.

Copy – Displays the Copy Profile dialog box to copy an existing profile. Enter aname and description for the new profile. When you choose OK, a copy of theselected profile is created, and the new profile name is added to the list box.

Rename – Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name anddescription of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profilebut keep its current settings.

Delete – Deletes the selected profile.

Export – Exports a profile as a REG file. You can import the profile on the samecomputer or a different computer.

Import – Imports a profile created using export.

Reset – Resets the values in the selected profile to the default settings.

Settings

7-69

Preferences (Standalone Version)

Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings. Not allthe available settings are relevant to RSWire.

The tabs in the Preferences dialog will be similar to those in the add–on version. Ifyou installed the Standalone version that uses AutoCAD R14 format drawings, seepage 7-64. If you installed the Standalone version that uses AutoCAD 2000 formatdrawings, see page 7-61.

Settings

7-70


Plotting

8-1

8 Plotting

This section explains how to plot drawing pages from RSWireTM Designer.


� Plot Functions

� Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

� Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

� Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

� Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

� Plotting to Files

� Plotting Selected Layers

Plotting

8-2

Plot Functions

To plot drawing pages from RSWire, select the File > Print/Plot pull–down menu.

File � Print/Plot � Preview...� Plot Config...� Current Page...� Multiple Pages...

There are two plotting functions:

Preview – The Plot Preview function displays the drawing on the screen as itwill appear when plotted on paper. While using the Plot Preview function, thereal–time interactive zooming capability is available. As you move the pointingdevice, the drawing image zooms in or out.

During Plot Preview, zoom–in is limited by the resolution of your plotter. PlotPreview stops your zoom–in at the point where one pixel on your display isequal to one pixel (or plotter step) on your plotter. You can only zoom in to thelevel of detail that your plotter or printer is capable of plotting.

When you have reached the zoom–in limit (the current view), the plus sign (+)is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom in any further. Whenyou have zoomed out to the limit (the extents of the current view), the minussign (–) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom out any further.You cannot zoom out beyond the extents of the current view.

Plot Config. – This function displays the Plotting tab of the the Options (Tools >Preferences) dialog box. Here you can select or add printers and plotters.Configure the drivers and make other printer/plotter settings.

Current Page – Select this function for plotting to a plotter or to the Windowssystem printer. This function displays the Plot Configuration dialog box. Seepage 8-5.

Multiple Pages – Use this function to plot a group of drawing pages in oneoperation. You can select an entire project, an installation within a project, orindividual pages within an installation. You can send the pages to a plotter or todisk files (PLT, DWG, or DXF format).

Plotting

8-3

Plot Preview

The File > Print/Plot > Preview function allows you to preview a plot before yousend it to the plotter.

Select:

File � Print/Plot � Preview

A Plot Preview will appear (example shown below).

While using the Plot Preview function, the real–time interactive zoomingcapability is available. As you hold down the button and move the pointingdevice, the drawing image zooms in or out.

Plotting

8-4

During Plot Preview, zoom–in is limited by the resolution of your plotter. PlotPreview stops your zoom–in at the point where one pixel on your display isequal to one pixel (or plotter step) on your plotter. You can only zoom in to thelevel of detail that your plotter or printer is capable of plotting.

When you have reached the zoom–in limit (the current view), the plus sign (+)is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom in any further. Whenyou have zoomed out to the limit (the extents of the current view), the minussign (–) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom out any further.You cannot zoom out beyond the extents of the current view.

To Exit Plot Preview

Press the <Esc> key, or:

1. Press right mouse button. A sub–menu will appear.

2. Select the Exit function. The drawing will appear.

Select“Exit”

Exit

Plot

Pan

Zoom

Zoom WindowZoom Previous

Plotting

8-5

Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

Use the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function to plot the currently displayeddrawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command)also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.

File � Print/Plot � Current Page

The following Print/Plot Configuration dialog box will appear.

Device and Default Information

7.93

Paper Size and Orientation

OK Cancel Help...

File Name...

Device and Default Selection...

Default System Printer

Pen Parameters

Pen Assignments... Optimization...

Additional Parameters

Display

Limits

Extents

View

Window

Hide Lines

Adjust Area Fill

Autospool

View... Window...

Inches

MM

Plot Area 7.93 by 10.49

Size... MAX

Scale, Rotation, and Origin

Rotation and Origin...

Plotted Inches = Drawing Units

14.874=

Scaled to Fit

Plot Preview

Preview... Partial Full

Text Resolution 50

Text Fill

This CheckboxMust BeSelected ToEnable ThePlot PLT Func-tion.

Orientation Icon

Plot to File

Print / Plot Configuration

Plotting

8-6

The following settings are available:

Device and Default Information

Select the Device and Default Selection button to view or change informationabout the device, to save or get defaults from a Plotting Program Parameters(PCP) file, or to view or change a device–specific configuration. The name ofthe currently selected printer/plotter is displayed above this button.

When you select the Device and Default Selection button, the following Deviceand Default Selection dialog box will appear.

Default System Printer

Select a Device Configuration

OK Cancel

Configuration File

Device Specific Configuration

Manufacturer: System Printer ADI 4.3 – By Autodesk, Inc

Device Requirements: Show..

Save.. Save..Replace.. Merge..

Complete (PC2) Partial (PCP–R12/R13)

Port: \\Boggy\B–Size

Help...

Change

Device and Default Selection

Partial Save – Saves the current default settings to a PCP file. PlotConfiguration Parameter (PCP) files store the device independent plot settingsyou specify. This means you can store settings like paper sizes, pen assignments,orientations, and scaling factors. You can choose to save to a new or existingfile.

Partial Merge – Retrieves the default settings from a PCP file. The Merge FromPCP File dialog box is displayed, in which you can select a PCP file. If the PCPfile contains errors, a dialog box is displayed listing the errors. Choose CreateError File to create a file containing any listed errors. A file is created using thePCP filename with an .err file extension. The file is placed in the same directorythat contains the PCP file.

Plotting

8-7

Complete Replace – Replaces the default settings from a PC2 file. Currentinformation is lost unless it has been saved to a PC2 file.

Complete Save – Saves the current default settings to a PC2 file. Complete PlotConfiguration (PC2) files store all the information found in a PCP file, plusdevice–specific information that would otherwise be defined in the ACAD.CFGfile. You can choose to save to a new or existing file.

Device Specific Configuration – Displays and changes device–specificconfiguration requirements. The Show button displays configurationinformation for the current plotter. The Change button allows you to enter newsettings for the current plotter. The dialog boxes are different for differentplotters.

Pen Parameters

Use the Pen Assignments button to assign colors, line types and pen widths forthe various pens of the current plotter. The ability to control these parametersdepends on the type of plotter you have selected.

Use the Optimization button to select various optimizations that can beperformed when plotting, minimizing wasted pen motion and reducing plottime. The default setting is dependent on the device you have configured.

Additional Parameters

In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows:

Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen.

Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing thatcurrently contains entities).

Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits.

View – Not accessible.

Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. Youspecify a lower left corner and an upper right corner of the area to be plotted.This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.

Plotting

8-8

To specify the window, select the Window button. The Window Selection dialogbox will appear. If the area you wish to plot is totally visible on the screen youcan select the Pick button and use your pointing device to designate the window.The default window is the current display. You can also specify the window byentering drawing unit coordinates in the First Corner and Other Corner fields.When you accept the specified window, you will return to the PlotConfiguration dialog box and the Window radio button will be enabled andselected.

Text Resolution – Sets the resolution, in dots–per–inch, of True Type fontswhile plotting, exporting, and rendering. Lower values decrease resolution andincrease plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plottingspeed.

Text Fill – Controls the filling of True Type fonts while plotting, exporting andrendering. If Text Fill is not selected, text is output as outlines.

Hide Lines – Not applicable.

Adjust Area Fill – Not applicable.

Plot To File – Select to send plot output to a file rather than directly to a plotter.

Important The Plot to File checkbox must be selected (on) to allow the RSWire PLT Plotfunction (File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages > Create PLT Files) to workproperly. A plot file will be created with the extension .plt. To specify a file nameother than the default name, select the File Name button. If the current drawing isunnamed, a plot file will be created with the name unnamed.plt.

Autospool – Select to send plot output directly to a plotter.

Paper Size and Orientation

Use this area to specify plot size, paper size, and orientation.

Use the Inches and MM (millimeters) radio buttons to select the appropriateplotting units.

The Orientation icon is a rectangle that indicates the natural orientation (portraitor landscape) of the current plotting device. If your current plotter’s naturalorientation is portrait, it may be necessary to rotate the plot 270 degrees toachieve the result you want.

Use the Size button to display the paper size dialog box. This dialog boxdisplays the plot sizes that the current plotter supports. “MAX” is the maximumsize that the plotter can handle. Select a predefined size or enter the width andheight in a USER text box.

Plotting

8-9

Scale, Rotation, and Origin

Use this area to set the plot scale, rotation, and origin.

The label Plotted Inches = Drawing Units will read Plotted MM = DrawingUnits if millimeter was selected as units. The values in these fields indicate thescale of the plot; plot units in relation to drawing units.

Use the Rotation and Origin button to display the Plot Rotation and Origindialog box. Select a rotation value to rotate the plot clockwise. The plotnormally begins in the lower left corner of the paper (home position). If youwish to place the plot origin at another location, enter the desired coordinates inthe X Origin and Y Origin fields.

Select the Scaled to Fit checkbox to scale the plot so the view chosen, theportion of the drawing to be plotted, is made as large as possible for thespecified paper size. When this checkbox is selected, the text boxes display theactual scale used to fit. When Scaled to Fit is turned off, the text boxes defaultto 1=1 except when the scale has been previously set to other values. In thiscase, the software will use that scale.

Plot Preview

Select the Preview button to display the plot on screen so you can see that it iscorrectly placed on the paper.

If you select the Partial radio button, the preview will indicate the plot area as asimple rectangle positioned on the paper. If the plot origin has been offset sothat the effective area extends outside the graphic area of the preview area, agreen line will be displayed along any clipped side.

If you select the Full radio button, the preview will show the drawing on thescreen as it will appear on paper. Because this requires a regeneration of thedrawing it is slower than a partial preview. During a full preview a dialog box isdisplayed with buttons for Pan and Zoom and End Preview. The Pan andZoom function is similar to the Dynamic zoom function (see page 4-32). TheEnd Preview function returns you to the Print/Plot Configuration dialog box.

Plotting

8-10

Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

Use the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function to plot the currently displayeddrawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command)also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.

File � Print/Plot � Current Page

The following Plot dialog box will appear.

Plot SettingsPlot Device

Plot ?

CancelOK Help

Layout name

Model

Full Preview...

Save changes to layout

Page setup name

Add...<Select page setup to apply>

Plotter configuration

Name:

Plotter:

Where:

Description:

HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced Properties

HintsHP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced-Windows System Driver

LPT1:

Plot style table (pen assignments)

Name: None Edit... New...

Partial Preview...

What to plot

Current tab

Selected tabs

All layout tabs

Number of copies 1

Plot to file

Plot to file

File name:

D:\RS\PROJECT\WORK\____6Location:

Plotting

8-11

Layout name – (Layouts are not used in RSWire – they are the same as PaperSpace.) Displays the current layout name or displays ”Selected layouts” if multipletabs are selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the LayoutName shows ”Model.” Select the Save changes to layout checkbox to save changesyou make in the Plot dialog box in the layout. This option is unavailable if multiplelayouts are selected.

Page setup name – Displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You canchoose to base the current page setup on a named page setup, or you can add a newnamed page setup by choosing Add. Selecting Add displays the User Defined PageSetups dialog box. You can create, delete, or rename named page setups.

Plot Device tab

Use the Plotter Configuration function to select a printer/plotter driver.

Use the Plot style table function to edit pen colors and line weights.

Use the What to plot functions to select which tabs to plot and the number of copiesto plot. Current tab plots the current Model or Layout tab. (Layouts are not used inRSWire.) If multiple tabs are selected, the tab that shows its viewing area is plotted.Selected tabs plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs. To select multipletabs, hold down CTRL while selecting the tabs. If only one tab is selected, thisoption is unavailable. All layout tabs plots all layout tabs, regardless of which tab isselected.

Select the Plot to file checkbox if you wish to create a plot file of the currentdrawing. You can enter the desired filename and directory.

Plotting

8-12

Plot Settings tab

Plot SettingsPlot Device

Plot ?

CancelOK Help

Layout name

Model

Full Preview...

Save changes to layout

Page setup name

Add...<Select page setup to apply>

Paper size and paper units

Plot device:

Printable area:

HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced

10.60 x 8.10 inches

Partial Preview...

Plot area

Limits

Extents

Display

Plot scale

Scale Lineweight

Custom:

Scaled to FitScale:

Paper size: Letter

inches mm

Portrait

Landscape

Drawing orientation

Plot upside-down

View

Window Window <

Plot offset Plot options

Center the plot

X: 0.00 inches

Y: 0.00 inches

Plot object lineweights

Plot with plot styles

Plot paperspace last

Hide objects

Paper size and paper units

Select the output Paper size. Also select inches or mm as the units for the plotsettings.

Drawing orientation

Select Portrait or Landscape orientation of the drawing on the paper. Selectedorientation is indicated by the page icon. Also, select Plot upside down ifdesired.

Plot area

Plotting

8-13

In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows:

Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits.

Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing thatcurrently contains entities).

Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen.

View – Not accessible.

Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. Selectthe Window button. Then define two opposite corners of the area to be plotted.This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.

Plot scale

Scale – From the pulldown list, you can select Scaled to Fit to scale the plot aslarge as possible for the selected paper. You can also select from a number ofscale ratios (1:1, 1:2, etc.).

Custom – Indicates the relation between plot units of length and drawing unitsof length. This will change according to the selected scale.

Scale lineweights – Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale.Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed objects and are plottedwith the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale.

Plot offset

Select the Center the plot checkbox to center the plot on the paper. Or, you canset the origin of the plot by entering values in the X and Y fields.

Plot options

Plot object lineweights – If you have turned off the Plot with plot stylescheckbox, you can select this checkbox to use object lineweights in the plot.

Plot with plot styles – Select this checkbox to plot using the plot styles appliedto objects and defined in the plot style table. All style definitions with differentproperty characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be attached tothe geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions ofAutoCAD.

Plotting

8-14

Plot paperspace last – Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometryis usually plotted before model space geometry.

Hide objects – Plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layoutenvironment (paper space). Hidden line removal for model space objects inviewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide property in the Object PropertyManager. This is displayed in the plot preview, but not in the layout.

Plotting

8-15

Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

The File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function allows you to plot an entireproject or a group of selected pages within the project.

Select:

File � Print/Plot � Multiple Pages

The following Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear.

Export Type File Name Format Export Format

OK Cancel Help...

Page Selection... Layer Groups...

Plot Direct

Create PLT Files

Create DWG Files

Create DXF Files

Project/Inst./Page

Consecutive

AutoCAD R12

AutoCAD R13

Plot Sequence

Forward

Backward

Define Layer...

AutoCAD R14

Print/Plot Pages

This dialog box allows the user to select whether pages will be sent to a plotter or toa disk file. There are also radio buttons to select the file naming format and theAutoCAD version format of the files.

Plot to a Plotter

Select the Plot Direct radio button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.

Plotting

8-16

Plot to a File

In the Print/Plot Pages dialog box, select the radio button for the file type that youwish to create: PLT, DWG, or DXF. The section on Plotting to Files contains moreinformation (see page 8-21).

Select Pages to be Plotted

Select the Page Selection button. The following Plotting dialog box will appear.

Project:


Installation: Page:

OK Cancel Help...


Plotting

The Project field contains a list of projects currently on your system. Select aproject name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and alist of pages in that installation will appear.


To Plot an Entire Project – Select the project name followed by the OK button. (Donot select any installation or page names.) All drawing pages in the project will beplotted.

To Plot an Entire Installation – Select the project name and then the desiredinstallation name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any page names.) Alldrawing pages in the installation will be plotted.

Plotting

8-17

To Plot Individual Pages – Select the project name and then the desired installationname. You can then select one or more individual pages from the Page columnfollowed by the OK button. The selected pages will be plotted.

Select the OK button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box to proceed with the plotting.

Plot Sequence

You can select the order in which pages plot with the Plot Sequence radio buttons inthe Print/Plot Pages dialog box.

Select the Forward radio button to print pages in numerical order from lowest tohighest.

Select the Backward radio button to print pages in reverse numerical order fromhighest to lowest.

Plotting

8-18

Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

The File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function allows you to plot an entireproject or a group of selected pages within the project.

Select:


The following Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear.

Export Type

File Name Format Export Format

OK Cancel Help...

Page Selection...

Layer Selection...Plot Direct

Create PLT Files

Create DWG Files

Create DXF Files

Project/Inst./Page

Consecutive

AutoCAD R12

AutoCAD R13

Plot Sequence

Forward

Backward

AutoCAD R14

Print/Plot Pages

Define Layer...

AutoCAD 2000

Create DWF Files

Plotter Configuration

This dialog box allows the user to select whether pages will be sent to a plotter or toa disk file. There are also radio buttons to select the file naming format and theAutoCAD version format of the files.

Plotting

8-19

Plot to a Plotter

Select the Plot Direct radio button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.

Plot to a File

In the Print/Plot Pages dialog box, select the radio button for the file type that youwish to create: PLT, DWF, DWG or DXF. The section on Plotting to Files containsmore information (see page 8-21).

Select Pages to be Plotted

Select the Page Selection button. The following Plotting dialog box will appear.

Project:


Installation: Page:

OK Cancel Help...


Plotting

The Project field contains a list of projects currently on your system. Select aproject name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and alist of pages in that installation will appear.


To Plot an Entire Project – Select the project name followed by the OK button. (Donot select any installation or page names.) All drawing pages in the project will beplotted.

Plotting

8-20

To Plot an Entire Installation – Select the project name and then the desiredinstallation name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any page names.) Alldrawing pages in the installation will be plotted.

To Plot Individual Pages – Select the project name and then the desired installationname. You can then select one or more individual pages from the Page columnfollowed by the OK button. The selected pages will be plotted.

Select the OK button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box to proceed with the plotting.

Plot Sequence

You can select the order in which pages plot with the Plot Sequence radio buttons inthe Print/Plot Pages dialog box.

Select the Forward radio button to print pages in numerical order from lowest tohighest.

Select the Backward radio button to print pages in reverse numerical order fromhighest to lowest.

Plotting

8-21

Plotting to Files

PLT Files

To plot drawing pages as PLT files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pagesfunction and select the Create PLT Files radio button. Files will be saved in theRS\PLOT directory.

Note The Create PLT Files function will not work under AutoCAD R14 unless the Plot toFile checkbox in the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function is turned on.

Note When you use the AutoCAD PLOT command to plot to a file, the system will createa plt extension file in the same directory as the original page file (underRS\PROJECT\WORK).

Procedure:

1. Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.

2. Select the Create PLT Files radio button in the dialog box.

3. Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available:

Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOTdirectory for the project and installation and store the PLT files in thesesubdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A areplotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is noinstallation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be namedNO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.plt where “pagename” isthe name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the filePlot_plt.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates whichproject/installation/location/page are in each plot file.

Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOTdirectory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will besaved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in theformat ecs0.plt, ecs1.plt, etc. The software creates the file Plot_plt.txt in theproject’s plot file directory that indicates whichproject/installation/location/page are in each PLT file.

4. Select the Page Selection button to select the project, installation and pages thatyou wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will returnto the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.

Plotting

8-22

5. Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.

The software will remind you to select the Plot to File radio button in the Print/Plot> Current Page function. If there are already PLT files in the same subdirectory ofthe PLOT directory (from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt“There are PLT files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to deletethe existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the PLT plotfunction.

DWF Files

(AutoCAD 2000 add–on version only) DWF files can be viewed in Internetbrowsers with the Autodesk WHIP! 4.0 plug–in. To plot drawing pages as DWFfiles, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the CreateDWF Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory.

Procedure:


2. Select the Create DWF Files radio button in the dialog box.

3. Select a configuration file from the drop–down list immediately to the right ofthe Create DWF Files radio button. There are two choices for DWF files: TheDWF Classic.pc3 configuration file creates DWFs that resemble AutoCADRelease 14 DWFs. The output file is created with a black drawing background.The DWF ePlot.pc3 file creates DWFs with a white drawing background and apaper boundary.


Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOTdirectory for the project and installation and store the DWF files in thesesubdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A areplotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is noinstallation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be namedNO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dwf where “pagename” isthe name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the filePlot_dwf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates whichproject/installation/location/page are in each plot file.

Plotting

8-23

Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOTdirectory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will besaved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in theformat ecs0.dwf, ecs1.dwf, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dwf.txt in theproject’s plot file directory that indicates whichproject/installation/location/page are in each plot file.

5. Select the Select Pages button to select the project, installation and pages thatyou wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will returnto the Plot dialog box.


DWG Files

To plot drawing pages as DWG files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pagesfunction and select the Create DWG Files radio button. Files will be saved in theRS\PLOT directory.

Note You can also use the File > Save As function to save drawings as DWG files (seepage 4-9), but these functions only save one page at a time. The plot function allowsyou to save a range of pages in one operation.

Procedure:


2. Select the Create DWG Files radio button in the dialog box.


Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOTdirectory for the project and installation and store the DWG files in thesesubdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A areplotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is noinstallation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be namedNO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dwg where “pagename” isthe name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the filePlot_dwg.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates whichproject/installation/location/page are in each plot file.

Plotting

8-24

Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOTdirectory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will besaved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in theformat ecs0.dwg, ecs1.dwg, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dwg.txt in theproject’s plot file directory that indicates whichproject/installation/location/page are in each plot file.

4. Select the Export Format AutoCAD R12, AutoCAD R13, AutoCAD R14 orAutoCAD 2000 to match the DWG type that you wish to create.

5. Select the Select Pages button to select the project, installation and pages thatyou wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will returnto the Plot dialog box.


If there are already DWG files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory(from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There areDWG/PLT files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete theexisting files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the DWG plotfunction.

DXF Files

To plot drawing pages as DXF files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pagesfunction and select the Create DXF Files radio button. Files will be saved in theRS\PLOT directory.

Procedure:


2. Select the Create DXF Files radio button in the Plot dialog box.


Plotting

8-25

Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOTdirectory for the project and installation and store the DXF files in thesesubdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A areplotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is noinstallation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be namedNO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dxf where “pagename” isthe name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the filePlot_dxf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates whichproject/installation/location/page are in each plot file.

Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOTdirectory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will besaved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in theformat ecs0.dxf, ecs1.dxf, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dxf.txt in theproject’s plot file directory that indicates whichproject/installation/location/page are in each DXF file.

4. Select the Page Selection button to select the project, installation and pages thatyou wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will returnto the Plot dialog box.


If there are already DXF files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory (froma previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are DXF files in theplot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the existing files andcontinue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the DXF plot function.

Plotting

8-26

Plotting Selected Layers

RSWire has the capability to plot selected drawing layers. This is useful if, forexample, you wish to show or hide mounting information on a panel layoutdrawing, or show or hide certain texts on a schematic drawing.

To plot by layer, the user creates a layer group consisting of one or more selectedlayers. A layer group can then be selected for plotting. All the standard RSWiredrawing layers are available for inclusion in a layer group. (See page 5-127 for a listof layers.)

If you have created custom drawing layers, these must first be defined in RSWireusing the Define Layers function before they can be included in a layer group. Seepage 8-31.

Creating and Selecting Layer Groups

To plot by layer, the layer first must be assigned to a layer group. A group canconsist of one or more layers.

To create a layer group

1. Select File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages.


The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear.

2. Select the Layer Groups button.

The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear.

Plotting

8-27

Select

Delete

Modify...

OK Cancel Help...

Layer Control

On

Off

Layer Group

Add...

Enter New Group Name

Active

Layer Printing Control

Enter a name for the new layer group in the field above the Add button. Thenselect the Add button.

3. The Modify Groups dialog box will appear.

Delete

OK Cancel Help...

Layer Group

Add

ECS_LEV_FIELDECS_LEV_LINEECS_LEV_LINE_WNOECS_LEV_PG_FRAMEECS_LEV_PG_LADDERECS_LEV_PH_DATAECS_LEV_PH_EEDECS_LEV_PH_TMP

Layer Names

Modify Groups

Plotting

8-28

Existing layer names are listed in the Layer Names field. Select (highlight) thenames of the layers that you wish to include in the layer group. Then select theAdd button. The selected layers will be listed in the Layer Group field. Whenyou have added all the desired layers for the group select the OK button.

4. The Layer Groups dialog box will return. The newly created layer group will belisted in the Layer Group field.

Selecting a Layer Group for Plotting

To select a layer group for plotting:




2. Select the Layer Groups button.

3. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear. Select the On radio buttonin the Layer Control section.

Select

Delete

Modify...

template

OK Cancel Help...

Layer Control

On

Off

Layer Group

Add...

Active

Layer Printing Control

Plotting

8-29

4. Existing layer groups are listed in the Layer Group field. Select (highlight) thename of the layer group that you wish to plot.

5. Then select the Select button. The selected layer group name will appear in theActive field.

6. Select the OK button. The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will return. You can thenselect pages for plotting with the Page Selection button.

7. The plot by layer mode will remain in effect during the work session until youreturn to the Layer Groups dialog box and select the Off radio button in theLayer Control area.

Modifying a Layer Group

To add or remove layers in an existing layer group:


2. Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box willappear.

3. Select (highlight) the name of the layer group to be modified.

4. Select the Modify button. The Modify Groups dialog box will appear. Layersthat are currently in the group are listed in the Layer Group field. All availablelayer names are listed in the Layer Names field.

5. Use the Delete button to remove selected layer names from the Layer Groupfield. To add a layer name to the group, select the layer name in the LayerNames field followed by the Add.

Deleting a Layer Group

To delete an existing symbol group:


2. Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box willappear.

3. Select (highlight) the name of the layer group to be deleted.

Plotting

8-30

4. Select the Delete button.

Plotting

8-31

Defining Custom Drawing Layers

If you have created custom drawing layers, these must first be defined in RSWireusing the Define Layers function before these layers can be included in a layergroup for plotting by layer.

Define a Layer




2. Select the Define Layer button.

3. The Define Layers dialog box will appear. A list of existing, defined layernames appears on the left side of the dialog box.

Remove

OK Cancel Help

Existing Layer Names

Add

ECS_LEV_FIELDECS_LEV_LINEECS_LEV_LINE_WNOECS_LEV_PG_FRAMEECS_LEV_PG_LADDERECS_LEV_PH_DATAECS_LEV_PH_EEDECS_LEV_PH_TMP

Enter Layer Name

Save

Define Layers

4. Enter the name of the layer that you wish to define in the field above the Addbutton. Then select the Add button. The name of the newly defined layer willthen appear in the list in alphabetical order.

5. If you wish the layer to remain defined in future work sessions select the Savebutton. If you only wish to define it for the current work session select OK.

Plotting

8-32

Remove (un–define) a Layer

When a layer is removed from the Existing Layer Names list, this layer name can nolonger be included in a layer group. The removed layer still exists, it is simply notlisted in the Define Layers dialog box. A removed layer can be added to the layerlist again at a later time.

1. Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and then the DefineLayer button.

2. Select (highlight) the layer name that you wish to remove.

3. Select the Remove button.

4. If you wish the layer name to remain un–defined in future work sessions selectthe Save button. If you only wish to un–define it for the current work sessionselect the OK button.

Reports

9-1

9 Reports

This section describes the various information reports and lists that can be generatedin RSWireTM Designer.

The report functions are found under the Reports pull–down menu. They aredivided into a number of submenus, each of which contain several specific listfunctions. These submenus are described in the following sections.

Reports � Project � Libraries� Connections� Terminals� Wire� PLC–List� Parts� MS Access Reports� Comma Separated� Error Checking

The Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function displays a dialog box thatallows a number of list output settings to be made. See page 7-5.

See Section 14, List Generator Configuration, for information on customizing theformats of the various reports and lists.


� Printing Lists from RSWire

� Project Reports

� Project Full

� Project Brief

� Installations

� Page Full

� Page Brief

Reports

9-2

� Table of Contents

� Library Reports

� Macro

� Symbols

� Device Type Full

� Device Type Brief

� Parts

� Foreign Languages

� Page Formats

� Connections Reports

� Wire List

� Wire Labels

� Cable List

� Field Wire

� Signals

� Terminals Reports

� Terminals

� Terminal Strips

� PLC–List Report

� Parts Reports

� Compile Parts File

� Master List

� Bill of Materials

� Purchase Order

� Job Costing

� Dimension List

� MS Access Reports

� Comma Separated Reports

� Error Checking Reports

� Unreferenced Signals Report

� Device Without Parent Report

Reports

9-3

Printing Lists from RSWire

When a list is sent from RSWire to a printer, the default method for printing is touse the DOS PRINT command. RSWire creates a file and then “shells” out to DOSand calls a batch file in the RS\WORK directory. The name of the file to be printedis sent as a parameter to the batch call (%2). The name of the batch file to be calledis named in the Tools > System Settings > Printer Configuration dialog box inone of the numbered Printer fields. See page 7-9. Up to five different batch files canbe used at any given time.

The batch files can be written to send the print files to different printers or to imbedescape sequences for the printer so that different printer setups for fonts, paperorientations, etc., can be assigned to the five printers. This can be done by the use ofan ECHO command with a redirection to the appropriate printer.

For example, this line would send “ [ESC] FF” to LPT1 at the start of every printjob:

ECHO [ESC] FF > LPT1 ]PRINT %2

Or

This line would send a whole file of text or escape sequences:TYPE PRINTER1.ESC > LPT1

The standard default batch is PRINTER.BAT. This file uses the DOS PRINTCOMMAND.

Other methods can also be used in the batch file:

“TYPE %2 > LPT1”“TYPE %2 > LPT1.DOS”“COPY %2 LPT1”“COPY %2 LPT1.DOS”

You can verify that these lines will work on your system by typing them on the DOScommand line while shelled out of DOS and substituting an actual text file name forthe “%2”.

Other methods may also be available with your network or spooling software.NPRINT for example.

Reports

9-4

Project Reports

The Reports > Project submenu allows you to generate lists of projects and theinstallations and pages contained in those projects.

Reports � Project � Project Full� Project Brief� Installations� Page Full� Page Brief� Table of Contents

Project Full

This function generates a list of RSWire projects that currently exist on the systemin the designated project directory (RS\PROJECT\WORK). The list includes projectname, number of pages, description, job number, drawing number and additionaldescription.

Project Brief

This function also lists all RSWire projects, but in a more concise format that doesnot include the additional description.

Installations

This function generates a list of all installations in a selected project.

Page Full

This function generates a detailed list of all drawing pages in a project includingpage descriptions, format number, location, date, etc. When you select this functiona Select Project – Installation dialog box appears allowing you to select a projectand (if desired) limit the list to a single installation.

Reports

9-5

Page Brief

This function generates a more concise list of drawing pages in a project, includingonly page, description, location, date and name. When you select this function aSelect Project – Installation dialog box appears allowing you to select a project and(if desired) limit the list to a single installation.

Table of Contents

This function generates a graphical page list. The pages are listed in table format,with columns for installation, page number, description, location, date and macro.

Reports

9-6

Library Reports

The Reports > Libraries submenu provides a selection of lists of information thatis relevant to all projects. This includes lists of macros, symbols, device types, andlanguage texts.

Reports � Libraries � Macro� Symbols� Device Type Full� Device Type Brief� Parts � Full Data Preview

� Brief Data Preview� Full Data Printout� Brief Data Printout

� Foreign Languages� Page Formats

Macro

This function generates a list of available macros in the currently loaded symbollibrary. Sorting can be performed by macro name and macro description.

Symbols

This function generates a list of all the symbols in the currently loaded symbollibrary.

Note If you have not looked at any drawing page since entering RSWire, the system mayprompt “No catalog loaded” when you select the macro or symbol list. In this case,you can open a drawing page that utilizes the desired symbol catalog.

Device Type Full

This function provides a list of device types. (In RSWire, a device type is adefinition that ties together a parent symbol, a child symbol, and a cross referencesymbol.) The list contains detailed information about the device types including thenames of the parent, child and cross reference symbols and the distance of the crossreference symbol from the parent symbol reference point.

Reports

9-7

Device Type Brief

This function generates a concise list of available device types consisting of devicename and description.

Parts

The Library > Parts report functions allow you to create reports on information inthe parts database.

Full Data Preview – This function displays a detailed listing of parts data on thescreen.

Brief Data Preview – This function displays a more concise listing of parts data onthe screen including part number, description, manufacturer and catalog number..

Full Data Printout – This function generates a detailed printout of parts data.

Brief Data Printout – This function generates a more concise printout of parts dataon the screen including part number, description, manufacturer and catalog number..

Foreign Languages

This function allows foreign language lists to be searched and listed. RSWireincludes a file containing lists of commonly used technical words and phrases inmultiple languages (English, German, French, etc.). By entering the number for theword or phrase in the drawing (instead of the word itself), RSWire can automaticallydisplay the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages. The ForeignLanguages function displays the following Language Text Database dialog box.

Reports

9-8

All Selected Languages

Translated Texts

Not Translated

ListSelected Languages

EnglishGermanFrenchSpanishNetherlandsItalian

Filter

Cancel Help...

Language Text Database

Text

Number

The Selected Languages field allows you to select one or more languages forsearching and/or listing. Use standard Windows selection keys (hold down <Ctrl> toselect more than one language, hold down <Shift> to select a block of languages.)

The Filter fields allow you to enter a text phrase or number and search for thatentry. Wildcard entries containing an asterisk (*) character are possible (e.g., entertext *ON* to search for all text containing the letters “ON”).

The List buttons allow you to list all the selected languages, all entries that exist inall languages (Translated Texts button), and all entries that do not exist in alllanguages (Not Translated button).

The selected texts are listed in a dialog box. You can print these texts by selectingthe Print button. To sort the texts by text number, click in the column header for textnumbers. To sort the texts alphanumerically by text, click in the column header forthe texts. See following figure.

Reports

9-9

1 DRIVE2 MOTOR DRIVE3 E-VALVE4 MOUNTINGS5 PUMP6 AMPLIFIER7 THROTTLE ORIFICE8 TRANSFORMER

OKTEXTNO

Language Text Database

Print

Click incolumn headers tosort texts

Page Formats

This Reports > Libraries > Page Formats function generates a list of RSWiredrawing page formats including dimensions and descriptions.

Reports

9-10

Connections Reports

The Reports > Connections submenu provides wire related list information.

Reports � Connections � Wire List� Wire Labels� Cable List� Field Wire� Signals

Wire List

The Reports > Connections > Wire List function generates a list of wires whichincludes the following information: wire number, gauge, color, source (from),destination (to).

When you select the Wire List function, a dialog box will appear asking if you wishto create a project connection list. This connection list is a source file that is used togenerate the wire list.

Create project connection list?

Yes No Cancel

Warning

If you have not yet created a connection list file for the project, or have madechanges since the last connection list was generated, select the Yes button. If youwish to base the wire list on an existing connection list file, select the No button.

The Connection List dialog box will appear.

Reports

9-11

File Name

Installation

Location

Comment

File Name(s)

Connection List

Help...Cancel

Search...

LINE1 WIRE LIST

L1.LST LINE1 WIRE LISTL2.LST LINE2 WIRE LISTWIRELIST TOTAL WIRE LIST

L1.LST

LINE1

Open Connections

Search...

OK

Delete

Parameter

To create a new connection list:

In the File Name field enter the name you wish the connection list to have.

In the Installation field enter nothing if you wish to include all installations. Enteran installation name if you wish to restrict the contents of the list to the specifiedinstallation.

In the Location field enter nothing if you wish to include all locations. Enter alocation name if you wish to restrict the contents of the list to the specified location.

In the Comment field enter a description of the connection list. This will help youdistinguish the various connection lists later.

The Parameter button provides additional toggles to include or restrict certain typesof terminal information. See page 9-13.

Selecting the Open Connections toggle will generate a list consisting only of openconnections.

Reports

9-12

Select OK to generate the wire list.

To use an existing connection list:

The File Name(s) area of the Connection List dialog box lists the availableconnection lists. Select an existing list by pointing and clicking; the file name anddescription is listed in the upper part of the dialog box.

The Parameter button provides additional toggles to include or restrict certain typesof terminal information. See page 9-13.

Selecting the Open Connections toggle will generate a list consisting only of openconnections.

Select OK to generate the wire list.

Note When there are more than two devices connected to a potential, the connectionsshown in the wire list are determined by the connection search priorities that thesoftware uses when analyzing the schematic drawings. See page 9-15.

Note To delete an existing connection list, select the list name in the Connection Listdialog box and then select the Delete button.

Reports

9-13

Connection List Parameters

The Parameter button in the Connection List dialog provides settings to include orrestrict certain types of terminal information. The following dialog box is displayed.

Complete Partial

OK Cancel Help...

Terminal Blocks Clip Jumpers

Terminal Blocks Wire Jumpers

Terminal Block Connections

Suppress

Print Target

Both Targets Match Selection

Selection Filters To Target 1

Target Definition

Cable Connections

Connection List Parameters

Suppress:

Terminal Blocks Clip Jumpers – When this checkbox is Off all connections areshown in the connection list. When On, connections between two consecutivelynumbered terminals possessing the same device ID (terminal strip) will not appearin the connection list. The jumper connection will then be displayed in the terminalplan interconnection drawings and subsequent lists.

Terminal Blocks Wire Jumpers – When Off all connections are shown in theconnection list. When On, connections between two non–consecutively numberedterminals possessing the same device ID (terminal strip) will not appear in theconnection list. The jumper connection will then be displayed in the terminal planinterconnection drawings and subsequent lists.

Reports

9-14

Terminal Block Connections – When Off all connections are shown in theconnection list. When On, connections between two terminals possessing differentdevice IDs (terminal strip) will not appear in the connection list. The cablinginformation will then be displayed in the terminal plan interconnection drawingsand subsequent lists.

Cable Connections – When checked, will omit cable connections from theconnection list.

Target Definition:

Both Targets Match Selection – When this checkbox is On, both targets(destinations) in the connection list must match the installation and location definedby the user in the Installation and Location fields of the Create Connection Listdialog box. When Off only one of the destinations must match the installation andlocation defined by the user. The system will display the connection between thedevices in their respective installations and locations when connected by wires.

For example: suppose a wire list is generated based on the installation L1 and thelocation E1. Suppose the following wire list is generated with the Both TargetsMatch Selection checkbox turned OFF.

FROM TO

Inst. Loc. Device ID Inst. Loc. Device ID

= L1 + E1 PB1 = L1 + E1 TB1:10

= L2 + ST1 LS2 = L1 + E1 SS2

The first connection in the list matches the specified installation and location (L1and E1) on both the From and the To sides. The second connection matches thespecified installation and location only on the To side. If the connection list werecreated again with the Both Targets Match Selection checkbox turned ON, only thefirst connection shown above would be listed because both sides would have tomatch the specified installation and location.

Selection Filters To Target 1 – This checkbox works in conjunction with the BothTargets Match Selection checkbox (which must be OFF for this checkbox to serveany purpose). Turning ON the Selection Filters to Target 1 checkbox will place alldestinations that match the installation and location specified by the user ( in theInstallation and Location fields of the Create Connection List dialog box) on theFrom side of the list. For the example listing shown above, turning this checkboxON would have the effect of reversing the second connection the next time a listingwas made, as follows:

Reports

9-15

FROM TO

Inst. Loc. Device ID Inst. Loc. Device ID

= L1 + E1 PB1 = L1 + E1 TB1:10

= L2 + E1 SS2 = L2 + ST1 LS2

Print Target

These radio buttons determine whether the complete target name is listed includinginstallation and location. Selecting Complete will include installation and location.Selecting Partial will exclude the installation and location.

Select OK to return to the Connection List dialog box.

Then select OK to create the connection list.

The Wire List output is done with the Reports > Connections > Wire Listfunction.

Connection Search Priorities

The software uses a search routine to determine connections on potentials wheremore than two devices are connected. For most wires, only a “from” and “to” needto be determined; but in some cases there may be many devices all connected to thesame potential. The software searches these wires in the following manner:

The search of a potential begins on the left–hand side of the lowest line number onthe connected symbols. If the page format in use does not have line numbers, theleftmost connection will be used as the starting point. If two connections on a pagewithout line numbers are lined up, the topmost one will take precedence. If adiagonal connection symbol exists on the wire, the connection search will begin atthe connection point left of position 1 on the diagonal connection symbol (seediagram on next page). If multiple diagonal connection symbols exist, the searchwill begin with the upper–leftmost connection.

The system will follow the wire from this first connection until it encounters anotherconnection point. Here it analyzes all wires incoming to the connection point andlooks for unanalyzed wires. In a vertical (U.S. type) ladder diagram, the system usesthe following priorities at each connection point:

1st priority: horizontal line to the left2nd priority: horizontal line to the right or slanting3rd priority: vertical line upwards4th priority: vertical line downwards5th priority: diagonal line

Reports

9-16

T2

T1

1st 2nd

3rd

4th

Connection SearchFrom Left Side of T2

Search Priorities

JIC Style Diagram

5th

For horizontal (IEC, DIN) style diagrams, the system searches for connections usingthe following priorities:

1st priority: vertical line upwards2nd priority: vertical line downwards3rd priority: horizontal line to the left4th priority: horizontal line to the right5th priority: diagonal line

T2T1

3rd 4th

1st

2nd

Connection SearchFrom Left Side Of T2

Search Priorities

5th

IEC Style Diagram

For both diagram types (ladder and IEC), these priorities only apply if aperpendicular connection is used as the connection point. If the diagonal wiringsymbol DW is used (selected with Tools > Project Settings > General Defaultsfunction), the subsequent course of the search depends on the orientation of thediagonal wiring symbol:

incoming at connection point 1 continue at 2incoming at connection point 3 continue at 2incoming at connection point 2 continue at 3incoming at connection point 2 continue at 1 if 3 already processed

Reports

9-17

1

3

2

DW SymbolConnection

Points

After the search is completed, each connection along the search path is put on theconnection (wire) list. If the list did not contain any diagonal wires, the list will besorted alphanumerically according to the “From” part of each connection. If ANYdiagonal wires exist, connections will be shown on the wire list in the order theywere analyzed.

The above process is completed for each potential and the information is added tothe connection (wire) list.

Reports

9-18

Wire Labels

Use the Reports > Connections > Wire Labels to generate a list of wire numberswhich can be printed in the form of wire labels.

Select:

Reports � Connections � Wire Labels

The wire labels will be printed, displayed on the screen or saved to a file dependingon the output mode selected with the Report Settings tab in Tools > SystemSettings function.

Note Wire labels cannot be filtered using the list generator filter function.

Cable List

The Cable List is a list of cables in the project including installation, location,device ID and number of conductors.

Reports � Connections � Cable List

Field Wire

The Field Wire report is a list of cables in the project including the internal andexternal connections of each conductor. The list indicates which conductors havebeen used (assigned).

Reports � Connections � Field Wire

Signals

The Signals report function displays a list of signal symbols in the project showingeach symbol’s device ID and Installation – page – line number position. It alsoindicates whether the signal is an incoming or outgoing symbol type.

Reports � Connections � Signals

Reports

9-19

Terminals Reports

The Terminals report functions generate information on terminals strips.

Reports � Terminals � Terminals� Terminal Strips

Terminals

The Terminals function generates a list of terminal strips. For each strip, theinternal and external connections of each terminal are indicated.

Select:

Reports � Terminals � Terminals

Terminal Strips

The Terminal Strips function generates a list of terminal strips in the projectincluding installation, location, device ID, and number of terminals.

Select:

Reports � Terminals � Terminal Strips

The list shows the terminal strip ID and the number of terminals used in the project.

Reports

9-20

PLC–List Report

The PLC–List report function generates a list of programmable controller I/Omodules in the project. This list indicates the address and descriptive text of eachI/O point of each PLC module parent symbol. Installation and line number are givenfor PLC child symbols.

Select:

Reports � PLC–List

Reports

9-21

Parts Reports

The Reports > Parts submenu provides a selection of lists jointly compiled fromthe items included in a project and the data in the parts database.

Reports � Parts � Compile Parts File� Master List� Bill of Materials� Purchase Order� Job Costing� Dimension List

Compile Parts File

The Compile Parts File function creates a source file of parts information from thecurrent project that is used to generate other job lists including the Master Parts List,Bill of Material, Purchase Order List, Job Costing List and Dimension List.

Reports � Parts � Compile Parts File

The Master Parts List dialog box will appear.

Project:

Language

Output File Name: MAST.LST

Replace Language Text

Replace Multi–Line Text (^)

Only Device IDs With Part Number

Include Terminals

Only On–Line Selected Pages

project name

OK Cancel Help...

1:

2:

3:

English

Master Parts List

The Output File field allows the name of the parts file to be entered. The defaultfilename is MAST.LST.

Reports

9-22

The following checkboxes determine what is included in the parts file:

Replace Language Text – Select this checkbox to overwrite the user–definedfunction text language selected in the Project Parameters dialog box (you must thenspecify new languages in the Language fields of the Compile Parts File dialogbox).

Replace Multi–Line Text – Select this checkbox to eliminate the control symbol (^)in the lists to be created. When text is entered on a drawing this symbol indicates aline break. For function text printouts, leave this checkbox unselected to maintaintext locations for applications such as nameplate generation.

Only On–Line Selected Pages – Select this checkbox to create a file only fromthose pages with online control turned on.

Only Device IDs With Part Number – Select this checkbox to restrict the list toonly those device IDs that have a part number assigned.

Include Terminals – Select this checkbox to include terminals in the list.

Select OK to generate the parts file. The parts file will be stored in theRS\PROJECT\WORK directory in the subdirectory for the currently active project.

Master List

The master parts list includes the device ID, page/line number, part numbers, andfunction text for items in the schematics.

In order to generate this list, a parts file must first have been created with theReports > Parts > Compile Parts File function.

Select:

Reports � Parts � Master List

A Master List dialog box will appear listing the available parts files. Select a filename and select the OK button to generate the master list.

Reports

9-23

Bill of Materials

The bill of materials is a list of parts used in a given project. The list shows everydevice ID to which a part number has been assigned, the part number, the partdescription and manufacturer.

In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports >Parts > Compile Parts File function.

Select:

Reports � Parts � Bill of Materials


Master List:

MAST.LSTMASTB.LST

OK Cancel Help...

Select:Installation:Location:

Bill Of Materials

You can select from different parts files which are listed on the left side of the dialogbox.

The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations byentering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Locationfields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed.

Select OK to generate the list.

Reports

9-24

Purchase Order List

The purchase order list is a quantified list of part numbers (with descriptions) usedin a project. All items with matching part numbers are combined and shown as aquantity.


Select:

Reports � Parts � Purchase Order


Master List:

MAST.LSTMASTB.LST

OK Cancel Help...


Purchase Order List

Print Device ID’s

You can select from different parts files listed on the left side of the dialog box.


If you select the Print Device ID’s checkbox, each item on the list will include thedevice IDs to which that part number was assigned.


Reports

9-25

Job Costing List

The job costing list calculates the total cost of the project including material,assembly and wiring time, and mark–up.


Select:

Reports � Parts � Job Costing


Mark–Up

Master List:

MAST.LSTMASTB.LST

OK Cancel Help...


Job Costing List

Print Device ID

0.00

0.00

Hourly Cost

You can select from different parts files listed on the left side of the dialog box.


The Hourly Cost field allows you to enter a labor cost value which, in conjunctionwith the assembly and wiring times from the parts database, will be used to calculatethe total assembly and wiring costs.

The Mark–Up field allows you to set a mark–up percentage beyond the prices in theparts database.

Reports

9-26

If you select the Print Device ID toggle, each item on the list will include the deviceIDs to which that part number was assigned.


Reports

9-27

Dimension List

The dimension list calculates the total area, maximum depth and total weight of thecomponents in the project. Subtotals are calculated for each location.


Select:

Reports � Parts � Dimension List

The software will prompt you to create a master parts file.

The following will then appear dialog box appears:

Master List:

MAST.LSTMASTB.LST

OK Cancel Help...


Dimension List

You can select from different master lists listed on the left side of the dialog box.


Select OK to create the dimension list.

Reports

9-28

MS Access Reports

Parts reports can be generated in Microsoft Access format. See the previous section,Parts Reports, for descriptions of these reports.

Reports � MS Access Reports � Print � Master List� Preview � Bill of Materials

� Purchase Order� Job Costing� Dimension List

Note It is not necessary to compile a parts file for these reports. Access obtains theinformation directly from the project database.

To print a MS–Access report – select the Reports > MS Access Reports > Printmenu and then the desired list.

To view a MS–Access report on screen – select the Reports > MS AccessReports > Preview menu and then the desired list.

Reports

9-29

Comma Separated Reports

The Reports > Comma Separated submenu provides list generator functions thatproduce various lists in a comma separated format. List output files in this formatcan be imported easily into spreadsheet and database programs for furthermanipulation and formatting. See previous sections for descriptions of these lists.

Reports � Comma Separated � Project� Libraries� Connections� Terminals� PLC–List� Parts� Error Checking

Reports

9-30

Error Checking Reports

The Reports > Error Checking submenu allows you to generate lists related tosignals and parent/child referencing. These functions are performed for the currentlyactive project. Use the Manage > Project > Project Preselect function to select adifferent project.

Reports � Error Checking � Unreferenced Signals� Device Without Parent

Unreferenced Signals Report

This function displays a list of unmatched signal IDs (an outgoing signal without acorresponding incoming signal, or vice versa). The list shows each symbol’s deviceID and Installation – page – line number position. It also indicates whether thesignal is an incoming or outgoing symbol type.

If there are no unreferenced signals, the software will display the message “Allsignal cross references are matched up.”

Device Without Parent Report

This function displays a list of child symbols that exist in the schematics without acorresponding parent symbol. For example, a relay contact for which there is no coilwith the same device ID.

Panel Layout

10-1

10 Panel Layout

This section contains instructions for producing a layout of devices in a cabinet orother type of assembly.

Overview

Although the user can use ordinary drawing functions to produce a panel layoutdiagram, this would not take advantage of the time–saving features of the RSWireTM

Designer panel layout mode.

When you create schematic diagrams with RSWire, the system allows you to enter apart number for each device in the drawing. This part number ties the device in thedrawing to the parts database (see figure below). The database, in turn, containsinformation about a specific part, including dimensions and the name of a layoutsymbol which can graphically represent the part on a layout drawing.

The Panel Layout mode can access this information. When the user wishes tocreate a panel layout, the Panel Layout function will automatically present the userwith a list of every item in the drawing for which a part number has been assigned.The user simply selects one or more items from the list and then selects a positionon the layout page. The system places the symbol and labels it with the device ID.This greatly speeds the production of the layout drawing.

PB206

Part number: 10250T101–23X

PB206 PB223

Schematic Diagram Parts Database Panel Layout Drawing

10250T101–23X

Part Number 10250T101–23X

Description PUSHBUTTON N.O.

Manuf. ACMESymbols

Ref.

Wire

Lay.

PBNO

L–PB

Panel Layout

10-2

Preliminary Panel Layout Steps

The following preconditions are necessary to produce panel layouts using the PanelLayout function.

1. Ensure that the parts database contains information on the components to beused in the schematic diagrams. If you are using layout symbols (see next step),the layout symbol name should be assigned to each part in the database that thelayout symbol will represent. There is a layout symbol name field for thispurpose. See Section 13 for information on using the database.

2. If you want the software to prompt you with a layout symbol (as opposed to adimensioned box), create the necessary symbols. See page 10-9 for layoutsymbol creation procedures. A number of layout symbols are provided withRSWire; these symbols all have names that begin with the characters “L–”.

3. When you create the schematic diagrams, assign part numbers to the symbols,either as you place the symbol or afterwards (right click on symbol and selectPart Number from the pop–up menu).

Panel Layout

10-3

Panel Layout Procedure

Use the following steps (after the preliminary steps on the previous page):

1. Using the File > New > Page function, create a drawing page for the panellayout in an appropriate scale (e.g. 1:4). You must select “Panel Layout” in thePage Type field. Commonly used portions of layouts can be set up as macrosand specified in the Page Macro field.

Project

Installation

Location

Page


Scale 1: 1

Online



Page Macro


1... 2... 3... 4... 5...

6... 7... 8... 9... 10...

Page Type

Panel Layout

OK Cancel Help...

Select...

Select...

Select...Set Scale

Select “PanelLayout”

New Page

2. Set an appropriate grid size to allow proper positioning of components (Tools >System Settings > Grid Settings).

3. Select the Tools > Panel Layout function. The Panel Layout dialog box willappear.

Panel Layout

10-4

Text Parameter...

Place as a Group

Display Placed Components

Selected: 0

OK Exit Help...

Select Devices... Use Text Parameter

Panel Layout

4. Select the Select Devices button. The Select Devices dialog box will appear.

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Terminals

OK Cancel Help...

Devices

Display All Part Numbers

Select Devices

Select...

Select...

Panel Layout

10-5

This dialog box allows you to select which items from the schematics will beprompted for placement in the panel layout drawing. Select OK to continue.

a. Select the Terminals checkbox to display only terminals, or select theDevices checkbox to display all other items.

b. If desired, you can use the Installation, Location and Device ID fields torestrict the listing to items that match these entries. Wildcard (*) entries arepermitted in these fields. Use the Select buttons to view and select fromlists of existing installations and locations.

c. Select the Display All Part Numbers checkbox to display all part numbersin cases where more than one part number is assigned to a single device ID.If this checkbox is not selected, only the first part number assigned to eachdevice ID will be displayed.

5. The Panel Layout dialog box will then reappear with the selected itemsdisplayed.

Pos. Installation Location Device ID Dim X Dim Y Symbol

Selected: 0

OK Exit Help...

0001 LINE1 EN10002 LINE1 EN10003 LINE1 EN10004 LINE1 EN10005 LINE1 EN10006 LINE1 EN10007 LINE1 EN30008 LINE1 EN30009 LINE1 EN30010 LINE1 PBS10011 LINE1 PBS1

CR303 0.000 0.000CR307 0.000 0.000CR310 0.000 0.000CR314 0.000 0.000CR337 0.000 0.000PB310 0.000 0.000GW320 5.000 2.000SS325 0.000 0.000SS330 0.000 0.000PB348 0.000 0.000PB350 0.000 0.000

L–ABNCRL–ABNCRL–ABNCRL–ABNCRL–ABNCRL–PB

L–SSL–SSL–PBL–PB

Panel Layout

Text Parameter...Select Devices...

Place as a Group

Display Placed Components

Use Text Parameter

Panel Layout

10-6

The dialog box lists all the device IDs (including installation and location) forwhich a part number was assigned. This is the list that you will select from toplace items in the panel layout. If any X and Y dimensions have been assignedto the part in the parts database, these are listed in the Dim X and Dim Ycolumns. If a panel layout symbol has been assigned to the part number in theparts database, this is indicated in the Symbol column.

a. Use the Text Parameter button to make the desired settings (size, labelorigin, etc.) for the device IDs and other text that will appear on thedrawing. See page 5-34 for more information on the text parameterfunctions.

b. Selecting the Display Placed Components checkbox will cause items thathave been placed in the panel layout to be marked with an “X” in theleftmost column. If Display Placed Components is not selected, items thathave been placed are removed from the list as they are placed.

c. Select the Use Text Parameter checkbox to use the text parameters that youset with the Text Parameter button (see above). If you do not select thischeckbox, the software will use the default text settings for device IDs.

d. Select the Place as a Group checkbox if you wish to simultaneously placemultiple items in the panel layout with one click of the button. You canselect multiple items in the list (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys). Theitems will appear in the drawing together, spaced from each other accordingto the X value entered in the parts database for each part.

6. To place items in the panel layout select one or more items from the list in thePanel Layout dialog box and select the OK button.

Note If the item was assigned a layout symbol in the parts database it will be representedon the panel layout by that layout symbol. If the item was assigned no layout symbolbut was assigned X and Y dimensions it will be represented by a box having thosedimensions. If only the x–coordinate is entered, the part will be represented on apanel layout as a circle having this value as its diameter (if no other symbol isnamed in the Layout Symbol field).

To place a single item, select the item followed by the OK button. The panellayout page will appear. Point at the desired position for the layout symbol andclick the left mouse button.

Panel Layout

10-7

To place multiple items, you can select multiple individual items from the listby pointing and clicking on each item while holding the <Ctrl> key down. Or, toselect a continuous block of items, you can hold down the <Shift> and select thefirst and last item. Then select the OK button. The panel layout page will appear.Point at the desired position for the layout symbol and click the left mousebutton. The items will be prompted in the order in which they appear on the list.

After placing items you can select the Tools > Panel Layout function again toselect more items (or you can click the right mouse button). As items are placed,they are removed from the list in the Panel Layout dialog box unless you selectthe Display Placed Components checkbox in which case items that have beenplaced are marked with an “X” in the leftmost column.

If an item is deleted from a panel layout drawing, that item will reappear in thelist of items in the Panel Layout dialog box where it will be available forselection.

To exit the panel layout mode, select the Exit button in the Panel Layout dialogbox.

You can leave the panel layout mode and continue at a later time; the systemwill keep track of the items you have placed.

Panel Layout

10-8

Panel Layout/Schematic Comparison Check

The software will automatically check for items in the panel layout that have beendeleted from the schematic drawing after the panel layout was created. This check isperformed the next time you start the panel layout function.

After deleting one or more items from the schematic, when you start the panellayout function again, the following dialog box will appear that lists the items in thepanel layout that no longer exist in the schematic.

OK Cancel Help...

Panel Layout

Non placed devices in drawing

Mark devices to be deleted

LINE1 NO_LOC PB106

To delete the listed item(s) from the panel layout, select the item(s) and select theOK button.

To leave the listed item(s) in the panel layout, select the Cancel button.

Panel Layout

10-9

Creating a Panel Layout Symbol

If you want RSWire to prompt you with a layout symbol (as opposed to adimensioned box), you must assign a layout symbol to the parts data that you use inyour project. A selection of layout symbols are provided with RSWire (they havenames that begin with the characters “L–”), or you can create your own symbolsusing the following procedure.

1. Create a blank drawing page. Select “Schematic Diagram” as the page type.Generally, layout symbols are created in a 1:1 scale, so select this scale for thedrawing page. The Online toggle for this page should be turned off.

2. With the blank page active, select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modifyfunction.

3. In the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, enter the symbol name and description.(The layout symbols provided with RSWire all have names that begin with thecharacters “L–”. This is not required, but makes it easier to find and list thelayout symbols.)

4. Also in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, select the symbol groupGS1–General Symbol (no cross ref.).

5. Select OK to continue.

6. Define a reference point for the symbol with the Manage > Symbol >Reference Point function. You can redefine this point later.

7. Draw the symbol using RSWire drawing functions or import an existing DWGfile. If you are importing a file, follow the steps given on page 6-21.

8. Enter the attribute text that will receive the device ID when the symbol is placedin a panel layout. To do this, first select the Draw > Text function. In the Textdialog box’s Text Input field, enter a “?”. Also select an appropriate text size,label origin, etc. Select OK to continue. Select a position for the text. TheDefinition of Text Attributes dialog box will appear.

Panel Layout

10-10

Function Text

Symbol Text:

Address

I/O Text


Activate Activate

No: 9

Select ActivateToggle

Select DID,Panel/Wire Dia

?


DID,Panel/Wire Dia

Select the Attribute Activate toggle and select “DID,Panel/Wire Dia” from thelist of attribute types. Select OK to continue.

9. If you wish function text associated with the schematic symbol to appear at thelayout symbol, enter another “?” attribute text as in the previous step, but forthis text select “Function Text” from the list of attribute types.

10. Add any other drawing elements, texts, etc., that you wish the symbol to have.Redefine the reference point if desired with the Manage > Symbol > ReferencePoint function.

11. Store the symbol: Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define awindow around the symbol elements.

Remember that if you wish RSWire to automatically prompt the layout symbol inthe panel layout mode, the layout symbol must be assigned to the appropriate partnumbers in the parts database, and those part numbers must be assigned to deviceIDs in your project. The layout symbol name is entered in the Parts Database dialogbox (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form function) in the Symbols – Lay. field.

Panel Layout

10-11

Part Number

Description

Manuf. PMG

Catalog

DateCreated

Changed

Dimensions

X

Y

Z

1.81

2.82

3.31Symbols

Ref.

Wire

Lay.

Price

Price_B

0

0

Units

Discount 0

Weight[lb] 0.00

Power[VA] 0.00

Time[min]Assembly

WiringDevice Type

Technical Description Additional Part Numbers

(C)over or (P)anel

Parts Database

Article

Price_S

Enter Layout Symbol Name

Panel Layout

10-12


Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan

11-1

11 Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan

RSWireTM Designer has functions that automatically compile information on all theterminals that exist in the project drawing pages. The user can view and edit thisinformation in a table format. Graphic drawings of terminal strips can also begenerated automatically.

There are also Pin–Plug Plan functions that operate in the same manner as theterminal plan functions except that they gather and display pin and plug informationrather than terminal and terminal strip information.


� Terminal Plan Overview

� Steps of Terminal Plan Creation

� Internal/External Connections and Jumpers

� Connection Search Priorities

� Terminal Plan Functions

� Terminal Plan Editor

� Graphical Terminal Plan

� Graphical Terminal Plan Macro

� Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration

� Graphical Terminal Plan Generation

� Pin–Plug Plan

� Pin–Plug Editing

� Graphical Pin–Plug Plan


11-2

Terminal Plan Overview

Steps of Terminal Plan Creation

Once the schematics in the project are complete, use the following steps to create aterminal/cable plan. (More detailed information is given in the following sections.)

1. Activate the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugsfunction. This function automatically generates a list of terminals and terminalconnections according to the information in the project schematics.

2. The Terminal Strip Selection dialog box will appear. Select the strip(s) that youwish to edit.

3. Select the Edit button in the selection dialog box. The connections for theselected terminal strip(s) will be displayed in the Terminal Editor dialog box.Changes can now be made, such as cable assignment, reversing internal andexternal connections, sorting terminals, inserting spare terminals, and otheroperations.

4. Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Planfunction to automatically create a drawing page showing a representation ofselected terminal strips.

CREATE SCHEMATICS

EDIT TERMINALSNew destinationsChange terminal numbersAssign part numbersAssign cables

GRAPH TERMINAL PLAN & TERMINAL LISTS

Terminal PlanCreation Steps


11-3

Customization – Default formats for terminal lists and graphical terminal plans areincluded with the software. These formats can be customized to suit the user’srequirements.

Internal/External Connections and Jumpers

“Internal” vs. “External” Connections – The terms “internal” and “external” areused to describe the two “sides” of connections to terminals. Other terms such as“from and to” or “source and destination” may be more familiar to you. Theassignment of internal and external connections may be based on positioning in theschematic (left or right of the terminal) or by manual assignments made by the user.Terminals can also be designated as jumpers.

Internal, External, and Jumper priorities are defined at the connection points ofterminal symbols. In other words, a connection point can be “set” so that anythingconnected to it is considered an internal connection, external connection, or ajumper. This setting can be made in three different ways:

1. Connection points can be defined as internal, external, or jumper when theterminal symbol is created (see page 6-63).

2. Connection points can be designated as internal, external or jumper after thesymbol is placed in a schematic by activating the Modify > Symbol function,selecting the desired terminal symbol and then selecting the TerminalDestinations toggle in the Modify Symbol dialog box. You can also use theModify > Power–Editor function (or right click on a terminal symbol) andselect “Jumper” from the pop–up menu.

3. If the connection points of a terminal symbol in a schematic are undefined (havenot been designated as internal, external, or jumper) the system has defaultpriorities upon which it will make assumptions.

For a terminal symbol with two connection points:1st Connection Point – Internal2nd Connection Point – External

1st CP 2nd CP


11-4

For a terminal symbol with five connection points:1st Connection Point – Undefined2nd Connection Point – Internal3rd Connection Point – Jumper4th Connection Point – External5th Connection Point – Jumper

X1 Symbol – Connection Point Order

12

3

4

5

13

4

5

2

JIC IEC

Why does it matter whether connection points are internal or external?Documentation listings, terminal plan macros, and editor screens for terminals showinternal destinations on one side of the terminal and external destinations on theother side of the terminal. By changing the connection point designations, we havecontrol over how the information is listed and displayed.

Target Internal TB:No. Target External

–PB201 +L1–STRIP2:1–TB1:1–PB203 +L1–STRIP2:2–TB1:2–LS205 +L1–STRIP2:3–TB1:3

Static Header Text

Variable Data

Connection Search Priorities

The Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function causesthe system to look along the wires in both directions from each terminal in theschematics. Signal cross references are also analyzed. The software uses searchpriorities in cases where a potential has more than two devices connected. Thesepriorities are the same as those used in generating the connection list. See page 9-15.


11-5

Terminal Plan Functions

Functions related to the terminal plan are found in the Tools >Project Settings >Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration and Tools > Terminal/Pin–PlugPlan submenus.

Tools � Project Settings � Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration

Tools � Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan � Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs� Generate Graphical Plan

Tools > Project Settings >Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration –Configuration of the graphical terminal plan. See page 11-24.

Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs – Terminal planeditor (table format). See page 11-6.

Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan – Generates agraphical terminal plan. See page 11-30.

In addition, terminal lists can be generated under the Reports > Terminals submenuwith the Terminals and Terminal Strips functions.


11-6

Terminal Plan Editor

The terminal plan editor mode compiles a list of terminals in the current project andallows the user to select and edit the terminal information.

To enter the terminal plan editor select:

Tools � Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan � Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs

If no page is currently open, you will be asked to select a project.

The Terminal Strip Selection dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you toselect which terminal strips will be included in the current editing session.

Terminal Strip Selection

OK

Edit...

Help

Location Terminal Strip Total=LINE1 +BAY1 -TB1 3 =LINE1 +BAY1 -TB2 3 =LINE1 +BAY1 -TB3 3 =LINE1 +CAB1 -TB 8=LINE1 +EN1 -STRIP1 17=LINE1 +EN1 -STRIP2 30=LINE1 +EN1 -TB1 8=LINE1 +EN1 -TB2 8

Installation

Location

Strip

Search...

View All...

Search

*

*

*

Number of Selected Terminal Strips: 8

Terminal Strip

Installation


11-7

If you wish to limit the editing to a portion of the project, you can make entries inthe Installation, Location and Strip fields to filter the list of terminal strips. Useasterisks (*) to make wild card entries. For example enter *BLDG1* in theInstallation field to include any installation names containing the characters“BLDG1”. Select the Search button to display the filtered list of terminal strips. Bylimiting the editing session to part of the project you can improve editor responsetime for large projects and also make it easier to find a specific strip.

The value shown on the Number of selected Terminal Strips line indicates the totalnumber of strips that were found.

The Terminal Strip section of the dialog box lists all the terminal strips that thesystem found in the current project (or selected portion). The strips are listed inalpha–numeric order by installation–location–terminal strip name.

To select an individual strip for editing, select (highlight) the strip and select theEdit button.

To select all listed strips for editing, select the View All button.

The Terminal Editor dialog box will then appear.


11-8

Editor Display

You can resize the Terminal Editor dialog by dragging the lower right–hand corner.You can resize the width of the columns by pointing at the dividing line between thecolumn headings and dragging. The information in the unshaded columns can beedited by double clicking inside a cell.

Use the Settings > Wire Number function to select how many columns of wirenumber information (wire number, color, guage, etc.) are displayed.

Use the Settings > Expand Columns to Fit function to expand the columns todisplay all the information they contain.

Note Installation/Location display – In RSWire a complete identification consists of aninstallation name (indicated by an “=”) followed by a location name (indicated bya “+”) followed by a device ID (indicated by a “–”). In the terminal editor list, thefull name of the current terminal strip is given, but in the listing of internal andexternal targets, installations and locations are not shown unless they differ fromthat of the current terminal strip. In the following example, we can assume theInternal Targets belong to Installation “L1” because no other installation name isgiven. However, they do have a different location name (“E1”). The ExternalTargets consist only of a device ID so we can assume they belong to the sameinstallation and location as the terminal strip. If you are viewing a single terminalstrip, its installation and location will be shown at the top of the editing screen butnot in the Strip:TB column.

=L1+B1–TB5

+E1–STRIP1:1+E1–STRIP1:2+E1–STRIP1:3

–TB5:1–TB5:2–TB5:3

1.101.111.12

–M110–M111–M112

Installation

Internal Targets External Targets

Color Internal Target Strip: TB Type Page Jumper External Target

Device IDLocation

The following editing functions are available in the Terminal Editor dialog box.


11-9

Terminal Editing Functions

Note You can access most of the terminal editing functions using the Edit pulldown menuin the Terminal Editor dialog box. There are also toolbar buttons for most of thesefunctions at the top of this dialog.

Change Terminal Number

To change a terminal block number in the terminal editor:

1. Double click on the desired terminal block ID. The Device ID Assignmentdialog box will appear.

2. Change the terminal block ID as desired

3. Select OK in the Device ID Assignment dialog box.

Double click to edit terminal ID

Any changes to terminal numbers are reflected in the schematic drawings.


11-10

Rename Terminal

Rename – This function allows you to change the terminal strip to which a terminalbelongs.

1. Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog and select one or moreterminals to be reassigned by highlighting the terminal names in the Strip TBcolumn.

2. Select the Edit > Rename function (use the pulldown menu inside the TerminalEditor dialog box).

3. The Define Target dialog box will appear.

OK Cancel Help...

Installation:

Location:

Strip ID:

=LINE1

–TB4

+EN1

Define Target

Select...

Select...

Select...

4. Enter the Installation, Location and Strip ID of the terminal strip to which youwish the selected terminal block(s) to be assigned.

5. Select OK. The reassigned terminal blocks will be removed from the terminaleditor display (because they no longer belong to the current terminal strip).

Note If you reassign a terminal block to a strip that already contains a terminal blockwith the same number, the result will be two terminal blocks with the same numberin that strip (unless you edit the terminal number).


11-11

Renumber Terminals

This function allows you to renumber all the terminals in the selected strip. Changesmade with this function are reflected in the schematic drawings.

1. Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.

2. Select the Edit > Renumber function (use the pulldown menu inside theTerminal Editor dialog box) or use the Renumber toolbar button. The RenumberTerminal Strip dialog box will appear.

First Number: 1

OK Cancel Help...

Renumber Terminals with the Same Number

Renumber Terminal Strip

3. In the First Number field enter the number that you want to assign to the firstterminal in the strip. Select the Renumber Terminals with the Same Numbercheckbox if you wish to renumber duplicate terminals as well.

4. Select the OK button. All the terminals in the strip will be numberedsequentially from the first number. Changes made with this function will also bereflected in the schematic.


11-12

Sort Terminals

This function lets you change the order in which terminals are listed in the terminaleditor.


2. Select the Edit > Sort function (use the pulldown menu inside the TerminalEditor dialog box) or select the Sort toolbar button. The Sort Terminals dialogbox will appear.

Sort by Terminal Number

OK

Sort by Internal Target

Sort by External Target

Sort Terminal Blocks

Sort Terminals

Help...Cancel

3. This dialog box lets you select whether terminals will be listed in order ofTerminal Number, Internal Target, or External Target. Select the desired optionfollowed by the OK button. The terminals will be listed in the selected order.

Note The Sort by Internal and External Target functions will take into accountInstallation and Location names even if these names are not displayed (installationand location names of targets are not displayed if they are the same as the currentterminal strip).

Generally, terminal sorting is done before renumbering.


11-13

Move Terminals

Move – This function allows you to move a terminal or a group of terminals fromone position in the strip to another. This function will only affect the listing ofterminals in the graphical terminal plan.


2. Select the group of terminals that you wish to move. Do this by selecting thefirst terminal in the group, holding down the <Shift> key and then selecting thelast terminal in the group.

3. Select the Edit > Move function (use the pulldown menu inside the TerminalEditor dialog box) or select the Move toolbar button.

4. The system will prompt “Mark Destination Position.” By double clicking, selectthe terminal just ahead of where you want the moved terminals to be inserted.The terminals will be moved to that position.

5. The software will ask you “Maintain Terminal Sequence?” Select OK if youwish the moved terminals to remain in the new position when you exit theterminal editor. Select No if you wish the move to last only for the current worksession.

Create Spare

This function allows you to insert additional terminals into a terminal strip.


2. Select the terminal just ahead of where you want the spare terminal inserted.

3. Select the Edit > Create Spare function (use the pulldown menu inside theTerminal Editor dialog box) or select the Create Spare toolbar button.

4. The Insert Spare Terminal dialog box will then appear, prompting you with thenext available terminal number in the Terminal Number field. You can typeover this number if desired. If you enter the number of an existing terminal, thesoftware will ask if you wish to duplicate the terminal. If you answer Yes it willcreate a spare terminal with the same number.

5. In the Quantity field you can specify how many spare terminals are to beinserted.


11-14

Terminal Number

Quantity

4

1

OK Help...Cancel

Insert Spare Terminals

6. Select the OK button. The new terminals will appear in the list. The spareterminal number is followed by an “R” in the Type column to indicate it is a“Reserve” terminal.

Delete Spare Terminal

To delete spare terminals from a terminal strip:

1. In the terminal editor, select (highlight) the spare terminal(s) that you wish todelete

2. Select the Edit > Delete function (use the pulldown menu inside the TerminalEditor dialog box) or select the Delete toolbar button.

3. The selected spare terminal(s) will be removed from the list.

Edit Spare Terminal Targets

The Internal Target and External Target for spare terminals can be edited in theterminal editor. Only spare terminals can be edited in this manner. Use the followingprocedure:

1. In the terminal editor, double click inside the Internal Target cell or theExternal Target cell for the desired spare terminal. The Define Target dialogbox will appear.


11-15

OK Cancel Help...

Installation:

Location:

Strip TB: TB4

Define Target

Select...

Select...

2. In the appropriate fields, enter the Installation, Location and terminal number ofanother terminal to which you wish to jumper. Use the Select buttons to viewand select from lists of existing Installations and Locations.

3. Select OK to enter the target information.

Switch Targets

This function will switch the targets for a terminal from an internal target to anexternal target and vice versa.


2. For the desired terminal, highlight the cell in either the Internal Target columnor the External Target column.

3. Select the Edit > Switch Targets function (use the pulldown menu inside theTerminal Editor dialog box) or select the Switch Targets toolbar button. Thetargets will be switched between the Internal and External columns.

Note Changes made with this function will be reflected in the schematic (but can only beseen by using the Terminal Dest. function in the Modify > Symbol mode).


11-16

Clip Jumper

This function specifies a short jumper symbol to be used in the graphic terminalplan. If the target for a terminal is another terminal, you can specify a jumpersymbol rather than listing the terminal as a target. The jumper symbol will connectthe two terminals in the graphical terminal plan.

TERMINAL STRIP=L1+CAB1–TB2WIRE NO. WIRE NO.

1

2

3

4

Clip jumper ingraphical terminal plan

Note To use the clip jumper symbol, the two terminals must be connected by a wire in theschematic drawing.

When terminals are jumpered, they are marked as such in the Jumper column of theterminal editor. Numbers in this column indicate to which other terminal a terminalis jumpered. In the following figure terminals 1 and 2 are jumpered.

–TB5:1–TB5:2–TB5:3

1.101.111.12

–TB5:3–LT110

Clip jumper information

Internal Target Strip: TB Type Page Jumper External Target

21

–TB5:2

The connection points on terminals can be set Internal, External, Undefined, orJumper. If you have used a wire in the schematic drawing to connect two terminalconnection points that are defined as Jumper, these will automatically appear in theterminal editor as jumpered.

If you wish to assign a jumper in the terminal editor, use the following procedure.



11-17

2. For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Targetcolumn or the External Target column (depending on which side of theterminals should be jumpered). Hold down the <Ctrl> key while selecting thetwo cells.

3. Select the Edit > Clip Jumper function (use the pulldown menu inside theTerminal Editor dialog box). Numbers will appear in the Jumper columnindicating to which terminal the terminals are jumpered.

When a graphical terminal plan is generated, the clip jumper symbol will representthe terminal–to–terminal connection.

Removing a Clip Jumper

To remove a clip jumper, use the following procedure.

1. After assigning a clip jumper, you must first exit from the terminal editor andthen re–enter the terminal editor before you can delete the clip jumper.

2. Assign a wire jumper to the two terminals that have the clip jumper assigned.(See the following section). This will have the effect of removing the clipjumper.

Wire Jumper

When a wire jumper is assigned between two terminals, they are listed as targets foreach other.

Note To assign a wire jumper, the two terminals must be connected by a wire in theschematic drawing.

The connection points on terminals can be set Internal, External, Undefined, orJumper. If you have used a wire in the schematic drawing to connect two terminalconnection points that are defined as Internal or External, these will automaticallyappear in the terminal editor as a wire jumper. If the two connection points aredefined as Jumper, this will default to a clip jumper in the terminal editor and youwill not be able to assign a wire jumper. The user must redefine these connectionpoints as Internal and External using the Terminal Dest. function in the Modify >Symbol mode.

To assign a wire jumper, use the following procedure:



11-18

2. For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Targetcolumn or the External Target column (depending on which side of theterminals should be jumpered). Hold down the <Ctrl> key while selecting thetwo cells.

3. Select the Edit > Wire Jumper function (use the pulldown menu inside theTerminal Editor dialog box) or use the Wire Jumper toolbar button. The internalor external targets will become the terminal that is at the other end of thejumper.

To change a wire jumper to a clip jumper, highlight the two Internal Target orExternal Target cells that are jumpered, and select the Edit > Clip Jumperfunction.

Assign Terminal Part Number

You can assign a part number to a terminal or a group of terminals in the terminaleditor.

1. Select (highlight) the Part Number cells for the desired terminals.

2. Click a second time in the last selected cell.

3. The Assign Part Number screen will appear. This screen allows you to searchthe parts database for appropriate part numbers and assign them. See page 5-81.

Assign Cable

In the terminal editor, you can assign the conductors of a cable to a group ofterminal targets. Use the following procedure.

1. Display the terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.

2. For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Cable columnor the External Cable column (depending on which side of the terminals shouldbe cabled).

3. Click on the highlighted cells. The Device ID Assignment dialog box willappear.

4. Assign a device ID to the cable. Select the OK button to continue.


11-19

5. The Device Type dialog box will appear. Enter an appropriate device type forthe cable. (Use the Search button to display a list of existing cable devicetypes.) Select the OK button to continue.

6. The Connection Points dialog box will appear, listing the conductordesignations for the cable. Select the OK button to continue.

7. The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This allows you to enter a length valueand other descriptive texts to be associated with the cable. Enter the desiredtexts and select OK to continue.

The cable device ID and conductor designations will appear in the terminal list.

Note When you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing thecable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless you selectthe Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function and select the DisplayHidden Symbols checkbox.

Delete Cable

To delete an existing cable in the terminal plan editor:

1. Display the terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.

2. Highlight the cells in either the Internal Cable column or the External Cablecolumn to which the cable has been assigned.

3. Select the Edit > Delete function (use the pulldown menu inside the TerminalEditor dialog box).

The cable will be removed from the terminal list.


11-20

Graphical Terminal Plan

The software can create a graphical terminal plan, automatically generating drawingpages that show terminal strips with connection information for each terminal.

To do this, the software uses a designated terminal plan macro, which graphicallyrepresents each terminal strip. Appropriate terminal information is thenautomatically placed at each terminal position.

The user can select from a number of terminal plan macros provided with thesoftware, or the user can create a custom macro.

The terminal plan configuration mode allows the user to set up the format, contentand positioning of items in the graphical terminal plan pages.

The Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function causesthe graphical terminal plan pages to be generated according to the preselectedformats.

The following subsections describe the elements of the graphical terminal plan.

Graphical Terminal Plan Macro

The graphical terminal plan layout is created and stored as a macro. This macro canconsist of a realistic drawing of a terminal strip (see below). It can also consist ofcolumns of boxes containing various texts, or any other format the user requires.When the macro is first defined, variables (?values) are entered at appropriate placesin the drawing. Note the variables in the terminal plan macro shown below.

TERMINAL STRIP?stripFROM SOURCE WIRE NO. TO DESTINATIONWIRE NO.

?t1devid ?t1wn ?t2wn ?t2devid

Terminal Plan Macro(similar to FTW20 Provided With The Software)

?term


11-21

When a graphical terminal plan is generated for a given project, the correct value isautomatically substituted for each variable in the terminal plan macro. Informationfor each individual terminal proceeds from the variable positions with spacingdetermined by offset values entered in the graphical terminal plan configurationmode.

In the following figure, after the Generate Graphical Plan function has been run,the software has filled out the macro with information for the terminal strip TB2 inthe installation L1, location CAB1. The left side indicates the device IDs and wirenumbers connected to the internal side of the terminal. (The “:4” at the end of thedevice IDs is connection point text for those limit switches.) The right side of thediagram shows connection information for the external side of the terminals. In thisexample, the external connection is to items in a different location, CAB2.

TERMINAL STRIP=L1+CAB1–TB2FROM SOURCE WIRE NO. TO DESTINATIONWIRE NO.

LS101:4 W10 1

2

3

4

5

6

W14

W18

W21

W26

W29

LS103:4

LS105:4

LS107:4

LS109:4

LS111:4

W62

W66

W69

W73

W75

W79

+CAB2–LT301:X1

+CAB2–LT303:X1

+CAB2–AH307:X1

+CAB2–LT311:X1

+CAB2–LT313:X1

+CAB2–LT315:X1

Creating a Terminal Plan Macro – Use the following steps (see page 6-81 formore information on creating macros.)

Note You can use existing terminal macros provided with the software to build up yourown macro. For example the FTW5– macro provides a group of five terminals whichyou can use to build longer strips. Other macros provide columns of cableinformation, etc., complete with variable texts. Look in the macro list fordescriptions of “Construction Macro” and “Term Plan Macro”.

1. Use a blank drawing page of the appropriate format size.

2. Create the drawing elements of the terminal plan. Position them where theyshould appear on the finished terminal plan pages.

3. Place the desired terminal plan variables using the Draw > Text function. Eachvariable must begin with a “?”. A list of available variables is given on the nextpage. For individual terminals it is necessary to place the variable only at thefirst terminal position. Information for the remaining terminals is positionedaccording to offset values entered in the configuration mode (see page 11-24).


11-22

4. Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.

5. Enter an appropriate name and description for the macro in the New/ModifyMacro dialog box.

6. The software will prompt you to “Define Base Point.” Select any point on thedrawing for now.

7. The software will prompt you to Select objects. Select all the objects to beincluded in the macro. (You can also select items later with the Manage >Macro > Select Items function.)

8. Select the Manage > Macro > Reference Point function. The reference pointof a terminal plan macro must be at the origin (0.0000, 0.0000) of the page XYcoordinate system, i.e. at the bottom left corner. Therefore, after selecting theReference Point function, position the cursor at the 0.0000, 0.0000 point(coordinates are displayed above the drawing area) and press the left mousebutton.

9. Use the Manage > Macro > Save function to store the macro.

To select your new macro for use in generating terminal plans, select Tools >Project Settings, select the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab andthen enter the macro’s name in the Plan Macro field (see page 11-25).

Terminal Plan Variables

Variable Description

?location Location designation

?locstrip Location designation and terminal strip

?strip Terminal strip

?strip_inst Display installation

?strip_loc Display location

?strip_name Display strip name

?term Terminal number

?t1cablecInternal cable designation complete: includesinstallation + location + device ID

?t2cablecExternal cable designation complete: includesinstallation + location + device ID

?t1devid Internal: device ID

?t2devid External: device ID

?xref Cross-reference


11-23

Variable Description

?xrefinst Cross-reference with installation

?t1cable Internal: cable designation

?t1wire Internal: wire designation of cable conductor

?t2cable External: cable designation

?t2wire External: wire designation of cable conductor

?partno Part number(Ident.number)

?consno Consecutive number

?t1cabtype Internal: cable type

?t2cabtype External: cable type

?t1cabpartno Internal: cable part number

?t2cabpartno External: cable part number

?t1cablen Internal: cable length

?t2cablen External: cable length

?t1cabgauge Internal: cable gauge

?t2cabgauge External: cable gauge

?t1cabwire Internal: Number of wires

?t2cabwire External: Number of wires

?jumper Evaluated jumpers are displayed

?ftext Terminal: function text

?t1ftext Internal: function text

?t2ftext External: function text

?t1wn Internal: wire number

?t1wnc Internal: wire number and color

?t1wng Internal: wire number and gauge

?t1wncg Internal: wire number, color and gauge

?t2wn External: wire number

?t2wnc External: wire number and color

?t2wng External: wire number and gauge

?t2wncg External: wire number, color and gauge

?t1conduit Internal: conduit

?t2conduit External: conduit

?t1cabtxt01etc.

Internal cable text 1

?t1cabtxt50 Internal cable text 50

?t2cabtxt01etc.

External cable text 1

?t2cabtxt50 External cable text 50


11-24

Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration

Use the Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configurationfunction to set the defaults for graphical terminal plan generation.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration

(First select the Tools > Project Settings function and then select the Terminal/PlugPlan Graphical Configuration tab.) The following dialog box will appear.

Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical ConfigurationConfiguration Terminal and Plug IDs Object DefaultsDevice ID Style


XProject Settings

Cable External

Write text as single line

Title Block

Terminal Plan Plug Plan

Installation

Cable/Wire Used Symbol

Jumper Symbol Name

Plan Macro

Page Format

Starting Page Number

Title Block Variables

Total Lines

Columns

Offset Y:

Offset X:

Cable Internal

Columns

Offset Y:

Offset X:

Offset X Offset Y

Format Of Target Destinations

Installation

Maximum Characters

Connection Point

Device ID

Location

Columns Offset Y:Offset X:

File: TPLAN.CFG

-0.7500

D-0COL

1

TCPLAN

CROSS

JUMPER

FTW20

TITLED

0.0000

0.0000 0.0000

-0.2500

1

10

0.2500

10

25

0

0

0

-0.5000.00020

pgdescr01

DrawingsTerminalstrip

pgdescr07pgdescr06

internextern

Jumper

Update Existing Pages

In the File field, select a configuration file (such as TPLAN.CFG). The remainingfields will then become active.


11-25

Select the Terminal Plan toggle to ensure that the settings you make will apply tothe terminal plan and not the pin/plug plan.

Note The default configuration file is TPLAN.CFG located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEMdirectory. You can create alternate terminal plan configuration files by copyingTPLAN.CFG under another name and then editing it with the Tools > ProjectSettings function (Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab).

This dialog box allows you to set title blocks, page formats, page numbers,installation name, and other variables for the graphical terminal plan.



File – Indicates the name of the selected terminal plan configuration file.

Title Block – You can specify a title block macro name in this field that willoverride the default title block macro (selected when the project was created) onterminal plan pages.

Plan Macro – Determines the macro that graphically represents terminal strips inthe terminal plan pages.

Jumper Symbol Name – Determines the symbol that represents jumpers in thegraphical terminal plan pages. (“JUMPER” is a variable length symbol that isautomatically sized to stretch from terminal to terminal.)

Cable/Wire Used Symbol – Determines what symbol is used in the graphicalterminal plan to mark a cable conductor that has been used (assigned). (The“CROSS” symbol is an “X”.) If the user enters a minus sign (“–”) in this field, thesoftware will fill in the cable conductor colors in the graphical plan, rather than justplacing a cross symbol.

Installation – Determines what installation the system will create to hold thegraphical terminal plan pages.

Starting Page Number – Determines the first page number the system will assign tothe terminal plan pages.

Page Format – Determines the drawing page format to be used for the graphicalterminal plan pages.


11-26

Title Block Variables – The six fields in this area allow you to specify three titleblock variables and the values that will appear at those variable locations in the titleblock. This applies to the title block entered in the Title Block field and only to thegraphical terminal plan drawing pages. There are three pairs of fields; the upperfield contains a variable name, the lower field contains the information to bedisplayed where that variable exists in the title block (see page 6-83 for more abouttitle blocks). You can also use another variable name in the lower field (for example,?strip to show the terminal strip name in the title block).


pgdescr05

Terminal

pgdescr06

Plan

pgdescr07

Drawings

OK Cancel Help...

This Variable In The Title Block

Will Contain This Information

Total Lines

The Quantity field sets the maximum number of lines of terminal information oneach graphical terminal plan page.

Offset X, Offset Y – Determines the spacing between lines in the graphical terminalplan. When lines are listed vertically, enter an Offset Y value and enter 0 for OffsetX. When lines are listed horizontally, enter an Offset X value and enter 0 for OffsetY. See the following figure.

=1+LS–PB1

=1+LS–PB2

=1+LS–PB3

Offset Y

Offset X=

1+LS

–PB

1

=1+

LS–P

B2

=1+

LS–P

B3

10

11

12

10 11 12


11-27

The upper right portion of the dialog box allows the user to specify the number ofcolumns available for cable information:

Cable External and Cable Internal

The Quantity fields establish the number of columns of cable information that willbe provided in the terminal plan.

The Offset X and Offset Y fields allow you to set the spacing of the columns.

Jumper

Offset X and Y – These fields determine the position of the jumper symbol inrelation to the terminal number. Depending on whether the terminal plan ishorizontal or vertical, one of the values will be zero.

Jumper Offset Y

Jumper Offset X

10

11

12

10 11 12

(JIC Example: dx=–0.50, dy=0 in.)(IEC Example: dx=0, dy=–5 mm)

(JIC Example: dx=0, dy=–0.50 in.)(IEC Example: dx=0, dy=–5 mm)

Format of Target Destinations – This area allows the setting of the layout andcontent of the target information for each terminal. For example, in the figure below,each terminal is labeled with the installation, location, and device ID of the itemsconnected to the terminal (the “=”, “+”, and “–” characters are RSWire conventionsused to distinguish installation names, location names, and device IDs, respectively.

=1+LS–PB1

=1+LS–PB2

=1+LS–PB3

10

11

12

The Installation, Location, Device ID, and Connection Point fields let the user setthe spacing of this information by assigning a beginning column number to eachpiece of information.


11-28

Note The above example does not include connection point text. If you imagine eachcharacter of the above information assigned to a column number, it might look likethe following figure.

= 1 + L S – P B 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

The default entries for these fields are 1 for Installation and 0 for Location andDevice ID. The “0” column value means that the location and device ID willimmediately follow the installation name with no spaces in between.

However, if you wished to space out the information more you could enter, forexample, values of 1 for Installation, 10 for Location, and 20 for Device ID. Thenthe information would have the following column assignments. These values willspace the information out more, but note that with these values any installation orlocation names longer than 9 characters will be truncated in the graphical terminalplan target listings.

= 1 + L S – P B 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

The Maximum Characters field lets you set how many columns will be allowed fordisplaying this information.

The intern and extern selections allow you to choose whether the columnassignments you make in the Installation, Location, and Device ID fields apply tothe internal side of the terminal plan or the external side. Select one or the otherbefore entering column values.

Write Text as Single Line – When this checkbox is selected, this feature allows youto write function text on a single line. The “return” is over–ridden and the “^” willbe replaced with a space on the plan.


11-29

Update Existing Pages – This checkbox determines whether the software willalways generate new graphical terminal plan pages or if it will update informationon existing pages. If the checkbox is not checked, the software will always generatenew pages starting with the page number in the Starting Page Number field. Thismeans that existing pages in the same page number range will be overwritten. If theUpdate Existing Pages checkbox is checked, the software will update informationon existing pages for the selected terminal strips, but will not overwrite existingpages for non–selected terminal strips.

When you have finished entering values in the Terminal/Plug Plan GraphicalConfiguration tab, select the Save button to copy the new information over theexisting terminal plan configuration file. Select Cancel to keep the old configurationinformation. If you select the OK button without first saving any new values, thesenew values will only be used during the current work session.


11-30

Graphical Terminal Plan Generation

Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function togenerate a graphical terminal plan. This consists of automatically generated drawingpages for each terminal strip in the project.

Select:

Tools � Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan � Generate Graphical Plan

The software will prompt you to select the Project, Installation and Pages to beincluded in the terminal plans. Select OK to continue.

The Select Terminal Strip dialog box will then appear, listing all the terminal stripsin the selected project or portion thereof. Select (highlight) those strips for whichyou wish to produce a graphical terminal plan page. Select the OK button.

Graphical terminal plan pages will be generated according to the variables set in theterminal plan configuration mode. See page 11-24.

The system will create a separate installation for the graphical terminal plan pages(provided the installation name specified in the configuration mode does not alreadyexist). The default installation name is TCPLAN. A different installation name canbe specified in the configuration mode.

If there are more terminals in a strip than will fit on the terminal plan macro(designated in the configuration mode) the software will create additional pages inthe same number sequence, for example, page 5, page 5.1, page 5.2, etc.

To view the graphical terminal plan pages use the File > Open function.

Note The software will generate the graphical terminal plan based on the configurationfile that was most recently selected in the Tools > Project Settings function underthe Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab. Configuration files areselected from the File pulldown list.


11-31

Pin–Plug Plan

The software is capable of accessing pin and plug information in the same way itcan access information about terminals and terminal strips. Information can begathered, edited and presented in a graphical plan.

The same functions that are used for editing and generating a terminal plan are usedfor pin–plug plans. There is a separate function for configuring the pin–plug plan.

Pin–Plug Editing

Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function.Any plugs in the selected project/installation will be available for editing along withthe terminal strips. See page 11-6.

Graphical Pin–Plug Plan

Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Macro

A pin–plug plan macro named PPLAN is provided with the software. This macrocan be specified in the pin–plug plan configuration mode so that it will be usedwhen generating graphical pin–plug plans.

You can also create custom pin–plug plan macros. Following the procedures forcreating a terminal plan macro. See page 11-20.


11-32

Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Configuration

Use the Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration function toset the defaults for graphical pin–plug plan generation.

Select:

Tools � Project Settings � Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration

(Select the Tools > Project Settings function, then select the Terminal/Plug PlanGraphical Configuration tab.) The following dialog box will appear.

Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical ConfigurationConfiguration Terminal and Plug IDs Object DefaultsDevice ID Style


XProject Settings

Cable External

Write text as single line

Title Block

Terminal Plan Plug Plan

Installation

Cable/Wire Used Symbol

Jumper Symbol Name

Plan Macro

Page Format

Starting Page Number


Total Lines

Columns

Offset Y:

Offset X:

Cable Internal

Columns

Offset Y:

Offset X:

Offset X Offset Y

Format Of Target Destinations

Installation

Maximum Characters

Connection Point

Device ID

Location

Columns Offset Y:Offset X:

File: PPLAN.CFG

-0.7500

D-0COL

1

PPLAN

CROSS

JUMPER

PPLAN

TITLED

0.0000

0.0000 0.0000

-0.2500

1

10

0.2500

10

25

0

0

0

-0.5000.00020

pgdescr01

DrawingsPin Planstrip

pgdescr05pgdescr03

internextern

Jumper

Update Existing Pages

In the File field, select a configuration file (such as PPLAN.CFG). The remainingfields will then become active.


11-33

Select the Plug Plan toggle to ensure that the settings you make will apply to thePlug Plan rather than the Terminal Plan.

Note The default configuration file is PPLAN.CFG located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEMdirectory. You can create alternate pin–plug plan configuration files by copyingPPLAN.CFG under another name and then editing it with the Tools > ProjectSettings function (Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab).

The Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration dialog box will appear.


This dialog box allows you to set title blocks, page formats, page numbers,installation name, and other variables for the graphical pin–plug plan. It is the samedialog box used for terminal plan configuration. See page 11-25.

Use the Macro File field in this dialog box to specify the macro to be used forgenerating the graphical plan.

Use the Installation field to set the name of the installation that will be created forthe pin–plug plan drawings.

Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Generation

Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function togenerate a graphical pin–plug plan. This consists of automatically generateddrawing pages for each plug in the project. Pin–plug plan pages are generated alongwith terminal plan pages. These can be placed in different installations according tothe settings made in the terminal plan and pin–plug plan configuration modes.

Select:

Tools � Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan � Generate Graphical Plan

The Select Terminal Strip dialog box will appear, listing existing plugs and terminalstrips. Select (highlight) the plugs for which you wish to generate a graphical plan.

Graphical pin–plug plan pages will be generated according to the variables set in thepin–plug plan configuration mode.

The system will create a separate installation for the graphical pin–plug plan pages(provided the installation name specified in the configuration mode does not alreadyexist). The default installation name is PPLAN. A different installation name can bespecified in the configuration mode.


11-34

If there are more pins in a plug than will fit on the pin–plug plan macro (designatedin the configuration mode) the software will create additional pages in the samenumber sequence, for example, page 5, page 5.1, page 5.2, etc.

To view the graphical pin–plug plan pages use the File > Open function.

Note The software will generate the graphical pin–plug plan based on the configurationfile that was most recently selected in the Tools > Project Settings function underthe Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab. Configuration files areselected from the File pulldown list.

Cables

12-1

12 Cables

This section explains various aspects of creating and assigning cables in RSWireTM

Designer. The user can create device types and enter part numbers that representvarious types of cables. Wires can be assigned to cables either in the schematic or inthe terminal plan editor.


� Assigning a Cable in the Schematic

� Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor

� Creating a Cable Symbol

� Creating a Cable Device Type

� Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol

� Cable Lists

Cables

12-2

Assigning a Cable in the Schematic

You can assign a group of wires to a cable by placing a cable symbol in theschematic drawing. Cables assigned in the schematic will be listed in the terminalplan editor mode (see page 11-18).

To assign a group of wires in a schematic to a cable, use the following steps:

1. While viewing the schematic, select the Insert > Symbol by Name function.When prompted for a symbol name enter a cable symbol name. The symbolnamed CABLE is provided with RSWire.

2. Select the desired cable symbol position on the first wire that you wish to assignto the cable.

3. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear. A device ID tag will beprompted in the Device ID field. Enter a device ID for the cable in this field.

4. The Multiple Placement checkbox will default to the “On” setting when placingcable symbols. This allows you to assign multiple consecutive wires to the cablein one step. (You can also assign wires to a cable individually by placing thecable symbol on each wire and assigning the same device ID on each wire).

Installation:

Location:

Device ID:

Part Number

Suppress Device ID

OK Cancel Help...

Duplicate Device ID

Search Device ID

Search...

Search...

Multiple Placement

Search...

Addit.Part Number

Assigned Part No. / Select to DeleteMultiple Placementcheckbox


Cables

12-3

5. At this time, if desired, you can also assign a part number to the cable. Selectthe Search button and the parts database Assign Part Number dialog box will bedisplayed. You can search the database for cable part numbers. Select these partnumbers by pointing and clicking. Caution: assign a part number to only one ofthe cable’s conductors. Select OK to return to the Device ID Assignment dialogbox.

6. The Device Type dialog box will appear allowing you to select a device type forthe cable. The device type determines how many conductors the cable has andwhat the designation (such as color) is for each conductor. Use the Searchbutton to display and select device types that apply to cables.

Note If you assigned a part number to the cable, and a device type was defined in thedata for that part number, the device type will be assigned automatically and theDevice Type dialog box will not appear.

Device Type:

Search... OK Cancel Help...

Device Type

Description:

7. The Connection Points dialog box will appear next, listing all the conductordesignations for the cable. The first available (unassigned) conductor will beassigned to the cable symbol you are currently placing unless you select adifferent conductor by pointing and clicking. The selected conductor’sdesignation will appear in the field at the bottom of the widow.

Cables

12-4


Connection Points

CABLE BLKCABLE WHTCABLE REDCABLE GRN

OK Cancel Help

Device ID: =LINE1+LOC1–CAB50

Device: 8444

BLK



If any of the conductors have already been assigned in the schematic, a page andline number will be indicated in the Connection Points dialog box. Theseconductors cannot be assigned again unless you delete the existing cable symbolwhere they have been assigned.

Select the OK button to continue.

8. The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to enter up to50 descriptive texts related to the cable. Ten text fields are displayed at a time.You can move from one group of texts to another with the Next and Previousbuttons.

Select the OK button when the desired texts have been entered.

Cables

12-5

Length

Text 2:

Text 3:

Text 4:

Text 5:

Text 6:

Text 7:

Text 8:

Text 9:

Text 10:

OK Cancel Help...

Cable Text

Next Previous

9. The cable symbol will appear at the selected position with the device ID and thedesignation of the first conductor.

If the Multiple Placement toggle was selected, the software will then prompt,“Mark position of last symbol.” By pointing and clicking, select the last wire (orbelow the last wire) to be assigned to the cable.

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

L1

PB103

PB105

LS107

LS109

LS110

LS113

TB1

1

2

3

4

5

6

CAB50BLK

Original Symbol Position

Select Last Wire

Cables

12-6

Cable conductor designations will be automatically assigned to each wire up tothe last selected wire. The cable device ID appears at the first wire; conductordesignations appear at subsequent wires (see following figure).

Note To cancel out of the multiple placement mode (if you decide you wish to assign onlyone conductor) use the <CTRL> <C> key combination or click the right mousebutton.

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

L1

PB103

PB105

LS107

LS109

LS110

LS113

TB1

1

2

3

4

5

6

CAB50BLK

Conductor DesignationsAutomatically AssignedWHT

RED

GRN

Cables

12-7

Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor

In the terminal plan editor mode you can assign a group of terminals to theconductors of a cable. See page 11-18 for more information.

Cables assigned in this manner will automatically appear in the schematic (see thefollowing note). Cables that were assigned in the schematic will be listed in theCable columns of the terminal plan editor.

Note When you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing thecable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless you selectthe Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function and select the DisplayHidden Symbols toggle.

The terminal plan editor is accessed through the Tools > Terminal Pin–Plug Plan >Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs function. After selecting one or more terminal stripsfrom a list, the Terminal Editor dialog box will appear. There are columns indicatingany cables that are assigned.

Cable columns

Cables

12-8

Creating a Cable Symbol

A cable symbol named CABLE is provided with RSWire. The user may wish tocreate other cable symbols to meet specific requirements. The following exampleshows how a cable symbol is created.

Use the following procedure to create a symbol called XCABLE.



3. Set the drawing grid to the desired spacing (use the Tools > System Settingsfunction and Grid Settings tab).

4. Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. The New/ModifySymbol dialog box will appear.

5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCABLE (or whatever symbol nameyou wish to use). Press the <Enter> key.

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:


HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

XCABLE

Example cable symbol

New/Modify Symbol

List...


CS2 Cable Symbol

Cables

12-9

6. Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example cablesymbol.” Select symbol group CS2 Cable Symbol.


8. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbolreference point where the cable symbol will cross a wire. Zoom in for a betterview of the work area.

9. Draw the graphic elements that will represent the symbol.

10. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will promptyou to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point abovethe symbol.

11. The Device–ID–Parameter dialog box will be displayed. Enter the device IDtag “CB” (or whatever you want your cable ID prefix to be).

12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. Select aconnection point position.

Cables

12-10

Important The connection point itself is not required for this symbol (the connection point textis) but the connection point must not be located where it will contact the wire onwhich the cable symbol is placed. Place the connection point above or below thesymbol itself.

CB

Connection PointText Position

Device ID

Connection PointPosition

13. After you place the connection point you will be prompted to “Define labelorigin of text.” Select a position for the connection point text where you wishthe cable conductor designations (such as BLACK, RED, etc.) to appear. Thesedesignations are defined as part of a cable device type (see page 12-11). Whenthe Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the desired textparameters and select the OK button to continue.

14. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of thesymbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “TheSymbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.

After you create an appropriate cable device type (see page 12-11), the symbolcan be placed in schematics and should appear as shown below.

CB22BLACK

Cables

12-11

Creating a Cable Device Type

A cable device type is a definition that tells RSWire how many conductors a cablehas and what designation (color, etc.) each conductor should have. This informationallows the software to automatically assign conductor designations, and keep trackof which conductors have been assigned.

When you place a cable symbol in a schematic, the software will ask which devicetype to use with the symbol. By having different device types available you canmake the cable symbol represent various types of cables.

Use the following procedure to define a device called X4CON.

1. Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. The Device TypeNew/Modify dialog box will be displayed.

2. In the Device Type field, enter the name X4CON. Press the <Enter> key.



Parent XCABLE BLKChild 1 XCABLE WHTChild 2 XCABLE REDChild 3 XCABLE GRNChild 4Child 5Child 6Child 7Child 8Child 9


Device Type X4CON

CableGroup

Search

Cross Ref.

Absolute Position


Cables

12-12

3. In the Group field select the Cable device group.

4. Select the Description button. The Device Description dialog box will bedisplayed.

5. Enter “Example device” in the first description field. This description willappear on device listings. Enter “Example cable” in the Cable Type field. SelectOK.

Description

Descr. 1

Descr. 2

Example device

OK Cancel Help...

Descr. 3

Cable

Cable Type

Gauge

Example cable

Part Number

Device Type Description


Note We could also enter a part number in the Part Number field if we wished a specificpart number to be assigned automatically to any cable using this device type.

6. Enter XCABLE for Parent symbol name. This is the symbol name of theparent symbol associated with this device. (XCABLE is the example cablesymbol created in the previous section. If you did not create this symbol use anexisting cable symbol name such as CABLE.)

7. Enter XCABLE for the symbol name of Child 1 through Child 3. With cabledevice types it is not necessary to enter a different symbol name in the Childfields. The Child fields merely represent additional conductors of the cable. Ifmore conductors are needed, you can scroll down to display additional Childfields (up to 256).

Cables

12-13

8. Enter the connection point text shown in the Device Definition dialog box (BLK, WHT, RED, GRN). These are the conductor designations (sometimesnumbered by the cable manufacturer) that will appear in the schematic besidethe individual wires assigned to the cable.

9. Select OK to complete the creation of the device type.

To test the device type, follow the instructions on page 12-2 for assigning a cablein a schematic. Use the parent symbol name and device type name that you used inthe Device Type New/Modify dialog box.

Cables

12-14

Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol

You can create a cable cross reference symbol that will show all the conductorconnection information for a given cable in one place. This allows easy generationof interconnection plans.

If you have assigned descriptive cable texts to the cable (for cable length, connectortype, etc.) these can also be shown on the cross reference symbol.

Use the following procedure to create a cross reference symbol for a four conductorcable called XCAB4REF:



3. Set the drawing grid to the desired spacing (use the Tools > System Settings >Grid Settings function).

4. Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. The New/ModifySymbol dialog box will appear.

5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCAB4REF (or whatever symbolname you wish to use). Press the <Enter> key.

Symbol Name:

Description:

Symbol Group:


HorizontalVertical

Preferred Direction

OK Cancel Help...

XCAB4REF

Example cable cross reference symbol

New/Modify Symbol

List...



Cables

12-15

6. Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example cablecross reference symbol.” Select symbol group CS3 Cable Cross ReferenceSymbol.


8. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbolreference point somewhere in the center of the drawing area. Zoom in for abetter view.

9. Use the graphical line and box functions (not wires) to draw the graphicelements that will represent the symbol. For this example we will draw arectangle with four branches at each end.

10. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will promptyou to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point abovethe reference point of the symbol. Select a label origin of 5 for the device ID.Enter the text “CAB” for the device ID tag. Select the OK button. “CAB” willappear at the device ID position.

Cables

12-16

The remainder of the creation of this symbol consists of entering a series ofsymbol texts with attribute numbers to determine which piece of informationwill be displayed at each text position. The following text attribute numbershave been set aside for cable information:

Cable Destination Left: Attribute numbers 3000 to 3255Conductor Description Left: Attribute numbers 3600 to 3855Cable Destination Right: Attribute numbers 3300 to 3555Conductor Description Right: Attribute numbers 3900 to 4155

11. Assign the destination symbol text for each conductor on the left side of thesymbol. Use the Draw > Text function and place a “?” as the text. Use a labelorigin of 6. When the Text Attribute Definition dialog box appears, select theAttribute – Activate checkbox and enter the appropriate attribute number in theNo. field. Then select the OK button. The first (top) conductor should beassigned attribute 3000, the second conductor 3001, and so on.

Symbol Text:

Address


Activate Activate

No: 3000

SelectActivate

checkbox?

I/O Text


EnterAttribute Number

3000 to 3003

CAB

?

?

?

?

Assign attribute 3000




Cables

12-17

12. Next assign the description symbol text for each conductor on the left side ofthe symbol. Use the Draw > Text function and place a “?” as the text just beloweach text placed in the previous step. Use a label origin of 6. When the TextAttribute Definition dialog box appears, select the Attribute – Activatecheckbox and enter the appropriate attribute number in the No. field. Thenselect the OK button. The first (top) conductor should be assigned attribute3600, the second conductor 3601, and so on.

Symbol Text:

Address


Activate Activate

No: 3600

SelectActivate

checkbox?

I/O Text


EnterAttribute Number

3600 to 3603

CAB

?

?

?

?





?

?

?

?

13. Now repeat the symbol text assignment steps for the conductors on the rightside of the symbol. First, place symbol text for the destinations. Use a labelorigin of 4. Assign attribute numbers 3300 to 3303.

Cables

12-18

CAB

?

?

?

?





?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

14. Assign conductor description symbol texts to the right side of the symbol. Placethem just below the destination texts placed in the previous step. Use a labelorigin of 4. Assign attribute numbers 3900 to 3903.

CAB

?

?

?

?





?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

15. Place a label for the text length symbol text. Use the Draw > Text function andplace the word “LENGTH” below the symbol reference point. Do not assign anattribute number, simply select OK in the Text Attribute dialog box.

16. Below the “LENGTH” text, place a text consisting of the string “?cabtxt01”.Use a label origin of 5. This text will display the cable length when the symbolis placed.

Note All other cable texts can be extracted in this manner using ?cabtxt02–?cabtxt50.

Cables

12-19

CAB

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

LENGTH

?cabtxt01

17. Save the symbol: Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define awindow around all the symbol elements. The message “The symbol was addedto the catalog” will be displayed.

Testing the cable cross reference symbol

To test the operation of the symbol cross reference symbol you must first assign acable in a schematic.

Note There is no need to specify the cable cross reference symbol when assigning thecable in the schematic.

Suppose you had assigned the following cable in a schematic.

TB2

1

2

3

4

CAB77BLK

WHT

RED

GRN

TB9

1

2

3

4

You can then place the cable cross reference symbol on any online drawing page inthe same project and assign the same device ID as the existing cable (CAB77).

Cables

12-20

After placing the symbol you must perform a View > Refresh Page function toupdate the cross reference symbol with the correct information for the cable asshown in the following figure.

CAB77

= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:1




BLK

WHT

RED

GRN

LENGTH

50





BLK

WHT

RED

GRN

The following information is displayed for each conductor:Cable Installation/Cable Page–Line/= Symbol Installation+Location–Device ID

Note For a length value to appear, you must have assigned a length value as the firstcable text when assigning the cable in the schematic. See page 12-4.

Cables

12-21

Cable Lists

There are two cable–related list functions in the Reports > Connections submenu:

Cable List – This is a list of all the cables in a given project.

Field Wire – This is a list of all cables in a project including descriptions anddestinations of each conductor within each cable. The list indicates whichconductors have been used (assigned).

Cables

12-22


Parts Database

13-1

13 Parts Database

This section describes the RSWireTM Designer parts database. This databasecontains information about the physical devices that will be used to build theprojects that are designed with RSWire. As the user creates schematic drawings withRSWire, the user can assign part numbers to each symbol. Then, when theschematics are completed, RSWire can use the information in the database togenerate an appropriate bill of material, purchase order list, etc., based on theschematic.

For information on assigning part numbers to symbols, see page 5-79.

The Manage > Parts Database pull–down menu provides functions which allow avariety of parameters to be set for parts data.

Manage � Parts � Edit Form� Edit Table� Duplicates Check


� MS–Access Database Files

� Accessing the Parts Database

� Parts Database Edit Form

� Add a Parts Database Record

� Delete a Parts Database Record

� Find a Parts Database Record

� Edit a Parts Database Record

� Table View of Database

� Database Manipulation

� Previewing the Parts Database

� Printing the Parts Database

Parts Database

13-2

MS–Access Database Files

The parts database and language text databases in RSWire are based on MicrosoftAccess database software. If you do not have MS–Access installed on yourcomputer at the time that you install RSWire, the run–time version of Access will beinstalled.

Warning: Make sure all Microsoft Access applications are closed beforestarting RSWire. Otherwise, data from RSWire could override your opendatabase files.

When RSWire starts for the first time, it creates a UI.mdb database file in theWORK directory. The UI.mdb file links to tables within two database files,ARTICLE.mdb (parts data) and TDB.mdb (language text). The UI.mdb file alsocontains a number of queries. The database files ARTICLE.mdb and TDB.mdb arelocated in the DB and the LG directories respectively.

Once the UI.mdb database file is created, RSWire copies forms and reports fromeither USER.mdb or DEFAULT.mdb located within the LIST directory. TheDEFAULT.mdb will contain the default reports and forms shipped with RSWire. Ifyou would like to create your own reports or forms, store them in USER.mdb.

Main RSWire Directory

Location of TDB.mdb File

Location of ARTICLE.mdb File

Location of USER.mdb Fileand DEFAULT.mdb File

Location of UI.mdb File

BmpCatalogDb

Pr

CustomLgLogos

DbDbs

FontsMenuPlot

ProjectSyscon

ListSystem

TmpUser

Work

Program

Parts Database

13-3

UI.mdb

UI.mdb is a database file located in the RS\WORK directory.

SelectUI.mdb File

BmpCatalogDb

Rs

Dbs

FontsMenuPlot

ProjectSyscon

TmpUser

Work

Program

Contents of 'Work'

Name

To access the UI.mdb file, go to the RS\WORK directory and select the UI.mdbicon. The following UI: Database dialog box will appear:

UI: Database

Open

Design

New

ARTICLE

TDB

Tables Forms Reports MacrosQueries Modules

The UI: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms,Reports, Macros, and Modules. To review the links to any of these functions, selectthe applicable tab.

Parts Database

13-4

Tables

The Tables function contains links to two files with tables, ARTICLE and TDB.These are the ARTICLE.mdb and TDB.mdb files discussed further in this section.

UI: Database

Open

Design

New

ARTICLE

TDB


Note The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version ofAccess. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only.

Open – Use this button to open the selected (highlighted) table.

Design – Use this button to modify the table.

New – Use this button to create a new table in the database.

Parts Database

13-5

Forms

The Forms function contains two forms, ARTICLE and TEXT. These forms arecopied into UI.mdb from USER.mdb or DEFAULT.mdb files.


Open – Use this button to open the selected (highlighted) form.

Design – Use this button to modify a form.

New – Use this button to create a new form for the database.

Article Form

Article FormUI: Database

Open

Design

Article


Record: *

ARTICLE

Part NumberDescription

Manuf.

Catalog

Date

CreatedChanged

DimensionsX (in)Y (in)

Z (in)

1.81

2.92

3.31SymbolsRef.Wire

Lay.Price

Price_B

0

0

Units

Discount 0

Weight[lb] 0.95

Power[VA] 0

TimeAssembly

WiringDevice Type M31

220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZTechnical Description Additional Part Numbers

(C)over or (P)anel

Parts Database

Price_S

PMG100A09NA3

A–B

100A09NA3

IEC CONTACTOR04/23/96

06/05/96

M

W–ABCOA010

L–ABCOA010

MS3, CRNO QM31

PARTNUMBER

Sort By:

Filter By:

PARTNUMBER

Filter

RemoveFilters

Supplier M31

Parts Database

13-6

Text Form

Text Form

UI: Database

Open

Design

New

Article


TEXT: FormText

Text Number

English:

Language Database

Find Text Number

French:

Italy:

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

1

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

German:

Spain:

Dutch:

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Parts Database

13-7

Reports

The Reports function contains links to two reports, Full “ARTICLE1” and Brief“ARTICLE1”. The full report lists all parts database information about a part. Thebrief report lists only specified parts database information.


Preview – Use this button to view the selected (highlighted) report.

Design – Use this button to modify a report.

New – Use this button to create a new report from the database.

Article Report

UI: Database

Preview

Design

New

ARTICLE

ARTICLE_BRIEF


Record:*

ARTICLE1

Full “Article1” Report

Part Number

Description

Technical Description

Parts DatabaseManufacturer List PricePMG

Sell PriceCatalog #

100-A09NA3

IEC CONTACTOR

220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ

A-B 0

0100-A09NA3

0

MS3, CRNO

100-A09NB3 A-B

Units

Discount

Parts Database

13-8

UI: Database

Preview

Design

New

ARTICLE

ARTICLE_BRIEF


Record:*

ARTICLE1

Brief “Article1” Report

Part Number


Parts DatabaseManufacturer

100-A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B

MS3, CRNO

Description

100-A09NB3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B

MS3, CRNO

100-A09NC3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B

Parts Database

13-9

Macros

The Macros function contains no links to files or reports at time of installation.Macros can be defined and created after initial installation.


Run – Use this button to run the selected (highlighted) macro.

Design – Use this button to modify a macro.

New – Use this button to create a new macro for the database.

Modules

The Modules function contains no links to files or reports at time of installation.Modules can be defined and created after initial installation.


Run – Use this button to run the selected (highlighted) module.

Design – Use this button to modify a module.

New – Use this button to create a new module for the database.

Parts Database

13-10

ARTICLE.mdb

The ARTICLE.mdb is a database file located in the RS\DBS\DB directory.

SelectARTICLE.mdb File

BmpCatalogDb

Pr

CustomLgLogos

DbDbs

Contents of 'Db'

Name

To access the ARTICLE.mdb file, go to the RS\DBS\DB directory and select theARTICLE.mdb icon. The following ARTICLE: Database dialog box will appear:

ARTICLE: Database

Open

Design

New

ARTICLE

DICTION


The ARTICLE: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries,Forms, Reports, Macros, and Modules. To access any of these functions, select theapplicable tab.

Parts Database

13-11

Tables

The Tables function contains two files with tables, ARTICLE and DICTION.

ARTICLE: Database

Open

Design

New

ARTICLE

DICTION


Parts Database

13-12

ARTICLE Table

To select the ARTICLE table, select (highlight) the ARTICLE icon and select theOpen button. The following ARTICLE: Table will appear:

Record:*

ARTICLE:Table

100-A9NA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NB3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NC3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9ND3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NE3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NF3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NG3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NH3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NI3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NJ3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NK3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NKA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NKD3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B

PART NUMBER DESCR SYMBOL MANUFACT PREFGROUP

The ARTICLE: Table contains records on each of the parts within the parts database.

Parts Database

13-13

DICTION Table

To select the DICTION table, select (highlight) the DICTION icon and select theOpen button. The following DICTION: Table will appear:

Record:*

DICTION:Table

ARTICLE ARTICLE PARTNUMBER partno 2000ARTICLE ARTICLE DESCR descr 2001ARTICLE ARTICLE SYMBOL symb_wir 2002ARTICLE ARTICLE MANUFACT manufact 2003ARTICLE ARTICLE PREFGROUP prefgrp 2004ARTICLE ARTICLE ORDNUMBER ordno 2005ARTICLE ARTICLE PRICE_S price_s 2007ARTICLE ARTICLE PRICE_B price_b 2006ARTICLE ARTICLE DISCOUNT discount 2025ARTICLE ARTICLE UNITS units 2008ARTICLE ARTICLE X dim_x 2011ARTICLE ARTICLE Y dim_y 2012ARTICLE ARTICLE Z dim_z 2013

DIC_NAME DIC_TABLE DIC_FIELD DIC_INTERN DIC_KEY

The DICTION: Table defines the structure for each field record within theARTICLE table.

Parts Database

13-14

TDB.mdb

The TDB.mdb file is located in the RS\DB\LG directory.

SelectTDB.mdb File

BmpCatalogDb

Rs

CustomLgLogos

Dbs

Contents of 'Lg'

Name

To access the TDB.mdb file, go to the RS\DB\LG directory and select the TDB.mdbicon. The following TDB: Database dialog box will appear:

TDB: Database

Open

Design

New

TEXT


The TDB: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms,Reports, Macros, and Modules. To access any of these functions, select theapplicable tab.

Parts Database

13-15

Tables

The Tables function contains one table, TEXT.

TDB: Database

Open

Design

New

TEXT


Parts Database

13-16

TEXT Table

To open the TEXT table, select (highlight) the TEXT icon and select the Openbutton. The following table will appear:

Record:*

TEXT: Table

110 MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR100 '.' DIRECTION BEWEGUNGS DIRECTION '.' DIR. DE MOVI101 MAIN SPINDL HAUPTSPINDL BROCHE PRIN102 MAIN SPINDL HAUPTSPINDL BROCHE PINC103 FEED ON VORSCHUB S DEPART AVAN104 FEED HOLD VORSCHUB H AVANCE STOF105 INDEX TABLE UEBERWACH CONTROLE ^P106 SAFETY DOO UEBERWACH CONTROLE PO107 MANUAL TOO WERKZEUGW CHANGEM.MA108 CHECK CLAM UEBERWACH CONTROLE DI109 LUBRICATION STOERUNG ZE DERANGEMEN RECTIFICADO11 RECTIFIER GLEICHRICHTEREDRESSEUR

TEXT NO English German French Spanish

The TEXT: Table contains records on each language database.

Parts Database

13-17

USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb

Once the UI.mdb database is created by RSWire, it looks for two files (USER.mdband DEFAULT.mdb) to link forms and reports. These files contain reports and formsfor data to be entered. Both files are located in the RS\Syscon\List directory.

UI.mdb conditionally looks for the USER.mdb and then for the DEFAULT.mdb file.If USER.mdb exists (and contains reports or forms), UI.mdb will stop and obtaindata from USER.mdb for the form and report information. If USER.mdb eitherexists but contains no reports or forms, or does not exist, UI.mdb will look toDEFAULT.mdb for the form and report information.

RSWire currently is shipped with an empty USER.mdb file. This file is created bythe user to either put their own reports and forms, or copy DEFAULT.mdb, changename to USER.mdb, and modify the reports or forms.

SelectUSER.mdb File(If Present)

Or

SelectDEFAULT.mdb File

BmpCatalogDb

Pr

Dbs

FontsMenuPlot

ProjectSyscon

ListSystem

TmpUser

Work

Program

Contents of 'List'

Name

Parts Database

13-18

Accessing the Parts Database

As delivered, the parts database contains one ARTICLE file with a collection ofsample parts data. The Manage > Parts Database pull–down menu providesfunctions which allow access to the parts data.

Manage � Parts Database � Edit Form...� Edit Table...� Duplicates Check

Parts Database

13-19

Parts Database Edit Form

You can view and enter data about a part number using the parts database edit(Article) form.

Note The ARTICLE mdb database file is located in RS\DBS\DB. If you use metric unitsyou may wish to edit the Article Form to change the labels for the Dimensions andWeight fields from “in.” and “lb.” to “mm”, “kg”, etc.

Note RSWire is supplied with the Run–Time version of Access which will allow you toview and edit only the data files. If you wish to edit the Article form itself, or createa custom form, you will need to have a Full Version of Access installed on yoursystem.

To access the parts database edit form, select:

Manage � Parts Database � Edit Form

The following form will appear:

Record: *

ARTICLE

Part NumberDescription

Manuf.

Catalog

Date

CreatedChanged

DimensionsX (in)Y (in)

Z (in)

1.81

2.92

3.31SymbolsRef.Wire

Lay.Price

Price_B

0

0

Units

Discount 0

Weight[lb] 0.95

Power[VA] 0

TimeAssembly

Wiring

Device Type M31

220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZTechnical Description Additional Part Numbers

(C)over or (P)anel

Parts Database

Price_S

PMG100A09NA3

A–B

100A09NA3

IEC CONTACTOR04/23/96

06/05/96

M

W–ABCOA010

L–ABCOA010

MS3, CRNO QM31

PARTNUMBER

Sort By:

Filter By:

PARTNUMBER

Filter

RemoveFilters

Supplier M31

Parts Database

13-20

This form contains the various data fields available for each part in the database.Each time a database query is requested, Microsoft Access opens the database andprovides an output based on the type of query.

Database Data Fields

Part Number – This field holds the part number by which the part is identified bothin the database and when entering part numbers on the schematic screen.

Important Do not include spaces in the part number.

Description – Use this field to enter a description of the part.

Manuf.– Use this field to enter the manufacturer’s name. Up to 15 characters areallowed.

Catalog – Use this 20 character field to enter the manufacturer’s catalog partnumber for the part.

Supplier – Use this 20 character field to enter the name of the company from whichyou purchase the part.

PMG – Use this field to assign the part a Preferred Manufacturer’s Group (PMG)number of up to 3 characters.

Each part in the database can be assigned to a preferred manufacturer’s group.These groups can consist of parts from a single manufacturer, parts from a certainsupply company, etc.

Once the groups are created, you can filter parts data by the PMG field so that onlythe parts from the selected group(s) will be listed in the Assign Part Number dialogbox (the dialog box that appears when you search for part numbers from thedrawing screen).

Price:

Price_S – Use this field to enter the selling price that you charge for the part.

Price_B – Use this field to enter the billing price that the manufacturer charges forthe part.

Units – Use this field to enter a description of the units that the part is measured in,such as inches, millimeters, gallons, etc. These units are not taken into account inthe default RSWire lists.

Parts Database

13-21

Discount – Use this field to enter the percent discount.

Device Type – You can assign a device type to the part. If this is done, when the partis assigned to a symbol the device type is automatically assigned to the symbol andthe Device Type selection dialog box will not be displayed. In other words, it saves astep when placing parent symbols. (You have the option of changing thisautomatically assigned device type when the symbol is placed.)

Technical Description – Use these four fields to enter an extended description of thepart.

Date:

Created – This field holds the date that the part data was entered in the database.

Changed – This field holds the date that the part data was altered (edited).

Symbols:

Ref. – Use this field to enter the name of the symbol that will represent the part inschematic diagram. For example, enter the symbol name PBNO for parts that arenormally open pushbuttons (JIC format). This ensures that when the symbol is usedin a schematic, the part will be listed on the Assign Part Number dialog box (thatallows users to select a part number). You can have many different part numbersassigned to one symbol name. If a part number applies to more than one symbol,you can enter multiple symbol names in the Ref. field separated by commas up tothe maximum width of the field (example: TBC1,X1).

Wire – Use this field to enter the name of a wire diagram symbol that will representthe part on wiring diagrams. (This is an optional routine that automatically generatesa wiring diagram showing connection information for devices in the schematics.)

Lay. – Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part on panel layoutdiagrams. If no symbol is named here, the part will be shown on panel layouts as abox having the size entered in the Dimensions fields.

(C)over or (P)anel – Enter a “C” or “P” to indicate whether the part is usuallymounted on an enclosure door (cover) or on an inside panel.

Dimensions (X, Y, Z) – Use these fields to enter the size of the part. Fields areprovided for width (x), height (y), and depth (z). If only the x–coordinate is entered,the part will be represented on a panel layout as a circle having this value as itsdiameter (if no other symbol is named in the Lay. field). If no x or y values areentered, the user can make a box of any size in the layout mode.

Parts Database

13-22

Weight – Use this field to enter the weight of the device.

Power[VA] – Use this field to enter the power requirements of the part in VA.

Time:

Assembly – Use this field to enter an assembly time value in minutes.

Wiring – Use this field to enter a wiring time value in minutes.

Additional Part Numbers – Use these four fields for additional part numbers thatare associated with this part. This is useful for parts that are assemblies of multipleparts. These additional part numbers should have their own data records elsewherein the parts database.

Sort By – The dropdown list allows records to be sorted by a specific database field.The selections in the list are the internal names of the parts database fields.

Filter By – This pair of fields allows you to restrict the range of parts records thatare displayed. In the lower of the two fields, use the dropdown list to select thedatabase field to which you wish the criteria to apply (part number, manufacturer,etc.). In the upper field, enter the alphanumeric string that the desired parts recordsmust match. This can include wildcard (*) strings. When the desired criteria areentered, select the Filter button to put the filter into effect. Now only those partsrecords that match the entered criteria will be displayed. To remove the filter, selectthe Remove Filter button.

Record 1 of ? Count – Displays the number of records contained within a specificregular or filtered search.

Parts Database

13-23

Add a Parts Database Record

1. Display the parts database edit form (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form).

2. Select the Add Record ( >* ) button at the bottom of the form for new dataentry. A blank data entry form will be displayed. Enter the desired part data.

3. You can store the newly entered data by a.) selecting the Add Record buttonagain, b.) displaying another part record, or c.) selecting the Save Record button(the button with the disk and pencil icon).

Undo Record

You can use the Undo Record button to clear the form of any parts data that has notyet been saved (if you wish to start over). This is the button with the curved arrowand pencil icon.

Parts Database

13-24

Delete a Parts Database Record

1. Display the parts database edit form (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form).

2. Display the part record that you wish to delete. See page 13-25.

3. Select the Delete Record button (the button with the “X” icon).

4. The software will ask, “Are you sure you wish to delete this record?” Select theYes button to delete the record from the Article.mdb file.

Parts Database

13-25

Find a Parts Database Record

1. In the Parts Datadabase edit form, place the cursor in the field for the type ofinformation for which you plan to search (part number, manufacturer, etc.)

2. Select the Find button. (This is the button with binoculars icon.) The Find andReplace dialog will appear.

3. The Look In field will show the name of the database field that you selected instep 1. The database search will be confined to entries in this field. If you wishto include all database fields in the search, select “Article” in the Look In field.

4. In the Find What field, enter the alphanumeric string for which you wish tosearch. You can use wildcard (*) searches.

5. In the Match field select whether the search string you entered should matchAny Part of the part number, the Whole part number or the Start (beginning) ofthe part number. (This step is not necessary if you entered a wildcard string inthe previous step.)

6. Select the Find Next button to find the next part number record that matchesyour search criteria.

Parts Database

13-26

Filtering Parts Database Records

The Parts Database edit form contains filtering functions that allow you to narrowdown the range of parts records that are displayed. This makes it easier to find andview parts data that matches a given set of criteria.

Filter By:

PARTNUMBER

Filter

RemoveFilters

Filtering functions

The two Filter By fields allow you to restrict the range of parts records that aredisplayed.

1. In the lower of the two fields, use the dropdown list to select the database fieldto which you wish the criteria to apply (part number, manufacturer, etc.).

2. In the upper field, enter the alphanumeric string that the desired parts recordsmust match. This can include wildcard (*) strings.

3. When the desired criteria are entered, select the Filter button to put the filterinto effect. Now only those parts records that match the entered criteria will bedisplayed.

You can add additional criteria to the current filter by repeating the above steps.

To remove the filter, select the Remove Filter button.

More complex filters can be created by using the Edit Filter button (the button withthe filter and pencil icon). This displays a table where multiple filter criteria can beentered with conditional statements. Refer to MS–Access documentation for moreinformation.

Parts Database

13-27

Edit a Parts Database Record

To edit individual parts records using the Parts Database edit form.

1. Display the desired parts database record.

2. Enter the desired new data in the appropriate field(s).

3. Select the Save Record button. (This is the button with the disk and pencilicon.)

Note The new data also will be saved if you display a different parts record.

Parts Database

13-28

Table View of Database

You may choose to edit parts data using the table view of the database. New datacan be entered into a table using the Edit function within Access.

To add a new record to the database, select:

Manage � Parts Database � Edit Table

The following TEXT table will appear:

Record:*

ARTICLE:Table

100-A9NA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NB3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NC3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9ND3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NE3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NF3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NG3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NH3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NI3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NJ3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NK3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NKA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B100-A9NKD3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B

PART NUMBER DESCR SYMBOL MANUFACT PREFGROUP

The columns in the table correspond to the data fields in the parts database editform.

Parts Database

13-29

Database Manipulation

This section provides information for the advanced RSWire user who wishes towork with the structure of the RSWire parts database. It is vital that completebackup copies of database information be made before attempting to alter thestructure or content of the database.

Parts Database

13-30

Database Manipulation Outside of RSWire

The form for Parts Data entry and Editing work well for manipulation of data withinRSWire, but some users may wish to manipulate the parts database outside ofRSWire using a separate Database Management System (DBMS). The reasons fordoing this vary with each company. Some possible reasons for working with thedatabase outside of RSWire are:

1. Data entry may be done outside of the RSWire environment by clericalpersonnel who have data entry experience but no CAD knowledge.

2. The users can use the DBMS that they are the most experienced with.

3. The data entry interface can be customized by the use of the chosen DBMStools which may be more familiar than dialog box modification.

4. DBMS programming tools such as macros, scripts and database applicationlanguages can be used to manipulate data and automate data entry.

5. The RSWire parts database can be linked to a company–wide DBMS partsmanagement / inventory system.

6. Actions can be performed on the database which are not available throughRSWire (spell checking, search and replace, etc.).

7. External manipulation can help to minimize limitations of table locking.(AutoCAD does not support record locking.)

Editing the Database Outside of RSWire

The DBMS you choose depends on the import / export functionality of the DBMSand the format that you wish to use for your parts table. (The terms import andexport are used because .MDB may not be the native format of your DBMS and animport / export function may be needed. If your software does use .MDB directlyyou would simply use a file open or save.)

Parts Database

13-31

If you choose to stay with the default format of MS–Access you need to be sure thatyour software will do a true Access or .mdb export. This means the databasestructure MUST be kept intact and the structure exported must match what isimported. If you have any doubt, back up the DB directory. Import the tablesARTICLE and DICTION from the ARTICLE.MDB file and try every manipulationthat you intend to perform (add, delete, sort, edit, etc.). Export the database back toRSWire and thoroughly check the database’s integrity. You may be able to use aspreadsheet software as well as true DBMS software, although this may limit thesize of the files that you may need to work with.

Be especially careful of spreadsheet programs such as Excel which will change thefield width when you graphically widen a column to view its entire contents.

To read the parts database simply open the ARTICLE.MDB and read it into yourDBMS. The user may now make any modifications to the table as long as they donot change the structure. The ARTICLE.MDB can then be saved.

Parts Database

13-32

Changing Field Sizes

The simplest restructuring of the database is to change the field width. Alwaysbackup your database file before restructuring! Losses of data can occur whichbecome un–retrievable. The first step is to bring the tables from ARTICLE.MDBinto a DBMS as discussed above. Use the tools within the DBMS to modify thefield desired. Save the file.

The DICTION table has the following structure:

DIC_NAME – Database Name used in RSWire (Several “virtual databases”may be created from one Physical table.)

DIC_TABLE – Database .MDB file (Table) name

DIC_FIELD – Database structure field name

DIC_INTERN – Variable name used within RSWire for dialog boxes and lists

Note All entries to DIC_INTERN must be at least 4 characters long. Otherwise, the fieldwill not appear in the list.

DIC_KEY – A field number used internally by RSWire. The range is 2000 to2099. This number determines the order of the fields listed in the Assign PartNumber dialog box.)

DIC_LENGTH – The character width of the field.

DIC_TYPE – The type of information stored in the Field Database Structure0 – String (Characters)1 – Integer (Whole Numbers)2 – Floating Point (Decimals)

DIC_PREC – Precision (Not used at this time.)

DIC_ITYPE – Type of index (Not used at this time.)

DIC_INDEX – The name of the .NDX file in which the field is the key for theindex. (Not used at this time.)

DIC_DCL – The name of the dialog box for entry in the database withinRSWire. (Not used at this time.)

Parts Database

13-33

In the DIC_FIELD column, search for the field name that you wish to change thesize of. In the DIC_LENGTH field for the record change the number to the newfield width. Note that some fields may be listed more than once in the DICTIONtable with different DIC_NAME entries. This is because RSWire may internallydivide one physical database file into several tables and an individual entry may actas a field in several of these virtual tables. Be sure that you change all of the entriesto match the same width as that which is actually used in the MDB file. After theedits are complete, save the file.

Now that RSWire will be able to use the new column widths to read the databaseand handle it internally it is necessary to allow the users to make use of the newwidth. This will require the modification of all forms and List Generator files toreflect the new field widths. Typically the files to be modified are ARTICLE formand several of the parts related List Generator files. An easy way to get a list of thefiles that need changing is to use a utility such as Norton File Find to find alloccurrences of the DIC_INTERN entries for the records that were modified in theDICTION table.

Parts Database

13-34

Adding Fields

To add or delete fields the process is the same as for modifying fields. First you readin the ARTICLE table with a DBMS and restructure the database with the newfields. Then edit the DICTION table. You will have to insert new lines for the newfields. The position in the file where you place the new records does not matter. Forthe sake of clarity you should use the same order as the actual database field order.Add the internal variables into the appropriate list generator and files.

Example:Three new fields are needed for parts information; one floating point, one integerand one string.

New fields:

Name Type Length

MY_INT new integer field 4

MY_FLOAT floating point field 6

MY_STRING new character field 5

1. Enter the DBMS and add the three fields to the ARTICLE table. Give the newfields the appropriate width and type.

2. Modify the DICTION table within the DBMS. Add the corresponding 3 rows tothe table:

DIC_NAME DIC_TABLE DIC_FIELD DIC_INTERN DIC_KEY DIC_LENGTH

ARTICLE ARTICLE MY_INT int1 2099 4

ARTICLE ARTICLE MY_FLOAT float 2098 6

ARTICLE ARTICLE MY_STRING string 2097 5

DIC_TYPE DIC_PREC DIC_ITYPE DIC_INDEX DIC_DCL

1 0 0 db_rec

2 0 0 db_rec

0 0 0 db_rec

The positions of the new columns and the new rows don’t matter. Save the fileand enter RSWire.

3. Create a new form within Access.

Parts Database

13-35

4. Edit the description file of the database list description (db2.lst):Add three lines in the part data section:

|Int : ?int1 ||Float : ?float ||String : ?string |

When the list is used the new fields will be displayed in the list.

Parts Database

13-36

Database Complete Restructure

Through the use of the methods already discussed it seems possible to completelyrestructure the RSWire database to match one that the customer may already have.This attractive proposition would allow the customer to have real time interactionbetween RSWire and his other parts inventory software. Unfortunately there are tworoadblocks to this goal.

The first is the already mentioned limit to record locking. In most true DBMS’s,locking is accomplished on a record level. This means that any number of peoplecan be using the database simultaneously to do edits, lists, data entries, etc. Theonly limitation is that the software will not allow two people to modify the samerecord at the same time. In RSWire, whole tables are locked at the same time. Thismakes the system difficult to use in a large multi–user environment where severalpeople may need to change part information at the same time. If you must have thistype of data entry flexibility, the only solution at this time is to maintain thedatabase using the current DBMS software and use a script or custom software totransfer the parts information in a separate parts database file to be used by RSWireon a read–only basis.

The second limitation to tying directly to an existing database is that there are a fewfields which must be left alone for RSWire to function correctly. These fields are:

� symb_ref

� prefgrp

� partno

� dim_x

� dim_y

� addparton

� symb_lay

� descr

These fields must be left alone with regard to DIC_FIELD and DIC_INTERN.

Parts Database

13-37

Previewing the Parts Database

To access the RSWire parts database, and view the detailed data, select:

Reports � Libraries � Parts � Full Data Preview

The following Parts Database dialog box will appear.

Part Number

Description


Parts DatabaseManufacturer List PricePMG Device TypeUnits

Sell Price (C)over or (P)anelDiscountCatalog #

Ref. Symbol Wire. Symbol Lay. Symbol

X Y Z

Weight Assembly Time Created

Power Wiring Time Changed

Additional Part Numbers

100-A09NA3

IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 0 M31

0 0100-A09NA3

M L-ABC0A010 04/23/96

06/05/96

W-ABC0A010

1.81 2.92 3.31 0

0.95

0 M31

0 0

M L-ABC0A010 04/23/96W-ABC0A010

1.81 2.92 3.31 0

0.95

0 M31

0 0

M L-ABC0A010 04/23/96W-ABC0A010

1.81 2.92 3.31 0

0.95

0 M31

0 0

M L-ABC0A010 04/23/96W-ABC0A010

1.81 2.92 3.31 0

0.95

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NB3

IEC CONTACTOR


A-B

100-A09NB3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NC3

IEC CONTACTOR


A-B

100-A09NC3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09ND3

IEC CONTACTOR


A-B

100-A09ND3

MS3, CRNO QM31

Wednesday, December 30, 1998 Page 1 of 898

The Parts Database list in the Full Data Preview function is viewed in a landscapeformat.

Parts Database

13-38

To access the RSWire parts database, and view a more concise data listing, select:

Reports � Libraries � Parts � Brief Data Preview

The following Database Data dialog box will appear.

Part Number


Parts DatabaseManufacturer

100-A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NA3

MS3, CRNO QM31

Wednesday, December 30, 1998 Page 1 of 321

Description Catalog #

100-A09NB3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NB3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NC3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NC3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09ND3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9ND3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NE3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NE3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NF3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NF3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NG3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NG3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NH3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NH3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NI3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NI3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NJ3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NJ3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NK3 IEC CONTACTOR


A-B 100-A9NK3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NKA3 IEC CONTACTOR

48VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50/60HZ

A-B 100-A9NKA3

MS3, CRNO QM31

100-A09NKD3 IEC CONTACTOR

24VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50/60HZ

A-B 100-A9NKD3

MS3, CRNO QM31

The Parts Database list in the Brief Data Preview function is viewed in a portraitformat.

Parts Database

13-39

Printing the Parts Database

Printing from MS–Access

Note Printing options will vary depending on which version of Access (Run–Time or Full)is on your system. You can verify which version of Access you have by using theHelp > About Microsoft Access drop–down menu. The Run–Time version will allowprinting of the complete list only. The Full version will allow printing of thecomplete list, range of pages, or the current page.

Use the following procedure to print the Full Data Preview list or the Brief DataPreview list from Access:

1. Open the project.

2. Select either the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Full Data Preview or theReports > Libraries > Parts > Brief Data Preview function.

3. Select the page you want to print.

4. Select File > Print pull–down menu in Access. The Print dialog box willappear.

5. Select one of the printing options: all pages, range of pages, or current page.

6. Select the OK button.

Once printing is complete, exit Access. You will return to RSWire.

Parts Database

13-40

Printing from RSWire

In order to print the complete Full Data Preview list or Brief Data Preview list fromRSWire , you must perform the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Brief DataPrintout or the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Full Data Printout function.

Select:

Reports � Libraries � Parts � Full Data Printout

or

Reports � Libraries � Parts � Brief Data Printout

Access will open, the Printing dialog box will appear, and the complete list willprint.

Note Selecting one of these functions will result in the printing of the complete partsdatabase list. Some lists could be over 850 pages. If only a specified range of pagesare required, refer to the Printing from Access section.

Once printing is complete, exit Access. You will return to RSWire.

List Generator Configuration

14-1

14 List Generator Configuration

The RSWire list generator generates information reports and lists with a variableformat. The format of a list is determined by a list description file. These files arestored in the directory RS\SYSCON\LIST. When one of the RSWire list functions isexecuted (from one of the Reports submenus), the system uses a list description fileto determine which data are used in the listing and how they are positioned.

List File(provides format)

RSWireProjectInformation

FormattedInformation Listing

List Generator

A number of list description files are provided with RSWire. The user can alsocreate custom list files.

Caution: If you create your own list description files, keep a backup copy ofyour new files on a separate disk. Do not edit the existing list generator files asthese will be overwritten when you update to a new software version. Instead,make a copy of list generator files under a different name and edit the copy.


� Assigning List Generator Files

� List File Structure

� Sample List File

� Sort Criteria Function

� Using Variable Data in Lists

� List Data Formatting

� Arithmetic Operations With Variables

� String Manipulations

� Static Filter for Lists

� Tab Formatting in Lists


14-2

� List Generator Variables

� Project Lists

� Database Lists

� Wire Lists

� Parts Lists

� Field Wiring Lists

� Error Checking Lists


14-3

Assigning List Generator Files

If you create a custom list generator file you must assign this file to the appropriatereport or list function within RSWire.

1. To assign list generator files, select:

Tools � System Settings

2. Select the Reports: Description Files tab. The following dialog box will appear.



XSystem Settings

Printer

Conn. List I/O List

Default 5 File3 41 2

List Name PrinterFile Name

Conn. List I/O ListConn. List Wire Diagram ListConn. List Wire Label ListConn. List Wiring ListFld. Wire Cable + Wire ListFld. Wire Cable ListFld. Wire Terminal ListFld. Wire Terminal Strip ListGen. Info Device Types [Brief]Gen. Info Device Types [Detailed]Gen. Info Macro DirectoryGen. Info Page Formats

DefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefaultDefault

PLC.LSTWIREDG.LSTWIRELAB.LSTWIRE.LSTFLDWIRE.LSTCABLE.LSTTERM.LSTTSTRIP.LSTDEVICE2.LSTDEVICE1.LSTMACRO.LSTFORMAT.LST

PLC.LST

SelectList

Here

EnterFilename

Here

Conn. List I/O List PLC.LST Default

After selecting the desired list name, you can enter the new file name in the fieldbelow the list. You can also select a printer for each list. Select the Save button tosave the assignment for future work sessions.


14-4

The following list generator files are provided with the software. The defaultdirectory for these files is RS\SYSCON\LIST. (See next page for comma–separated“CS” list generator files.)

List File Description

BRADY.LST Brady label list

CABLE.LST Cable list

DB1.LST Database list (brief)

DB2.LST Database list (detailed)

DEVICE1.LST Device type list (detailed)

DEVICE2.LST Device type list (brief)

DEVWP.LST Device without parent list

DIM.LST Parts dimension list

FLDWIRE.LST Field wiring list

FORMAT.LST Page format list

INST.LST Installation list

JOB.LST Job costing list

MACRO.LST Macro list

MASTER.LST Master parts list

P_O.LST Purchase order list

PAGE1.LST Page list (brief)

PAGE2.LST Page list (detailed)

PAGE3.LST Project all list (project paths/directories)

PAGE4.LST Alternative format page list

PARTS.LST Bill of Materials

PLC.LST PLC (programmable logic controller) list

PROJECT1.LST Project list (brief)

PROJECT2.LST Project list (detailed)

SIGNAL.LST Signal list

SYMBOL.LST Symbol list

TERM.LST Terminal list

TEXT1.LST Language text list (single language)

TEXT2.LST Language text list (multi-language)

TSTRIP.LST Terminal strip list

WIRE.LST Wire list

WIRELAB.LST Wire labels


14-5

The following list generator files produce comma separated lists (qualified with ” ”)which can be imported into a spreadsheet program.

List File Description

CSCABLE.LST Comma separated cable list

CSDB1.LST Comma separated Database list (brief)

CSDB2.LST Comma separated Database list (detailed)

CSDEVICE1.LST Comma separated Device type list(detailed)

CSDEVICE2.LST Comma separated Device type list (brief)

CSDEVWP.LST Comma separated Device without parentlist

CSDIM.LST Comma separated Parts dimension list

CSFLDWIR.LST Comma separated field wire list

CSFORMAT.LST Comma separated Page format list

CSINST.LST Comma separated Installation list

CSJOB.LST Comma separated Job costing list

CSMACRO.LST Comma separated Macro list

CSMASTER.LST Comma separated master list

CSP_O.LST Comma separated purchase order list

CSPAGE1.LST Comma separated Page list (brief)

CSPAGE2.LST Comma separated Page list (detailed)

CSPARTS.LST Comma separated parts list

CSPLC.LST Comma separated PLC list

CSPROJECT1.LST Comma separated Project list (brief)

CSPROJECT2.LST Comma separated Project list (detailed)

CSSIGNAL.LST Comma separated Signal list

CSSYMBOL.LST Comma separated Symbol list

CSTERM.LST Comma separated Terminal list

CSTSTRIP.LST Comma separated Terminal strip list

CSWIRE.LST Comma separated wire list


14-6

List File Structure

The list file is organized in blocks of lines. Each block has a specific purpose asdescribed below. These blocks are always output “en bloc”, in other words, withoutpage breaks.

The following blocks must be listed in every list description file:

Control sequence: Block Description:

!lh List header (beginning of first page)

!ph Page header (beginning of all subsequent pages)

!d1 Data block (output of data)

!pf Page footer (end of all pages with the exception of the last page)

!lf List footer (end of the last page)

The following is a sample list file, with an example of the listing that is generatedfrom the list file.


14-7

Sample List File (TSTRIP.LST)!lh 0 First Page Header –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Terminal strip list Date : ?date Page : ?pgno | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project : ?project * ?addr01 | | Description: ?title01 * ?addr02 | | Drawing–No.: ?title02 * ?addr03 | | Job–Number : ?title03 * ?addr04 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip |%3.3s ?pgno%.22s ?title01%.22s ?title02%.22s ?title03%.33s ?addr01%.33s ?addr02%.33s ?addr03%.33s ?addr04!ph 0 Second Page Header (all following page headers) –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– * Terminal strip list Project: ?project Date : ?date Page : ?pgno* –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––!d1 1 Database | ?count | ?install&?location&?strip |!fill 0 | |!pf 0 Page Footer –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | continued on page ?nextpgno | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––!lf 0 End of List ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

List Header(first page)

Page Header(2nd page, and Following)

Data Block

Page Filler

Page Footer

List Footer(Last Page)


14-8

Sample List Generated from the List File

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Terminal strip list Date : 02.20.99 Page : 1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project : PROJECT * Company Name | | Description: SAMPLE PROJECT * Company’s Address | | Drawing–No.: 1000 * City, State Zip | | Job–Number : NONE * Phone Number | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 24 | =LINE1+JBOX–TB1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 6 | =LINE1+PANEL–TB1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 18 | =LINE1+PANEL–TB2 | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

In each block of the list file, text that will not change is entered as it should appearin the listing. RSWire variables are entered as a ? followed by the variable name.When the list is generated, the variable is replaced with the appropriate piece of datafrom the project. See page 14-29 for lists of available variables. Also see page 14-14for information on formatting the appearance of variable data in the listing.

List Header Block – This block specifies the information that will appear at the topof the first page of the listing. In the example list file on the previous page, theheader block begins with the positioning of the various fields and descriptions ofthese fields. Below this, the field size of the variables are defined. For example,“%.22s ?title01” means that variable ?title01, the project description, is a string ofwhich a maximum of 22 characters will be displayed. See page 14-14 for moreinformation on formatting variables.

Page Header Block – Specifies the page header that will appear at the top of thesecond and all subsequent pages. In the example file, the page header has beenconfigured to display the project name (?project), the date (?date), and the pagenumber (?pgno).

Data Block – This block specifies the main content of the listing. In the examplefile, the variable ?termno (Quantity of terminal blocks) is specified, followed byvariables ?install, ?location, and ?strip (terminal block installation, location anddevice ID).


14-9

Page Filler Block – (Optional) If the user requires that page and list footers arealways positioned at the lower edge of the page, the output block “page filler”should be listed in the list description file. The control sequence for the page fillerblock is “!fill ”. This block must only contain one line. It is output repeatedly so thatthe pages end precisely with the final line of the page or list footer.

Note When outputting a list, in some circumstances, only one page with a large number oflines will be created. In order to avoid the generation of the corresponding numberof fill lines, in such a case, the list generator will ignore the page filler.

Page Footer Block – Specifies what will appear at the bottom of every page exceptthe last page of the listing. In the example file, the text “continued on page” isspecified, followed by variable ?nextpgno which represents the next page number.

List Footer Block – Specifies what appears at the end of the last page of the listing.

Rules for list files

� The beginning of each block is signaled by a control sequence composed of anexclamation mark and a block identifier.

� It is essential that the control sequences begin in the first column.

� The end of each block is signaled either by the beginning of the following blockor by the end of the file.

� Each line must be completed with a carriage return.

� If the output of a block is not required, it must nevertheless be listed (otherwisean error message will appear), but it may be specified with 0 output lines.

� In some lists, provision is made for additional output blocks. These must belisted in the corresponding description files.

Other List File Functions

Page Break – Normally, the list generator automatically controls page breaks.Following the last block which will fit in full on the page started, the output of thepage footer is activated. If the user requires a new page to begin after each group ofdata, this can be achieved by adding the letter “n” to the control sequence !d1.Example:

Control sequence: Description:

!d1 Data block is output with maximum page utilization.

!d1n Page break prior to output of the data block.

!h1 Headline is output if block output before is not page header.

!h1nHeadline is output only on the first page of the list, later on only apage break is initiated.


14-10

Caution: The unconditional page break must not be used for list headers, listfooters, page headers and page footers.

Page Counter Variables – The list generator has two counters that keep track of:

� The number of the current page

� The number of the following page

Output of page numbers is initiated by the variable ?pgno (current page of list)or ?nextpgno (next page of list). Recommended method: use ?pgno in list and pageheaders; use ?nextpgno in page footers (“continued on page ?nextpgno”).

Consecutive Number – The list generator holds a range of indices which can beoutput in every list at any given point. The starting value for the indices is 1; theexpression of an index automatically leads to its incrementation. These indices canbe used, for example, for numbering items in the list. The following variables maybe specified:


?ix1 Index 1

?ix.1 Index 1.1; is reset in the event of incrementation of index 1

?ix..1 Index 1.2; is reset in the event of incrementation of index 1 or 1.1

?ix2 Index 2

?ix3 Index 3

Suppress Individual Lines – Occasionally, when replacing variables, the listgenerator will access strings with a length of 0. It is possible to suppress such lines.For this purpose, the control sequence ?nopr should be entered at any point in thelist description file. The line thus marked will be suppressed if only zero strings areaccessed during data access.


?nopr Line is suppressed


14-11

List to File – When outputting a list to a disk file, the file path is generatedautomatically. However, automatic generation can be prevented via the entry of thecontrol block !outfile at the end of the list file. The control sequence !outfile or!outfile ? will cause the system to request path/filename for the file. The sequence!outfile <path/filename> will automatically save the file to <path/filename>


!outfile request filename for list

!outfile? <path/filename> save list as <path/filename>

Sort Criteria Function

The user can place sort statements in the list generator files which specify variablesby which the list will be sorted. This sorting will only occur when the Sort Ontoggle is selected in the Report Settings dialog box (Tools > System Settings >Report Settings tab).



XSystem Settings

Filter

OFF

ON

Sort

OFF

ON

Output

Screen

Project

File

Printer

Graphic Output

Sort Toggles

Interactive


14-12

When the Sort Off toggle is selected, sorting occurs in default order.

In the list file on the following page (P_O.LST), the sort criterion is found at the endof the file and is identified by the key phrase “!sort”. Following the sort command isthe “!h2” descriptor identifying the data block to be sorted and the variable name(?manufact) to be used in the static sort method. Also specified is a numericconstant (0) which describes the sorting method. These numeric constants aredefined as follows:

Sort Constants

Sort Mode Ascending Descending

Alphabetical [0] [1]

Ignore Case [2] [3]

Numerical [4] [5]

Mixed: Alpha + Num. [6] [7]

Date [8] [9]

New Page [n]

Therefore, in the following P_O.LST example the list would be sorted by theinformation in the !h2 block by manufacturer name in alphabetical order. Theinclusion of the “n” switch indicates that a new page should be started for eachmanufacturer.


14-13

!lh 0 First Page Header ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Purchase Order List Date: ?date Page: ?pgno| ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project Name: ?project | ?addr01 | | Install. Name: ?title01 | ?addr02 | | Drawing No.: ?title03 | ?addr03 | | Job Number: ?title02 | ?addr04 | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Part No. Qty. Description Catalog No. Manufacturer |%3.3s ?pgno%.24s ?title01%.24s ?title02%.24s ?title03%.32s ?addr01%.32s ?addr02%.32s ?addr03!ph 0 Second Page Header (all following page headers) ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Purchase Order List Project: ?project Date: ?date Page: ?pgno| ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Part No. Qty. Description Catalog No. Manufacturer |%3.3s ?pgno!h2 1 Database ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | ?partno ?quant ?descr ?ordno ?manufact | | ?nopr ?tech01 | | ?nopr ?tech02 | | ?nopr ?tech03 | | ?nopr ?tech04 |%–14.14s ?partno%–6.6s ?quant%–21.21s ?descr%–12.12s ?ordno%–13.13s ?manufact%.48s ?tech01%.48s ?tech02%.48s ?tech03%.48s ?tech04!d1 2 | | | ?ins01 ?ins02 ?ins03 ?ins04 ?ins05 ?ins06 ?ins07 ?ins08 | | ?loc01 ?loc02 ?loc03 ?loc04 ?loc05 ?loc06 ?loc07 ?loc08 | | ?did01 ?did02 ?did03 ?did04 ?did05 ?did06 ?did07 ?did08 |!fill 0 Fill Command | |!pf 0 Page footer ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | continued on page ?nextpgno | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––!lf 0 End of list –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––!sort !h2 ?manufact 0n!outfile ?


14-14

Using Variable Data in Lists

The list description file contains references to data assigned in the program. Thesereferences (? values) are composed of a question mark and a variable name, forexample ?date. The list generator replaces the string ?date in the output list with thecurrent date. Because the date comprises 8 characters, the 6 characters following?date in the list description file are ignored and are overwritten in the output list.

Note The variables that can be accessed by each list are limited. If an attempt is made toaccess variables that are not valid for a given list then it is possible for nonsensevalues to appear in the output list (see page 14-29 for lists of the variables availablefor each type of list).

The “&” Separator – For many variables, the list generator will access values ofdifferent lengths. If these data are to be written consecutively in flush format, thesymbol “&” should be added to the data identifier to ensure that the first value doesnot write over the second. The following examples show various methods ofseparating the values.

Where:

� ?title01 is replaced by Installation12

� ?title02 is replaced by 0815

� ?title03 is replaced by 4711

Control sequence: ?title01?title02

Produces output: Installa0815

Control sequence: ?title01&?title02

Produces output: Installa120815

Control sequence: ?title01&?title02&?title03

Produces output: Installation1208154711

Control sequence: ?title01&/?title02&/?title03

Produces output: Installation12/0815/4711

Control sequence: ?title01& / ?title02& / ?title03

Produces output: Installation12 / 0815 / 4711

Note – the “&” character must be directly after the data identifier– all symbols between & and ? will be inserted flush– if there is no ? after the &, all symbols until the end of the line will be inserted inflush format


14-15

List Data Formatting

As a general rule, the data in the lists are output left–aligned. It is also possible tochange the output to other formats including right–aligned. Reformatting isconducted separately for each output block. Format specifications are listed belowthe last output line of the output block in question. Each format specification is in itsown line, terminated by a carriage return. The formatting instruction is identified byits leading percentage symbol %. The formatting instruction is followed by the dataidentification number, separated at least by a blank.

Note The formatting instruction must begin in the first column.

Indicates A FormatSpecification

FieldWidth

Number OfDigits To TheRight of DecimalPoint (FloatingPoint) Or NumberOf Characters Displayed

Indicates Format OfValue

%10.2f

% 10 . 2 f

Example format instruction

If no field width value is given, as many characters will be displayed as is necessaryto show the value.

Note Most listings will require a field width to establish columns.

A minus sign preceding the field width value will cause the listing to beleft–aligned.

Examples:

Note In the following examples, colons have been used to show the beginning and end ofthe string; these are not output by the list generator.

a. String output:

An “s” at the end of the format instruction represents a string.


14-16

Format instr.: Result:

%5s :EXAMPLE1:

%-5s :EXAMPLE1:

%10s : EXAMPLE1:

%-10s :EXAMPLE1 :

%10.5s : EXAMP:

%-10.5s :EXAMP :

%.5s :EXAMP:

b. Output as whole number: (E.g.: 123)

A “d” at the end of the format instruction represents a whole number value.


%d :123:

%10d : 123:

%10.4d : 0123:

%-10.2d :123 :

%-10.4d :0123 :

%.2d :123:

%.4d :0123:

c. Output as floating point number: (E.g.: 123.321)

A “f” at the end of the format instruction represents a floating point number.


%f :123.321000:

%10.2f : 123.32:

%10.4f : 123.3210:

%-10.2f :123.32 :

%-10.4f :123.3210 :

%.2f :123.32:

%.4f :123.3210:


14-17

Arithmetic Operations With Variables

By means of arithmetic operations, it is possible to import additional informationinto the lists from the data defined in RSWire. For this purpose, the list generatorprovides two types of variables:

� Type i (integer) variables for whole numbers

� Type f (float) variables for floating point numbers

Expression in the list description file:

Variable: Meaning:

?i1 1. Whole number variable

?i2 2. Whole number variable

?f1 1. Floating point variable

?f2 2. Floating point variable

Up to 30 of each type of variable are allowed.

Formatting List Generator Variables

Equations must exist in the control sequence block where the variable is defined.Formatting instructions for variables must be located at the end of the block, afterall the output lines. They are likewise identified by the leading percentage symbol.Whole number variables must be formatted using the conversion symbol d, andfloating point variables using the characters ?f.

Examples:

%d ?i1

%f ?f1

%4.2f ?f2

Value assignment to List Generator Variables

Values can be assigned to the variables via expressions following the correspondingformat specification. These expressions are composed of a sequence of operandsand operators.


14-18

Permissible operands: Purpose:

?c constants

(no character) RSWire variable

?i whole number variable

?f floating point variable

Permissible operators: Function:

+ for addition

- for subtraction

* for multiplication

/ for division

Examples: Effect:

%d ? i1 ?c4*25The list generator variable ?i1 is allocated the value of theconstant 4 multiplied by the RSWire variable 25.

%d ?i2 ?i2+?i1The value of the list generator variable ?i1 is added to the listgenerator variable ?i2.

%f ?f1 ? i1*?i1*?c3.14?f1 is allocated the approximate value of the circle area with aradius of ?i1.

Note – The starting value for all variables is zero.– All variables can be freely assigned in all List Generator lists.– The expressions are processed sequentially; there are no operator priorities (no point–before–dash rule)– All data are converted to the type of variable to which they are assigned (for floating point data, floating point variables are used in some circumstances, even though no places after the point are outputted)– Do not forget the character “c” before constants.– Expressions are processed in the order in which they are listed in the list description file (exception: brackets, see below.)

Example of a list description:

The database supplies:

� The part number under data variable ?partno

� The quantity used under data variable ?quant

� The list price under data variable ?price_b


14-19

This information should be extended by the total item price and the overall costs.

List description:

!lh Calculation list!ph!d1 Part number : ?partno Quantity : ?quant List price : ?price_b Total price : ?f1%5.2f ?price_b%5.2f ?f1 ?quant*?price_b%f ?f2 ?f2+?f1!pf!lf The sum of overall costs is: ?f2%.2f ?f2

Caution: In this example, the overall costs (?f2) are calculated in data block!d1, but not printed until the list footer !lf. Irrespective of the order of thevalue assignments listed under the print lines of the data block !d1, the value isnot assigned to ?f2 until all variables printed in block !d1 have been allocatedtheir values.

Parentheses

Not all calculation formulae can be transformed in such a way that sequentialprocessing displays the required result. Example: The user wishes to calculate theoverall area of all devices in an installation in the dimensions list.

Variable for overall installation area: ?f11

Variable for x dimension coordinate: ?dim_x

Variable for y dimension coordinate: ?dim_y

The following actions must be executed:

� Initialize the variable ?f11 with 0 (in installation header !h2)

� Add the individual areas to ?f11 (in data set !d1)

� Output the variables ?f11 (in installation footer !f2)


14-20

Problems will occur when adding up in the data block; according to the rulesoutlined above, the instruction in the data block must be as follows:

%f ?f11 ?price_s * ?units + ?f11

However, this will not produce the desired result. The list generator will assign thefirst operand, ?price_s, to the variable ?f11 when processing the expression. Thismeans that the sum of all areas formerly calculated will be overwritten, and insteadof this, the double area of the most recent device will appear in ?f11.

The solution to this situation is to use parentheses.

In order to achieve the required result, the instruction should therefore be as follows:

%f ?f11 ?f11 + (?price_s * ?units)

The parentheses may also be nested, but note that no error message will appear ifthe bracketing is incorrect.

Minimum/Maximum Determination

With the aid of the comparative operators, it is possible to determine extreme valuesof RSWire variables and list generator variables. The greater than symbol “>”serves as maximum determination, and the less than symbol “<” as minimumdetermination.

Caution: The list generator does not recognize the intended use of a variablefor extreme value determination and initializes all list generator variables withzero. Accordingly, the variables must be set “manually” in the list header tovalues beyond the expected values.


14-21

Example:

!lh . . .%f f2 c99999 . . .!d1 Item no.: ?partno Depth : ?ordno%f f1 f1>?ordno Conditional valueassignment%f f2 f2<?ordno Conditional valueassignment!pf!lf The maximum depth is: ?f1 The minimum depth is: ?f2

In the first line, with the comment “conditional value assignment” the value of f1 iscompared with the value of the RSWire variable ?ordno. If the latter value isgreater, it is assigned to f1; otherwise, no action is initiated. This conditionalassignment is repeated until the data block !d1 is output. Once all data blocks havebeen output, the maximum of the depths is printed in the list footer.The same applies analogously to the processing of f2.

Note In the case of aborted lists (screen output), only the extreme values of the outputsection of list are determined, as the arithmetic operations do not take place until ablock is output.


14-22

String Manipulations

As outlined above, the strings present in RSWire may be output in a formatted form.In order to be able to cut the beginning of a string, another mechanism of the listgenerator connected prior to formatting must be initiated. The list generatorprovides memory space for 30 manipulated strings which can be re–allocated inevery list. Output of strings (in this case list generator strings) is conducted asfollows:

Data ID: Meaning:

?s1 1. List Generator string



: :

The contents of all list generator strings are pre–assigned the string length 0. Thesecontents may be modified by manipulation terms which are appended to theformatting instructions described above.

Example:

The RSWire variable ?ftext contains the string:

“1st line^2nd line^3rd line”

Format spec. Effect of ?s1 or ?s2, ?s3 in the relevant output block

%s ?s1 ?ftext 1st line^2nd line^3rd line

%s ?s1 ?ftext t^1 1st line (positioned by separator)

%s ?s2 ?ftext f^1 t^2 2nd line (positioned by separator)

%s ?s3 ?ftext f^2 3rd line (positioned by separator)

%s ?s2 ?ftext f10 t17 2nd line (positioned absolutely)


14-23

The leading data identification number specifies the RSWire variable from whichthe string is to be taken. The letter “f” in the manipulation term means “fromsymbol”, the letter “t” means “up to symbol”. The sequence directly following “t” or“f” may contain a non–numerical symbol and a number. If only one number (n) iscontained, the string is copied into the list generator string from or up to the nthsymbol inclusively. If a non–numerical symbol (c) is also included, then the string iscopied into the list generator string from the nth symbol c exclusively or up to thenth symbol c exclusively.

Caution: The sequences f[symbol][number] or t[symbol][number] must notcontain any spaces (exception: when the symbol itself is a space).

Static Filter for Lists

The filter feature for list generators enables the user to filter specific data into thelists. An example would be the purchase order list. Not all of the parts are purchasedfrom one vender. We might need a separate P.O. list for each vender. Throughfiltering, we can print only the parts we need.

To filter a list the user must do two things:

1. Put a filter statement in the list generator file that specifies how the list is to befiltered.

2. Turn on the Filter function in the Tools > System Settings > Report Settingstab before generating the list.

If the filter statement contains variables, the user will be prompted for values at thetime the list is generated.

The filter statement consists of the following information.


14-24

!filt (Filter statement identifier)

!h2 (The data block in which the variable resides.)

& (Logical operand and for the AND junction and allows the filter

description to be displayed in the Filter DCL. NOTE: If no other

operands are used the & must be in place.)

&! (Logical operand for a negated AND junction, �AND NOT".)

| (Logical operand for an OR junction.)

|! (Logical operand for a negated OR junction, �OR NOT".)

?manufact (The name of the variable to filter. �manufact" is one example.)

0 - 8 (The filter mode). See below.

= (The equation which the filter path is to take). See below.

* (The preset value �*" appears in the filter data entry field of the filter DCL and* (The preset value *" appears in the filter data entry field of the filter DCL andcan be used as a wild card i e S* which would display all manufacturerscan be used as a wild card, i.e. S*, which would display all manufacturersbeginning with S) Keep in mind case sensitive data In a static filter the & |beginning with S). Keep in mind case sensitive data. In a static filter the & |

b d t t l hi h t iti i *S *g g ) p |

may be used to accept values which are not case sensitive, i.e. *S or *s.

�Manufacturer" (Text that appears in the Filter window to identify the filter variable name)�Manufacturer" (Text that appears in the Filter window to identify the filter variable name).

Statement Format – (the actual statement is separated by spaces, not commas)!filt, block identifier, logical junction, field identifier, comparison mode, comparisonoperator string

Example statement: !filt !h2 & ?manufact 0 = *“Manufacturer”

This statement will filter for manufacturers in alphabetical order.

Filter Criteria :

The following values in the filter statement determine the order in which the datawill be listed.

Filter Mode Constants (Ascending)

Alphabetical [0]

Ignore Case [2]

Numerical [4]

Mixed: Alpha-Numeric [6]

Date [8]


14-25

For filtering, the block identifier !filt is used in conjunction with the followinglogical operators:

& = AND junction

&! = AND NOT junction

| = OR junction

|! = OR NOT junction

Several entries may be made in the Filter window; only those data records whichsatisfy all entries are output.

For the “equal to” and not equal to”, partial qualifications are evaluated, i.e. it ispossible to use “*” and “?” in the entries you make in the Filter window.

Example: AC* to list all parts from companies beginning with “AC” .Example: 4??? to list all wire numbers with four digits starting with 4.

For the “equal to” and not equal to”, multiple entries are possible in the Filterwindow; they must be separated by a pipe “|” (OR).

Example: ABLE | BAKER to display only Able or Baker manufacturers. Up tosixty characters may be entered on one line for multiple manufacturers names,separating each name by a “|” character.

For “not equal to” (!=) suppression is implemented, i.e. the list is output with theexception of the entries listed in the Filter window.

Example: I:000/??|O:000/?? to list all wire numbers except the I:000/ and O:000/I/O addresses.

List Filter Restrictions – In the filter statement the user must indicate the manner inwhich the list for this variable is to be restricted. The following modes may bespecified.

= equal to

!= not equal to

< less than

> greater than

<= less than or equal to

>= greater than or equal to


14-26

Example: to filter for a specific quantity of parts (quantity of 3).

!filt !d1 & ?quant 4 > 2!filt !d1 & ?quant 4 <= 4

After the list generator has been modified with the filter statement, the filterfunction must be selected by picking Tools > System Settings from the pull–downmenu, and Report Settings tab. Select the On toggle in the Filter field. Save thissetting for future work sessions by selecting the Save button.



XSystem Settings

Filter

OFF

ON

Sort

OFF

ON

Output

Screen

Project

File

Printer

Graphic Output

Interactive

Filter Toggles

When filter statements are present that require variable entries, the Filter dialog boxwill appear when a list is generated. The entry fields will be labeled as specified inthe filter statement. For example, if the following pair of filter statements was addedto the list generator file:

!filt !h2 & ?manufact 0 = * “Manufacturer name”!filt !h2 & ?ordno 6 = * “Part number”


14-27

Then the Filter dialog box would appear as follows:

Manufacturer name =

Part number =

OK Cancel Help...

Filter

Note Due to the number of variables used to extract wire numbers, wire labels cannot befiltered using the filter function.


14-28

Tab Formatting in Lists

You can format tab stops in lists so that information appears in columns.

Tabs are specified in the data block portion of the list generator file following thesort constant value (see following example). The tab values represent distance fromthe left edge of the page in the default units (inches or millimeters) of the system.

On the next line of the list generator file, place the variable names whose values areto appear at each tab stop. After each variable name, press the <Tab> key (this willnot be visible in the file, but must be present. Do not enter a tab character before thefirst variable name. After each variable name you must also enter a sufficientnumber of spaces to account for the maximum length of data that will be placed inthe list. If this is not done, information for one variable could overwrite theinformation of the previous variable.

Data block

Sortconstant

Tab values (represent inches or millimeters depending on default units)

!d1 2 1 3 5

Example tab format instruction!d1 2 1 3 5

?install ?page ?pagedescr01

?install ?page ?pagedescr01

Variablenames

Include spaces and atleast one tab betweeneach variable name


14-29

List Generator Variables

This section describes the variables that are used in list files to represent variouspieces of RSWire project data.

Each variable has been assigned a name consisting of an alphanumeric string. Thisvariable is entered in a list file as a question mark (?) followed by the variable name.For example: use ?project to get the name of the current project in a parts list.

Note Under MS–Windows the lists are printed on screen using the OEM_FIXED_SYS –font. This font may be smaller than the standard Windows font. Dimensions of thewindow are set by MS–Windows only: lines and screen output:columns. The numberof lines per page is set by screen output: lines. Correct the number of output linesper page (screen output: lines) by using a list including page filler and list settings:scrolling by page.

Graphic Characters (All Versions) – Some lists contain the extended IBM graphiccharacters for borders. These signs can be transformed to Pipes and Dashes (| and –)by switching off the Graphic Output toggle in the Tools > System Settingsfunction, and the Report Settings tab.


14-30

All Lists


?host Workstation name

?user User name

?date Current date

?inst Current installation

?loc Current location

?page Current project page

?pgno Current list page

?nextpgno Next list page

?ix1 Index 1 (used for item numbers)

?ix.1 Index .1 (used for item numbers)

?ix..1 Index ..1 (used for item numbers)



?path Directory path

?sins Sign: Installation (=)

?sloc Sign: Location (+)

?sdid Sign: Device ID



?addr03etc.

Address file: line 03



14-31

Parts Database Data Variables


?partno Part number

?descr Description

?manufact Manufacturer

?prefgrp PMG

?ordno Catalog #

?price_b List price

?price_s Selling price

?units Units

?discount Discount

?devtype Device type

?date_cr Date created

?date_ch Date changed

?symb_ref Reference symbol

?symb_wir Wiring diagram symbol

?symb_lay Layout symbol

?dbloc On (C)over or (P)anel

?dim_x Dimension[in] X

?dim_y Dimension[in] Y

?dim_z Dimension[in] Z

?weight Weight[lb]

?power Power[VA]

?time1 Assembly Time [min]

?time2 Wiring Time [min]

?tech01 Technical Description 1




?addpart01 Additional Data 1




Note If the database has been customized by the user, the above variable names (keys)may be different.


14-32

Project Lists

All Project–Related Lists


?project Current Project

?prdescr01 Project Description 1


?prdescr03etc.

Project Description 3


?addrfile Address File


?title02etc.

Project title data 02


Project List


?project Project name

?title_blk Page title block

?catalog Symbol catalog (active)

?tablet Tablet overlay file

?devid Device ID (default)

?xgrid x-grid

?ygrid y-grid

?devidsz Device ID text size

?connpntsz Connection point text size

?prpgno Total drawing pages in project

?xrefsz Cross-reference text size

?termsz Terminals text size

?lang1 1st language

?lang2 2nd language

?lang3 3rd language


14-33

Installation List


?inpgno Total drawing pages in installation

?install Installation name

Page List


?ingpno Total drawing pages in installation

?page Page

?install Installation

?location Location

?cont Online control checking (Y/N)

?scale Page scale

?form Page format number

?titblk Title block

?termpl Is page a terminal plan (Y/N)

?crdate Creation date

?crname Creation user



?pgdescr03etc.

Page description 3


?path File path for page


14-34

Page Format List


?format Format

?formno Format number

?descr Description

?xmin Dimension: xmin

?ymin Dimension: ymin

?xmax Dimension: xmax

?ymax Dimension: ymax

?lrmin Line range: min

?lrmax Line range: max

?lrinc Line range: increment

?macro Macro

?lpos1 Line position: 1




Database Lists

Macro List


?path Macro path

?macro Macro name

?descr Macro description

?term Terminal macro symbol

Symbol List


?path Symbol path

?symbol Symbol name

?descr Symbol description

?type Symbol type


14-35

Device Type List


?path Device path

?device Device name

?xrefsym Cross-reference symbol

?xrefdx dx

?xrefdy dy

?parsym Parent symbol

?parcpnt Connection points parent symbol

?descr Device Description

?contact01 Contacts

?contact02 Contacts

?contact03etc

Contacts

?contact16 Contacts

?cpnt01 Connection points of contacts


?cpnt03etc

Connection points of contacts


Device Type List Brief


?path Device path

?device Device name

?descr Device description

Language List


?textno Text number

?crdate Date of creation

?text Text

?lang Language

?pattern Search string


14-36

Wire Lists

Wire List (Connection List)



?location Location

?t1p Internal - page/line number

?t1i Internal - installation

?t1l Internal - location

?t1d Internal - device ID

?t2p External - page/line number

?t2i External - installation

?t2l External - location

?t2d External - device ID

?diffinst * (asterisk) for different instal.

?t1sym Internal - symbol

?t2sym External - symbol

?pot1 Internal - potential string 1 (Wire Number)

?pot2 Internal - potential string 2 (Gauge)

?pot3 Internal - potential string 3 (Color)

?pot4 Internal - potential string 4 (Additional)





Wire Labels


?did01etc

Device ID 1

?did20 Device ID 20


14-37

Programmable Controller List


?descr I/O address description

?devid Device ID

?install Installation where child symbol is located

?location Location of child symbol

?pglnno Page/line number where child symbol is located

?ftext PLC function text

?targ1 1. target after PLC (only child)

?targ2 2. target after PLC (only child)

See also Symbol Attribute Text variables.

Parts Lists

Master Parts List



?location Location

?devid Device ID

?pglnno Page/Line number

?partno1 Part number 1st line

?partno2 Part number 2nd line

?ftext Function text

?instdraw Installation where device ID is drawn

See also Parts Database Data variables.



14-38

Bill of Material



?devid Device ID

?location Location

?pglnno Page.Line number

?partno Part Number

?ftext Function Text



Purchase Order List


?partno Part Number

?quant Quantity

?ins01etc.

Installation 1

?ins20 Installation 20

?loc01etc.

Location 1

?loc20 Location 20

?did01etc.

Device ID 1

?did20 Device ID 20



14-39

Job Costing List


?hour_cost Hourly cost

?mark_up Mark up

?partno Part number

?quant Quantity

?ins01etc.

Installation 1

?ins20 Installation 20

?loc01etc.

Location 1

?loc20 Location 20

?did01etc.

Device ID 1

?did20 Device ID 20



Dimension List



?devid Device ID

?location Location


?partno Part Number

?ftext Function Text




14-40

Symbol Attribute Text

Attribute text entered for symbols can be accessed in the Master Parts list and Bill ofMaterial. These variables correspond to the numbered items in theRS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT file.


?stxt001 Function text

?stxt002 PLC function text

?stxt003 Rack

?stxt004 Module

?stxt005 Combination of attributes

?stxt006 Reserved

?stxt007 Reserved

?stxt008 Wire diagram, CP

?stxt009 Device ID, panel layout, wire diagram symbol

?stxt010 Part number

?stxt011 Reference symbol name

?stxt012 Horsepower

?stxt013 Revolutions per minute

?stxt014 Voltage

?stxt015 VA

?stxt016 Full load current

?stxt017 Frequency

?stxt018 Temperature range

?stxt019 Pressure

?stxt020 Resistance

?stxt021 Velocity

?stxt022 Density

?stxt023 Quantity

?stxt024 Capacitance

?stxt025 Inductance

?stxt026 Seconds

?stxt027 Minutes

?stxt028 Hours

?stxt029 Channel

?stxt030 Manufacturer

?stxt031 Type

?stxt032 - ?stxt041 reserved

?stxt042 - ?stxt120 free for user entries


14-41

Field Wiring Lists

Terminal Strip List



?location Location

?strip Strip

?count Number of terminals

Terminal Connections List


?location Terminal Strip - location

?strip Terminal Strip

?term Terminal

?termtxt Terminal CP Text

?termftxt Terminal Function Text

?termpno Terminal Part no.

?xpos Terminal X Position

?ypos Terminal Y Position

?termt1txt Terminal side t1: CP Text

?termt1cpno Terminal side t1: CP No.

?termt2txt Terminal side t2: CP Text

?termt2cpno Terminal side t2: CP No.

?instdraw Installation of page

?pagedraw Page

?lineno Line no.

?t1_pot1 Wire description 1 (Wire Number)

?t1_pot2 Wire description 2 (Gauge)

?t1_pot3 Wire description 3 (Color)

?t1_pot4 Wire description 4 (Additional)





?t2_pot1 Wire description 1 (Wire Number)


14-42


?t2_pot2 Wire description 2 (Gauge)

?t2_pot3 Wire description 3 (Color)






?jumper Jumper

?t1inst Internal: installation

?t1loc Internal: location

?t1did Internal: device ID

?t1cp Internal: connection point

?t1cptxt Internal: connection point text

?t1cpno Internal: connection point no

?t1sym Internal: symbol

?t1ftxt Internal: function text

?t1cab Internal: cable

?t1cond Internal: conductor

?t2inst External: installation

?t2loc External: location

?t2did External: device id

?t2cp External: connection point

?t2cptxt External: connection point text

?t2cpno External: connection point no

?t2sym External: symbol

?t2ftxt External: function text

?t2cab External: cable

?t2cond External: conductor


14-43

Project Cable List



?location Location

?name Cable name

?wireno Number of wires (database)

?used Number of wires being used

?device Device type

?devtxt1 Device type: description 1



?partno Device: partnumber

?devtype Device: type

?gauge Device: gauge

?t1ins Target1: =installation

?t1loc Target1: +location

?t1did Target1: -device ID

?t1no Target1: terminal No./Conn. Point

?t1txt Target1: terminal text

?t1ftxt Target1: function text







?cabtxt01 Cable text 1



14-44

Field Wire List



?location Location

?name Cable name

?wire Number of wires (database)

?used Number of wires being used

?device Device type




?partno Device: part number

?devtype Device: type

?gauge Device: gauge













?pot1 Wire description 1 (Wire Number)

?pot2 Wire description 2 (Gauge)

?pot3 Wire description 3 (Color)

?pot4 Wire description 4 (Additional)





?cabtxt01etc.

Cable text 1



14-45

Error Checking Lists

Signal List, Unreferenced Signal List


?devid Device ID

?inst Installation

?page Page

?lineno Line number

?xpos X Position

?ypos Y Position

?type Signal type

Device Without Parent List


?device Device

?instdraw Installation of page

?locdraw Location of page

?devi Device ID

?inst Installation

?loca Location



14-46


Alternate Search Paths

15-1

15 Alternate Search Paths

Ordinarily, RSWireTM Designer uses a default directory structure (established duringinstallation) to access the files it needs.

The Alternate Search Path sets a different search path that the system can use tolocate RSWire files. More than one set of directories can be specified in thealternate path, and a search priority is established. This is useful, for example, whenworking with several symbol catalogs (electrical, pneumatic, etc.) in a singleproject, or if every user on a network operates with his or her own symbol or macrolibrary or has otherwise customized RSWire.

When RSWire is used on a network, an alternate search path allows standard files(symbol libraries, etc.) to be shared over the network while customized files locatedat each workstation can be accessed by the local user.

Alternate search paths can be set for dialog boxes, list descriptions (.LST files),catalog libraries (symbols–macros–devices), and configuration files.

You set alternate search paths by editing the ECSCAD.CFG file in the RS\WORKdirectory (default). With a default install to the C drive this file appears as follows.The statements that can accept alternative search paths are shown in bold.

WORK_PATH=C:\RS\PROJECT\PROGRAM_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\?\TMP_PATH=C:\RS\LIST_PATH=C:\RS\SYSCON\LIST\CONFIG_PATH=C:\RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM\TEXT_PATH=C:\RS\DB\PLOT_PATH=C:\RS\PLOT\

It contains a number of path statements telling RSWire where to find various systemfiles. These paths are described below.


15-2

Path Descriptions

WORK_PATH=

This variable points to the directory where RSWire will store all projects. (Cannotuse alternate search path.)

PROGRAM_PATH=

This variable points one directory above where the program is stored. This is thepromis �e program path. (Cannot use alternate search path.)

CATALOG_PATH=

This variable points directly to the directory where RSWire stores all of the varioussymbol catalogs which can be loaded. The question mark at the end allows thesystem to load the symbol catalog defined in the project parameters dialog box.

TMP_PATH=

This variable points one directory above where RSWire stores the temporary files.This is a temporary file path for lists and file imports and exports. This path must bethe same as the program path. Each user must have their own TMP directory.(Cannot use alternate search path.)

LIST_PATH=

This variable points to the directory where the list generator files are stored. Thesefiles determine the format of lists and reports.

CONFIG_PATH=

This variable points directly to the directory where the configuration and settingsfiles for various RSWire functions are located.


15-3

TEXT_PATH=

This variable points to the directory that contains subdirectories for the languagedatabase and the address files. (Cannot use alternate search path.)

PLOT_PATH=

This variable points to the directory where the software files generated by the plotfunctions. (Cannot use alternate search path.)

Alternate Search Paths – You create an alternate search paths by adding additionalpaths to the path statements shown in bold above. This allows the software to searchthrough more than one directory to find the files for which it is searching. The firstpath listed is the first directory to be searched. Added directories are searched in theorder that they appear in the declaration. When files are saved they are alwaysplaced in the primary (first) directory. This occurs even if the file originated inone of the secondary directories.

A question mark wild card may be used in paths. The “?” will be replaced by thecatalog loaded for the project that is active.

Question Mark Variable Example:

CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\?\ H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\

Assume that the catalog for the project is “USER.” When a symbol is selected forplacement the C:\RS\CATALOG\USER directory is searched first. If the file is notfound in the USER directory, the H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ directory is searched. If asymbol from H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ is re–created, it will be read fromH:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ and stored in C:\RS\CATALOG\USER. The original versionof the symbol is left in the H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ directory.

Alternate search paths allow for a great deal of flexibility in a network environment.By making the shared network directory a secondary directory, users cannot modifythe “company standard” symbols, but symbols that they create in the course ofcreating a new project can be stored as needed (in the user’s first directory). Thesesymbols can then be reviewed by the “RSWire administrator” and placed into the“company standard” directory if they are of use to other users. Another applicationof alternate search paths is to allow a catalog of symbols specific to only one projectto be kept in a separate symbol catalog that can be archived with the project.

In a similar way, list formats, dialog boxes, and configurations can be customized byindividual users and saved in the first path, while “standard” files remain unchangedin the secondary directories.


15-4


Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages

A-1

A RSWire Error Messages

This sections lists error messages that are displayed by RSWireTM Designer forvarious conditions.

Error 0: Page not stored.

Remedy: You may not leave this page because an error condition exists which must becorrected. Correct the error condition, or turn off the page error checking function.Use the Tools > Error Checking > Page Error Check function to set or disablepage error checking functions.

Error 1: The file does not exist in the Path as is listed in the Environment VariableLIST_PATH

Remedy: Check file name or add the name to the Environment Variable LIST_PATH

Error 2: The file �list.vz" on the 1st path of the Environment Variable LIST_PATH ismissing.

Remedy: Check the RSWire installation.

Error 3: Project already exists.

Remedy: Select a new project name or delete the existing project.

Error 4: The ASCII-Project file in the 'TMP' directory cannot be opened.

Reason: The file does not exist. No read/write permission on file for user. Incorrect filebeginning (PN<Blank> is expected in the first line)

Error 5: Error in one of the ADS-Function callups.

Remedy: Verify the ADS module of AutoCAD is installed correctly. Reinstall the AutoCADsoftware selecting to install ALL files.

Error 6: No color configuration setup file existing.

Remedy: Check the RSWire installation.

Error 7: Search path or file name incorrect.

Remedy: Enter the correct search path or correct file name.

Error 8: No symbol library active.

Remedy: Read page from a project in which the symbol library is defined.

Error 9: No RSWire Menu found.

Remedy: Verify the installation process and input selections.

Error 10: The address file cannot be read or written to.

Remedy: Verify that the path setting is correct.

Error 11: The configuration file cannot be read or written to.

Remedy: Verify that the path setting is correct. No read/write permission on file for user.

Error 12: The Text function is locked.


A-2

Remedy: Verify that the text function is not being accessed at another location.

Error 13: Hard drive is full.

Remedy: Back up and/or delete files.

Error 14: Error in calling up the ADS-Function.

Remedy: Verify the ADS module of AutoCAD is installed correctly.Reinstall the AutoCAD software selecting to install ALL files.

Error 15: The desired symbol is not in the Library.

Remedy: Verify that correct symbol name is entered.

Error 16: The device already exists in the working Device directory path

Remedy: Use new name.

Error 17: The page already exists.

Remedy: Use new page number.

Error 18: Application presently in use.

Remedy: Close use by other application and try again.

Error 19: The file is write protected.

Remedy: Remove write protection (e.g. DOS command ATTRIB)

Error 20: The Installation name already in use.

Remedy: Use new Installation name.

Error 21: There is not enough RAM memory available.

Remedy: Close any other open applications, or install additional RAM memory.

Error 22: The requested project does not exist.

Remedy: Enter the correct project name.

Error 23: No page active.

Remedy: Select a page using the File > Open Page > Select function.

Error 24: No files exist for plotting.

Remedy: Call up the Plot function again.

Error 25: No Plot list exists.

Remedy: Verify installation of RSWire.

Error 26: Browse copying not possible.

Reason: Incorrect screen viewports used.1. Copied objects can only be placed in view 0 (lower left quadrant).2. The subject and reference point not in the same viewport.3. An attempt was made to place the subject into viewport 1, 2 , or 3.

Error 27: The password file cannot be read.

Remedy: Check password input for correctness, or no password existing.

Error 30: Device ID for symbol exists

Remedy: Use another device ID - verify checking logic.

Error 31: Part number not available.

Remedy: The part is not in the database

Error 32: Wire number already exists.


A-3

Remedy: Enter a different wire number.

Error 33: Device cannot be on-line checked.

Remedy: Please call Hot Line.

Error 34: Page Without Control

Remedy: The current page is offline; no error checking or cross referencing will beperformed. If you need these functions, select the Manage > Page > Modifyfunction and turn on the Online toggle.

Error 35: Wrong part number entered when placing or modifying.

Remedy: Part number already exists in database or the part number input field is empty.

Error 36: Description phrase not found

Remedy: Enter description or change the search criterion.

Error 40: Address description already exists using present PLC control switchsettings

Remedy: See Tools> Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function.

Error 41: Module description already exists using present PLC control switch settings

Remedy: See Tools> Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function.

Error 42: A temporary file cannot be created

Remedy: Verify the path or the user rights to the file.

Error 43: The selected list generator file is formatted incorrectly.

Reason: It does not begin with the control sequence identifier !lh

Error 44: The requested data block is missing in the list generator file

Remedy: Check the list generator file and correct the situation

Error 45: The requested file cannot be opened (read)

Remedy: Verify the path or the user rights to the file

Error 46: The requested file cannot be saved

Remedy: Remove the write protection or the path is not available

Error 47: The requested sort format is incorrect

Error 48: Warning: Device does not exist in device list or device data.

Error 49: Description data does not match with device.

Remedy: The selected device does not match the part device.

Error 50: Data format incorrect. The function is expecting a different format.

Error 51: Selected text font is not available. The �STANDARD" text font will be used.

Error 52: The revision number of the data to be read in does not match.

Error 53: Symbol does not exist.

Remedy: Verify existence of desired symbol.

Error 54: Font configuration file in config file - does not exist

Error 55: Child symbols are missing in the device type definition in order to place thePLC function text


A-4

Error 56: After reading in ACAD file (DXF or DWG), blocks must be exploded in forRSWire to recognize and take over the graphical elements.

Remedy: Execute the EXPLODE command multiple times until no additional blocks exist.

Error 57: An attempt was made to attach a wire number to a wire that has one existingthrough a signal cross reference symbol at another location

Error 58: SQL cannot be initialized when ASE was initialized, an error resulted.

Reason: ASE (AutoCAD SQL extension) was not installed completely or correctly.

Error 59: SQL driver cannot be initialized. The error message contains ? text from theASE environment.

Error 60: Logging into the database is not possible. The error message contains ?text from the ASE environment.

Error 61: Error in accessing the database. The error message contains ? text from theASE environment.

Error 62: An attempt was made to change a wire number to a wire that also exists atanother location through a signal cross reference symbol.

Suggestion: After selecting OK, other wire parameters such as text size and position can bechanged. If you must change the number itself, use the Edit > Wire/Line >Change Number function.

Error 63: Text with question mark.

Error 64: Device ID with question mark.

Error 65: Connection point text with question mark.

Error 66: Symbol text with question mark.

Error 67: Wire number with question mark.

Error 68: Connection between terminals.

Error 69: The symbol is not connected.

Error 70: Wire is not connected.

Error 71: Page offline.

Error 72: Logical line (wire) without a connection.

Error 73: The entered wire description does not exist in the cable definition (devicetype).

Suggestion: Allow the wire name choices to be prompted and select the next available wire.

Error 74: Wire number already assigned.

Suggestion: Allow the wire number choices to be prompted and select the next available wire.

Error 75: Cable not yet placed. This is why no cable listing can be made and the nextavailable wire cannot be found.

Error 76: Error in EED Structure. EED structure not set correctly in DWG file.

Error 77: Line number positions and the line numbers actually used in a page do notmatch.

Suggestion: Set the Digits in Line Numbers value correctly in the Tools > Project Settings >General Defaults function. You may need to be manually correct the device IDs.

Error 78: Page format not found, system will refer to default page format number 0.


A-5

Error 79: Wire number not found.You have entered a wire number that does not exist in the current project.

Error 80: Catalog cannot be imported into the first search catalog.First string in CATALOG_PATH has no question mark in the config file.

Suggestion: Add a question mark to CATALOG_PATH in the config file.

Error 81: Symbol definition cannot be activated.Symbol already on page.

Suggestion: Delete all symbols on page or activate �new page".

Error 82: Clip jumper not possible.Number of terminal blocks connected by a clip jumper exceeds the predefinedmaximum.

Suggestion: Change Target Modify selection in the Terminal Plan Editor dialog box from ClipJumper to Wire Connection.

Error 83: Terminal jumper is neutral.No Internal/External/Jumper defined for the terminal block center point.

Suggestion: Check the Internal/External/Jumper toggle in the Tools> Project Settings > Con�figuration Terminal and Plug IDs function. Change target in Terminal ConnectionPoint Definition dialog box .

Error 84: Short circuit found.Two lines with different wire numbers are connected.

Suggestion: Delete one of the wires to remove one of the wire numbers.

Error 85: Page should be reorganized.RSWire page was modified with AutoCAD.

Suggestion: Reorganize the page by selecting OK in the Error dialog box.

Error 86: Wire couldn't be connected.No Internal/External target available.

Suggestion: Delete Internal/External wire. Check the Internal/External/Jumper toggle in theTools> Project Settings > Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs function.Change target in Terminal Connection Point Definition dialog box .

Error 87: Open drawing limit exceeded.

Suggestion: Restart your computer.

Error 88: Error in ODBC: text from ODBC driver.ODBC exception caught ODBC runtime system or driver couldn't execute function.

Error 89: Error in ODBC: can't update/append current record.File system write protection or ODBC driver does not support changes.


A-6


Appendix B – RSWire Files

B-1

B RSWire Files

This sections lists the directories and files included when RSWireTM Designer isinstalled.

The default setup of files and subdirectories under the RS\ directory is as follows:

RS\

BMP Directory of bitmap files for toolbar buttons (not available in Standalone)

CATALOG Symbol, device, and macro catalog directories

DB Text database, custom data files (i.e. address files, and logos)

DBS Parts database directory

FONTS Additional fonts directory (not available in Standalone)

MENU Directory containing menu, dialog, and help files

PLOT Directory containing plot scripts for RSWire

PROGRAM Directory containing EXE files

PROJECT Project directory and DWG files

SYSCON System configuration files, and list generator files

TMP Temporary file directory

USER User customized files

WORK Default DWG file for the startup of RSWire. Also configuration files forprinter and alternate search paths

The following pages list the subdirectories and major files included in eachdirectory.


B-2

BMP

The BMP directory contains bitmap files used for toolbar function buttons.

CATALOG

Sub Directories:

JIC (or IEC or other symbol catalog)

Sub Directories:

BLOCK Symbol files

DEVICE Device type files, Cable device type files

MACRO Macro files

WMF WMF format files for symbol select icon groups

DB

Sub Directories:

CUSTOM Address files.

RSI Rockwell Software address file

LG Text database.

TDB.MDB Text Access file (only if converted to MS Access)

LOGOS Title block logo information.


B-3

DBS

Sub Directories:

DB Parts database files

ARTICLE.MDB Article parts database file

FONTS

Additional font files (.SHX)

MENU

Sub Directories:

DIALOG Dialog prompts and help files: All files can be renamed through configuration settings.

ATT_ENG.TXT Symbol attribute file (English)

DCL_ENG.TXT Symbol attribute file (English)

DIA_ENG.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (English)

ATT_FRA.TXT Symbol attribute file (French)

DCL_FRA.TXT Symbol attribute file (French)

DIA_FRA.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (French)

ATT_GER.TXT Symbol attribute file (German)

DCL_GER.TXT Symbol attribute file (German)

DIA_GER.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes the Command Line (German)

ATT_ITA.TXT Symbol attribute file (Italian)

DCL_ITA.TXT Symbol attribute file (Italian)

DIA_ITA.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (Italian)

ATT_SPA.TXT Symbol attribute file (Spanish)

DCL_SPA.TXT Symbol attribute file (Spanish)

DIA_SPA.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (Spanish)

RSWIRE.HLP RSWire help file

RSWIRE.CNT RSWire help table of contents file


B-4

MNU Menu files and command files.

ACAD.MLN AutoCAD multiline definition files (not available in Standalone)

ACAD.MNC Compiled AutoCAD menu supplied with RSWire

ACAD.MNS Source file for AutoCAD menu supplied with RSWire

ACAD.PGP AutoCAD program parameters file (short cut commands) supplied withRSWire add-on

ECSCAD.LIN AutoCAD line type definition file for RSWire

ECSCAD.MNL RSWire command file, all program commands

ECSCAD.MNC Compiled application menu for RSWire

ECSCAD.MNR Resource file for application menu for RSWire

ECSCAD.MNS Source file for application menu for RSWire

ECS_ENG.MNS Source file for application menu (English source)

ECS_FRA.MNS Source file for application menu (French source)

ECS_GER.MNS Source file for application menu (German source)

RSWi.PGP Parameters file (short cut commands) supplied with RSWire standalone

PLOT Plot spool directory.

Directory where “Plotting to File” files are stored.


B-5

PROGRAM Directory where all linking library and executable files are located for the RSWiresoftware.

ECSCAD.ARX RSWire executable

ECSAPI.DLL Combined linking library (Version 4.1 and later)

ECSDRSET.DLL Drawing set linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSDRSET.TLB Drawing set linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSEVALUATION.DLL Evaluation linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSFIELD.DLL Field linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSMACRO.DLL Macro linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSPAGE.DLL Page linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSPROJECT.DLL Project linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSSYMBOL.DLL Symbol linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECS TEXT.DLL Text linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSWIRE.DLL Wire linking library (Version 4.0 only)

ECSWIRENO.DLL Wire number linking library (Version 4.0 only)

WKSVMON.EXE Wibu key server monitor executable

WKSVW32.EXE Wibu key license manager executable

RSW.HLP RSWire help file (Standalone Version 4.0 only)

RSWi.HLP RSWire help file (Standalone Version 4.1only)

SYSTEM Directory where system linking library and executable files arelocated.

DAO350.DLL linking library (Version 4.1 and later)

DDAO35.DLL linking library

DDAO36.DLL linking library (Version 4.1 and later)

DUNZIP32.DLL linking library

DZIP32.DLL linking library

MSORCL10.CNT linking library

MSORCL10.DLL linking library

MSORCL10.HLP linking library

MSRDC20.OCX linking library

ODBCINT.DLL linking library

RDOCURS.DLL linking library


B-6

PROJECT Directory for the user’s projects.

Sub Directory:

WORK Under WORK a subdirectory is created for each project. The NAMES.EC2 file identifies the contents of each subdirectory.

SYSCON System configuration directory

Sub Directories:

LIST List generator files

(The LIST.VZ file contains all the names of the list generator files being usedfor a given session of RSWire. These file names are assigned through the Tools> System Settings > Reports: Description Files function.)

CABLE.LST

CSCABLE.LST

CSDEVIC1.LST

CSDEVIC2.LST

CSDEVWP.LST

CSDIM.LST

CSFLDWIR.LST

CSFORMAT.LST

CSINST.LST

CSJOB.LST

CSMACRO.LST

CSMASTER.LST

CSMASTER1.LST

CSP_O.LST

CSPAGE1.LST

CSPAGE2.LST

CSPARTS.LST

CSPLC.LST

CSPROJE1.LST

CSPROJE2.LST

CSSIGNAL.LST

CSSYMBOL.LST

CSTERM.LST

CSTSTRIP.LST

CSWIRE.LST

CSWIRELA.LST

DB1.LST

DB2.LST

DEFAULT.MDB

DEVICE1.LST

DEVICE2.LST

DEVWP.LST

DIM.LST

FLDWIRE.LST

FORMAT.LST

INST.LST

JOB.LST

LIST.VZ

MACRO.LST

MASTER.LST

P_O.LST

PAGE1.LST

PAGE2.LST

PAGE3.LST

PAGE4.LST

PARTS.LST

PLC.LST

PROJECT1.LST

PROJECT2.LST

SIGNAL.LST

SYMBOL.LST

TERM.LST

TEXT1.LST

TEXT2.LST

TSTRIP.LST

USER.MDB

WIRE.LST

WIRELAB.LST


B-7

SYSTEM System configuration files

BACKUP.CFG Backup/Restore function path settings

BANGLE.CFG Symbol angle settings configuration file

BSCALE.CFG Symbol scale settings configuration file

COLOR.CFG Color mapping configuration file

CONNLIST.CFG Default setting for �Create Connection List When Saving Page"

CP.CFG Command protection configuration file

DEVSTY.CFG Device ID style configuration file

DID.CFG Terminal settings configuration file

DLG_TABS.CFG Project Settings and System Settings tabs

DWG.CFG Drawing format configuration file

DWGCTL.CFG Page control settings configuration file

GENERAL.CFG General default settings configuration file

GRID.CFG Grid settings configuration file

HW.CFG Report settings configuration file

LAYER.CFG Layer names

LNG.CFG Language settings configuration file

MANGLE.CFG Macro angle settings configuration file

MARK.CFG Marking settings configuration file

MSCALE.CFG Macro scale settings configuration file

NAVIGA.CFG Navigation scale settings configuration file

PLC.CFG PLC symbol settings configuration file

PPLAN.CFG Pin-Plug plan configuration file

PRESET.CFG Sets LT scale (dash line size)

PRT.CFG Printer settings configuration file

PT.CFG Terminal/Pin-Plug default configuration filenames

SAVEAS.CFG Save settings configuration file

SODDEF.CFG Project definition default configuration file

SODSETT.CFG Project parameters settings configuration file

SSETUP.CFG Device ID delimiter configuration file

STYLE.CFG Font style configuration file

TANGLE.CFG Text angle settings configuration file

TERM.CFG Terminal settings configuration file

THEIGHT.CFG Text height settings configuration file

TLORG.CFG Text label origin settings configuration file

TPLAN.CFG Terminal plan configuration file

TPMAC.CFG Terminal plan macro configuration file

TRATIO.CFG Text ratio settings configuration file


B-8

TSLANT.CFG Text slant settings configuration file

TSTYLE.CFG Text font style settings configuration file

TXTOD.CFG Text on drawing settings configuration file

UNDEF.CFG AutoCAD undefined commands configuration file

VERSION.CFG Indicates default to DWG or non-DWG drawing format

WIRE.CFG Automatic wire numbering configuration

WIRE1.CFG Manual wire numbering configuration

TMP Temporary swap files (delivered empty)

USER Backup of files that the user may have customized. Directory is automatically created when an update install is performed.

DOCUMENT.MDB

WORK Default DWG files used on start–up of program.

ACAD14.CFG AutoCAD R14 configuration

ACAD2000.CFG AutoCAD 2000 configuration

ADD_CU.BAK Backup of registry files

ADD_CU.REG Registry files (modified at install)

ECS.DVB Default VBA project

ECS_$$$.DWG Temporary files

ECS_CAD.MSG Message file

RSWIRETAB.DWG Tablet overlay drawing (JIC symbols)

PASSWD.TXT RSWire password file

PRINTER.BAT Printer batch file

RSWire.ARG Registry data

RSWire.DWG Default drawing file

RSWire.ICO RSWire icon file

SAMPLE.DVB Sample VBA project

TYPELIB.BAK Backup to registry

TYPELIB.REG Registry files (modified at install)

UI.MDB User interface database file

Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups

C-1

C Creating Symbol Icon Groups

This sections describes how to make custom graphical symbol selection groups foruse with the Insert > Select Icon function.

Selection groups are provided for the symbol catalog that is included with thesoftware. However the user may wish to create new groups to arrange commonlyused symbols in one group or to allow selection of new symbols that the user hascreated. Macros can also be selected from these groups.


C-2

Each new selection group is drawn in RSWireTM on a drawing page. The page isthen converted to the WMF (Windows Metafile) format. This WMF file is stored ina WMF subdirectory under the symbol catalog directory selected for the currentproject (example: \RS\CATALOG\JIC\WMF).

Icon Group Creation Procedure:

Note You must use a white drawing background when creating icon groups in order forthe icons to work properly.

1. In RSWire, create a blank drawing page. This page can be online or offline.Most of the groups provided with the software were created using the B–1COLpage format although this format is not required. Use a separate page for eachgroup you create.

When creating the page, select the page parameter 1 button and enter the namethat you wish the group to have as page parameter number 1. The groupsprovided with the software follow a group naming format where the first threeletters are the symbol catalog name (example: JIC_Relay1). Although thisformat is not mandatory it helps organize the groups if you have multiplesymbol catalogs

2. On the new page, draw a box to define the total area for the new symbol group.This box can be any size; it will be scaled to fit in the Select Icon dialog box.(Most of the groups provided with the software were drawn in a box 3 incheshigh by 8 inches wide – 7.6 x 20.3 cm). Do not use the logical box drawingfunction.


C-3

3. Inside the box draw smaller boxes. Each smaller box defines the pick area forone symbol. These boxes can touch (share sides) as shown in the followingfigure, but the reference points for two boxes must not occupy the samepoint. Allow a margin of at lease 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) between the smaller boxesand the edge of the larger box.

4. Inside each small box, place the desired symbol using the Insert > Symbol byName function. All parts of the symbol (reference point, connection points,text) must fit inside the box to ensure proper operation.

PB125

LS128

CB125

If the symbol is too large to be conveniently shown in a box you can insteadplace a text string in the format S=SYMBOLNAME. For example, place thestring S=1771–IAD in the selection box for the symbol 1771–IAD.

Note If you wish to select a macro, place the desired macro in the box. For macros, thebox must also contain a text string in the format M=MACRONAME. For example,place the string M=MOT1 in the selection box for the macro MOT1.


C-4

5. Modify the symbol to the appearance you wish it to have in the selection box.For example, you might wish to remove the device ID or function text by usingthe Modify > Symbol function. You must turn off displayed symbol referenceand connection points (use the Tools > System Settings > Display Settingsfunction).

6. Add any other elements you wish to appear in the selection window such as textor borders. The symbol groups included with the software have text giving thesymbol name and symbol group (PS1, etc.) in each selection box. Place nothingoutside the large box drawn in step 2.

PBNO

LSNO

CB3M

G

G

G

7. Save the drawing page (File > Save).

8. Select the Tools > Create Icon function (or enter the commandCREATE_WMF on the command line).

9. You will be prompted to select objects. Select the large box and everythinginside it. Press <Enter>. The WMF file will be created. It will be stored in theWMF directory for the symbol catalog that you have selected for the currentproject.


C-5

10. To verify that the new selection group exists, select the Insert > Select Iconfunction. If the group name does not appear in the list, select the Edit > Refreshfunction from the menu inside the Select Icon dialog box.

The WMF files are stored in the WMF subdirectory for the symbol library that wasselected in the New Project dialog box for the project in which the symbol groupdrawings were created (example: \RS\CATALOG\JIC\WMF).

If you wish to move or copy WMF files from one symbol library to another, you cancopy the WMF files to the appropriate directory. However, you must then edit theWMFLIST.INI file to add or delete the names of the symbol groups (see followingparagraph).

If you wish to change the names of existing groups you can edit the WMFLIST.INIfile located in the appropriate WMF directory. The group names are listed as folders(example: FOLDER=JIC_Motor). Be careful not to alter any other information inthis file.

It is a good idea to keep the original drawing page after the WMF is created in caseyou wish to modify the symbol group in the future. You can add or delete items onthe original page and then run the CREATE_WMF function again. You shoulddelete the existing WMF file before running the Tools > Create Icon function,otherwise you will have two selection groups with the same name. The name of therelevant WMF file is shown in the WMFLIST.INI file two lines above the group(folder) name.


C-6


Index

I–1

Index

A

ACAD.PGP File, 1-6

AccessDatabase Files, 13-2Full Version, 13-19Run–Time Version, 13-19

Active Input File, 7-38

Address File, 3-6Edit, Select, 7-17

Aerial View, 4-33

Aliases, 1-6

Alternate Search Path, 15-1

Angle, Dialog Box, 5-35

Angular, Function, 5-84

Arc, 5-56Filled Arc, 5-56

Article, Form, 10-11, 13-19

Assign Part Number, Dialog Box, 5-81, 5-118

AttributesList of, 6-15Text, 5-16, 6-14, 14-40User Created File, 5-117Visible/Hidden, 6-15

Automatic, Function, 5-66

Automatic Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-66

B

BackupDevice Type, 3-21Macro, 3-21Projects, 3-21Selected Symbols, Macros, Device Types, 3-23

Symbol Catalogs, 3-21

Backup/Restore, Function, 3-21, 6-5

Bill Of MaterialsDialog Box, 9-23Function, 9-23

Blank Drawing Pages, 7-35

Block, 6-21, 6-82

Box, 5-47Drawing, 5-49Function, 5-47Logical, 5-47Settings, 5-50

Box: Connection Point Parameters, Dialog Box,5-48

Break, 4-16

Browse Copy, 4-35

C

Cable, 12-1Assign, 11-18Assign in Schematic, 12-2Conductor Designations, 5-98Cross Reference Symbol, 12-14Delete, 11-19Device Type, 12-11Hidden Symbol, 7-16List, 9-18, 12-21Multiple Assignment Check, 7-28Part Number, 12-12Symbol Create, 12-8Terminal Editor, 11-18, 12-7Text, 5-100Wire Numbering, 5-72

Cable Text, Dialog Box, 12-4

Character Sets, 7-10

Index

I–2

Character Size, 3-10

Characters, Reserved, 4-12, 5-15, 5-54

Child Symbol, 5-18, 5-25, 6-28, 6-34

Circle, 5-562 Points, 5-563 Points, 5-56Filled Circle, 5-56Tan Tan Radius, 5-56

Clear Page, 4-17

Clip Jumper, 11-16Remove, 11-17

Close Page. See Quit Page

Color, Wire, 5-101

Comma Separated, List, 14-5

Load Editor, Function, 1-5

Command Dispatch, 4-34

Command Protection, 7-11

CommandsAliases (Shortcuts), 1-6List of, 4-34

Comparison Check, Panel Layout With Schematic,10-8

Compile Connections, 9-10

Compile Parts File, Function, 9-21

Configure, Lists, 14-1

Connection List, 9-10Delete, 9-12Dialog Box, 9-10With Page Save, 7-25

Connection List Parameters, Dialog Box, 9-13

Connection Point, 6-3, 6-11Designations, 5-18Display, 7-16Function, 5-47Modify, 5-98Text, 6-3, 6-11, 6-36, 6-91, 7-23

Connection Points, Dialog Box, 5-17

Connection Search Priorities, 9-15, 11-4

Connections, 9-16Search Priorities, 9-15Reports, 9-10

Connections Point, Dialog Box, 12-3

Contacts, Form C, 6-72

Continuous Wire, 5-8

Copy, 5-105Device Type, 6-95From Page to Page, 4-35Function, 3-16, 4-20, 4-40Installation, 4-40Macro, 6-95Page, 4-20Project, 3-16Symbol, 6-95Wire Numbers, 4-22, 4-41

Copy Installation, Dialog Box, 4-40

Copy Project, Dialog Box, 3-16

Copy To Clipboard, Function, 5-93

CreateDevice Type, 6-89Field, 5-52Function, 5-47Icon

Macro, C-3Symbol, C-2

Language, 5-45Macro, 6-81Page, 4-11Project, 3-5Symbol, 6-6

Cross ReferenceCable, 12-14Device Definition, 6-34Distance from Device ID, 7-21JIC or IEC, 7-21Position, 7-21Signal

IEC, 5-65JIC, 5-58

Index

I–3

Suppress, 5-100, 7-25Symbol, 6-31Toggle, 5-100with Child Symbol, 6-27, 6-30, 6-54, 6-60, 7-25Zone, 7-22, 7-36

Cross Reference Point , Function, 6-16

Current Pages, Function, 8-2

Custom Symbol, Stored, 6-17

Cut, 5-93

Cut & Paste, 4-35

D

Dashed Lines, 5-102

Data Source Name, 3-10

DatabaseAccessing, 13-18Add New Record, 13-23Adding Fields, 13-34Delete Record, 13-24Field Sizes, 13-32Manipulation, 13-29Parts, 5-79, 13-1

Edit Form Function, 13-19Edit Table Function, 13-28

Print, 13-39Restructure, 13-36Table View, 13-28

Database DataDialog Box, 13-37Record, 13-19

Date, General Default, 7-21

DDINSERT, Command, 6-21

DefaultDevice ID Format, 3-9Font, 7-49

Default Settings, 7-4

Define Names, Dialog Box, 8-31

Definition of Text Attributes, Dialog Box, 10-9

Delete, 5-104Device Type, 6-93Function, 3-14, 4-18, 5-77, 5-120Installation, 4-39Macro, 6-93Page, 4-18Project, 3-14Symbol, 6-93Wire Number, 5-77, 5-120

Delete Connection Point, Function, 5-47

Delete Language, Function, 5-46

Delete Page(s), Dialog Box, 4-18

Delete Unused Text, 7-38

Delete Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-77, 5-120

Device. See Device Type

Device and Default Selection, Dialog Box, 8-6

Device ID, 6-2, 6-91, 2, or 3 Lines, 7-43Angle, 5-101Color, 5-100, 6-10Display with Installation, Location, 7-44Duplicate, 5-15, 5-30, 5-32, 5-55Find/Replace, 5-114Height, 5-101, 6-10Label Origin, 5-101, 6-10Macro, 5-30Modify, 5-97Nested, 7-44Prompt, 7-23Renumber, 5-110Replace, 5-110Repositioning, 5-99Reserved Characters, 5-15Search, 5-20Suppress, 5-15Symbol, 5-14Tag, 6-2

Device ID Assignment, Dialog Box, 5-14

Device ID Sign (–), 5-24

Index

I–4

Device Type, 5-17, 5-25, 13-21Backup, 3-21Cable, 12-11Copy, 6-95Create, 6-89Definition, 6-34Delete, 6-93Dialog Box, 5-17, 12-3List, 9-6Modify, 5-97, 6-99Rename, 6-96Without Parent, 9-30

Device Type Brief, Report, 9-7

Device Type Full, Report, 9-6

Diagonal Wire Connection, 7-24, 9-16

Dialog Boxes, Customize, 2-13

Dialog Language, 7-4

Digitizer, 1-7

Dimension List, Function, 9-27

DimensionsAlign Text, 5-85Alternate Units, 7-60Angular, 5-84, 5-87Annotation, 7-58Drawing, 5-83Family, 7-54Format, 7-57Geometry, 7-54Leader, 5-84, 5-87Linear, 5-84, 5-85Ordinate, 5-84, 5-86Radial, 5-84Radius, 5-86Settings, 7-52Style, 7-54Tolerance, 5-84

Directory, RSWire Directories, 1-2

Disable Settings, 5-33

Display Only Attribute Text, 5-16

Display Settings, 7-15

DrawArc, 5-56Box, 5-47

Empty, 5-49Filled, 5-49

Circle, 5-56Dimensions, 5-83Field, 5-52Line, 5-10

Polyline, 5-10Single, 5-10

Logical Box, 5-47Connection Point, 5-47Create, 5-47Delete Connection Point, 5-47

Macro, 5-27Symbol, 5-11Text, 5-31Undo, 5-92Wire, 5-3

3 Phase, 5-690 Degree Down, 5-990 Degree Up, 5-9Continuous, 5-8Repeat Last, 5-8Single, 5-4

Wire Number, 5-72Automatic, 5-66Manual, 5-72

Wire/Line, 5-3

Drawing Box, 5-49

Drawing Entity List, 5-132

Duplicate Device ID, 5-15, 5-30

DW Symbol, 9-16

DWF Files, Plot to, 8-22

DWG File, 4-3, 4-9, 6-82Plot To, 8-23Symbol Import, 6-21

DWT File, 4-9

DXF File, 4-9Plot to, 8-24

Index

I–5

DXF Import, Function, 6-22

E

EditCopy To Clipboard, 5-93Cut , 5-93I/O Device ID, 5-121Part Number

Multiple, 5-119Single, 5-118

Replace Symbol, 5-108Text

Find/Replace, 5-114Modify, 5-103

Wire NumberDelete, 5-77, 5-120Modify, 5-104

Edit Menu, 5-92

Edit Phrases, Function, 5-44

Edit Symbol, Dialog Box, 5-97

Edit Wire/Line Type, Dialog Box, 5-101

Enable Settings, 5-33

Entity List, 5-132

Error Checking, List, 9-30

Exchange Title Block Text, Dialog Box, 4-25

Exit, Without Saving, 1-4

Explode Function, 6-21, 6-82

F

FieldDelete, 5-55Draw, 5-52Function, 5-52Mixed device IDs in, 5-54Modify, 5-103Rules, 5-52

Field Parameters, Dialog Box, 5-53

Field Wire, Report, 9-18

Field Wire List, 12-21

FileBackup/Restore, 6-5New Page, 4-11New Project, 3-5Open Page

Previous, 4-7Refresh, 4-6Select, 4-4

PlotCurrent Pages, 8-2Multiple Pages, 8-2Preview, 8-2, 8-3

Break, 4-16Save, 4-8Save As, 4-9

File Locking, 3-13

Files, B-1

Filled Circle, Function, 5-56

Filter, 7-6Dialog Box, 14-27Lists, 14-23

Find/Replace, Function, 5-114

Find/Replace Text, 5-114

FontDefault, 7-49Selecting, 5-39

Foreign Languages. See Language Text

Form C Contacts, 6-72

FormatColor, 5-101Layers, 5-123Linetype, 5-101, 5-122Multiline Styles, 6-100Page, 4-12Text Style, 5-39

Formats Available For All Projects, Function, 7-36

Function, DXF Import, 6-22

Index

I–6

Function Text, 5-32, 6-14

Functionality, 2-2

G

General Defaults, Settings, 7-19

Generate Graphical Plans, Function, 11-30

Graphical Terminal PlanSee also Terminal PlanConfiguration, 11-24Create, 11-30

Grid, 3-10Draw/Hide, 7-23

Grid Settings, 7-2

Group, Device ID, 3-9

H

Height, Dialog Box, 5-34

Help Screens, 2-11

Hidden Symbol, Display, 7-16

Hourly Cost, 9-25

I

I/O Device ID, Function, 5-121

Icon, CreateUsing Macro, C-3Using Symbol, C-2

IEC, Connection Search, 9-16

Import, Text File, 5-88

Insert, Symbol/Macro From Icon, 5-27

Insert Spare Terminals, Dialog Box, 11-13

InstallationCopy, 4-40

Definition of, 3-2Delete, 4-39Device ID Format, 7-43NO_INST, 3-4Rename, 4-42

Installation (of Software), 1-2

Installation and Location, 3-2

Installation Guide, 1-1

Installation List, 9-4

Installations, Function, 9-4

Internal/External Connections, 7-41Definition, 11-3Display Format, 11-27

J

Job Costing, Function, 9-25

Job Costing List, 9-25Dialog Box, 9-25

Job Number, 3-6

Jumper, 11-3Clip, 7-42, 11-16Wire, 11-17

L

Label Origin, 5-38, 5-101

Label Origin Text Justification, Dialog Box, 5-38

LadderLine Number, 7-21Two Line, 7-33

Ladder Line NumberX Direction, 7-33Y Direction, 7-33

Ladder Macro, 7-33, 7-35

Language, Of Dialogs, Menus, etc., 7-4

Index

I–7

Language Text, 3-9, 5-41Create, 5-44Font, 5-45Replace, 9-22Report, 9-7Search, 5-32

Language Text Database, Dialog Box, 9-7

Layer Control, Dialog Box, 5-123

Layer Printing Control, Dialog Box, 8-26

LayersFunction, 5-123Plotting, 8-26

Layout Function, 10-3

Leader, Function, 5-84

Leader Lines, 5-87

Line, 5-3Adjusting Length, 5-5Change Type, 5-101Draw, 5-10Edit, 5-101Logical, 5-3Numbers, 7-31Stretch, 5-107

Line Numbers, 7-21, 7-31Columns, 7-35With Page No., 7-24

Linear, Function, 5-84

Linetype, 5-101Properties, 5-122

List, Comma Separated, 14-5

List FileArithmetic, 14-17Assigning, 14-3Data Formatting, 14-15Rules, 14-9Sort Function, 14-11Strings, 14-22Structure, 14-6Using Variables, 14-14

List Generator, 14-1Assigning Files, 14-3File Structure, 14-6Filenames, 14-4Path to, 15-2Variables, 14-29

List Generator Settings, Function, 7-5

List Object Function, 5-132

Lists, 9-1Bill Of Materials, 9-23Cable, 9-18Comma Separated, 9-29Connection, 9-10Customizing, 14-1Device Type, 9-6Device Without Parent, 9-30Dimension, 9-27Field Wire, 9-18File Assignment, 14-3File Structure, 14-6Filtering, 7-6, 14-23Foreign Text, 9-7Graphics, 7-6, 7-8Installation, 9-4Job Costing, 9-25Macro, 9-6Master Parts, 9-22On Drawing, 5-88Open Connections, 9-11, 9-12Output, 7-6, 7-8Page, 9-4Page Format, 9-9Parts Dimension. See Lists, DimensionPLC, 9-20Printing, 7-6, 9-3Project, 9-4Error Checking, 9-30Purchase Order, 9-24Signals, 9-18Sort Function, 14-11Sorting, 7-6Symbol, 9-6Terminal Connections, 9-19

Index

I–8

Terminal Strip, 9-19Variables, 14-29Wire, 9-10

Load Project, Function, 1-5

LocationDevice ID Format, 7-43NO_LOC, 3-4

Lock Project, 3-13

LogicalBox, 5-47Line (Wire), 5-3Online Control, 4-14

Logical BoxFunction, 5-47Nested Symbols, 5-49

Logo file, 7-18

M

MacroBackup, 3-21Copy, 6-95Create, 6-81Delete, 6-93Device IDs, 5-30Edit, 6-97Ladder, 7-33, 7-35List, 9-6Modify, 6-97Page, 4-14Placing, 5-29Rename, 6-96Report, 9-6Select, 5-27Settings, 7-48Terminal Plan, 11-20Title Block, 6-83Wire Numbers, 5-30, 6-83

Macro by Name, Function, 5-27

Macro Settings, 5-29

Maintenance Agreement, 1-1

ManageInstallation

Copy, 4-40Rename, 4-42

PageCopy, 4-20Delete, 4-18Modify, 4-23Move, 4-30Page Variables, 4-25

Page , Rename, 4-28Project

Copy, 3-16Delete, 3-14Modify, 3-17Page Count, 4-49Rename, 3-19

Manual, 2-3Conventions, 2-4Function, 5-72Organization, 2-3

Master List, 9-22Report, 9-22

Master Parts List, Dialog Box, 9-21

Menu, 2-4Functions, 2-4

Menus, 2-6

Mirroring, 5-24

ModifyConnection Point, 5-98Device Type, 5-97, 6-99Field, 5-103Function, 3-17, 4-23Line, 5-101Macro, 6-97Move, 5-106Page, 4-23Project Parameters, 3-17Properties, 5-107Stretch, 5-107Symbol, 5-96, 6-97Symbol Text, 5-95, 5-99, 5-115

Index

I–9

Terminal Destination, 5-99Text, 5-103Wire, 5-101

Modify Device Type, Dialog Box, 5-98

Modify Groups, Dialog Box, 8-27

Modify Page, Dialog Box, 4-23

Modify Project, Dialog Box, 3-17

MoveFunction, 4-30, 5-106Page, 4-30Symbol, 3-10

Move Page(s), Dialog Box, 4-30

MS Access, Reports, 9-28

MS–Access, Database Files, 13-2

Multi–language Text, 5-41

Multi–Line Text, Replace, 9-22

Multi–Page View, 4-35

Multiline Styles, 6-100

Multiple Pages, Function, 8-2

Multiple Placement, of Cable Conductors, 12-2

N

NavigatorFunction, 4-43Zoom Setting, 7-13

Navigator Function, 4-43

Nested Device ID, 7-44

Nested Symbols, in Logical Box, 5-49

New Language, Function, 5-45

New Page, 4-11Dialog Box, 5-91Function, 4-11

New Project, Dialog Box, 3-5

Next Page Function, 4-7

90 Degree Down, Function, 5-9

90 Degree Up, Function, 5-9

O

Oldb.mdb File, 3-25

Online, Set Page Online, 4-23

Online Function, 4-14, 5-16

Online function, Change, 4-23

Open Connections, List, 9-11, 9-12

Options for RSWire, 2-14

Ordinate, Function, 5-84

Overview, 2-1

P

PageBreak, 4-16Browse, 5-79Browse Copy, 4-35Close (without save), 4-16Copy, 4-20Count, 3-26Create, 4-11Delete, 4-18Displaying, 4-4DWG File, 4-3, 4-9EC1 File, 4-3Erase. See Page – Clear PageError Checking, 7-27Filenames, 4-3Format, 4-12Macro, 4-14Management, 4-1Modify, 4-23Move, 4-30Name Field, 4-6Clear Page, 4-17Next Page, 4-7

Index

I–10

Page Count, 4-49Parameters, 4-25Open, 4-4Refresh, 4-6Rename, 4-28Save, 4-8, 7-24Save As, 4-9Save Automatic, 4-8Scale, 4-14Storage, 4-3Variables, 4-25View, 4-32Without Control, 7-28, A-3

Page – Parameter 2, Dialog Box, 4-15, 4-26

Page Brief, Function, 9-5

Page Control Function, Settings, 7-27

Page CountDialog Box, 4-49Function, 4-49

Page Count Function, 3-26

Page FormatDefault, 7-21List of, 4-12, 9-9Saving, 7-36Settings, 7-29

Page Formats, Report, 9-9

Page Full, Function, 9-4

Page List, 9-4

Page Macro, 4-14Default, 3-6

Page Name Field, 4-6

Page Number, With Line No., 7-24

Page ParametersModify, 4-23, 4-25Modify in title block, 4-27

Page Type Field, 4-14

Page VariablesDialog Box, 4-25Function, 4-25

Modify in title block, 4-27

Pan, 4-33

Panel Layout, 10-1, 13-21Comparison With Schematic, 10-8Dialog Box, 10-3Function, 10-3Item Placement, 10-6Preliminary Steps, 10-2Procedure, 10-3Symbol Create, 10-9Text Parameters, 10-6

Parent Symbol, 5-25, 6-24, 6-34

Parent/Child, 5-17, 5-25Device Without Parent, 9-30Search, 5-20

Part Number, 5-79, 13-20Additional, 13-22Automatic Assignment, 6-18Check, 7-23Copied Pages, 4-22Display, 7-16Duplication, 5-55Entering, 5-15Edit, 5-118Modify, 5-82Multiple, 5-15, 5-80Multiple Replace, 5-119Replace Globally, 5-119Search, 5-82Symbol Create, 6-18Symbol without, 7-28Terminal, 7-41Text, 6-3

Parts Database, 5-79See also DatabaseButton, 3-10Reports, 9-7

Parts Dimension List, 9-27

Parts File, Create, 9-21

Password Protection, 7-11

Pin Charts, 6-66

Index

I–11

Pin–Plug Plan, 11-31

PLCAddress Separator, 7-39Addressing, 7-39Attribute, 6-43Child Symbol

IEC, 6-57JIC, 6-52

Duplicate Checking, 7-39Input File, 7-38List, 9-20Octal Address, 7-39Parent Symbol, 6-39Placing Symbol in a Drawing, 6-49Replace Text, 7-38Text, 5-99, 6-50, 7-38Wire Numbering, 5-71

PLC Online File, 7-38

PLC Text, 6-50Input File, 7-38Modify, 5-99

Plot, 8-1Configuration, 8-5, 8-10Current Page (ACAD 2000), 8-10Current Page R14, 8-5Dialog Box, 8-10DXF File, 8-24Layers, 8-26Multiple Pages (ACAD 2000), 8-18Multiple Pages (R14), 8-15PLT File, 8-21Preview, 8-3, 8-9Scale, 8-9Sequence, 8-17, 8-20To File, 8-21

Plotting, Dialog Box, 8-16, 8-19

PLT File, Plot to, 8-21

Plug, 6-66Device IDs, 7-41

Plug ID, Settings, 7-40

PMG, 5-82, 13-20

Polyline, Function, 5-10

PositionCross Reference, 5-99Device ID, 5-99

Power–Editor, 5-94

PreferencesAutoCAD 2000 Version, 7-61AutoCAD R14 Version, 7-64Standalone Version, 7-69

Preferred Direction, 6-7

Preferred Manufacturer’s Group, 5-82, 13-20

Preview, Function, 8-2

Previous, Function, 4-7

Previous Page Function, Next, 4-7

Primary Units, 7-59

Print/Plot Configuration, Dialog Box, 8-5

PrinterConfiguration, 7-9Select, 7-9

Printing Lists, 9-3

Programmable ControllerSee also PLCReport, List, 9-20Settings, 7-37

Programmable Controller Settings, Function, 7-37

Programmable Controller Text Definition, DialogBox, 5-99

ProjectBackup, 3-21Copy, 3-16Create, 3-5Data, 3-25Default Character Size, 3-10Default Symbol Library, 3-5Default Title Block, 3-6Delete, 3-14Description, 3-6Device ID Format, 3-9

Index

I–12

Directory Names, 3-4Grid, 3-10List, 9-4Lock and Unlock, 3-13Management, 3-1Modify Parameters, 3-17Organization, 3-2Page Count, 3-26Parameters, 3-6, 3-7, 3-17Preselect, 3-12Rename, 3-19Renumber, 5-110Reorganize, 3-25Reports, 9-4Settings, 3-10, 7-19

Project Brief, Function, 9-4

Project Cable List, 12-21

Project Full, Function, 3-20, 9-4

Project Preselect, Dialog Box, 3-12

Project SettingsBackup, 3-22Grid, 7-2

Properties, Function, 5-107

Purchase Order, Function, 9-24

Purchase Order List, 9-24Dialog Box, 9-24

Q

Quadrant Function, 4-34

Question Mark, Alert, 7-28

Quit, Page, 4-16

Quit Page, 4-16

R

Radial, Function, 5-84

Ratio, Dialog Box, 5-37

Open, Page, 4-4

Real Time Pan, Function, 4-33

Record, Parts Database, 13-19

Redraw, 4-32

Reference Guide, VBA, 1-5

Reference Point, 6-2, 6-9Display, 7-16

Refresh, Function, 4-6

Regen, 4-32

RenameDevice Type, 6-96Function, 3-19, 4-28, 4-42Installation, 4-42Macro, 6-96Page, 4-28Project, 3-19Symbol, 6-96

Rename Page, Dialog Box, 4-28

Renumber, Terminals, 5-111

Device ID, Formats, 3-9

Renumber Terminal Strip, Dialog Box, 11-11,11-12

Reorganize, Project, 3-25

Repeat, Last Wire, 5-8

Repeat Last, Function, 5-8

ReplaceDevice ID, 5-110Part Number, 5-119Symbol, 5-108Symbol Text, 5-115Wire Number, Replace, 5-76

Replace Part Number, Dialog Box, 5-119

Replace SymbolDialog Box, 5-108Function, 5-108

Replace Symbol Text, Function, 5-115

Replace Text, Dialog Box, 5-114

Index

I–13

Replace Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-76

Report Settings, Tab, 5-88

ReportsSee also ListsCable, 9-18Cable List, 12-21Comma Separated, 9-29Connections, 9-10Device Type Brief, Device Brief, 9-7Device Type Full, Device Full, 9-6Field Wire, 12-21Field Wire, Field Wire List, 9-18Foreign Languages, Language, 9-7Library, 9-6Macro, Macro, 9-6Master List, 9-22MS Access, 9-28Parts, 9-21

Bill Of Materials, 9-23Compile Parts File, 9-21Dimension List, 9-27Job Costing, 9-25Purchase Order, 9-24

Parts Database, 9-7PLC List, Compile, 9-20Project, 9-4

Installations, 9-4Page Brief, 9-5Page Full, 9-4Project Brief, 9-4Project Full, 3-20, 9-4

Settings, 7-5Signals, 9-18Symbols, Symbol, 9-6Table of Contents, 9-5Terminals, 9-19Wire, Wire List, 9-10Wire Labels, 9-18Wire List, Compile Connections, 9-10

Reserved Characters, 4-12, 5-15, 5-54

Restore, Projects, Symbols, 3-24

Rotate, Symbol, 5-23

RSWireBase System, 2-14Concept, 2-1Exiting, 1-4Optional Modules, 2-14Starting, 1-3VBA, 1-5

Run Macro, Function, 1-5

S

Save, Page, 4-8

Save As Function, 4-9

Save Function, 4-8

ScaleDrawing, 4-14Symbol, 5-23

Scan Direction, 6-7

Schematic Elements, 5-1

Search, Device ID, 5-20

Search Device ID, Dialog Box, 5-21

Select, Project, 3-12

Select Color, Dialog Box, 5-39

Select Devices, Dialog Box, 10-4

Select Icon, 5-11

Select Page, Dialog Box, 4-46

Select Quadrant, Dialog Box, 4-34

Settings, 3-10, 7-1Display, 7-15Grid, 7-2

Short Circuit, 7-28

Shortcuts, 1-6

Signal Analysis Type, 3-9

Signal Cross ReferenceAnalysis Types, 5-61

Index

I–14

Device ID, 5-61in the Wire List, 5-60Include Page/Line, 7-22Notation Formats, 5-60Star Type, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64Symbol Create, 6-77Symbols, 5-59Wire Numbering and, 5-66

Signals, Report, 9-18

Single, Function, 5-4, 5-10

Slant, Dialog Box, 5-36

Snapmode, 6-7

SODSETT.CFG, 7-47

Software Modules, 2-14

Sort Function, 14-11

Standalone, Version of software, 2-1

Stretch, Function, 5-107

Suppress Device ID, 5-15

Suppress Device Sign (–), Toggle, 7-44

SymbolAlternate search, 15-1Attribute Text, 6-15, 14-40Backup, 3-21Cable, 12-8Catalog, 6-4, 6-17Catalog Path, 5-109, 6-5Child, 6-28, 6-34Connection Point, 6-11Copy, 6-95Create, 6-6Cross Reference Symbol, 6-31Delete, 6-93Device Definition, 6-34Device ID, 3-9, 5-14Dialog Box, 5-23DWG Import, 6-21Elements of, 6-2Example Creation, 6-24Groups, 6-8Layout, 10-9

Libraries, 6-4List, 9-6Mirroring, 5-24Modify, 5-96, 6-97Move, 3-10, 5-106Multiple Placement, 5-19Nested, 5-49Panel Layout, 10-9Parent, 6-24, 6-34Placement Rules, 5-13PLC Child

IEC, 6-57JIC, 6-52

PLC Parent, 6-39Power–Editor, 5-94Reference Point, 6-9Rename, 6-96Replace, 5-108Report, 9-6Rotate, 5-23Rotation (Automatic), 5-13, 6-13Scale, 5-23Selecting, 5-11Settings, 5-23Signal Cross Reference, 6-77

IEC, 5-65JIC, 5-58

Terminal, 6-63Text, 5-99, 6-3Without Connection, 7-28Without Part Number, 7-28

Symbol By Name, Function, 5-11, 5-12

Symbol Sets, 7-10

Symbol Text, 6-3Angle, 5-101Assign, 6-13Color, 5-100Dialog Box, 5-16Find/Replace, 5-114Height, 5-101Label Origin, 5-101Modify, 5-95, 5-99Replace, 5-115

Index

I–15

Window, 5-30

Symbol/Macro From Icon, Function, 5-27

SYMBOL_REF, 5-82

T

Table, Text, 13-27

Table of Contents, 9-5

Tablet, 1-7

Tabs, 14-28

TerminalAssign Cable, 11-18Branch Between, 7-28Change Number, 11-9Connection Report, 9-19Connection Search, 9-15Delete Spare, 11-14Device IDs, 7-41Editing Functions, 11-9Editor Mode, 11-6Equals Wire Number, 5-72In Macro, 6-82Internal vs. External Connection, 11-3Modify Destination, 5-99Move, 11-13Multiple Placement, 5-19Part Number, 11-18Part Number Enable, 7-41Renumber, 5-110, 5-111, 11-10, 11-11Settings, 7-40Sort, 11-12Spare, 11-13Switch Targets, 11-15Symbol, 6-63Target Setting, 5-99

Terminal Connections, Priorities, 11-4

Terminal Editor, Dialog Box, 11-7

Terminal Plan, 11-1Basic Steps, 11-2Configuration, 11-24

Configuration File, 11-25, 11-33Editor, 11-6Functions, 11-5Graphical, 11-20Internal vs. External, 11-3Jumper, 11-16, 11-17Macro, 11-20Overview, 11-2Update Existing Pages, 11-29

Terminal Plan Editor, Dialog Box, 12-7

Terminal Strip, Report, 9-19

Terminal Strip Selection, Dialog Box, 11-6

Terminal=Wire Number, 5-72, 6-65

TextAlignment, 5-38Angle, 5-35Attributes, 6-14, 6-15, 14-40Color, 5-39Dialog Box, 5-31Edit, 5-103Entry, 5-31Find/Replace, 5-114Font, 5-39Foreign Language, 5-41, 9-7Function, 5-31Function Text, 5-32Height, 3-10, 5-34, 7-23Hidden, 5-40Invisible, 5-40Label Origin, 5-38, 6-42Language, 3-9, 5-41Modify, 5-103Multi–line, 5-32On Drawing, 5-88Ratio, 5-37Settings, 5-34Size, 5-34Size (Default), 3-10Slant, 5-36Styles, 7-49Table, 13-27

Text File on Drawing, 5-88, 7-6

Index

I–16

Text On Drawing, Dialog Box, 5-89

Text Style, Default, 7-23

Text Styles, 7-49

Text Window, 2-10

3 Phase, Customize, 6-100

3 Phase, Function, 5-6

Title Block, 4-15Address in, 7-17Create, 6-83Default, 3-6Display/Hide, 7-22Logo File, 7-18Modify Page Variables, 4-27Reassign, 4-23Variables, 6-87

Tolerance, 7-60

Toolbar, 2-9Set Position, 2-10

Toolbars, 4-34

ToolsError Checking

Device Without Parent, 9-30Unreferenced Signals, 9-30

Panel Layout, 10-3Project Settings, 11-24, 11-32System Settings

Grid Settings, 12-8Report Settings, 14-3

Terminal/Pin–Plug PlanEdit Terminals, 11-31Generate Graphical Plans, 11-20, 11-30

Two Line Ladder, 7-33

U

Undo, 5-92

Undo Delete, 5-104

Units, 7-23

Unload Project, Function, 1-5

Unreferenced Signals, Function, 9-30

Update Existing Pages, 11-29

Upper/lower case, 7-4

User Name, 7-21

V

VariablesDatabase, 14-31List, 14-29Terminal Plan, 11-22Title Block, 6-87

VBALoad Editor, 1-5Load Project, 1-5Reference Guide, 1-5Run Macro, 1-5Unload Project, 1-5

View, 4-32List, 5-132Navigator, 4-43Quadrant, 4-34Redraw, 4-32Regen, 4-32Toolbars, 4-34

W

Windows, Using, 2-12

Wire, 5-3Change Type, 5-101Color, 5-71Continuous, 5-8Draw, 5-3Gauge, 5-71Modify Number, 5-104Multiple Cable Check, 7-2890 Degree, 5-9Numbers, 5-66Repeat, 5-8Reports, 9-10

Index

I–17

Size, 5-71Without Connection, 7-28

Wire Labels, Function, 9-18

Wire List, Function, 9-10

Wire Number, Display, 7-16

Wire Number Manual, Dialog Box, 5-73

Wire Numbers, 5-66Automatic, 5-66Before/After Terminal, 3-10Color (Display), 5-71Copied Pages, 4-22, 4-41Delete, 5-77, 5-120Duplicate, 5-73, 5-75Height, 5-71Invisible Text in, 5-75Macro, 5-30, 6-83Manual, 5-72Modify, 5-104Page select, 5-67Position, 5-71Replace, 5-76Repositioning, 5-78Same as PLC Address, 5-71Same Over Terminal, 3-10With Color/Gauge, 7-26

Wire/Line, Function, 5-101

Wires, (Logical Lines), 5-3

Wiring Diagram, 13-21

X

X–Direction, Ladder Line Number, 7-33

Y

Y–Direction, Ladder Line Number, 7-33

Z

ZoneConfiguration, 7-36Select, 7-22

ZoomAll, 4-33Center, 4-33Dynamic, 4-32Extents, 4-33In, 4-33Out, 4-33Previous, 4-32Real Time, 4-32Scale, 4-33Window, 4-32

Zoom Off, Function, 7-13

Zoom Parameters, System Settings, 7-13

Index

I–18

RSWire Manual

Documents

registered trademarks

rockwell software logo

rockwell automation

wintelligent series

wintelligent logic

microsoft corporation

wintelligent recipe

wintelligent linx